Home

Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help - swstechnology.com archive

image

Contents

1. EER RERET 269 SIS CUS os cas nn career wicca sea eG aa Se eso act oie Se Tg gs raw GIR E E oud eGR So A eae vet 270 RE NGC FO exces ETT TED s 271 Create thematie com I UU 277 Modi Thema tic Map ien denicietiss e EF UppA ERR ER EFE Pc XI Sera DO POE RE ER er ae aiu eina Eevent ete Qu dade CUR Ee cie i dated roro rA 280 Create CORtoll S soon ente t dob tubes vim ow ak TO Umum Eb eU c cU UM UE E 280 Create Gridded DSUd ussescecusteraeiseton ss sveseuxevcce deu oux uta eoeuc etos even vetns urbs avr eoe ee veseinv tss un miudee v TEERAA EEt dana o mds 286 BiQo paPrpcue c RET 287 j Ner T 296 Tools aona ie ins 297 UI Peer M 301 1 NN E 303 c ugI c c M 304 Help NN cec nex 308 3 Detining a Cross Section LING oic e o indes vea pus SEEN eue ER HE P ooo ER VAS o TU Ya MAN EE a ERES REGE ERA NN SA See QUNM OL VER VR SERES 308 Part 14 Cross Section Editor 312 I Aboutthe Interface ugue e on RR erar ev en dotes PAL n Ua eel am Neu RD EI EUR UUN ETUR Fa eR Ho eH I Ve E eA Ue 312 2 Description OT Menu kems rr 315 Project nre 315 j NN rtr E 318 VIEME Xousestixpupodatssueiddsad ePi T Suomen lusavbausi eve vie
2. 53562546 481425310 332 92 3 192 Borehole v cB 18 53551850 481430580 339013 3313 Borehole 535394 80 481830260 330 76 133175 Barefrale E35288 76 4 814 296 10 Borehole 53520000 4 504 2330 an Borehole 53621827 4814 620 30 Borehole GB 24 53 16306 4 874 647 50 Borehole 536258 4 614 664 20 ja GB 26 53596468 4814487 90 E GB 27 535 866 19 4 574 655 10 GE 28 53578282 4B14 529 DU 535 502 63 4 814 501 BO 5350478 481455440 53536436 414 634 30 835278 96 4 674 624 00 53523332 4 814 527 B0 4 814 861 50 4 B14 985 30 LA mu mn En lr EM I7 9 Station Group All Stations Rows 151 You have several options to adjust the view of these groups You can add additional groups right click on any existing tab either vertical or horizontal Several of the modules within HGA will launch as a tab e g Query Builder Well Profile List Editor Material Specification Event Planning etc You can rearrange the order of the tabs within a group by simply dragging and dropping a tab You can even drag a tab from one tab group to another Here is an example of another way to organize your windows 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts as Hyco GeoAnatyst 20161 Demo lll Project View Modules Database Help cw F254 AOWMe es Bart iG Wa
3. You can add more stations to the plan if you wish select the Stations you wish to add from the list of stations on the left hand side You can reduce the list of all stations by selecting an appropriate Station Group Once you have selected the stations will be highlighted blue Select the button to move the stations to the Selected Stations area right hand side To move all stations from a Station Group to the Selected Stations area use the O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Event Planning 160 button The next step of the Event Plan wizard allows you to indicate if you want QAQC analysis samples to be taken amp Event Planning Wizard Event Plan Information Stations to be sampled QAQC An alysis QAQC Analysis Parameters to be Analyzed Sample Analysis Additional Data Collection Check List X Print Station Sample Type ee Select the ap button to add a QAQC sample to be taken Then you need to specify at which station the sample should be taken and what kind of QAQC sample should be taken options include duplicate trip blank and equipment blank You also have the option to provide a comment If you need to delete a QAQC sample highlight the sample and then select the P ad button The next step of the Event Plan wizard allows you to indicate which parameters will be analyzed O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 161 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Event Planning Wizard E
4. 10 2 5 Check Detection Limit Settings This QA QC check will compare the Standard Detection Limit in the QA QC reference table with your detection limits reported within your results If your reported detection limits are greater than the Standard Detection Limit in the reference table they will fail this check O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 179 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help MDL Settings Any detection limit above the Standard Detection Limit will be highlighted fou can configure Standard Detection Limit fram the Project Properties QAQC References menu Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color You can enter your QAQC references Standards by selecting Project Properties QAQC References gt QAQC References EC E __ Standard Detection Lind Standard Holding Time EPA 5242 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 EPA 5242 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 M EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 US EPA 8270 F JUS EPA 8010 4 4 4 4 44 4 4 4 4 4 amp Here you can manually enter or import the reference values used for running the associated checks You will notice that the Method Name and Chemical Name have drop down lists you can pick from this is based on your selections from the Settings QAQC References Settings O x Location of Analysis Method Field gt Local of Chemical Param
5. ae This option allows you to export the data from the current tab 3 This option allows you to print the data from the current tab to an Excel template When printing your Station List to an Excel template you will be prompted to select a O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts 22 template Provided with HGA is a template called Template Table xlsx You can modify this template by going to the folder where your templates have been stored see HGA Settings for more details and adjust it to suit your needs Perhaps you may want to change the logo etc Any templates stored in this folder will be available in the drop down list under the Open Template option pont To Excel a Template Template Table xlsx Once you have selected a template you can select the OK button and the Excel template will open with your data in it ready for printing 2 10 Station Data Tab For a more detailed view of a single Station s attributes the Station Data tab should be selected and an appropriate Data Category chosen The Station Data tab provides access to all data related to a single station Once a Station is added to the project detailed information on the station can be inserted edited or deleted through the Station Data tab The first line on this tab is the filter line and as such is highlighted in purple blue The filter line is similar to what you find in Excel when you apply a filter You can enter
6. 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Creating New Projects 102 New HGA Project Data Source amp Press Finish to begin installing the project Template Project Settings a Create Project At this final step you can decide if you want to go back and adjust any selections or settings you made or complete the New Project wizard by selecting the Finish button A new project will be created with the necessary tables fields and settings Please be patient during this process The new project should then appear in the main HGA interface O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 103 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 5 Template Manager The Template Manager is one of the most powerful tools provided with Hydro GeoAnalyst It allows you to edit the structure of your database The Template Manager provides the tools to Add or Delete tables and or fields Alter the properties of tables and fields Define relationships between tables Group tables under logical data categories Save database templates for future projects Set visibility of tables and or fields Setting user level table and or field names display units where applicable and data formats where applicable Understanding the Template Manager Hydro GeoAnalyst comes with our standard environmental database structure in metric and imperial templates that are currently in use around the world When creating a new database for your project you have the option of sele
7. Change Well Width E X DK Cancel FJ Help You can change well width as it appears on the screen by a factor displayed in the Current width drop down menu Using this factor you can make the wells thinner or thicker on the cross sectional display Change Vertical Axis This option allows you to extend the vertical range of the elevation axis When this option is selected the following dialog will display O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 322 Set Vertical Axis X Please set vertical axis Bottom 216 0036 m nk Cancel FJ Help Specify a Top value and a Bottom value Click Ok to accept the new values Change Vertical Exaggeration This option allows you to change the vertical exaggeration of the current cross section The vertical exaggeration is simply the ratio of the vertical scale to the horizontal scale Set Vertical Exaggeration I X Please input the vertical exaggeration m OF Cancel Help Specify a new vertical exaggeration and click the Ok button The cross section will then be regenerated to reflect the new vertical exaggeration Copy Window Provides an option for copying the current cross section window to the Windows clipboard The window may then be pasted into a supporting application Such as a document or image editor or slide presentation 14 2 3 View This menu provides options to modify the appearance and size of the Cross Se
8. IB Hydro Geatinalyst Demo Nm x Project View gt Modules j Database o Help Hw 9 RA QMeCA b i amp m5 E A Tabon List Station Data Date Query Data Filter Start Page TX f Station Groupe r l adin bk H m 4 i 1 ui 4 Hd Statons B Sistons MW 1 al Boma gt mem a Data Category a Burehoes wih plot dai E t Merterrr Wal b a iie al OC Montorng Wel Mined to Jenie f m Tal Lonatruct an T r 5nl Bunngs rs i Sod Teshing abn FES best isa f ai Samp al WO_Sistiors ze Mondomg Evert LL Iul A i rE Dri VLDE Mies E LE 1 1 b ation V al Cim thicher than 2 x oe F m OE E FECI Wl 5o Bosrgs wem TCE E G 10 mg z Vell History Duenes u T enas Plots Hog i ae Croastabs Le 3 Eiorehola L WID 4 Maa Pomi 7 lai Coarer gt JD Views Ag Repora TEE MET ET j 20 TER GB D GE 02 GEO GE D4 GE D6 GELE GEG GE DH GE 06 GE 10 GB 11 GE GEB 13 GB 1M GB 15 EAE Ga GB 18 GE 18 SES Rowse 1 Ready After a Data Category has been selected the appropriate tables and fields belonging to this category will be displayed in the Station Data tab 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts a6 The following is a list of the data categories provided in the HGA Demo Project along with some of the data entities that may be linked to each category e Description e g station name location coordinates elevation site etc e Geologic Description e g l
9. Rows 10000 Warning Maximum number of rows reached Total Rows 2390218 e Start Page Here you can specify if you want the Start Page to be hidden after opening a project as well as if you want the Start Page to be shown when you start HGA O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help HGA Settings Project StartPage Help Template Files ExternalPrograms General Hide the Start Page after a project has been opened Show the Start Page when HGA starts Number of projects to show in the history list 10 F Clear the list of recently opened projects Additionally you can change the number of projects to show in the list of recently opened project or even clear the list completely e Help Here you can specify if you want to use the Online Help Recommended or the Local In Program Help We recommend the Online Help if you are connected to the internet as this set of documentation can be updated more frequently that the Local Help 2014 Schlumberger Water Services amp HGA Settings Project Stat Page Help Template Files External Programs General Q Use Online Help Recommended Use Local Help File e Template Files Here you can specify where you want to store the HGA template files These template files include the database template files used when creating a New Project as well as the office template files for printing to Excel and PowerPoint as wel
10. Database SWS Project Name Demo In the Open Project from Backup dialog browse to the SQL server backup file bak Then select the corresponding project vbh file for the project Y ou need to specify which SQL Server you will be restoring the backup to You can select the Refresh button to look for additional SQL Servers The SQL Server instance should be on the same machine as HGA as SQL Server does not restore databases across a network The name of the database and the name of the project are determined from the files you selected but you have the opportunity to change them here The select the OK button The database will be restored onto the SQL Server and the project will open NOTE On Windows Vista or Windows 7 operating systems User Account Control UAC must be disabled before you can successfully open a project from backup 3 1 4 Close Close the project which is currently open 3 1 5 Re Open This menu item provides a list of projects that have been recently opened The most recent project will appear at the top Simply select the desired project and it will be loaded into HGA 3 1 6 Online Sharing This new option allows you to share your HGA project with others who do not have the 2014 Schlumberger Water Services program You can find this option by selecting Project Online Sharing On the first tab you can provide some general information regarding the project Online Sharing boja adm Gene
11. O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 263 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help TA Select Map Region File view Edit Options TE T a E Georeference Poin f 2 points C 3 points pixeles 751 Y pixels 552 In order to map the pixels of the image to a coordinate system the image must have at least two georeference points with known coordinates These georeference points can be defined using the procedure described below Note The real world georeference points must have coordinates that are in the same projection system as the Map Project Map Manager will not make adjustments or conversions for georeference coordinates that are in a different projection system To set a georeference point Click on the first map location where the X and Y world coordinates are known A Georeference point dialog will appear prompting for the X1 and Y 1 world coordinates of the selected location Georeference point AT 5351 22 Y 48 2838 Ap 220 Yp 393 OF Cancel O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 264 Enter the X1 and Y 1 coordinates for this point Click OK Click on the second map location where the world coordinates are known Enter the X2 and Y2 coordinates for this point Click OK A box will appear around the map region similar to the window shown below Georeference Pain f 2Zoomte S points A 535124 445 m Y 4812838 44 m The Georeference utility will convert the
12. Silty Sand Elevation m 280 HydroGeology Cross Section Window 2RL Site Map 500 500 1000 1500 2000 2500 3000 3500 4000 4500 5000 533 931 4 813 102 Distance m 538 305 4 814 234 937 18 382 97 X Z coordinates The Cross Section Editor window contains the following items Menu Bar Contains program menu commands Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to some of the most commonly used features in the Cross Section Editor Layer Control Manages cross sections visibility and editability of interpretation layers Right click a layer to access additional options such as Move up Move down View 3D and Properties Cross Section Window Contains the cross section view for the selected cross section line Site Map Displays the selected cross section line as it appears in the map project The selected stations for the cross section are highlighted in this Map preview window Coordinates Displays the X Z coordinate for the current mouse cursor location Active Window Select between the Map Manager window and the Cross Section window Description of Toolbar Items O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 314 The Cross section editor contains a toolbar with short cut buttons to some of the commonly used features Most toolbar buttons are context sensitive and react according to the active layer window or dialog If there are no options for the selec
13. contents of the MON file Er bn Level while that on the right PU screen ID side displays tables and PU Map fields in your database z Temperature H Conductivity Flowman 2 Map one or more components of Pour MOM file with one or more fields in your database by nodes and clicking on the Map button depth to water level Pe Dru indicator ves Mo Comments Source Fields Destination Fields 3 To remove mapping Logger settings Station Mame table at the bottom and select the delete button BJ Required Mappings 1 You must map a field In the source with the Station name field in the Station Fable 4 2 You could not mapp screen Id Save mapping to database x Back Next gt Cancel EJ Help The next step in the MON data import operation is to map the MON file fields source with the appropriate database fields destination To map a source field with a destination field F Select a source field from the MON file in the Select Section Field frame F Select the matching HGA destination field from the Select Table Field frame F Click the Map button Rules for Mapping The Station Name field of the Location table must be mapped All destination tables and fields must already exist in the HGA database All channel tables e g Level Temperature Conductivity Oxygen in the database must include a Screen ID All mapped tables in the database must have primary key s mapped Da
14. 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 419 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Create New Data Source EJ Select a driver For which you want ta set up a data source Micragaft Access Driver mdb Microsol amp ccess Treiber mdb Microsoft dBase Driver dbf Microsott dbase YFP Driver dbf Microgott dB ase Treiber dbf Microsol Excel Driver lz Microsoft Excel Treiber xls Microsol FoxPro Driver dbf Microgott FoxPro VFP Driver dbf hd rm 8E OMB Fer Oracle Advanced E um 4 j Back Cancel Click Next to proceed and the following dialog will appear Create New Data Source EJ Type the name af the file data source you want to save this connection to Or find the location to save ta by clicking Browse Datas purceM ame Browse Back Cancel In this dialog enter a name for the new Data Source in the Name field Click Next to proceed O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices o Create New Data Source When you click Finish you will create the data source which vau have just configured The driver may prompt you for more information File Data Source Filename DataSourceN ame Driver Micrasott Excel Driver xls Back This dialog displays a summary of the data source information Click Finish to close the dialog and the following ODBC Setup dialog will appear ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup EAE __ Canc
15. 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 218 x E53 BHLP Interval Series jw Visible Bieler E Transparency 50 da T Apply OF Cancel The Interval Series can be shown hidden and the Fill color and Transparency can be set 12 3 4 Well Construction Column The Well Construction column is the most comprehensive data column in the Borehole Log Plot It displays data from various sources in your database including e Drilling details e Lithology e Annular filling e Casing and screens e Water Level e Pump e Scale Information for the above items and in some cases the images for patterns are taken directly from the database To add a Well Construction column click the Add icon and select Well Construction from the combo box provided Some of the entities have been selected for you When the new Well Construction column appears it will display Lithology Drilling Casing Screen Annular Filling and Scale data for the selected station if it has been entered into your database Other entities such as pump locations have to be entered manually To specify the desired entity expand the Well Construction node and locate the specific sub node Use the combo boxes provided to set the data table and fields 12 3 4 1 Settings The Well Construction column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in
16. Cancel In the General tab specify the background color and page background color Under the series frame you can set the order of the plots to have one plot above below the other 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 216 LT NNNM E53 BHLP Plot Area a E gt Scale General Horzontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend E53 Well Construction Appearance E Desc Grain Size Show Grid Lines Color EIS Plot E E3 Plot rea Primary Secondary h Show Color L Auto Show Labels Font hinf 1E38 Logarithm bias 1E 38 intervalo Apply UE Cancel In the Horizontal Axis tab shown above you can modify the axis appearance and scale settings For both the Primary and Secondary Scales there are settings for Normal or Log as well as showing the gridlines and defining the color Finally you can define the axis range for each scale accept the default Auto option in which case the data min and max will be read and used as the min and max for the axis Or de select this option and enter user defined Min Max and Interval values BHLP Settings EN xj Plot Area General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend Appearance L Grain Size Show Grid Lines Color Fl Plat EE Plot Area Lett Right Show Color E W Show Labels Font E Label Direction Horizontal In the Vertical Axis tab shown above you can modify the appeara
17. Cancel B Help From the Select Channel frame select a parameter i e Level Temperature Conductivity Flowman NOTE A selection is not necessary if all the channels are inactive greyed out HGA will read the station name in each MON file and attempt to find an appropriate station match in the current HGA project database If one is found you may proceed Otherwise the field will display a color and you must specify the appropriate destination station name The color displayed in the information table represents the number of station names that can be matched with the location information in the MON file White indicates that a single station name has been found Red indicates that a matching station name could not be found Yellow indicates that two or more matching station names exist in the database If a row is either red or yellow click the button and manually specify a destination station name from the database O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 133 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Get Station amp Screen f 7 Ioj x Please select Station and screen List Matched Hame e p ooma Wm e 10 zl 11 Wel 12 BU 55550275 43 48331584 Uk Cancel E From the Get Station amp Screen dialog select a destination station and a screen id Click the List Matched button to open the List Matched dialog This dialog will display all the possible station and screen id combinations that match the MO
18. Direction Set the direction in which the code will be written EnableCheckSum Set whether the checksum is used when the code is rendered 16 2 2 13 ActiveReport DocumentName The document name appears in the print spooler and can be used to easily identify the report MaxPages Sets or returns the maximum number of pages ActiveReports will process Once the number of maximum pages is reached ActiveReports will stop processing the report This property can be used to limit the number of output pages when running large reports and distributing the results over a slow connection WaterMark Adds a specified image to the report s background The watermark image can be positioned sized aligned and placed on specified pages by using the other watermark properties 16 2 3 Using the Report Designer Report Explorer The Report Explorer as shown in the figure below allows you to browse through the controls of the active report and facilitates selecting controls for further editing The Report Explorer windows can be accessed by clicking on the Explorer icon E on the toolbar O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 39 Explorer El MainR eport AS ReportHeader eA Labell B 4 Label n Labels x 4 Label Labal5 s Label 2 Label an Labels o Station SroupHeader 4 StationID A Detail oo dcRptData e 4 Fldchemical name a 4 Fldresult value e 4 Fidresulk unit ES
19. In the last step you will see a preview of the data to be imported into the sample table as well as into the results table By selecting Finish the data will be imported Any errors or warning will also be displayed O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 127 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Import Chemical Data Wizard gt E Data Validation Errors arnings Preview parameter_result parameter sample eS ion sample id sample date 294 4 18 2001 12 00 00 AM 35 23 04 2001 4 23 2001 12 00 00 AM 36 364 22 01 2001 1 22 2001 12 00 00 AM 404 18 04 2001 4 18 2001 12 00 00 AM 41 ll 41 J 18 01 2001 1218 2001 12 00 00 4M 41 ll 414I 24 04 2001 4 24 2001 12 00 00 AM UOTE I a a es 4 Back Einish Cancel Help Liki ii ox 1 oD i Data Validation Errars W arnings Preview parameter result parameter_sample Station i chemical name result value result unit qualifier 29 294 18 04 2001 Al 0 3 a_i 18 04 2001 Bom of records 4875 lt lt Back Einish Cancel Help O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 128 After the records are successfully imported you will receive a message indicating how many records were imported 1 4675 out of 4875 records were successfully imported updated 6 5 Diver This option allows for importing data from a MON file a format generated from datalogger monitoring software such as Diver Pocket LoggerDat
20. Mine aw Fb T n m3 3 rw ra E Y Query Mame qr ab snalysis Rows 2109 Time O0h00n00 Ready The first line on this tab is the filter line and as such is highlighted in purple blue The filter line is similar to what you find in Excel when you apply a filter You can enter values to filter the list of what is displayed only to those values that you are interested in You can also highlight a record will turn bright blue by clicking on the button on the left hand side of the grid and then right click on the record and select copy Then you can paste this into for example an excel spreadsheet and both the header information and the records you highlighted will be pasted into the excel spreadsheet The following options are available on the Data Query Tab Id 4 6 cee ll Bd These navigation options allow you to scroll through the records 223 3 This allows you to create a new query you will be moved to the Query Builder tab and prompted for a name for your new Query g This allows you to edit the current query you will be moved to the Query Builder tab with the current query open P This allows you to execute query again 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help This allows you to delete the current query Q This allows you to use the query to generate a plume for visualization in the 3D xplorer m O ne This allows you to use
21. Screen X and Y rotates the display around the fixed axes of the Display Window by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer along the X or Y direction e he Rotate Model X and Y rotates the display around the 3D image axes by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer in the desired rotation direction 15 3 2 Animation Controls The tools located on the right hand side of the Navigation frame may be used to continuously rotate the image around the X Y and Z axes and animate plume objects z Options M Browser I Time vl Simply select the desired axis and click the Play button to start rotation e You can record the rotation as an AVI file by pressing the Record button For more details see Recording Animation to AVI file below al The rotation can be stopped by clicking the Stop button The Browser check box when selected will activate the player controls for static animation of the selected color map or Isosurface For color maps the map position will span in a loop along the specified plane through the project extents Isosurface values will be animated similarly in a loop however as the scroll bar moves the isosurface value will change The Time check box when selected will activate the player controls for time animation Both color maps and isosurfaces may be animated in time Clicking on the Options button displays the Animation Properties window as shown in the following figure O 2014 Schlumberger Water Servi
22. Zoom out button returns to the original BHLP view 12 2 BHLP Default Settings There are several default view settings and properties that can be defined for the BHLP To load the BHLP Settings Right mouse click anywhere in the BHLP Viewer window and select Properties or Right click on Design in the Designer tree and select Show Settings The BHLP Settings window will appear similar to the following figure BHLP Settings xj Default Far All Columns Header Properties Column Properties gt ight Aut Ez width 75 za 5 Well Construction Height Auto 41 a E E Plot Alignment Center Color em T Angle Dept W Auto Color Fired Depth Fit width to page Print scale factor 1 fo 0 fit to report template Help Apply UE Cancel The Header Properties frame allows you to modify the default appearance of the column header for all BHLP columns The following settings can be modified Height Set the default height of the header space Select the Auto checkbox to ensure that the header text remains visible within the header space Alignment Set the default header alignment to Center Near left or Far right Angle Specify the default text angle You may choose from 0 45 and 90 Color Specify the default text color Font Specify the default font style The Column Properties frame allows you to modify the default appearance for all BHLP columns including e Colum
23. amp Manage Event Plans 02 24 2013 02 24 2013 Here you have the option to re print the plan if necessary as well as the option to re open a plan if it was mistakenly closed You also have the option to delete Event Plans in this dialog O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 169 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 9 Crosstabs are Now Pivot Tables With the release of Hydro GeoAnalyst we have removed the old way of creating a Crosstab query and instead are offering a simpler option to push your query into an Excel template that has been set up to use the Pivot table option This gives you all the power of Excel and Pivot tables to allow you to re arrange your data to suit your specific needs The option is available from the Data Query tab and can be accessed by selecting the N button You will be prompted to select a template We have included a landscape as well as a portrait template As with other options within Excel you may want to review and adjust the template to make it more your own perhaps include your logo and change the title etc Select Excel File to use as a Template Template Selection Landscape Template xlsx When you select OK you will be prompted for a name for your excel spreadsheet and then it will open D lt Please be aware depending on your security settings you may find that the data connection have been disabled simply select Enable Content to allow for connection between the SQL Server and the Excel te
24. the top most layer and ignore all other layers with the same name If a station is removed from a cross section related saved interpretations contacts are removed as long as this station is not involved in any other cross sections If a layer is deleted from a cross section all related interpretations contacts are removed from all stations that are involved in the cross section as long as this layer does not appear in another cross section for any of the stations involved in the current cross section e f a given well appears in more than one cross section interpretation results are updated with interpretations from the cross section that is last updated O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 349 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 15 3D Explorer The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer is an advanced three dimensional visualization and animation component for displaying and presenting cross sections created with the mapping component included with Hydro GeoAnalyst Specifically this can be used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats In addition basemaps may be displayed for relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats available are specifically designed for vewing geology and hydrogeology data The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer uses state of the art 3D graphics technology to display your data and sampling results us
25. 1 L 3D Views I 1 1 2004 11 Ca 125 mol n 06 Reports l pie l I I 1 2004 31 maL 1 c MDL 1 1 20 31 Cand 1200 us 1 12004 31 Ethylbenzene 0 mgiL 2 MDL 12004131 f 8599955 mgl nat 1 200431 cas 125 mg L I1 1200431 my i maiL 0 001 1200 31 E 15 mail 01 1200433 Li la mg am lt MDL 1 201 My 22 mgl naz I 2004 M Mn g 6000000 mgiL Im 7200 31 Ma B maL on 1 200431 Pt D 0500000 mgl DUI aes PCE ju mg l E MDL 1 2004 31 pH 7150900 ja I 2004 333 Sample Dept 5 0 1 2004 M S 550 mg L 1 17 02 2011 1 20 31 TCE 8 mall 1 EPA 324 2 Rav T2004 31 TDS 726 mg L 1 Mawan 1200431 Temp 14 800000 Degrees C 0 2004 2 Toluene D mg L 1 sMDL 7 02 2011 1 2004 4 Vinyl chloride 0 mgiL 1 c MDL 1 2004 31 Xylene D mall 1 MDI 1 20 74 Ag 0199899 mg L 0 008 1 200474 Aa 15 mgl am t i 1 In Rows 2858 Ready The following options are available on the Data Filter Tab 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 33 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help l4 4 5 c tuti These navigation options allow you to scroll through the records P This allows you to execute the filter runs a query to return the records X This allows you to delete the currently selected records H This allows you to show or hide the columns This allows you to export the
26. 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts 52 The X button to the right of the station will delete the station If you wish to submit your data to be imported into HGA you first need to indicate that the data has been collected for the station by selecting the Collected option Only stations which have been designated as collected will be submitted To submit the data select the Submit button Submit collected data File Name ExampleStation Clear collected data after sending Send Cancel You need to provide a name for the file that is being submitted please note that the date will be automatically added to the name you provide By default the Clear Collected data after sending option is selected This will remove the data from the device after it has been submitted This way you can submit your data throughout the day when you have a wifi connection and carry on with collecting additional data When you return to the office you can import this data into Hydro GeoAnalyst by selecting Modules Import Mobile Data 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 53 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Import Mobile EDD Data Select Mobile Data Collection Link http online sharehga com hgamobile mobile edd testing hd B x Collected Data Files ExampleStation 2013 08 15 15 55 59ison HGA will remember the Mobile EDD s that you published for your project you can select them from the drop downlis
27. 329 50 330 50 Borehole 0 agl Borehole Logs LL aano LE TIL x Q Map Prgects GET 235 385 65 4 832 06D DO 3258 5n 336 5r Powe i ij Cmes Secbons GB 10 5S 295 59 4514090 338 DO j38 00 Borehole it ie 3D Vies ap LGB 31 535212 69 4014 00 DO 338 5I 33i 5i Borehole B Reports GB 12 53522582 481428180 325 3 306 33 Baraha GB 13 53512874 4814378 70 324 B amp 305 85 Eoee i GE 14 535606576 4 514 320 20 323105 324 05 Ecrehnle 34 ni Station Group All Stations Rows 151 D Station Data x H4 1 of1s i hA kd Stains GB 01 0 A Name Data Category n T Pm mes es al qn Geologec Descnpbon LT GB 02 Lithology Hydrogeciogy Modang Fagalurms Fractures GE 03 B Framim Taim Sol Type De GB 04 0 GES k OO amp 50 Domare Gravel Darsi GED O B 5D 28 00 Medium Sand Fme tz GEHIT 2b DO 52 00 Gavel Bare el _ i 4 L i GEE zoo em FineSend ill Fines GE 08 B8 DX 100 Duo Silt Siy el Ea 00 GE 11 GB 12 GB 13 Ten GB 14 a GB 15 T Rows 5 Ready 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts New Navigation options on Data tabs We have added new navigation buttons on the Station List and Station Data tabs to help you more quickly find that station you want Station Data jid 4 5 of151 b bj Additionally you have the option of showing the List of Stations on your Station Data tab In previous versions you had to select your station from a d
28. 336 52 31752 Borehole GB 33 53523332 4B1452790 34049 34148 orhe Ga 53620030 481485150 327 09 322 08 Borehole GB 35 5 amp 5 129 32 4 B14 985 XJ Ja Bh 322 85 Borehole ARE TEw moo Amana A A 1476 28 p in n Station Group All Stations Rows 151 Ready O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help The HGA Graphical User Interface is composed of several controls Menu Bar Contains menu commands with access to most features that are available in the HGA package Module Toolbar Contains several context sensitive short cut buttons for the most frequently used HGA features Project Tree Hosts a tree view listing some of the most common components of your project These include nodes for Station Groups Queries Crosstab Maps Cross Sections Reports 3D Views Station Data Borehole Log Plots and Plots Data Tabs Provides access to the various parts of the project including the Station List Data Query Data Filter and Station Data Well Profile Provides a borehole log plot BHLP view for the selected station Data Grids Contains the grids for data entry and visualization Data Grids Toolbar Contains icons for the main options you can perform with the data contained within the data grid Status Bar Displays the program status You will find that you now have options to move the tabs around and dock them where you like The default configuration is to have
29. 4 NAD 1983 LITM Zone 17N 535 541 4 814 418 12 When you are finished with the position edits you must right mouse click on the map window and turn off the Edit Layout option to disable this feature To edit the remaining layout settings including fields violation conditions and display properties simply select Layer Display Data from the main menu then modify the settings as explained above 13 2 3 Edit The Edit menu contains standard windows functions such as Cut Copy and Paste objects as well as other options for editing shapefiles NOTE Before editing a layer make sure that the Editable check box is selected After editing deselect the Editable check box on the Layer Manager Cut Cuts the selected object to clipboard only available if an object polygon rectangle circle line or text is selected Copy Copies the selected object only available if an object polygon rectangle circle line or text is selected Paste Pastes the clipboard item onto the current layer O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 297 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 13 2 4 Tools Delete Deletes the selected object Delete All Deletes all objects from the current map layer Add Vertex Provides an option to add a vertex to the selected object To add a vertex Activate the desired map layer containing an annotation object and make it editable Select an object on this layer Click on the Add Vertex button or sele
30. B For Spiked samples you must add two types of samples codes and results The first will be a sample that contains the known spiked concentration for each parameter Create a new sample ID and assign the appropriate Quality Code ST for Theoretical Spiked concentration Create a new sample for every spiked sample and enter the amount of O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 173 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help constituent that has been added for every spiked parameter Next add the analyzed spiked sample as a new sample Create a new sample ID and assign the appropriate Quality Code SM for Measured Spiked concentration Create a new sample for every spiked sample and enter the measure amount of constituent that was recovered for every spiked parameter Both the measured sample and the sample holding the theoretical concentrations should be assigned a common batch Batch ID which relates the samples to each other Defining Quality Codes for Data When importing adding sample data quality codes need to be added to indicate the type of sample in order to be used in a Lab Quality Analysis The following are the codes required by HGA Sample Type Quality Code Duplicate Original O Duplicate Measured D Spiked Theoretical ST Spiked Measured SM Blank measured B Using the Template Manager you can create a field that will store the quality codes This field may be added to any table but typically it is found in the Parameter Sample
31. Get ome BE 535960 3 4814251 30 GE 15 52 e e fer sers e Fomrcs a Hi s a es sesa e FONTE Gee m 42 GB E35518 50 g1 30580 POINT 8 GE 15 231 01 324 50 B n E3E3DB4 Eh agian n EWAIMT f D leew 773 TE e S DE ba Query Name TOC Exceeds 320 Rows 71 Time 00h 00m 00s The new data query will now appear as a new branch under the Queries node in the Project Tree if you do not see it right away right click on the Queries branch and select Refresh This query can be executed run at any time by selecting it from the Project Tree The results will show on the Data Query tab O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 147 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help If you need to make further changes to the query right click on the query in the Project Tree and select Edit Query and the query will be opened in the Query Builder tab For further information on what can be done with the query once it has been executed and the results are being displayed please see the section on the Data Query Tab section 7 4 Dynamic Station Group Query Example A Dynamic Station Group query is used to group stations that meet specific conditions The stations groups that are created this way are called Dynamic because the stations in the group may change as data is added edited in the database Alternatively the Stations Groups that are user defined are referred to as Static because they do not ch
32. Select the List Editor option from the Modules menu or click on the a button in the main toolbar The List Editor will appear as a tab in the main HGA view as shown in the following screenshot Any view or module which loads as a tab may be pulled out of the main HGA view and dragged to a secondary monitor if you wish 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 7 ist Editor i4 4 9 of 9 dh 3 Ld m 9 Wi Rels Station Type List Items Description Item Name Include Description Image T guess Borehole 7 i ame Effluent Y Observation Well v Elevation Open hole v TOC Pumping Well v Surface Water v description addins Test Pit v Geologic Description Weather Station J Well Construction gt Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History On the left side of the tab you will find the database structure tree similar to what you find in the Template Manager or Query Builder Select the field you wish to create a list for by highlighting it in the tree On the right side of the tab you can generate your list by using any of the following buttons Use the l4 4 2 of46 P i buttons to navigate through the individual entries for a list Use the ap button to add a new entry to the list Use the P ad button to delete the selected entry from the list Use the ra button to save the list Use the button to import images file jpg or bmp to
33. below Right click the desired line segment and select Convert to Cross Section Line from the pop up menu CrossSection Line E4 Mame ab Buffer 200 meters Description Enter description here 0K Cancel opecify a Name Buffer Distance and Description The Buffer Distance determines which stations will be included in the cross section stations which lie within the buffer distance will all be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance is projected out perpendicular to the cross section line Click Ok to accept the line settings The Select Station Layer dialog will display Select the appropriate station layer from the dropdown list box and click Ok Select Station Layer x Select Station Layer OF Cancel The following message will display 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 311 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help x 2 Do you want to create cross section AB Click Yes to open the cross section in the Cross Section editor This will load the cross section editor For more details on creating cross sections you may refer to Chapter 12 Cross Section Editor Modify Buffer Distance To modify the buffer distance of a cross section line e Select the cross section layer from the Layer Manager panel e Select a cross section line e Right click and select Update Buffer from the pop up menu CrossSection
34. can adjust the footer change the logo add my title etc Once like the way it looks O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts ES am going to save as a new template making sure to sawe it in the same folder as the original templates so HGA can find them Now am going to run my query and use my new template to chart the data So when select the e button the first thing need to do is select my new template from the drop down list Chart in Excel Template Selection My New Template xlsx Data Sheet Name Char Sheet Name Required Options Series Grouping Group charts by column Time T Use multiple deta hee Value Then select the Required mappings the Series grouping would be the chemical name the Time is the Sample Date and the Value is the Result Value Also want to have one page for every station so select the Group charts by option and select Station Name When I select OK I get the Mappings dialog Chart Mappings Target Column from Excel Source Column The chemical names automatically match because they are exactly the same within my template as they are stored within the database Also make sure that you map the Date field Then select OK and you will be prompted for a name for the excel spreadsheet that will be created 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Once you provide a name it will open in Excel and you can review to see that each station
35. have options for setting which row to begin importing at and if the first row contains header information O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 123 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 10 x gt Choose a Data Source Data Source File EAD peuments and SelttingssmgaertnerD esktapschem import Fles E ample Chemical Data sle Format One Analysed Value per Row Start Importing Data Using Row v Use Fitst How as Header Data Preview Worksheet DES station name gample date sample ID chemical name result value re k 1 24 4 18 2001 284 18 04 2001 lt 03 me g 29 471872001 294 18 04 2001 ALK 203 3 294 471872001 294 18 04 2001 As lt 2 me 4 291 47182001 2941 18 04 2001 B 1 69 E 204 4718 2001 234 18 04 2001 Ba 0 05 R 29 l ALL RUDI 29 18414 20 Ae Result Field contains Non Detect qualifiers e g lt 0 5 Select Result Field Help You also have the option to select if your result field contains Non Detect qualifiers e g 0 5 when you select the result field you will find that 2 new columns of data appear in your data preview one that contains just the qualifier and one that contains the value These columns can then be used for the mapping in Step 2 O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 124 Import Chemical Data Wizard 7 E rm xl Choose a Data Source Data Source File C Documents and SettingssmgaertnersD
36. however if you have created O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control custom fields or renamed existing fields in your database structure you may need to browse through the list and select the appropriate Query Alias in your project using the pull down menus that corresponds with a Field NOTE A field in your query must be mapped to each of the required fields as listed above Generate QC Results The results for an example analysis including all six checks is displayed in the screenshot w w D1 8 8 1336 sz 8 3 1335 12 00 00 2 we Well 1 8 1996 1 8 1996 12 00 00 We 2 12 1996 2 12 1996 12 00 0 10 i cee ei 0 5 Went W01 8 9 1996 s 8 9 1996 laz rng 2 Toluene below Lab Quality Validation Ini x DG Spike results e Blank results SC Duplicate results oy Dilution results w MDL results of Holding Time resulte name r Sample 1D Sample Date Batch ID Chemical Mame Result Value Real wi W01_41 2 1996_2 1 2 1886 12 05 00 2 Benzene 70 E wat war arene arses a rsene va war A anu ewme 8 ws wan aris varies zig Eeee 3 an 2008 war wscznznwizns nu 2 Eee 100 enema Ebene 100 wa wn ja Eeee 10 51 2 12 1996 wm W 01_4 1671996_ wor Wo p 0 1 E oto uira adnan 2 dd dn dd nne d wnnnn kd T rET i wt welll 1 2 1
37. move the mouse cursor to the right across the cross section to the interval in the first station which represents the model layer When the cursor is within the specified buffer distance from the station s lithology interval snapping will be activated With a left mouse click add a vertex at desired and appropriate locations both within and outside station intervals Continue to move the mouse cursor across the cross section using the left mouse button at each station to add a vertex at the desired location for the model layer At the right cross section boundary click once more with the left mouse button to add a vertex and complete the line when the mouse cursor becomes close enough to the boundary line the line will snap to the boundary The selected model line will be drawn at the specified location NOTE The model line is drawn using the attributes that were defined for it at the time it was created Most attributes of a model interpretation layer can be modified by right clicking on O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor EN the desired model interpretation layer and choosing Properties from the pop up menu A dialog similar to that shown below will appear Model Line Mame Description Pattern Color Size 2 Sample i Cancel Provide a Description Line Style Line Color Fill Pattern for the model interpretation layer the Name for the layer cannot be modified as the name is
38. on your machine Select the DataSourceName that was created Click OK to proceed ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup ki Ea Pata sauce Hamne Pescniptiarm PETS Database Help Versione Excel 97 2000 Workbook Drs 5 ample Stations Iz Select Workbook t directa M Use turent Girector RT Click OK again to proceed The main Data Link Properties dialog will appear once more The connection string to the data source will now appear in the connection string field as shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services oum Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help E Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced Al Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specify the source of data Use data source name Reresh f Use connection string Connection string DBG D Program Files HudroGeoBazesSam Build 2 Enter information to lag on to the server User name Password Blank password Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use Test Connection LIF Cancel Help Next you must select the initial catalog to use from the bottom of the Connection tab as shown in the figure below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices ous ES Data Link Properties Provider Connection Advanced Al Specify the following to connect to ODBC data 1 Specity the source of data Use data so
39. the view extent is saved together with the map project The next time the map project is opened the view extent will be restored Turn on All Layers Makes all layers visible Turn off All Layers Hides all layers View BHLP Allows the you to view the borehole log plot BHLP for any station To vew a BHLP make sure that you are in the HGA data layer select this option and click on any station An example taken from the Demo project is provided below Map Protect Demo Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help ithe k zmes A O7 x i Web RaSN SO s d B BHLP 67 GB 44 CrossSectionLine5 H Boreholes A AirPhota Bw ar bm p 318 AirPhoto Color ar b mp Water Courses Contour Lines Airports 1 Major Railroads Urban Areas Trees Grasslands Baiia RI RI R RI RI R R RI RI RI RI J Croplands CA s Nisy 535 162 4813762 From the top of the BHLP viewer select the template from the combo box These templates are defined in the main HG Analyst window under the Borehole Logs node For more information see Borehole Log Plotter section 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 303 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 13 2 6 Select This menu provides options for selecting or de selecting stations on the selected layer in the Map project Typically this involves stations from the Hydro GeoAnalyst project Once the Station s data points are selected a red circle will appear on top of the statio
40. 11 GB 12 GB 13 GB 14 GB 15 GB 16 GB 17 GB 18 GB 19 GB 20 GB 21 GB 22 k 12 09 PM 1 09 PM Bar Color Selected Statons u i All Day Event You must provide a name for the schedule in the Subject field and then you have the option of providing a description for the schedule Indicate the start and end date for the schedule Select the Stations you wish to schedule from the list of stations on the left hand side You can reduce the list of all stations by selecting an appropriate Station Group Once you have selected the stations will be highlighted blue Select the button to move the stations to the Selected Stations area right hand side To move all stations from a Station Group to the Selected Stations area use the button You also have the option to set the Recurrance for your your schedule similar to the options found in MS Outlook and the following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Event Planning 158 Appointment Recurrence Appointment time Start End 1 09 PM Duration Recurrence pattern Daily Weekly Monthly Recur every week s on F Monday Tuesday Wednesday Thursday Friday Saturday Yearly Range of recurrence Start Sun 2 24 2013 No End Date End after 10 occurrences End by Sun 4 28 2013 Cancel Remove Recurrence Once you save an close your New Schedu
41. 139 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Information i i records were updated and 44 records were inserted O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Query Builder mo 7 Query Builder This section provides a detailed description of the Query Builder Within an HGA project it may be necessary to perform different types of queries for data filtering reporting and management A few examples of data queries are provided below Select wells drilled later than 1995 and earlier than 2000 Select wells with discharge over 500 gpm Select boreholes deeper than 150 feet Select boreholes where the overburden thickness exceeds 20 feet Locate groundwater concentration exceedances for BTEX In the Query Builder tab the query display fields and conditions can be quickly defined Once the queries have been created they may be easily accessed from the Project Tree where each new query will appear as a new branch 7 1 Query Types There are two types of Queries within HGA A Standard Select Query which pulls data from the data for further analysis and a Dynamic Station Group Query which uses a condition to group stations Standard Select Query Data Queries can provide a more detailed look at your data and can be used for quantifying and qualifying any field in the database In addition many of the visualization and data analysis modules require data sources as data inputs Using the Query Builder you can generate Select Queries that provi
42. 2014 Help Template Manager 9 ee ee E Search JI A Table Child Properties H WEF Description Display Name Database Name H FE Geologic Description Child H FE Well Construction Description H JEF Soil Testing H JEF Soil Sampling El V amp Monitoring Event H E Parameter Sample WE Parameter Result Pima EL ary Key ID WES Water Level WES Meteorology Child table relationships WE Divers WIE Diver Data x WIE Field Measurements TUI EHIVIER Parent ild is EE i v 49 date Parent Key s Foreign Key s I observation m a 5 FJ Mining Exploration Child is parent to H V Geophysics Foreign Key s H FEF Well History fl vey Uncategorized Last changed on 01 05 2014 4 07 59 PM By DIR MGaertner Select the ar to add a new relationship to this child table and the Define Foreign Key dialog will appear amp amp Define Foreign Ke gn Key From the drop down list select the parent table in this example it is called Parent Then O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Template Manager 110 select the date field as the ParentKey and the date field as the ChildKey SY Please note it is common practice to use the same name for the field in both the Parent table and the Child table Additionally the fields must have the same data type When you select the OK button and review the Child table you will see that the relationship has been esta
43. 4 Fldname EE GroupFooter 1 0 ChartzDi i m PageFooter The explorer provides quick access for selection of controls on the report Selecting a control in the Report Explorer activates the corresponding control on the report This makes the control ready to be formatted or moved to another location The explorer lists at least three nodes under the MainReport node namely e PageHeader refers to the page header for the current report e Detail refers to the section that hosts the details of the report e PageFooter refers to the page footer for the current report Any item placed on the page header and footer of your report will be displayed on all pages of the report In addition to these sections one or more sections named Group Headers and a corresponding Group Footer sections can be added to the report In the figure depicted above the data on the report is grouped by stations That is the data for each station is displayed together Group Headers can have their own header and footer that will be displayed above and below each group s data respectively Data Fields Explorer For most report types the Report Editor takes data directly from the database based on the design and generates the desired report Access to the data in the database is provided through the connection string and SQL Statement These inputs result in a list of fields that are available for the current report These fields are listed in the Fields Explorer a
44. 4344 X 4 iia 4 4 4 4d 43 4 4 X 4 8 us EPA B 10 Here you can manually enter or import the reference values used for running the associated checks You will notice that the Method Name and Chemical Name have drop down lists you can pick from this is based on your selections from the Settings QAQC References Settings 1 O xi Location of Analysis Method Field Local of Chemical Parameter List Field m Category Monitoring Event Category Monitoring Event Table Parameter_Result Table Parameter_Resul Field Analysis Method Field Chemical Mame Cancel Once you have defined the settings for your Template you can create another template by clicking the Add button delete an existing template by clicking the Remove button or 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 181 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help accept reject your changes and return to the HGA main program window You are now ready to apply the lab quality template to your data 10 3 Perform Lab Quality Assessment NOTE An example of a Lab Quality Data query is available in the Demo project select the QC Lab Analysis query in the Queries node and feel free to follow along with the instructions below To apply a Lab Quality Template follow the instructions below e Select and highlight the appropriate Data Query from the Queries node in the HGA Browser e From the main menu click Tool
45. A 4 E Z ioj xj Select Station 4 m m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 B3bz12 53 481 4030 00 323 50 324 50 BE Design Al Lithology Coarse Gravel E Mame Value Gravel Fine Sand v Live update Apply Close Export v Print v Help 12 4 1 1 Edit Column Properties Column properties Entities can be set by expanding the Design node and clicking on the sub node to be updated For example to modify a Lithology column expand the Design node and the Lithology node and select LithologyEntities from the tree as shown in the following screenshot O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 239 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Borehole Log Designer 5ample 3 i E JEJ Cris Crawl Miodiurn ara a EE dB X 85 Cus lirei iard LO Ed el TUI oe tu buie In some cases the BHLP may not be able to identify the default data source for the selected column type and as a result there may not be a preview In this event you can manually select the data source or query results for the column using the Data Table Queries property In the case of Lithology select the Lithology Entities node as shown in the previous screenshot 12 4 1 2 Specify Data Source First select if you want to use a Data table or a Query as the Data Source Then choose the respective table or data query from the list provided in the combo box next to this property as indicated in the following screenshot All fields f
46. Data Source please note the following limitations e HGA currently supports LAS v 2 0 e hird dimensional data array handling is currently not supported e Multiple log runs is currently not supported When you are finished select the Next button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step The next step is Data Mapping O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 136 Import LAS File Step Data mapping Note Select Section Field Select Destination Field H Well Log B Parameter 1 Description Er Location H Station Name i Station Type i Total Depth E descrption addi E Geologic Description E Well Construction Fl Soil Testina The second step requires Field mapping from the source file ta destination fields in one ar more HidroGeo Analyst database tables Select one field from the source file in the left frame Select the appropriate matching field fram destination in the right Click on the Map button Mapped fields will then be added ta the Preview grid at the Bottom of the window To remove the mapping for a selected field select the appropriate raw in the grid then click on the Delete Mapping button Destination Fields Source Unit Table Field Unit Location Station Hame Fluid Hesistivi Depth Fluid Resist Value Source Fields Back Hest gt Cancel Help The next step in the data transfer operation is to mat
47. Database Name HGADemo e Windows Authentication SQL Server Authentication You simply need to provide the name of the SQL Server you wish to use the Database Name for the Demo Project and then select if you wish to use Windows Authentication or SQL Server Authentication The Demo Project files will be installed to the location designated under Project HGA Settings the Project tab The default location is under Documents Hydro GeoAnalyst We also provide an alternate way to access the Demo project you can download it from our website and then open it from backup using the following instructions Please be aware the download file may be quite large in size and therefore may take a while to download depending on your computer and internet speed Downloading Demo Project from Website e Ensure your computer is connected to the internet e Download the HGA Demo Project file e Select the Save option and indicate where on your local hard drive to save the HGA Demo Project zip file e he demo project will begin to download to your computer Depending on your internet connection speed this may take several minutes Opening the Demo Project in Hydro GeoAnalyst e Once the demo project has been downloaded to your computer extract the contents of the HGA Demo Project zip file to a location on your computer e Launch Hydro GeoAnalyst by double clicking on the desktop short cut icon Select Project gt
48. Dpen Project can with our mew Mobile EDD Electronic Data Deliverable option Publish your EDD templates to be used on your mobile device and then you can talect your data on he go When done collachng simply subrnel fae data and easily impor it into your project Da0 Project Recent Projects e Dero dh Event Planning Module Wi Print Borehole Log Plats to PowerPoint a Print to Excel ge Stet Page ah Updated Query Builder af Updated List Edito h Updated Maternal Specticrtion ab Support for SOL Server 2012 dh SOL Server Authentication ap User Interface Improvements Hide the Start Page after opening a project wma shon the Sari Page when HGA starts Ready The New Features tab will describe each of the new features Some features will also include links to videos about the new feature 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts oa The Release Notes tab will display our online Readme file This contains a lot of detailed information about the new features how to install the demo project a list of features and bugs fixed from previous versions as well as Known Issues and Limitations of the current version On the Support tab you will find lots of other information to help you including how to contact our support team If you have a question or concern with the product you can use this link to initiate an email to the support team and it will include all the System Information which can be
49. El Honzontal Axis zd Senet Type i ax 1H 885 1 585 14 887 15 888 15 58 152000 12001 15 2002 Sampliig Date Size The size ol the plot in pixels 2 M at os Prt ok He To zoom out to the original extents right mouse click on the plot area and select Zoom Out from the menu Viewer Window Settings Under the Settings tab you can define the settings for the plot page design O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 188 settings Data Source Name waterqualitu multipleplots Number af Columna 2 Number of Rows 2 Spacing Width 10 Spacing Height 10 Name controls the name of the selected plot series this is read only and cannot be modified The plotting component supports display and manipulation of multiple plot windows in the viewer window Number of columns controls how many columns will be displayed in the viewing window for displaying plots Number of rows controls how many rows will be displayed in the viewing window for displaying plots For example 2 columns X 2 rows means that 4 plots may be displayed simultaneously in the viewer window Spacing width controls the amount of space between each plot in the horizontal direction Spacing height controls the amount of space between each plot in the vertical direction 11 2 Adding Plots The data source for the plots must originate from a Data Query before you create a plot you must build and execute a data query using the Qu
50. Gravel Sand Coarse Sand Medium Sand Fine Sand Clay Mud Made Ground Cobbles B WWW aya 33333 ie N Ge sess K a va Boulders Rock Weathered Rock Top Soil Loam Slope Sediment The left side of the tab displays the existing specifications which may be chosen from the drop down box The right side of the tab provides the option for editing an existing custom material specification or creating a new one Please Note You are not able to edit the specifications that come with HGA you can only edit a custom made specification In the Existing Specification side the following buttons are available Use the l4 4 2 of46 P b buttons to navigate through the individual entries for a specification Use the cs button to set the selected specification as the project default Use the Pd button to delete the specification Use the button to edit the selected specification only available if you have selected a custom specification this will move the specification to the right side of the tab for you to make your edits Use the rd button to export the specification In the Edit Specification side the following buttons are available O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Use the J button to create a specification don t forget to provide a name Use the ap button to add a new entry to the specification Use the P ad button to delete the selected entry from the specificat
51. H E ioe j 1 Ip tation Name Sample ID Chemical Name Me sult Value Ad Each value must be a number Detection Limit i ui 3 STRING STRING STRING DOUBLE STRING STRING DOUBLE Once you have populated the worksheets with your data you can select the Validate amp Submit button The QuickChecker will validate all data in all the worksheets If there are any errors where the data fails to meet the conditions then the cell will be highlighted red as well as the tab 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts 40 In this example you can see that the only errors are found on the Parameter Sample worksheet When you view this worksheet you will find the cells where there are errors have been highlighted red This is because of the condition set in the EDD Template the Sample Date field was set to be required As you enter appropriate data into these fields the QuickChecker will automatically validate the data and remove the red highlighting if the data is appropriate 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Ts E IT fea Tay i L Jom imr mu s E mmi hi d aa Fy Pon y sa E Li z m LLL eee om a a Ts amp D ILI SE ns fs plies hem eel eee i eee himc Tat Pa a km LI Li T Lr SEHE Once you have corrected al
52. Heszult ea leTAING I NE Lab ID STRING parameter sample Huelt Control STRING Sample D ate DATESTAMP parameter sample Se ne ET I Show parameter sample fields x Back After selecting the next button you may receive a message indicating that some station names were not found within the database You will have the option to append the stations to you station table or reject those stations and the data associated with those stations Confirmation The project database does not include the following Station Name s Append this will add the Station Name s to the project database Reject this will ignore all data associated with Station Name s that are not included in the project database i of records 31 And then you will receive a message indicating any sample ID s that are not in your database O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 126 which will be added The project database does not include the Following Station sample id s The system will automatically add the Station sample id s to the project database 294 294 T1e 04Z72001 284 234 24 1 2001 JV 39 UTZAZ A2001 dBM 358 M 23 04 2001 abd ab4 2270172001 3B4 354 24 04 2007 4D 404 1 P7201 72001 4DA 4D4 18 04 2001 41 l 41 18 01 2001 41 4l AL 24 04 72001 dB 46 11 19 01 2001 AB 454 2004 42001 H of records 34 Step 3 Data Validation
53. Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help l ed P Prot Examples Microsoft Excel ENT ER Home Insert Page Layout Formuutact Data Reste Vins Developer QuirkChecker Foult FOF Team Options Design at co o a Cut Te m i SS Soa E Autosum j amp Calibin ht A X x Pr Wrap Text General FB z E d d ida Cupy sn o c uw e Bade Er D BB GERE dHMenge amp ACenter SS Conditional Format Celi insert Deiete Pormat Sort Finda f romat Panter a H A F E UU TT Formatting as Tabie Styles b Cart fime Seer Oipboard a Fort Alignment Mume 4 Shyles Cells Edsling cx iz A Pyyct Table Field Let a Choose fields in add in report us J 4 name Schlumberger Pivot Table Landscape Example 02 05 Pu Walgr terres Station Date Calumn E T lass E mem 1 94 1 Bretun nme s zhwme al zs afn 313 d mf i 10name as sas czswe 8 xe s 1 whwme 3 anime ao ear ases al axweyme 3 25 06 2000 i9 muxo 2 whoxe anime suma amps 34 er 39 2 95myme a 27 whoxe 2 assuxe sa TT a oa n awes ae vaoo evo al n J C oaro 30000 2000 W461 Sheet tI na Ready T Page tof Ri pje See se ole uleule d TT FTD TA TA
54. In the Designer tree expand the Lithology node and select Lithology Entities Using the combo boxes provided select the data table top bottom image and text entities Lithology column is a specialized version of the Interval column The Lithology column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Lithology node from the BHLP Settings window 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 212 BHLP Settings n x Column Options Pattern Symbol Description 7 Visible 7 Visible Font width 3 40 Help Apply OE Cancel The Lithology frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button The Border Line Visibility frame allows you to show hide the column Outline and the Grid by clicking on the appropriate check box The Pattern Symbol frame includes a Visible checkbox which allows you to show hide the lithology patterns and a Width vertical scroll box which allows you to set the width of the lithology pattern as a percentage of the total column width Under the Description frame you can modify the visibility and font style of the descriptive text by selecting the Visible check box a
55. Interpretation Cross section interpretations FROM Station RIGHT JOIN SStation ON Station ID SStation SID LEFT JOIN interpretation results ON Station id interpretation results Station WHERE SStation ID 22 amp dyanced Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event y Layer Name Top elevation Thickness Interpretation Mining Exploration 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Topography 323 500000072527 52 00000001512 Model E Geophysics 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 BottLayerl 271 500000057407 D Model Well History 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 BottLayer2 271 500000057407 48 000000070855 Model 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 BottLayer3 223 499999986552 1 4999999865517 Model 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Medium Sand 316 999999908833 19 4999999363255 Geology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Gravel 297 499999972507 25 9999999151006 Geology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Coarse Gravel 323 500000072527 6 50000016369393 Geology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Fine Sand 271 500000057407 17 0000000867341 Geology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 Silt 254 499999970673 30 333333384121 Geology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 upper aquifer 323 500000072527 6 50000016369393 Hydrogeology 24 293844946 1108770147 GB 01 lower aquifer 271 500000057407 17 0000000867341 Hydrogeology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 To
56. Layer will be deselected NOTE Once selected you cannot deselect individual stations Add to Station Group Provides an option to add the selected stations to a Hydro GeoAnalyst station group Using one of the Selection tools mentioned above select one or more stations then choose this menu item from the Select menu and the following dialog will appear Select Station Group X Please select Station Group LIF Lancel Help Stations can only be added to an existing station group Delete from Station Group Remove the selected stations from a Hydro GeoAnalyst station group The stations will be removed from the station group map layer currently selected and active in the layer manager 13 2 7 Settings Cross Section This dialog allows modifying the display properties of features that intersect with cross 2014 Schlumberger Water Services osos Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help section lines when viewing a cross section in the Cross Section Editor Selecting this option launches a dialog similar to that shown in the following figure The dialog makes a list of all line type layers available for selection Intersections With Cross Section Lines Rivers Sample E v Highway ID Sample wr U Contour Mas TCE Mas CONC Sample o U v CroseSectionLine name Sample E gn OF Cancel A cross section line may intersect with one or more cross sections or any line type features such as rivers and highway
57. Lithology table 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts so j E Example StationLithology x V gt gt C6 https onlinesharehga com hgamobile mobile_edd_testing lithalogy_dialog 5 NewTab J CarWash E Hyperbole and a Hal CruseCentroLNET C SLB leenExperience Lo fil The Hub SWS Logo Example Station Lithology data From To soil type Edt 0 5 Clay o Edit 5 10 Coarse Sand Edit 10 15 Fine Sand e Edit 15 20 Limestone e Y ou have the option to edit a record you entered by selecting the Edit button as well as an option to delete a record X if you made a mistake To return to the normal form view simply select Close When you select the Water Level tab you can see the field available to collect data for Remember that in HGA water levels are associated to the screen and therefore you need to provide a screen ID for each measurement D Hydro GeoAnalystMobile x V gt B https online sharehgacom hgamobile mobile edd testing gw level Lj New Tab Kj CarWash F Hyperbole and a Hal CruiseControl NET CJ SLB leonExperience Lo fil The Hub SWS Logo i Home Table View Add New Record Example Station a Screen_ID x date i depth to water level aumwwy Sv 5 2013 Schlumberger Limited All rights reserved And finally you can selec
58. Manage Databases MGAERTNER WAT sSWS Projects in SWS Database 3 x Delete Method Data Only ID Name Path 1 Demo Project C Program FilesHGAnalystiProjectsiDemo Project In this dialog select the Server and the Database that you would like to delete Once the database is selected a list of projects using the selected database will be listed at the bottom the project list is read only and displayed in order to assist you to decide if the selected database can be safely deleted Click on the 3 button to compress the file size of the database to save disk space After the database has been compressed you may continue to work with it sap Click on the E button to delete the selected database O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services os Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 3 4 2 3 5 Click on the X button to delete a project from the database as a database may include one or more projects Please take note of the Delete Method by default Data Only is selected Only the data from a project or database will be deleted If you also wish to delete the associated Project files you must first select the Project Folder and Data option before deleting the project or database NOTE Use caution when deleting databases since the data cannot be recovered once deleted and there is no undo option unless you have taken a backup BackUp Database Help Use this option to create a backup copy of the SQL Serve
59. O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 223 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help BHLP Settings E X El E gt BHLP Well Construction E Well Construction v Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Litholagy water level Reduci Appearanc Position z Help Apply LE Cancel The Appearance frame allows you to change the position of the lithology images layers within the cell construction column Choose from Right Left Both on each side of the well drilling The Border frame allows you to define the lithology border settings You can set the vsibility using the Show checkbox change the width of the border using the Width vertical scroll boxes 0 10 and change the color of the border using the color box Water Level BHLP Settings E X E3 BHLP Well Construction E Well Construction v Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc 4 symbols D ata Labels Appearance Water level position for multicasing Inside i Use Marker Use Font 7 Size fio reae Style HZH Line Color Fill Color Font Char Map Help Apply UE Cancel The Symbols tab allows you to define the symbol to represent one or more water level measurements on the plot Under the Appearance frame you can specify the water level position for multicasing wells 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter
60. Renderer allows assigning labels to objects on the map layers xl Please choose the effective renderers for the layer System Henderers Type emm ou gt xdg Background 5umbo M Show Background There are two types of renderers System Renderers and Custom Renderers The System Renderers are renderers prouded by MapObjects and include label value and graduated renderering Custom Renderers are renderers developed by SWS These renderers may provide the same O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 272 functionality as the MapObjects renderer i e label renderer but with additional options System Renderers A new System Renderer may be added by clicking on the Add button The following dialog will appear with the available Renderers from which you can select Renderer Type ES Typ C Value Renderer C Label Renderer Lk Cancel The Graduated Renderer provides a way of classifying features into categories or classes by drawing different symbols for features based on numeric attribute values and their ranges The Value Renderer provides a means of representing features of a map layer by drawing a symbol for each unique data value The Label Renderer can be used to display labels on contour maps or to place labels on stations or any other object Select the desired type and click OK For each Renderer type there is a corresponding settings dialog which is launched
61. Runtime v 10 0 50325 Both can be can be downloaded from microsoft com You can find the QuickChecker installation here http www swstechnology com hydro geoanlayst quick checker download setup exe Once you install the plug in you will find a new ribbon in Excel this plug in is only supported in Excel 2007 or 2010 and only supported on 32 bit versions ON HI c Bookl Microsoft Excel Home Insert Page Layout Formuii Data Review View Acrobat Team d 7 x y Open Template mi dea Data had nof yet been validated m de f E m Generate Herder zanl Ha emar Next Pr Chear Vaedate i Deta Eres E Formatting and Submit Tempie 0 000 Verkaion QuickChecker Ses Here you can open the EDD template that was created in Template Designer described in the previous section Then the Generate Headers open will become available this will load all the information from the EDD template into the Excel workbook In the example from above it 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 39 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help created a worksheet for the Parameter Sample table and populated it with the fields chosen from that table As well as a Parameter Result worksheet with the fields associated with that table Two additional worksheets are also always generated The List Data worksheet will contain the contents of the list editor from any field that was set to Use List in the Templat
62. State Datum NAD83 Layer Provinces and territories census divisions economic regions census metropolitan areas and census agglomerations census consolidated subdivisions census subdivisions Ontario Geological Survey http www mndm gov on ca mndm mines ogs draftbedrock_e asp Data Digital version of the Paleozoic bedrock of Southern Ontario compilation map Format Geodatabase Geographic Coverage Ontario Layer Geology Statistics Canada http www12 statcan ca english census06 geo index cfm Data Road Network file Boundary files for provinces and territories census divisions economic regions census metropolitan areas and census Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Canada Datum NAD83 Layer Road and Administrative Boundary 17 6 Appendix F Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s Schlumberger Water Services maintains an online Hydro GeoAnalyst FAQ https www swstechnology com software and instrumentation faqs software faq s hy dro geoanalyst faq O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services as Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help If you cannot find the answer please contact our technical support and they will be happy to assist you You may contact SWS at Schlumberger Water Services 72 Victoria Street South Suite 202 Kitchener Ontario CANADA N2G 4Y9 Phone 1 519 342 1142 Fax 1 519 885 5262 E mail sws support slb com Web www swstechnology com 17 7 Appendix G Configuring Geotransformation Setti
63. T3434 TW Tu T wp TA You now have all the power of Excel s options for customizing your Pivot tables 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control 10 Lab Quality Control When collecting analyzing and interpreting envronmental data Quality Control QC can come in many forms and fashions Hydro GeoAnalyst supports a Lab Quality Control component that allows users to verify the accuracy of the analysis results reported by a laboratory As part of a data collection process duplicate samples blank control samples and spiked samples are added to sample sets these samples are sent to a laboratory along with the original field samples to be analyzed in a controlled environment using constant techniques instruments and personnel The objective is to identify any sources of contamination that may originate from the lab analysis and provide some assurance to the client that the data is valid and representative of your site conditions HGA has integrated a Lab Quality Analysis component that allows users to e Define one or more lab quality assessment templates e Analyze Duplicate Spiked and Blank samples e Compare Relative Percent Difference and Coefficient of Variation for Duplicate samples for more details see Check Duplicates Settings Analyze Percent Recovery for Spiked samples for more details see Check Spiked Settings Compare Blank samples to method detection limits for more de
64. Virgin Islands American Samoa Guam The Commonweath of Northern Mariana Islands and the Midway Islands Datum NAD 83 Layer Roads Railroads Rivers Lakes Legal boundaries Census Statistical Boundaries etc NASA ftp eOsrp01u ecs nasa gowsrtm Data Shuffle Radar Topography Mission SRTM Format Raster SRTM Geographic Coverage Global SRTM1 30m for USA SRTM3 90m World Datum WGS84 NAVD88 Layer DEM Natural Resources Canada http geogratis cgdi gc ca download Data CGDI Warehouse Format Vector and Raster Geographic Coverage Canada Datum Various O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services am Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Layer Landsat RADARSAT Canada Atlas Canadian Geographic Information Systems Land Use National Scale Frameworks Census Data Ontario Land use Cover Canadian Conversation Areas Database State of Canada s Ecosystem CGIAR Consortium for Spatial Information CGIAR CSI http srtm csi cgiar org Data Shuttle radar Topography Mission SRTM Format Geotiff or Arcinfo Geographic Coverage Global 90M Datum WGS84 EGM96 Layer DEM Global Land Cover Facility http glcfapp umiacs umd edu 8080 esdi index jsp Data Land Sat TM Images Format GeoFTiff Geographic Coverage Global Up to 30m Datum WGS84 Layer Landover Images Land Information Ontario http lioapp Irc gov on ca lids welcome asp Data NRVIS Data Format Coverage Geographic Coverage Ontario Canada Da
65. Water Services Map Manager om Color Settings E a X Color Palette 321 09 323 03 324 37 326 91 328 85 Tam ka Jd x 3 Transparency 5 fo z DK Cancel Help The Color Settings Renderer allows you to define different colored zones ranges according to their specific interval of values The Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals The Ramp option loads the following dialog Color Ramps Start Color NEN End Color pnm Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box Click OK to return to the renderer screen Alternatively you may set the color for each value simply click on the Color box under the Color column and the Windows Color palette will display Select the desired color and click OK to continue Repeat this for other values as desired Adjust the Transparency option to make it possible to see layers under the color shading zones The higher the value the more transparent the layer will be The value must be within the range 0 100 The remaining options ar
66. acs D evv cusa vue saeva s ca oen ve Coe avia last ertv io Bae Eee NO UR U QR Rada 245 6 Borehole Log Reports Printing and EXpOFtInp eret ee reper ua e epos e eva nta ue bea vea eae aea deo cie eeu a Rev apr svvenes 246 Part 13 Map Manager 248 rt Abo bthelteffate quaseupateit dedii EEE EAE AEE ON ERE VE YER EUR d 248 Grouping Laye rS iere eee ore Eye YR TOR E OI EE YR XRS eS EAS SEI ERRE AD VdeVa Ye DOTNE DRIN E DEORSUM RA e VOV dE S a REN SE RUE S E POP FLU val csvadecesusencntareess 251 Descriptionof Toolbar Items uei eov nd Fare Eo EFIE EDU KP EREI Ao erise letev ENE EEANN E Yo aO RUE Tbe STEESEL REESEN EROE TE eatae 251 2 Description of Men tems osos ER vr KE esa o xU S EAF O EROR A EYE SU ET RR a E NAE SEVA NN a as 253 Project NNNM 253 PAYOR EE TO monet CE e NT E 256 NeW Linsen cpa scat stem O oh acu eU uotum ad Qui lo fucci voto treu ad Aa tM deat rundum Nee d 257 Open uxo eas ta ne decane tva ind IM Mec EDEN ri tem bc uic pano E IM ae 257 Lodd IGA Dia Ue ouod dia ecules iia dale seco denies cleus Etenim oa doc netto od audent pelea etat Rd o dada 260 IMPO eea da ven neva a Ea ees eve Nica ce aaa e ele ht neat eect nee a eae eee ck gaa dee 262 SA ec cv TIE Cet Pa TN rector dane ag cece inden aaa ats 269 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Delete m 269 Cea CSIC OES CC LION e m E Du DU ee Es a SR ER NE RR 269 POI m
67. all duplicated records and add only the ones that are not already included in the project database if any 1 Waming Message s You may choose to ignore the wamings and continue with the import 0 Eror Message s You must fix the issue s before continue with the import o 2 Question s Select one of the available actions for each question in order to continue with the import Click Here to View Data Now can continue with the import Now the Import dialog is updated and can see how many records will be imported EDD Import C Users mgaertnerDesktopNQuickCheckerDataPackage 01 12 12 10 08 19 zip hga EDD File Type Selected Validation Logs f EDDFileContent Q EDDFileVersion nen C Sheet parameter sample new records and 0 updates validated and ready to be import Sheet parameter result 24 new records and 0 updates validated and ready to be import anum Be jJ Validation Succeeded Click Import to finalize the operation 00 04 17 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts 4a r EDD Import EDD file C Users mgaertner Desktop QuickCheckerDataPackage_01 12 12_10 08 19 zip_hga Result Validation Validation Logs gt of EDD File Type Selected of EDD File Content EA EDD File Version of EDD File Signing Check Sum of Project Information and Connection of Sheet parameter sample 16
68. and next value Deleting a color To remove a color increment simply select the color from the Color Value table and click on the Delete button Resetting the Color Palette O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 376 The color settings can be reset to the initial default values by clicking the Reset button 15 5 5 Color Legend The Color Legend is a scale of the element values associated with each color The values and colors shown in the Color Legend are defined by the Color Palette settings for the selected data type element see prevous section Other display settings including Title Text size Text color and Frame color can be customized using the display settings options shown in the figure below Setting Name 0 Palette Ea Auto reset palette b Color legend Visible Tie Textsize 1 1 0 Tesxtcoo O O a Frame Rmmelnecoor Frame fillcolor CJ The color legend will automatically appear in the top left hand corner of the Display Screen whenever a display object using the color palette is plotted e g color map It can be moved to any other location in the Display Screen by dragging and dropping it at the desired location 15 6 Cross Section Data Display Settings The Cross Section Data tree contains the properties of the cross sections loaded in the project e Cross Sections e Stations e Interpretat
69. and displaying geological hydrogeological and model layer cross sections The 4 button in the main toolbar performs the same function For more details see Cross Section Editor 3 3 15 3D Explorer The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer is an advanced three dimensional visualization and animation component for displaying and presenting cross sections created with the mapping component included with Hydro GeoAnalyst Specifically this can be used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats In addition basemaps may be displayed for relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats available are specifically designed for vewing geology and hydrogeology data 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help The v icon launches the 3D Explorer module For more details see 3D Explorer 3 3 16 AquiferTest In order to use the AquiferTest analysis feature you must first have AquiferTest 2011 1 or later installed on the local machine and specify where the program is installed in the HGA Settings on the External Programs tab Use this feature to analyze pumping test data in AquiferTest For this feature you must have one or more data queries that contains the required fields for a pumping test analysis namely Well Name X Co ordinate for both Pumping Wells and Observation Wells Y Co ordinate for bot
70. and effects Visible Show Hide labels 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 196 Font Color Specify the color of the label text Bar Color Specify the color of the bars 11 3 1 Style and Display Settings oettings such as Axis Line and Legend can be modified in the Settings tab as shown below mare xX 2 vo H Settings Data Source Pel M ame ample Size 473 446 Location 10 10 Data Filter Title Background Color White Legend Vertical Axis Horizontal Asis Senes Type Line The following settings are available Common Name Enter the Plot name and optionally specify a Background color Size Specify the Height and Width for the plot Location Origin Specify the X Y origin for the plot The origin 0 0 is located in the upper left corner of the plot window Data Filter Set a data filter for the plot data this is useful when the plot contains a large number of data points and you want to filter out repetitive or unnecessary data or values where this is no significant change Active Use this option to enable disable the filter Value Set the filter value Any consecutive plotted data points with a value less than this specified filter value will be hidden from the plots when the filter is active Title Enter a Title for the plot Legend The following Legend settings are available Visible Show hide the legend Alignment Set the Legend position choose from the fo
71. at the bottom of the Plot Designer window and select from one of the print options as shown in the following screen shots Pririt Send current plot Eo report Send all plots to report NOTE If you select Send all plots to report a report will be generated for each station in the current selection please be aware that this may take some time If you want to print a plot for just the selected station use the Send current plot to report option You will be prompted to Select a Template for generating your report as shown in the following screenshot You can either select from the existing templates or leave the selection blank and create a new report template for yourself Select Template X Mame LE Cancel Help Click the OK button to load the plot s in the Report viewer The Report may be printed directly by clicking on the Print button saved to a report archive file by clicking on the 2 Save button or exported to one of several file formats including RTF PDF HTML XLS and TIF by clicking the Ds Export button If you would like to modify an existing report template or if you did not select an existing template and are creating your own report you can modify the report design to suit your needs 11 6 Managing Plot Templates Saving Plot as Template Once you have designed the current plot to your style and data needs you can save the design as a template for re use in future plot
72. be entries in the list Use the w button to import names for your entries in the list Use the e button to export the list Cao t 4 When importing to create your list ensure that you have the same format for your source file as what appears in the List Editor That means there are 4 columns with the following headers Item Name Include Description and Image The minimum that needs to be populated is the Item name O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services at Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help fy Z Please Note If you want to re use this list in a new project you must save the database template Then create a new project with this new database template and the list will be available For details on saving database templates see the Managing Database Templates section 3 3 8 Event Planning The Event Planning module ensures that your field activities are always completed correctly and on time Easily create multiple schedules for various stations and then create event plans that outline the details of your field activities including stations to be sampled data to be collected field checklists and more Event plans are automatically converted into reports which can be printed and given to field personnel Hydro GeoAnalyst keeps track of all your event plans and automatically reminds you in advance when scheduled field activities are due The icon launches the Event Planning module For more details see 3 3 9 Time Series Plotting Th
73. button Next to proceed to the next window O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 279 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Pie Chart ELEVATIDN Maz Size 40 Points TOL Min Size 20 Paints Preview In this dialog specify the field color by clicking on the colored rectangles to the right of each field and specify the chart size in the Max size and Min size fields A prevew window in the lower right corner displays a preview of the true size and color of the thematic map as it will appear in the Map Manager OK to create the map The thematic map is an entity of the selected layer when this layer is hidden the corresponding thematic map will also be hidden The Bar Chart is created in much the similar way Choose Bar Chart from the Layer Create Thematic Map menu and choose which fields you wish to map The following dialogue will allow you to choose colors for the bars representing different fields as well as the max height and width of the bars 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 280 Bar Chart ELEVATION Height TOC Points 30 width 23 Points Preview Back OF Cancel 13 2 2 12 Modify Thematic Map Provides options for modifying the properties of an existing Pie or Bar chart Es g W Bar Chart Delete Cancel Select the map you wish to edit by clicking on the check box beside the name you entered for that map and click Modify The same Bar Chart dial
74. cells and the X Y and Z extents to calculate the size of each grid cell The interpolated concentration value is calculated for each node of the grid cell A grid cell in the plume grid has eight nodes with associated values v1 v2 v3 There are three possibilities 1 all values at the nodes are less than the isosurface value a In this case the cell volume is not added to plume volume estimation 2 all values at the nodes are greater than the isosurface value a In this case the entire cell volume is added to plume volume estimation 3 some values are greater than the isosurface value a and some are less In this case the isosurface crosses the cell green polygon on picture and the linearly interpolated portion of cell volume is added to plume volume estimation only a part of the cell volume is added to the plume estimation The volume estimation value will be in the length units for the X Y co ordinates specified in the database For example if you use UTM and X and Y are entered in meters then the volume estimation value will be in cubic meters O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 370 15 5 2 Color Maps The Color maps elements allows you to create a color shaded map for the concentration data that will plot distributed colors A color legend for the Color map will also appear in the top left hand corner of the Display Screen Creating a Color Map To create a color map click on the desired
75. color sets the legend frame fill color 15 4 4 Axis Display Settings The Axis display element controls the appearance of the lines and labels for the X Y and Z axes The axes are primarily used to indicate the total dimensions size of the 3D image and to orient the image when it has been rotated O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services X Stay on top v ef Default Settings EE VEX3D EE Site maps Lf VED EF Surfaces Cross Sections Data D E AA Es Stations H E Interpretations E3 Model Layers Geology Layers eE Hydrogeology Layers Seting Nam 0 Visible Color gt Ellabel properties Visible Coe o o o a Size Klabl O OZ o babe Llabl O O Sets the label attributes vw Live Update Apply 363 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help The default axes labels indicate the axes direction and the units but this can be customized to display alphanumeric text A new name may be defined for each of the axes along with label size and color settings 15 4 5 Sitemap Display Settings The 3D Explorer supports AutoCAD DXF files and BMP files for site maps The Sitemaps category contains a list of the sitemaps used in 3D Explorer and control the display settings for each individual Sitemap 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 364 M x Stay on tap M e E3 E Er E3 Cross Sections Data fp AA i Settin
76. controls to the same middle coordinate of the last selected control Align Bottom Aligns selected controls to the bottom coordinate of the last selected control H Align to Grid Aligns the selected controls to the closest grid point C 0 Size to Same Width makes all selected controls the same width as the last selected control Jl Size to Same Height makes all selected controls the same height as the last selected control Lr oize to Same makes all selected controls the same height and width as the last selected control w Lock Controls Locks all controls on the designer so that they will not be resized or moved from their original location 16 2 2 Toolbox options for General Tools This section is designed to help familiarize you with the different options available in the toolbox for various tools The Toolbox is dynamic and changes depending on the object currently active in the Report Designer The vital options of select tools are described in this section however if you require further information please refer to the ActiveReport help file included with the installation in the Reports folder 16 2 2 1 Label Angle Allows you to change the angle at which the text appears in the label ClassName Sets the overall text style of the label caption e g Heading1 Hyperlink Allows you to change the label into a hyperlink To do so enter an internet address inside the Hyperlink field Left 2014 Schlumberger
77. coordinate and the observation date time and observed depth to water level Once all the required fields are defined click the Analyze button to send the data to AquiferTest For more details on how to use AquiferTest please refer to the AquiferTest User s Manual 3 3 17 AquaChem In order to use the AquaChem Water Quality Analysis feature you must first have AquaChem 2012 1 or later installed on the local machine When you select Modules AquaChem or select the icon from the toolbar HGA will search for the installation however if it can not be found you will be prompted to browse to the location of your AquaChem O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services executable aquachem exe Then it will check the current project database to see if the Geochemistry Extension has been added if this has not been added you will be prompted to add this extension Geochemistry Extension Adding the Geochemistry Extension will allow Hydro GeoAnalyst and AguaChem to seamlessly work together This extension requires updates to the Hydro GeoAnalyst database Making a backup of your project database is recommended before starting It is always a good idea to make a backup of our database before adding this extension The Geochemistry Extension will add several tables and fields required to allow AquaChem to run on the HGA SQL database Once the Geochemistry Extension has been added to the project database AquaChem will launch The next time
78. created in the Cross Section Editor Start the Cross Section Editor and open a Cross Section Show hide the desired interpretation layers in the cross section all visible layers will appear in the report Press the Print button from the toolbar or select File Print from the main menu The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the es Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The report editor allows you to either create a new report for the current cross section or add it to an existing one If you choose to add the current cross section to an existing report the report editor adds the new cross section to the report As such multiple cross sections can be sent to a report one by one In order to be able to add the current cross section to an existing report you must first open the existing report Each cross section is created with its associated legends and key map indicating the cross section location in plan view The cross section can be resized and repositioned as desired on the runtime report designer O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 407 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help The report will appear in the project tree once it is saved 16 5 5 Creating a Report Containing 3D Images A report for your fence diagrams and 3D views can be created by following the directions below e Start the 3D Explorer and ope
79. data that was submitted by a Mobile EDD O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 120 Import Mobile EDD Data 2013 08 Delete file after import HGA will remember the Mobile EDD s that you published for your project you can select them from the drop downlist Then hit the refresh button to see the files that were submitted from this site Select the file you wish to import and select the Import button You will see a validation dialog which shows how many new records will be imported In this example created one new station and entered 4 new lithology records O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 121 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help D Documents Hydro GeoAnalyst Projects Demo MobileDataCollection mobile edd testing VExampleStation 201 Validation Validation Logs f EDD File Type Selected M jBoTee Es i f PeexibwmtonmdComedon SSSCSCS S EA Table station 1 new records and 0 updates validated and ready to be imported See Preview Table lithology 4 new records and D updates validated and ready to be Your EDD Data was imported successfully You may select another EDD fil file to be eto be imported or close this form Select the Import button to finalize the import process can review the data that was imported within HGA for example here are the 4 new lithology records imported 2014 Schlumberg
80. data through the SQL Statement section of the Query Builder As soon as you begin typing within the SQL Statement section you will be prompted to confirm that you wish only use the SQL Statement to create edit the query Editing the SQL directly will prevent the designer from being able to generate the SQL automatically In the future the query can only be modified by editing the SQL directly Do you want to continue When you select yes you will notice the Display Fields Conditions and Group Conditions section will all become disabled Moving forward you can only edit the query by directly editing the SQL Statement O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 151 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Query Builder g Xj 33 Xaa v Query Name amp Display Fields test s X Conditions Group Conditions SQL Statement Available Fields SQL E Description Location Station Name X 7 Elevation TOC Station Type description addins Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History FF ER 8 R8 9 ER Two commands that are commonly used include the Select command and the Delete command Both of these commands are described below These queries are based on the HGA Demo Project Select Command The Select Command retrieves data from tables in a database and is usually followed by a where cl
81. defined in the Model Layer Options dialog Click OK to close the dialog Once this is finished repeat the same sequence of operations for other model layers within the cross section domain Restrictions on Model Layers The following restrictions apply when drawing model interpretation layers e The model layer line must start at the left boundary and end at the right boundary e he line must be drawn from left to right and may not go backwards i e no vertices can be drawn left of a previously drawn vertex e Model layer lines cannot intersect each other e Model layers need to be drawn in the order they are created For instance the bottom of model layer 3 can not be drawn between model layers one and two 14 3 4 3 Snapping Vertices to Other Model Layer Lines While drawing a model layer interpretation line it is possible to snap to part of or all of the vertices of an already drawn model layer line This can be helpful for defining geologic layers that pinch out i e have zero thickness in some parts of the site Snapping between two selected vertices Whenever a model layer line is drawn and the vertex of the line is within the buffer for a vertex of an adjacent model layer line a blue box will appear outlining the vertex on the adjacent line If the mouse is clicked on this vertex the vertex will snap to the existing vertex O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services EM Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help The line vertex will cha
82. do not wish to use a surface layer 14 3 2 Geology Layer Interpretations This option allows for drawing interpretation layers that assist in defining the geology sand clay till bedrock etc at the site To draw Geologic interpretation layers the polygon draw tool must be used and the polygon must be digitized manually using the mouse Follow the directions below Activate make it editable the Geology interpretation from the layer manager Select the E E Polygon button from the toolbar Place the mouse cursor at the desired location of the first vertex of the intended geology layer Click once on the left mouse button to add a vertex and start digitizing the polygon in the desired direction e Add more vertices by clicking on the left mouse button at desired locations Move the mouse cursor to an interval on a desired station the mouse cursor will snap the vertex of the polygon to the nearest station interval A vertex can also be added anywhere on the cross section by clicking on the left mouse button Double click anywhere on the cross section using the left mouse button to close the polygon the following dialog will appear ES EE my x Mame D escrplion Sand Pattern ok Cancel FJ Help e n the dialog that appears enter a Name for the layer a brief Description and select a soil Pattern If the geologic layer you have just digitized in the current cross section has already been created you ma
83. drift in xy cross quadratic drift in xz cross quadratic drift in yz The Variable Trend Estimate allows the user to choose between estimating the variable or the trend The default is Estimate variable The Nugget constant quantifies the sampling and assaying errors in the data In a Variogram plot the nugget constant is the y intercept value The Use variograms option allows the user to select the type of variogram to be used The Vario gram models available include e Spherical Ga Exponential ussian Power Hole Effect If the variogram information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 17 4 Appendix D Map Manager ISO Codes None 1250 ANSI Central Europe Latin 2 1251 ANSI Cyrillic Slavic 1252 1253 1254 1255 1256 1257 1258 437 108 120 137 775 850 852 855 857 860 861 862 863 ANSI Latin 1 ANSI Greek ANSI Latin 5 Turkish ANSI Hebrew ANSI Arabic ANSI Baltic Rim ANSI Vietnamese OEM US Latin OEM Arabic ASMO 708 OEM Arabic Transparent ASMO OEM Greek formerly 437 G OEM Baltic OEM Western Europe Latin 1 OEM Central Europe Latin 2 OEM Russian IBM Cyrillic OEM Turkish IBM OEM Portuguese MS DOS OEM Icelandic MS DOS OEM Hebrew OEM Canadian Frech MS DOS 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices am 8
84. eee p m B eus H wa feee a eus pop ums pee 0m o p ene pe p e qe 1 5 eus s p jue qme a eus c p ms feee O 1 8 o I85 ps p eme wee 2 m 8 o s emes ewe o m 8 eus x p mew mee 0 m B Ene Ja p wmm wee o m eus s p eum pee 1 eus s p pms eue 0 8 eus Lp p je a Tw m p La BENE W 8 i vr Query Name test Rows 152 Time 00h 00m 00s Since we used the in the Select statement ALL fields in the parameter results table will be displayed but only the records containing Benzene will be displayed Delete Command The Delete Command can be used to remove records from the database For example if you want to delete all records from the Parameter Result table with the chemical name benzene that we just found using the above Select statement enter the following SQL statement into the SQL Statement section DELETE FROM parameter result WHERE chemical name Benzene Then select the Execute Query button to run the delete query You will be moved to the Data Query tab but no records will be displayed as your query 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Query Builder 154 has del
85. element in the Model tree to highlight it then right click on the element and select the Add color map option from the pop up menu z Alternately color maps may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create color map icon located above the Model tree This will open the Select create slices window shown below with a list of the available surfaces slices The color map can be plotted on any of the surfaces listed or on cross section lines If there are no slices in the list then this window can be used to create the desired vertical or horizontal slices to use for plotting Color maps and Contour maps For more details see Creating Slices and Cross Sections O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 371 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help NS Seleck creake slices Ioj x Slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice na 1 Horizontal slice na 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal Select Cancel To select a surface from the list click on the desired surface and then click the Select button A color map of the plume will then appear on the selected surface and a Color map element will be added to the Model tree under the Plumes node Color Map Display Settings Once the Color map element has been added to the Model Tree the display settings can be customized as described below Seting O a Name Visible O Mas value Min value
86. file exceeds 300 000 nodes the message shown above will display and you can choose to accept the original grid size or modify its dimensions to lower the resolution and decrease the loading time To accept the original grid size click Ok Otherwise click the Modify button to specify a new grid size The following dialog will be shown x Mew size Original size Hols fon N Cols OO NRows 308 NRows 1400 OF The NCols and NRows fields represent the number of columns and number of rows for the surface file respectively These fields will contain recommended values for the new grid size However you can manually define a new grid size by entering the desired values for these fields Click Ok once the new grid size has been defined The surface layer will then be generated and added to the Layer Manager panel 13 2 2 3 Load HGA Data This menu item provides options for loading Hydro GeoAnalyst data as a new map layer The data source may be a list of stations from a Hydro GeoAnalyst Station Group or those resulting from a Data Query Upon clicking on this menu item the following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 261 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Load HGA Data f Station Group C pata AUEN DK Cancel FJ Help In this dialog select the data source type and choose from the appropriate combo box the desired Station Group or Data Query The data will be used to create a new Map
87. found in this menu option Each Module is explained in further detail in following sections Template Manager The Template Manager provides the tools to modify the HGA database structure and define user level views The Template Manager captures the schema of the database and displays database and view settings The following features are available e Adding and deleting tables fields e Altering the properties of each table and field defining primary keys defining relationships between tables Grouping tables under logical data categories Defining visibility of tables and or fields Defining user level table and or field names units and data formats where applicable Save user templates as a new database schema structure Rename fields add fields to data categories and modify the field formats 2014 Schlumberger Water Services For more details please refer to the Template Manager section 3 3 2 Import HGA has several import options for you to import your data into the program These include e General e EDD e Mobile EDD e Chemical e MON e LAS D Note When formatting your excel source file for importing using the General Chemical or EDD import options it is important to organize your station names so they will be recognized by the import routine Excel will take the data type format of the first 8 rows for each column therefore if you have station names that are completely numeric Data Type Double the i
88. greater than 100 to 120 inclusive will have a different set of symbol and label properties so they can easily be distinguished on the plot The Labels provides options for the data series labels Text Select the Font Color and Alignment options for the text Custom There are several options available for defining custom label Use different label source allows you to select a field from the list for the labels from a list Include pre fix provides the option to attach a text string in front of each label Include post fix provides the option to attach a text string at the end of each label NOTE If the Label options are inactive you must set the Labels to Visible load the General Series Settings and enable the Labels Visible option As you define the label options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series labels will appear using the selected settings When you are finished with the Label options you can click on the Symbol tab to modify the symbol options as shown in the screenshot below Series Settings l X Labels Symbol p Within guidelin Marker Symbol Tiange mr Exceedences Marker Size Proportional Height E width E gt Min value fo Minimum Height T 2 width T Max Value 120 Maximum Height Width Apply Close The following settings are available Symbol marker select the symbol marker type from the combo box Marker S
89. grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting is useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation process and details in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting is selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than otherwise Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Min Trimming Limit Minimum bound for the interpolated data if the Restrict Min Value option is not selected by the user Max Trimming Limit Maximum bound for the interpolated data if the Restrict Max Value O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices m option is not selected by the user The Points per block along X Points per block along Y
90. layer but may not be involved in the interpretation e g bad wells or data in those wells did not make sense etc and as such the following options are available Consider all intersection points as valid contacts this is the option Save All Contacts Only store contacts where there are vertices within the well e g user snapped to intervals or O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 332 clicked within a well and created a vertex To do this disable the option Save All Contacts Model Layers Before drawing model layers the model layer attributes must first be defined in the dialog shown below Model layers can be added deleted or edited in this og Model Layer Top of Layer Topography Topography Layer Bottom of Layer 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquiter Bottom of Layer 2 Aguitard Aquifer ies Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquifer Bottom of Aquiter EEG P x Save Cancel iJ Help In the Model Layers dialog there are four columns Order Layer order from top to bottom read only Name Defines the layer name Description Defines layer description Pattern Defines line properties for the model layer In this dialog specify the total number of model layers and the properties for each layer Layers will be ordered from top to bottom the first layer will always be Top of Layer 1 i e Ground surface followed by Bottom of Layer 1 Bottom of Layer 2 and so forth The top most layer rep
91. like to assign as the primary key for the table D Please note that if you do not assign a primary key field to a table HGA will add a field named tablename ID and set it to the primary key as well as making it an auto increment field Take note to select the appropriate Data Type for each of your fields and specify whether or not Nulls are allowed in that field If you wish to set a field to be an auto increment field its data type MUST be integer If you set a field to be double think of this as a measured number then you should also set a Unit Category and a Unit By default the table will be automatically linked to the Station table However with the release of HGA 2014 1 you now have the option to remove this link uncheck the Automatic link to station table option at lower left We refer to these tables as Non Station Data tables D Please note that to enter data to a Non Station table manually there is now a new tab Non Station Data Tab that allows for this You can also import data to a Non Station table using the The Data Transfer System When you select the OK button the table will be created and you will find it in the database tree within the Template Manager If you decide you need additional fields in the table simply O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Template Manager 106 mi select the icon and the Add Field dialog will appear Add Field Simply provide a name for the field and select t
92. list available for this field Optional this means there will be a list available for this field however you can still enter things other than the list items Required this means you can only enter items from the list for this field nothing else will be allowed You will notice that you have two options in the List Type drop down Generic this means you will need to create your list in the List Editor you will notice the icon appears so you can launch this module and make your list right from here Soil this means you will need to create your list as a Material Specification and make sure to set your material specification as the Project specification 5 4 How to Adjust Table Relationships Many tables within the standard environmental database template of HGA have relationships one table can be referred to can the Parent table and it is related to a Child table by a Foreign key A common example of this can be found in the Monitoring Even category The Parameter Sample table is the Parent to the Parameter Result table The way this relationship is established is by a foreign key Sample ID is the Primary Key in the Parameter Sample table and it is the Foreign Key in the Parameter Result table This means that the Sample ID must be unique within the Parameter Sample table to indicate the unique sample that was taken at a particular station however the sample O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Template Manager 108 sample
93. locations Well Snapping Buffer The default Well Snapping Buffer is 10 pixels When a line is drawn and the mouse cursor comes within 10 pixels of another well borehole then the borehole will be highlighted upon clicking the left mouse button on this station s lithologic interval the line will be automatically snapped to the closest vertex Boundary Snapping Buffer The default Boundary Snapping Buffer is 5 pixels When a line is drawn and the mouse cursor comes within 5 pixels of a cross section boundary line either the left or right then the boundary line will become highlighted upon clicking the left mouse button on this boundary line the drawn line will be automatically snapped to this boundary line Vertex Snapping Buffer The default Vertex Snapping Buffer is 5 pixels When a vertex on a polygon is selected and the Link Vertex option is used and the mouse cursor comes within 5 pixels of a vertex on an adjacent polygon then the vertex will become highlighted with a red box outline upon clicking the left mouse button on this vertex the vertex on the selected polygon will be O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 327 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help automatically snapped to this newly selected vertex Polygon Vertex Snapping makes it easy to place polygons adjacent to one another for continuous cross section views Labels Tab Provides options for modifying the label fonts for the interpretation layers Geology Hydrogeology a
94. model interpretation line from the cross section Right click the line and select Insert Vertices along Line The following dialog will display Insert ertices q X Insert vertices along the Line By distance m OF Cancel FJ Help You can insert multiple vertices in one of the following two ways e By number inserts a specified number of vertices along the model line at regularly spaced intervals e By distance inserts a vertex at a specified distance interval e g every 50 metres along the entire model line Select the desired method specify a value and click Ok to insert the vertices Other properties of model layers such as name pattern and description can be edited by using the Tools gt Model Layers menu option described in the Model Layers 14 3 5 Remove Stations from Cross Sections When working with a cross section in the Cross Section tab one or more stations can be removed from the cross section line by right clicking on the cross section and selecting the O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services sas Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Remove Stations option Then simply click on a station to remove it from the cross section Stations can also be added to removed from a cross section line in the Map tab as described in Defining a Cross Section Line 14 4 Querying Cross Section Interpretations In earlier versions of HGA the cross section interpretations were saved in shapefiles and alon
95. most common workflow is to create a new database for each new project and that workflow is documented here Starting the New Project Wizard The New Project Wizard can be launched in two ways e Select Project New from the Main Menu OR E Mew Project e Click on the button on the Start Page The New Project Wizard will then appear The Project Wizard contains various steps each step appearing in a new window with the various settings for a new project It is designed in a sequential fashion after defining the necessary inputs in each window press the Next button to proceed The Next button will only become activated after the necessary fields have been defined 4 1 Select Data Source The first step in the New Project Wizard provides the data source settings options New HGA Project Data Source w Help me pick a data source Template a Project Settings Data source type Create Project Microsoft SQLServer Available Servers MGAERTMER WAT sSW52012 Database Mame newproject Windows Authentication 0 SL Server Authentication O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Creating New Projects o HGA allows you to choose between Microsoft SQL Server or using the Local Database option If this project is intended only for you others will not need to be given access then the Local Database option can be used It does not require any additional Microsoft SQL Server installation as this is already done silen
96. new records and 0 updates validated and ready to be import i Sheet parameter result 24 new records and 0 updates validated and ready to be import _ Preview Qose Your EDD Data was imported successfully You may select another EDD file to be imported or close this form Select the Import button to import the records and the import dialog updates to inform you that the import was successful Now you can select another EDD file to import or close the dialog box 2 16 4 Mobile EDD Within the EDD Template Designer you will now find an option to Publish Mobile EDD So instead of using your EDD within the HGA QuickChecker MS Excel plugin you can now use your EDD on a mobile device O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 45 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help EDD Template Designer lata Template Version URL Description Geologic Description Template Format Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History 4 Create your EDD as you did previously Select the fields from the various tables that you wish to collect data for while you are out in the field Fields where you hawe created a list within the List Editor can be used to provide a drop down list in your Mobile EDD Please be aware of the following limitations for Mobile EDDs e the Grouped Sheets option is not supported on Mobile EDDs you can o
97. of the Isatis study on your C drive e g CMSATIS MyStudy You can open the point data and perform the desired geostatistical analysis and data interpolation in Isatis For information on how to use the features available in Isatis please refer to the Isatis user s manual Once you have interpolated your data you can bring it back into HGA to create contours color shading and zebra layers To bring an interpolated data set back into HGA In the Contours dialog click the Refresh button The Status will change to Interpolated Under the Variable column select the desired variable from the combo box O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 286 Select study to retrieve from SATIS Refresh Study name hga Water Level Interpalated k Water Levels Contour Typ W Contour Line Settings Color Shade Settings Zebra Settings Use Only Selected Stations Restrain within Domain Choose Domain Create Cancel Help J You can now select which contour layers to generate from the selected variable e g Contour Line Color Shade Zebra The Settings for each type is described in the following section Once you have specified the contour type s and name s click the Create button to generate the contour layers Note Be sure that you have selected the appropriate study from the study table located in the middle of the Contours window Otherwise the Create button will appear greyed
98. or multiple pages Save plot settings as templates for re use Export plots to graphics format Copy plots to Windows clipboard 11 1 About the Interface Once you have created and selected a data query you may create a plot with the data set The plot component may be launched from HGA in several ways To create a new Plot Page Design right click on the Plots node on the Project Tree and select New from the pop up menu Existing plots can be opened from the Plots node in the Project Tree by either double clicking on the desired plot in the available list or by right clicking and selecting the Open pop up menu option NOTE A data query containing the required fields see below must be selected in order to launch the plots mode from the HGA main interface A typical plot window is shown in the following figure 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 186 Plot Page Viewer Window Design Plot Designer f TE a X waterquality rnultipleplots gil Calcium Time Series Plot Sodium Time Series Plot odium Chloride 120 7 wo 6 Sulfate 110 55 IT 100 1 U n 5 E i 90 i i T 80 if i E in 70 341 B us 5 60 ae a A L i T so HC Ar E ae 40 EERE n ie ATA HH 30 25 EM EIN A Af i yer I d Hi T i 20 2 Li Huge d j 10 1271995 12 6 1997 12 6 1999 12 5 2001 Designer 0 SampllNg Date 1271995 12 5 1997 12 5 1989 12 5 2001 Tool bar Settings Data Source SampllNg Da
99. out 13 2 2 14 Create Gridded Data This feature allows you to interpolate data for the current layer and create a grid file GRD for use in HGA 3D Explorer or other applications For example if you have a station layer selected you can create a grid file based on station elevations or TOC top of casing elevations Select this menu item and the following dialog will appear 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 287 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Create Gridded Data E a zm xi Mame Elevation rid Calculating Fiel Choose Field Elevation Min 111 Max 111 Interpalato Choose Interpalator Natura Neighbours Advanced Settings Create Cancel FJ Help Enter a name for the grid file and select a field containing the source data Click the Create button to create the file The grid file will be created in the HGA project s folder in the Surface sub folder for example D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Surface test grd NOTE As with contours you can select an interpolation method and customize interpolation settings by clicking on the Advanced Settings button 13 2 2 15 Display Data This feature allows you to display data in a plot or tabular format on the map for the current points map layer Fields are based on points data loaded from Station Groups or Data Queries created using the Query Builder You may define conditions for fields and highlight rows in th
100. pop up menu O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor aaa Click on the N Draw Polygon or Rectangle buttons on the toolbar Insert the mouse cursor at the desired location Click and drag the mouse to create the desired shape double click in the case of a polygon to finalize the shape Settings The Settings dialog for Annotations is displayed below Annotation Settings X Please set annotations For Model layer Iv Poly EN Cancel For each Annotation type you may show hide using the Visible check box or edit the display properties by clicking on the preview in the Symbol column You can modify the standard properties for Text Line and Polygons To save the annotation changes you have made you can either deselect switch annotation types or click the Save button from the button bar 14 6 Limitations Although the cross section component currently allows creating complex overlapping zig zagging interpretations these types of interpretations are not suitable for the purpose of saving and later querying in the database As such the following rules limitations are enforced to avoid saving such results in the database e A given layer may not be allowed to intersect a given station more than twice When this rule is violated HGA will consider the two top most intersection points as defining the layer e All layers in a cross section must be uniquely identified by the layer name HGA may pick
101. record will turn bright blue by clicking on the button on the left hand side of the grid and then right click on the record and select copy Then you can paste this into for example an excel spreadsheet and both the header information and the records you highlighted will be pasted into the excel spreadsheet Hydro GenAnahyst 2014 1 Pema l Ex Project View x Modules Database Help emu gx xUo49MVOA wa ow alu LL alion List Station Dati Cate Query Data Filler Query Builder ri E CER of2868 MW 36 T ul a All shabons zie z i Borehales Staton Group Database Tables a Borehales w h nl a Fut ce Database Monsonng Eveni Parameter Fesult Leb QC Simlinns a Momoning Wills Yi dd ew E tee Tor x mtair CAS ar OC Mananma W sampe sd chemical ma result eamli recul und epring detection annhyss meh poser nutlie onwys det nube rmclcy C 5 nurn amp er 4 Soi Borings t sau S ee ee Fare Me ip al WU Stations 1 2004 1 Toluene moll 1 MDIL T7 02 2011 d Cimy ihicker han 1 2004 1 Vinyl chloride 0 mall 1 MIL a aul Bonngs wh 1 20D4 1 xvlena D maL I 1 KADIL 5 P Quenes IER EE aoa lane 1 T a ir T i Un umi 1n 3 8 Tima Series Plots 1 200911 2 00199999 mail gii i ag Borehole Logs T 2004 3 As 5 mgl gpl f J Mep Projects 120 71 Ba D 85535555 mg L a na 5 al Crose Sections 2004 31 Benzene mgl 1 EPA S24 2 Reyd MDL 17022011
102. result in the callout box displayed below the station A value of 0 will center the call out box over the station A negative offset will result in the callout box displayed above the station When you are finished with the Display Settings click OK to return to the layout window Click OK once more to create the layout on the map as seen in the examples below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager ENTE Map Project Site map 2J81lxl Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help 3D_phme testing m plume testing a WT Data uono2as sso45 contour All Stations CrossSectionLine5 voc aso Jut o A Boreholes AjPhola BV acbm AirPhoto Color gr b mp HO OLR Water Courses Airports 1 TvOC 4440 Major Railroads Urban Areas Trees Q Grasslands Croplands Layer Informatioi Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum D WGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 26 4 NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N 535 523 1 814 418 n 2 055 2 E 2 E E 3 2 E 4 Example of Display Data Chart You can see that sample values that exceed the specified conditions TVOC concentration result value greater than 5000 ug l are shaded red for easy detection O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 295 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help unix mex AIO x Pr Oa es fh e T v ean m J a i LIT Drill T UE FTT T m Dm m iii EHE stt kt L o a f eO
103. s X Y co ordinates and retrieve this info from the database For more details on this feature please see Interpretation and see Querying Cross Section Interpretations O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 317 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Export Image Provides options for exporting the current cross section to a Raster Image file Supported file types include bitmaps BMP Joint Photographic Experts Group jpg and enhanced Meta Files EMF Enter a filename and choose the desired export format and click OK An Export dialog will appear with settings for the image file Scale Factor Quality aa a a IE 83 100 Resolution Vertical Scale L 150 1476 Scale Symbology Export Depth Ho Symbology Scaled f t Line Symbology Not Scaled t All Sumbology Scaled OF Cancel Help There are several options for the modifying the image provided in this dialog ocale Factor Choose a scale factor from the combo box This factor will determine the resolution of the exported image The greater the factor the better the resolution will be A scale factor of 1 will keep the original size while a scale factor of 2 will be twice the size both in height and width Resolution Instead of a scale factor you can choose a specific resolution in units of dpi The vertical scale is the ratio of the height of the Cross Section in actual world units height of the Cross Section in screen units These are used to ca
104. sample IDs For this example will reject these sample IDs O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System Validation Results Validation Validation Log Station Key Validation Station Names will be used as unique identifiers for this transaction If you want to use station ID as the unique identifier please map the Station field with the Station ID not Station Name Checking if Stations From File Already exists in DB The project database does not include the following Click Here to Station Name s View Data Append this will add the Station Name s to the project database Reject this will ignore all data associated with Station Name s that are not included in the project database A record with the same Station sample_id already exists in the database Replace this will replace all information of duplicated record s with the data from the file Reject this will ignore all duplicated records and add only the ones that are not already included in the project database if any Legend 1 Waming Message s You may choose to ignore the wamings and continue with the import 0 Eror Message s You must fix the issue s before continue with the import o 2 Question s Select one of the available actions for each question in order to continue with the import Now can continue with the import Now the Import dialog is updated and can see how many records will be imported a ED
105. section Quality Control This menu item loads the Quality Control component with these tools you can manage Lab Quality Control templates and perform a quality control assessment For more details please see the Quality Control section Material Specifications Editor The Material Specifications Editor provides options for editing material specifications specifically creating editing soil classifications for your project This Editor displays a list of standard soil specifications shipped with HGA and allows the display of the soil type names and patterns for each classification The Material Specifications Editor may be launched from two locations Select the Material Specifications option from the Modules menu or click on the button in the main toolbar The Material Specifications Editor will appear as a tab in the main HGA view as shown in the following screenshot Any view or module which loads as a tab may be pulled out of the main HGA view and dragged to a secondary monitor if you wish 2014 Schlumberger Water Services _ Material Specification Editor x Existing Specification Edit Specification 1 of46 gt n e 0 of 0 au x eee Select a Specification DIN 4023 v Specification Name New Specification Note This specification is a standard and cannot be modified Note A specification with this name already exists Name Image T Name Image Coarse Gravel Medium Gravel iv v Fine
106. see options for defining validation rules for one of the selected fields along with display settings for the table O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 291 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Data Settings X Fields Condition Choose Data Font Header Row Color Grid Line Color a Violation Haw Color Violation Fiel Field Condition Compare To ELEVATION gt v Value song Field DK Cancel iJ Help The Header Row Color controls the color of the first row in the layout table The Violation Row Color allows you to assign a color to values in the table that exceed the violation conditions explained below This is useful for quickly identifying exceedences on the map The Grid Line Color controls the color of the gridlines in the table Under the Violation Field frame you may specify a condition for one of the display fields Select a Field from the combo box then a Condition lt gt etc and define the Compare To settings There are two options available e Compare to a Value simply type the value in the provided text box OR e Compare to a Field select another field from the data query to compare against The possibilities are limitless but here are some examples e concentration gt 5000 ug l a government guideline or MCL as shown in the screenshot above e depth to bedrock gt 40 feet e overburden thickness lt 50 feet e concentration of a chemical exceeds the crite
107. selected Depth or Interval for your plot series type the Entities displayed in the Settings window will be slightly different 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 214 Depth Interval t3 IntervalE ntities gt DepthEntities A E Plat FE Interval t3 DepthPlotEntities E IntervalEntities E E3 Plot FE Plat LO BepthPlatEntities DataTable DataTable TaopEntity DepthEntity Caption Top elevation Caption Depth Description Description Depth DataField ataField BaottamEntity 7 ValueEntity Caption Bottom elevation Caption concentration Description Description DataField C ataField ValueEntity Caption pressure Description DataField In the first row of the table under the Name column select the data source for the plot There are two options available Data Table or Queries If Data Table is selected then in the Value column you will see a list of Data tables from your database schema for which you may select one table If Queries is selected then in the Value column you will see a list of Data Queries available in your HGA project for which you may select one table The advantage of using Data Queries is that the fields may originate from one or several tables in your database LI Wenes ilce exceeds 10 mg per kg A ataT able F eres The Caption corresponds to the text you entered in the Label text box of the Add a Plot Series window
108. selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Scale node from the BHLP Settings window O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 211 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Scale Jv Visible Column Options Wisibilit Tic Marks Visible Major Tic Mark Interval fi Display Unit m Color Label Position Left L E BHLP hann E3 JE Minor Tic Mark Font Interval 5 Color Background amp Help Apply OE Cancel The Scale frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox To access the Column Options dialog click the Options button The Visibility frame allows you to show hide the contents of the column using the Visible checkbox modify the Display Unit and change the Label Position Change the font style and background color using the Font color box and Background color box respectively The Tic Marks frame allows you to set the Interval and Color of the column gradations Clicking on a Color box opens a palette to select from 12 3 2 Lithology Column 12 3 2 1 Settings The Lithology column is specifically designed to display geologic formation details It allows the use of soil lithologic patterns together with an optional description for each formation To add a Lithology column click the Add button and select Lithology from the combo box provided A new Lithology column will be added
109. set a Print Scale factor please see BHLP Default Settings for more information by default the scale will appear in the lower left corner of the BHLP report Alternately you can use the Report Designer please see Chapter 14 The Report Editor to add a label named Scale in your header footer information The default label will automatically be removed if a label named Scale is added The BHLP Report may be printed directly by clicking on the Print button saved to a report archive file by clicking on the 2 Save button or exported to one of several file formats including RTF PDF HTML XLS and TIF by clicking the D Export button If you would like to modify an existing report template or if you did not select an existing template and are creating your own report you can modify the report design to suit your needs For more details on designing and modifying a report please see Chapter 14 The Report Editor O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager ome 13 Map Manager The Map Manager is built on ESRI Map Objects technology and is packed with an abundance of mapping features that seamlessly connect your project maps with the Hydro GeoAnalyst database However the Map Manager goes far beyond simple mapping it also acts as a fundamental source for producing cross sections accessing borehole logs and well construction details and developing contour maps elevations concentrations water table etc
110. specify the location of the zip hga file that was generated within the HGA QuickChecker Please be aware that you should not attempt to unzip or modify the file in any way as this can invalidate the file and cause difficulties importing the data i E00 birpas I EDO Fee Rem V ablato abite Loan I uf EGO Fite Type Selected af ELE Fue Loner k EDD F de Verg i EDID Fils Sayer Cech umi d xr n ini ua Ze Cancel Hip walsdatng Data C a Rad E o oe I RR As soon as the file is validated you will see the Validation Results dialog appear Here you may need to answer a question before continuing For example the Validation found that some of the station names am trying to import do not exist in the database therefore can choose to append the new station names or reject records for stations that do not exist make my choice by selecting the appropriate option in the Action column If wish to see which stations are not currently in the database can select the Click Here to View Data option For this example choose to Append the stations so any station names in my data that are not in the database will be automatically added Then the validation also found have duplicates in the database some of the sample IDs already exist in the database Again can select what want to do either overwrite what is in the database or reject the duplicate
111. spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box Click OK to return to the renderer screen Alternatively you may set the color for each value simply click on the Color box under the Color column and the Windows Color palette will display Select the desired color and click OK to continue Repeat this for other values as desired Adjust the Transparency option to make it possible to see layers under the color shading zones The higher the value the more transparent the layer will be The value must be within the range 0 100 To display the value intervals in discrete color zones rather than continuous shading select O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 260 the Zebra checkbox Once the color settings have been defined click the Ok button The grid size For the selected surface exceeds 300000 nodes 45 a result loading and displaying the surface may require several e minutes Click OK to continue ar click Modify where veu can coarsen the arid size in order to improve loading and processing times Modify A surface file with a large grid size may take several minutes to load depending on the performance capabilities of your computer For example a DEM surface file that is approximately 9mb may take up to 10 minutes to load If the grid size for the selected surface
112. stations that belong to this group Station groups can be created based on any criteria Common examples include e ocations of the stations e g locations sorted by City Project Sites etc e Station type e g Monitoring Locations Boreholes etc or e Purpose of Study e g remediation site monitoring There are two kinds of Station Groups in HGA E static Select one or more stations directly in the Station List tab right mouse click and select the Add to Station Group option from the pop up menu Using the query builder define a more advanced search criteria and build a station group with those stations that satisfy the query criteria All Station Groups created for a project are listed in the Project Tree under the Station Groups branch Clicking on any of the sub branches corresponding to a Station Group will load the Station List tab and display the appropriate stations belonging to that group An example is shown below AB Hyco GenAnalyst Demo TIE Project 7 View Ge Modules Ej Database r Hel i a gt AOMee hs sod amp d Li Station List Statics Data Dat Query Data Fi Sart Pag X af uice rura z 1 efi bk H AS I rs a a i a d s a IL Station Hama Kim rim Elewation r Tier Station Type al Boren E at Bienoes with pix des a Lab DC Statens a Menden Welle al QC Mong Wels a 5 _Bosnos al jest a WO aara a Cey thicker han 2e al Soi Barros weh TCE Bxceedeg 10 sg i Guenes i Tee S
113. table with the Sample ID These quality codes are saved in the file Program Files HGAnalyst Whi QualityAC dll config If necessary the codes may be changed to reflect the codes used in your data Simply use a text editor to open the config file and modify the quality codes under the section lt QualityCodes gt Data Requirements Quality Control starts with a data set before you can apply a quality control template you must generate a data set by building and executing a data query with the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields required by the Quality Control component The following are required fields for the Lab Quality validation and as such must be fields that are present in your data query e Station ID located in the Station table e Sample ID this is typically found in the Monitoring Event gt Parameter Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table Batch Identifiers Samples that are prepared and or analyzed together with the same process and personnel using the same lot s of reagents within a specified time period should be assigned the same Batch ID Both the measured sample and the sample holding the theoretical concentrations should be assigned a common batch number which relates the samples to each other e Detection Limit Method detection limit typically found in the Chemistry_Results or ooil Chemistry table e Paramete
114. templates have changed for the HGA 2014 1 version and now have the extension hgat If you have exported a database template from a previous version and would like to use it to create a new project select the browse button and browse to the location of your template created in a previous version If you prefer you can select No Template at all this will only include the tables and fields that HGA requires You will notice it is a much reduced structure as compared to one of the Environmental templates Select the Next button to proceed to the next step in the New Project wizard 4 3 Provide Project Details This step in the New Project wizard allows you to specify a project name and location for your project folder Additionally you can select a Material Specification and then the Projection Type and Projection to be used for your X and Y coordinates 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Creating New Projects 100 New HGA Project Template Project Settings Create Project Project Folder D Documents Hydro GeoAnalyst ProjectsMew Project Data Source Praject Name New Project m Material Specification USCS Projection Type UTM Frojection NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N Unit M rM The Unit for your projection will be selected automatically based on the selected projection type e g UTM will use m State Planer will use feet etc If the Local Projection Type option is selected you can sel
115. the Line Style preview Click the OK button to add the surface line to the cross section The surface line will appear in the cross section legend under the Surface category where it can be shown hidden Options Allows setting line snapping options for lines drawn on the cross section If this feature is selected the dialog shown below will appear 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor ome E ditor Labels Fiulers Vertical Exag Screen Ww Level Intersecting Grid Snapping Buffe Well Snapping Butter fio Pixels Boundary Snapping Buffer 5 Fiels Vertex Snapping Butter 5 Pinels Cancel Help Editor Tab In this tab there are options for specifying the snapping buffers for the selected cross section and its elements The Snapping Buffers are specified in pixels The buffer values determine the distance to which lines and vertices will snap i e join to the nearest line or vertex If a low value for the Snapping Buffer is specified the mouse cursor must be very close to a vertex or line in order for snapping to occur If a high value for the Snapping Buffer is specified then snapping will occur at a distance further away from the destination vertex or line onapping allows for exact placement of vertices and eliminates the need for repetitive use of zooming in to specific locations If the snapping is used the vertices will be connected but not linked at the desired
116. the List Editor Importing tables in the Template Manager The following section describes briefly an example of how to Build a connection string and import an Excel file using the Data Link Properties For more details please refer to the context sensitive Help buttons in this module The example below applies to importing a list of fields in the template manager from an excel file To load the Data Link Properties window Click on the Build Connection String button a The following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services ous Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Aus E pE From the top of this dialog click on the Provider tab as shown below 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices 416 E Data Link Properties Frovider Connection Advanced All Select the data you want to connect to OLE DB Provider s Microsoft Jet 4 0 OLE DB Provider Micrasaft OLE DB Provider for DTS Packages Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Internet Publishing Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers Microsoft OLE DB Provider for OLAF Services Microsoft OLE DB Provider for Oracle Microsoft OLE DB Provider for SQL Server Micrasaft OLE DB Simple Provider MSD ataShape SOL Server Replication OLE DB Provider for DTS LIF Cancel Help Select the Prowder option For this example select Microsoft OLE DB Provider for ODBC Drivers this option allows you to choose from such sources as Text Excel or Acc
117. the axis labels For each axis you can set the visible status rotate the label and O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager sos control the gap between the label and the axis itself Code Page Use these settings to convert accented characters into a shapefile format that can be recognized by the Map Manager The following options are available Choose Code Page X Please choose the 150 cade page for the shape files ANSI Central Europe Latin 2 LIF Cancel From the combo box select the Code Page that should be used for the shapefiles in your map project The Map Manager provides several ISO standards For a complete list of which standard you should select based on your language and regional settings please see Appendix D Map Manager ISO Codes Click OK when you are finished NOTE This option is available for new shapes files only existing shapefiles cannot be converted 13 2 8 Help Contains the contents of the Map Manager help 13 3 Defining a Cross Section Line Use the Map Manager to define the locations of cross section lines which can then be interpreted in the Cross Section editor There are two methods for defining cross section lines Digitizing and Use Existing Polyline Additionally you can modify the buffer area for your cross sections Each method is described below Digitizing a Cross Section Line In the Map Manager open an existing map project or create a new map
118. the bull s eye pattern is undesirable then other methods of interpolation like Natural Neighbor and Kriging are recommended The Interpolator Options for the Inverse Distance Squared method is described below Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X Nodes Number of grid nodes in the X direction Start Y Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services s Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting is useful for where some measured values are many orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation process and details in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting is selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than otherwise Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated d
119. the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 219 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help then selecting the Well Construction node from the BHLP Settings window The Well Construction frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by selecting the Options button General BHLP Settings F x E E53 BHLP Well Constructia Well Construction jw Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc_4 Wisibilit w Drilling details vM Water Levels Casings details Scale Screen details V Pumps v Lithology Reducer Flush Mount Help Apply LIF Cancel The Visibility frame allows you to show hide the various components of the Well Construction column Drilling BHLP Settings x E E53 BHLP Well Construction a E Scale m Visible Column Options E Seale ft ue L3 Well Construction General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduci ri E3 Flot EJ res K Show withe Corf Line Style Straight m Straight W Show f Use Image C Use Color Help Apply UE Cancel The Drilling tab allows you to define the appearance settings for the annular filling Use the Border frame to set the Visibility border Width and border Color The Line S
120. the square Shape tool however the emphasis is on the border not fill 2 Subreports Add any number of subreports to the report The subreport will be limited by the width of the control but the height will grow to accommodate the length of the subreport Page Break Add a page break in the report at a desired location OE OLE Object Add an OLE Object Linking and Embedding object Such as a picture to the report Bar Code Insert a bar code into the report 3 ADO Control Click on it to add a ADO ActiveX Data Object datasource control on the report Chart Object Drag it to the designer to add a chart to the report dis Well Profile Add a borehole log plot to the report ActiveX Controls Add any ActiveX control that is registered on the current computer to your report O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 390 Alignment Tools a Bring To Front Move the selected item to the front of the overlay view Send to Back Move the selected item to the back of the overlay IS Align Left Aligns selected controls to the same left coordinate of the last selected control Center Align Aligns selected controls to the same center coordinate of the last selected control al Right Align Aligns selected controls to the same right coordinate of the last selected control ii Align Top Aligns selected controls to the same top coordinate of the last selected control at Align Middle Aligns selected
121. to the end of the cross section line If the model layer pinches out from any given point on the cross section to the end of the cross section line the cross section editor can draw the model line from that given point on for you To do this double click on the first vertex The model line will automatically be created for you See the bottom most layer in the figure above In this example the model layer pinches out at the right side of the cross section 14 3 4 4 Editing Model Layers Editing Model Layers Once the model interpretation layer lines are drawn it may be necessary to modify the positions of one or more vertices or add more vertices To move a vertex O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor aaa Select the k Pointer tool from the toolbar Click once on the desired model layer line to activate Click on the vertices to be moved Drag the vertex to a new location To add a vertex e Select the k Pointer tool from the toolbar e Click once anywhere on the line to activate the line e Select the Add Vertex tool from the toolbar e Place the mouse cursor at the desired location on the line the mouse cursor will change to a pen e Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Adding Multiple Vertices To insert multiple vertices along a model line follow the steps below e From the layer manager panel enable edit mode for the Model interpretation layers Select a
122. using the Ramp function E X Color Ramps Start Color Start Size 5 End Size Lk Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a spectrum between two different colors or a custom ramp by choosing colors for the Start Color and End Color boxes to load the color dialogue click on the colored box 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 274 This dialogue also allows you to specify the size of the symbols or if you wish the start and end size for a range Click OK to return to the renderer screen At the bottom of the Renderer dialog there is a toolbar with additional options These are described below TX amp vo From left to right the function of these buttons are e Add a new row to the renderer table with a new value and symbol color e Delete the selected row from the renderer table e Order the values by Ascending order e Order the values by Descending order e Reverse the order of the colors symbol lowest will be flipped to highest and highest will be flipped to the lowest When you are finished click OK again to confirm the renderer settings Make sure the renderer you ve created has a check mark in the Visible column and click OK to apply the renderer Value Renderer The Value renderer function is very similar to the Graduated renderer The Value Renderer dialog is sho
123. values to filter the list of what is displayed only to those values that you are interested in You can also highlight a record will turn bright blue by clicking on the button on the left hand side of the grid and then right click on the record and select copy Then you can paste this into for example an excel spreadsheet and both the header information and the records you highlighted will be pasted into the excel spreadsheet 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 23 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 1 Demo El Project 7 View Modules Database Help ATI EEFT a vU lag E Station List Station Data Data Query Data Filter X GM Station Groups MH 4 1 ofiSl Hit Renee Salen SEES 2 Stations GB 01 Boreholes_wath_pl E Home e E Hai Conr M Lab QC Stations ka PIE M Manitering Wells b E UC Nodo Wf a Geologic Description Sod Borings a Wall Constuction I E WO Stations Soil Testing fim Elevabenim TOC m aw Cley thicker then i edi Buwinns Momong Event 03000 323 50 324 50 7 E Sol_Borings_with Mining Exploration F z SR Pit Geophysics ime Senes Pilots Wall History Ha Borehole Logs 3 d Map Projects i ja Coss Sections j Y 3D Views 3 ll Reports l a iti Rows 1 Ready You have the following options in the Station Data tab ld 4 6 aEDL e M these navigation options allow you to scroll through the sta
124. zip hga files generated by the HGA Quick Checker 2 Mobile EDD import dais submitted with your Mobile EDD l Chemical impor chemical data where you need fo separate fe qualiter symbol from the result value o Diver import your dab from MON files created by Diver Offce Oiver Office Premium or Diver FPocket J LAS import your data from LAS files Log ASC Standard Version 2 0 file formats are supported lt lt Back Next gt gt Cancel Hee The General option is the updated version of the original DTS This should be used when you are importing your stations as it will perform the correct coordinate transformations Additionally if you need to convert units during your import you can do that within the General option Then there is the EDD option this lets you import the files that have been validated within our Quick Checker program an Excel plug in As well as the Mobile EDD option which lets you import data that has been submitted through a Mobile EDD form The Chemical option is available if you are importing chemical results usually received from a lab and you need to separate out the sign from your result value O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 113 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Then we also have a specialized import for Diver data from our dataloggers as well as one for Log data in LAS files You need to select the option you want and then select the Next button to launch the appropriate modu
125. 0 H ea Offset v bl E OF Cancel Help In the Callout Box Settings dialog you can modify several display properties for the callout box The callout box is the box oval or bubble that contains the data for the selected station A preview is shown on the right side of the window in the image above The following display settings are available Fill Color set the fill color for the callout box Outline Color set the color for the outline of the callout box Transparent set the transparency select from True or False Box shape select the box shape choose from Rectangle Round Rectangle or Oval Tip style set the tip style choose from Triangle or Line Padding set the padding thickness the higher the value the larger the box shape will be around the tabular values in the layout Shadow display a shadow around the callout box select from True or False Shadow Color select the shadow color only used if Shadow has been set to True Offset X set the X Offset this parameter controls how far the callout box will be placed horizontally from selected station A positive offset will result in the callout box displayed to the right of the station A value of 0 will center the call out box over the station A negative offset will result in the callout box displayed to the left of the station Offset Y set the Y Offset this parameter controls how far the callout box will be placed vertically from selected station A positive offset will
126. 0000089323 16 0000001468975 Geology 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 Silt 268 00000008306 26 0000001000194 Geology Boreholes 27 3324895205 333321587 GB 04 Clay 297 999999942426 9 00000001328527 Geology Rows 250 Time 0 0 0 47 For more details on using the Query Builder please see Queries 14 5 Adding Annotations to the Cross Section Text labels lines and shapes can be added to any layer in the cross section To add annotations you must select the layer but NOT make it active i e do not check the active edit check box Once the layer has been selected right click and select Annotations from the list of options The Edit options shown in the following screenshot can be used to add edit and delete text lines and polygons O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 347 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help ave elet View 3D Gopy From Geo Layers Lr fg rm tm Properties Model Label Update GrossSection Show Intersecting Info k Annotations Edit Text 7 f Edit Line ove P Edit Polygon Move Down Settings To add an annotation select the appropriate option from the list to enter Edit mode then click the corresponding button from the toolbar You can then user your mouse to select the location to add your annotation After adding an annotation you will need to click on the corresponding button again to add another annotation of the same type NOTE If you are adding editing deleting one annotation type
127. 1 o 420m 25 zm Ta Xylene 100 mgl 1 00 P squ enest pusnp is zu nd 4008 96 22107 200 Ag 05 mg l DI P squ ertest pump 131 OWS 43 2008 26 E 07 200 a 5 i0 ma i P selec ior deletion 1a o 4 5 26 22007 200 n Dg E MEI Hr ows 4200526 2x07 700 a m A meris E HOW 30002 25 Jamova qe 260 00 mgl E c BI Tene Sores Pint 13 owy 4200826 22 07 20 a 1 m 100 a api Borehole Loge 131 OW F 2006 26 22 IO I x0 Sond E mo Uu u 1 Uu a j we 18 Map Projects a OW 4 2008 26 2207 200 200 Ethylbenze e Dus mm owa aaora zane ef m M Repos RP OW sames 29077200 9 s 1x2 OWS 42006 26 23 zuo 200 K 132 OW 4 2008 26 22 07 200 0 Mg Tg OW 4 Fome 22 07 200 g Na 13 OWS eae 22 070200 E Pb 1322 OW 4200826 IE 22 07 200 200 PCE 12 o 4200826 22 anaw pH Iz2 ows 4008 26 22 07 200 Sample D 12 OW 4 2008 26 E 7200 804 132 OW 4005 26 2207 20 TCE 133 ows 420256 22 07 200 ToS 1050 00 ma 100 TD amp 1 ows a 2008 26 2z07 200 Tem 1500 DegresC 00 Temp 11 OW 42008 26 2207200 Tnluene n Da mgt ho meme 33 OW T 4005 26 5 za 1200 Ven chin 100 mgl 100 Vinylchlori 13 ows 4300826 ao T mail 100 Xylene 13 ow 42009 27 Maoa magit Ei Ag x3 o 4 MN G 27 12057200 mg l H D As 133 OW 4200827 XJO5J 200 mg nd las 17 Tran Lal anno 77T
128. 22a from the dropdown list box You can also select the type of symbol to represent the water level positions Select the Use Marker option and you can select from a list of symbol markers where the size style and line and fill colors can be defined Select the Use Font option and you can select from available fonts size color etc After the Font is selected load the Character Map to see the available characters for the selected font iol xi Font ESAI Environmental amp Icons Selected char LIE Cancel Simply click on the desired character then click OK to return 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 225 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help BHLP Settings P E Well Construction El Ea BHLP L3 Well Construction Visible Column Uptions General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduc 4 Symbols L ata Labels Data ta Displa All Hori tal Fist I Mas E e Vertical Top Jw Last 3 Aver E Help Apply OE Cancel Under the Data Labels tab the Data to Display frame allows you to select which water level s to represent on the BHLP Choose from the following options e All e First e Last e Min e Max e Average The color of each option can be changed by clicking on the corresponding color box Finally the Labels frame allows you to specify the Visibility Font and Alignment settings for the data labels NOTE In ord
129. 33333 5 3UbBBBBBBBBBb BM X 735 S 3UBBBBBBBBBBb 7 96 OF Cancel Upon clicking OK the entire bar chart will be colored with the appropriate color based on where it lies in this criteria 11 3 Plot Settings Once a plot is selected and visible there are several settings that can be modified These settings are sorted into several groups explained below General Series Settings Some of the most frequently used general plot settings are available when you right mouse click on a plot window that contains a data series and select Edit General Settings The following dialog will appear for line chart O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 195 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help x Line width i Line Style Solid meee Meie o Coe Preview The following settings are available Line Width specify the line width Line Style select the line style Labels Visible show hide the data marker labels Markers Visible show hide the data markers Color specify the color for the line As you define the series options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series will appear using the selected settings If you have selected Bar as the series type the following dialog will appear General Bar Series Settings E X abel L Visible Font H Bar Color Preview In this dialog you can modify the following settings Font Specify the label font style size
130. 36 535 278 96 535233 32 536 200 30 536 129 32 Gone wo nni Station Group All Stations Rows 151 53 amp 95360 Yim 48e 03000 4 674 000 DEO 4 814 281 BO 4 814 379 70 4 814 320 20 4 814 251 X 4814 348 4D 4 514 293 00 4 814 253 10 4814305 B0 4 814 302 B 4 814 296 10 4 514 293 30 4 814 520 3 4 814 641 50 4 B14 554 20 814 487 B0 4 514 655 10 4 814 520 UN 4 814 501 80 4 B14 554 40 4 814 624 30 Data Query Data Filter i ai d Xidkirg iD Staton Name xim Edeyatinn m 4 814050 00 326 4B 0D 306 00 4 814 060 00 325 50 TOGCim Simton Type m 324 85 34 1 324 25 325 5 325 30 332902 330 13 330 75 335 86 33758 321 47 325 25 qs BT 326 12 AS 325 41 334 28 4 674 624 00 336 4 614 507 90 4 amp 4 851 5 0 4 814 985 X ga m pn 327 55 ECEN zaa 331 13 133175 335 95 33858 324 47 35 25 1325 81 32712 EEE 325 48 335 28 331 38 Y ou have the following options in the Station List tab ld 4 6 of 151 stations k b These navigation options allow you to scroll through the qp This allows you to add a new record X This allows you to delete the currently selected record s ral This allows you to save the changes you have made 3 This allows you to refresh the data in the current tab This allows you select which columns you want to show or hide
131. 5 184 5 184 1825 Recordz The last step in the import involves previewing the data to be imported and taking appropriate actions with regards to erroneous data The Data Validation window as shown below displays all data ready to be imported Errors or warnings if any will be listed along with the data Records with errors will not be imported You may return to previous steps to make any corrections to the mapping The data is checked against the following conditions e Proper Station Locations e Data type compatibility NOTE All coordinates in the database are stored in latitude longitude format WGS 1984 for internal use regardless of the projection system in the source file and project The Preview in this window displays the converted station co ordinates However the station co ordinates may be displayed in HGA in any projection system desired At the top of the window each tab represents a different database table containing one or more mapped fields Accepting or Rejecting Records Any of the records in the prevew window may be accepted or rejected To accept the selected records click on the v Accept button To reject the selected records click on the x Reject button Once you have removed or verified the errors F Import button to import the data to the project After successfully importing the data a confirmation window will appear similar to the one shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services
132. 64 OEM Arabic 865 OEM Nordic MS DOS 866 OEM Russian MS DOS Cyrillic Il 869 OEM Greek 2 IBM Modern Greek 8859 1 ISO Latin 1 West European Danish Dutch English Faeroes Finnish French German Icelandic Irish Italian Norwegian Portuguese Spanish Swedish 8859 2 ISO Latin 2 East European Albanian Czech English German Hungarian Polish Rumanian Serbo Croatian Slovak Slovene 8859 3 ISO Latin 3 Southeastern European Afrikaans Catalan Dutch English Esperanto German Italian Maltese Spanish Turkish 8859 4 ISO Latin 4 North European 8859 5 ISO English amp Cyrillic Based Bulgarian Byelorussian English Macedonian Russian Serbo Croatian Ukrainian 8859 6 ISO Arabic 8859 7 ISO English amp Greek 8859 8 ISO Hebrew 8859 9 ISO Latin 5 Western European amp Turkish 8859 13 ISO Latin 6 Lativan and Lithuanian ANSI Uses the system code page OEM Uses the OEM equivalent of the system code page ISO Uses the ISO equivalent of the system code page BIG5 Uses the ANSI 950 code page also known as Big5 Chinese Taiwan HongKong SAR PRC SJIS Uses the ANSI 932 code page also known as Shift JIS Japanese EUC Uses the EUC ISO equivalent of the system code page 17 5 Appendix E Online GIS Data Resources U S Bureau of the Census http www esri com data download census2000 tigerline Data Census 2000 TIGER Line Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage United States Puerto Rico U S
133. 696 RB 23 087630139 256520896 BB 23 087630139 256520896 BB 23 087630139 256520896 BB 23 087630139 256520896 BB 23 4 802432775 1132585183 GB 24 47 802432775 132585183 BB 24 47 802432775 132585183 BB 24 4 502432775 132585183 GB 24 4 502432775 132585183 GB 24 47 802432775 1 32588183 GB 24 The last column displays the calculated sample elevations Z This value should be mapped 06725 2000 BTE 06 29 2000 BTE 10 02 2000 BTE 12710 2000 BTE 05715 2000 BTE 05 21 2000 BTE 06725 2000 BTE 08729 2000 BTE 10 02 2000 BETEK 12710 2000 BTE 05 15 2000 BTE 05 21 42000 BTE 06 25 2000 BTE 06 29 2000 BTE 10 02 2000 BTE 12710 2000 BTE 05 15 2000 BTEX 05 21 42000 BTE 06 25 2000 BTE 06 29 2000 BTE 10 02 2000 BTE 12 1042000 BTE 05715 2000 BTE 05 21 42000 BTE 06 25 2000 BTEX 06 29 2000 BTE 10 02 2000 BTE 12 1042000 BTE B ug B ugl 9 ug 10 ug l O ug O ug l O ug l O ug l ug O ug O ug O ug O ug O ug l O ug O ug ug O ugl O ug O ug 0 ug O ug l O ug l 0 ugl 0 ugl O ug O ug O ugl 330 76 16 63 330 76 16 63 330 76 16 63 330 76 16 63 335 95 16 53 335 35 16 53 335 35 16 53 335 95 16 53 335 95 16 53 335 95 16 53 337 59 14 64 337 59 14 64 337 59 14 64 337 59 14 64 33 53 14 64 33 83 14 64 323 47 14 15 323 47 1415 323 47 14 15 323 47 14 15 383 47 14 15 383 47 14 15 325 26 30 325 26 3n 325 26 3n 325 26 3n 325 26 3n 325 26 3n date chemical_n Concentrati result unit El
134. 896 1 2 1896 12 00 00 2 Vinyl Chloride of v Write Flags to Database View Log File Export Resule Close Help ae Indicates that all records have passed this check x Indicates that one or more record s has failed this check If any records failed the check you will also find the record is highlighted as per your settings from your template You will also find an option to write flags to the database indicating the results of the Validation You must select which field in the database to write the Results Flag should be in the results table The name of each check that was failed will be appended to the field you select You must also select which field in the database to write the Sample Flag should be in the sample table The name of the Template that was run on the sample will be appended to the field you select 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 183 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Writing QC Flags Aue these the fields to wich you wish to werte OC flags v X Results Flag Sample Flag Export Quality Control Analysis Results To export the results of your Lab Quality Analysis to a MS Excel spreadsheet click the Export Results button select the check results you wish to export and prowde a name for your spreadsheet jw Spike results fv Blank results Duplicate results Iv Dilution results MDL results Holding Time results DLC Validation E part xls Es O
135. A project with projected coordinates the X and Y coordinates in the database are stored as latitude and longitude WGS 1984 in decimal degrees When linking with AquaChem this information will be shown in the Coord Long and Coord Lat fields within AquaChem While working in AquaChem these can be converted back to UTM and shown in the X and Y fields by using the UTM Conversion tool found under Tools Calculators menu The X and Y fields will then NOT be dynamically linked to the HGA X and Y fields Therefore when needing to make changes to the coordinates you must make the change in HGA and then re run the UTM conversion in AquaChem When using an HGA project with local coordinates the X and Y coordinates are stored as is in the database Therefore when linking with AquaChem this information will be shown in the X and Y fields of AquaChem and no further conversion is required 3 3 18 Parameter List Editor The Parameter List Editor allows you to create groupings of parameters to make it easier to list which parameters will be analyzed by the lab within the Event Planning module For more details see Event Planning O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3 4 Database Enter topic text here 3 4 41 Manage Databases Use this option to remove unwanted databases from the local instances of SQL Express This option is available when HGA is first loaded and no projects have been opened The following dialog shows the options that are available
136. Color Mie O O Semitransparent P Color from palete Iv The Surfaces category contains a list of the surfaces used in 3D Explorer and control the display settings for each individual surface Mw hes grd m O Solid M To load a surface into the project select File Import Surface from the main menu The following settings are available for surfaces Name sets the surface name Visible shows hides the surface Color selects a color for the surface View selects a style for the surface choose from wire or solid Semitransparent sets the surface image as semi transparent Color from palette assigns colors from a palette based on the surface value e g elevation gw elevation etc Isolines For surfaces you may also display isolines These settings are displayed below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 366 Sm Surfaces E E Surface H E Cross Section ee S S Value Ee EE e SR m 340 9045 321 0538 qc E Color from palette v Fe DO S LJ ee re eS A SESS ene Solid M BlAuto intervals ElLabels Visible Iv e CIBREGOBR S LJ es eis 76 d Dedi eee 3 b Boslabes eed Dd HDNHEBN en 3 46325 EE o You may modify the isoline properties intervals and label settings Line properties Color from palette indicates each contour line will be colored according to the contour line value using the color palette for the selected data type Color in
137. Cross Section Editor oma Select the Cross sections to display from the dialog by placing a check mark beside each cross section name Or to select all cross sections place a check mark beside the Select All check box at the top of the dialog Select any Surfaces you wish to be displayed with the cross sections in the same manner Gridded surfaces can be created in the Map Manager see Chapter 11 Create Gridded Data for more details Select any Plumes you wish to be displayed with the cross sections in the same manner Plumes can be created in the HGA main window see Chapter 2 3D Interpolation for more details When you are finished select OK This will load the 3D Explorer window For more details on how to use 3D Explorer please refer to Chapter 13 Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Information Provides a window containing information on the selected station After selecting this option you may place the mouse cursor on a particular lithologic column within a selected station A small text box appears displaying specific information about the layer layer type top and bottom elevations and thickness If the station in question has screens the Information feature can also highlight their pertinent features Preview BHLP Allows you to view the borehole log plot BHLP of any station in the cross section To view the BHLP select this option and click on any station in the cross section Create Surface Line Allows you to
138. Cross Sectional Slice When adding a color map or isoline map you may also utilize cross section lines that were defined in the Map Manager provided they have been added to the current 3D project To select a vertical cross section through the site domain click the Cross section tab to open the Cross section window as shown in the following figure This window displays a list of the available cross sections for the current 3D project O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 382 4 Select create slices E x Slices X LrassSections AA JJ MM Cancel Help oimply select the cross section from the list then click the Select button 15 7 4 Deleting a Slice If many different slices have been defined during the current session and the list is becoming too long and cumbersome to work with any entry in the Surface list can be deleted by highlighting the slice in the list and clicking the Delete button 15 7 5 Modifying a Slice The location or orientation of any slice can be modified by highlighting the target slice in the list and clicking the Modify button This will open the Slice Properties window where the desired changes can be made 15 8 Scene Configurations When using 3D Explorer to display and animate data it is important to be able to save the various display settings for fast and easy recall during a presentation or for comparing different views 3D Explorer is able to save the displ
139. D Import C Users mgaertner Desktop NQuickCheckerDataPackage 01 12 12 10 08 19 zip hga Validation Logs esoricves o EDD File Version eo v Sheet parameter sample 16 new records and 0 validated and ready to be import v Sheet parameter result 24 new records and 0 updates validated and ready to be import manicis Validation Succeeded Click Import to finalize the operation 00 04 17 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 119 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help r EDD Import EDD file C Users mgaertner Desktop QuickCheckerDataPackage_01 12 12_10 08 19 zip_hga rmi Result Validation Validation Logs gt of EDD File Type Selected of EDD File Content EA EDD File Version of EDD File Signing Check Sum of Project Information and Connection of Sheet parameter sample 16 new records and 0 updates validated and ready to be import i Sheet parameter result 24 new records and 0 updates validated and ready to be import Breviem Qose j He Your EDD Data was imported successfully You may select another EDD file to be imported or close this form Select the Import button to import the records and the import dialog updates to inform you that the import was successful Now you can select another EDD file to import or close the dialog box 6 3 Mobile EDD The Mobile EDD option allows you to import
140. E EE CIYER RARE a aa Rd 12 5 Station Groups iditcautdiidusieimicsistit diera cet cute esee poe VE DER QR DRE b e v E eL DV L ERU AS SN 13 6 Data Categories unie ax HUE TO RE oho Dien eae re EN te d Dr ie ee ei SE Deed DIST RET de nEE 15 Z AdpistableAWindOWS ixeiadibaiueeeeceicoieeeesee ciat es do tea ece bx eade fena Cu UU Ee due see eo beoe ge e Na uS ee UII ED ME 16 8 Prolect Tree Tab aida exteri deles Dess dio Savi d la Uri Qu De oS o eve residui EP ES DE ER FECE 18 9 Staton List ee 20 10 Statiom Data Tab saaataaubecndvecicdcsaiviucascesccuncctadsstacsacheusesvassauncadensassstousedasaecasechsensdaccuvaseatusucssscisesmseatauveusuts 22 11 NonsStation Data TaD uiietetiina evade eei Dre ie ach ova edd EUVe eas B VER NI CHE SUV EI Mo CU Red Rv ERE ON IO Eaa 24 12 DataQuery TaD aeeoa aeaea ssa dc cael ees sen EErEE D tee pe deve e de Ee p cusses COL ris em ded 25 I3 Data Filter Tab Ara EE T E 32 14 WellProfile Tab Sena E cieEE EE Feds RE Ere etsi PER GR EN E RE 33 15 Data Enty Bevcdiercecssusicsiestacacesseseccosseacscteussivedcsededesesbecccsunsccccessagcsacsessuseaieunecuateseusdsssovsessncinccacieeete 34 16 EDD Workflow duse rei eae abono da pore ipo aae acne ak Eu VExME Ce bob A UV IV pee Suo Deere dex de 35 EDD Template De SIRO get ee NUN 35 HGA Quick CHECKER eov cause re YEGEIEIS ONE gees db ute yvesavmnew
141. EB on the toolbar The table of contents allows you to jump to any desired section in the report e Main Body of the Report Preview The main body of the report displays the final report as per the report design and data O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 399 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 16 3 1 Report Viewer Toolbars The Report Editor Viewer offers an extensive list of navigation tools the figure below shows the toolbars used in the Viewer window The following describes the toolbar buttons of the viewer window Open Static Report Opens a previously saved static report Save Static Report Saves the current report in the Report Editor s native format T Export Report Exports the current report to the desired format Ea Report Designer Displays the Report Designer window r Print Report Sends the current report to printer FH Show TOC Displays the table of contents for the current report 4 Show Ruler Displays a ruler tl Search Text Allows you to provide text to search for t Find Text Searches for text provided in the Search Text text box Copy Page Copies the current page to windows clipboard Show Single Page Displays report one page at a time Show Multiple Pages Displays multiple pages of the report at once F Zoom in Zooms in to a selected area of the report LEUR zi Zoom in percent Sets the zoom level to that selected in here 4 Zoom out Zooms out the report K First Page Moves to the first page of the rep
142. ER T Search D R Table Lithology Properties E me Description Display Name Database Name MEE Location I lithology E WE description addins Wiley Geologic Description E a Lithaloay FI fe Description Prima Station From To MIHE Soil Type Vui Eel Ti Description Litholoay table relationships Wy Consistency MY Structure A ASTM Descriptor T x IER Color Lithology i amp child to v E Odor Table Parent Keyla Foreign Key s EE Formation Name gt Location ID Station ME Formation Unit Moisture MA Comment E we Hydrogeology E mE Modeling E ME Features E WE Fractures l Foreign Key s H WE Well Construction Ce WEF Soil Testing Ce v Soil Sampling E WEF Monitoring Event E WE Mining Exploration Lithology i3 parent to Last chang edo on 01 05 2014 10 20 54 AM By DIR MGaertner The layout however is very similar to the previous version On the left hand side you will find the tables and fields organized into categories By selecting any item in the tree on the left hand side you will find all the properties of the item displayed to the right In the image above you can see the Lithology Table properties displayed All the fields in this table are found by opening the Lithology table branch Primary Key fields are indicated with a e icon while all other fields use the iE icon re t 4 Please be aware that certain tables and fields are requi
143. F Cancel If more than one check result is selected you will find multiple worksheets within your spreadsheet one for each check see below for an example O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control asa T 1 m m E EE m ILL HE iy E ti BH Ej tj a P P F n z 1 q A ii TT 2014 Schlumberger Water Services a85 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 11 Time Series Plotting The plotting component in Hydro GeoAnalyst allows users to create time series plots of data stored in the HGA database The plotting provides the following features Create Time Series X Y plots using data from data queries Display X Y plots as a line or bar chart Add legends and data marker labels to plots Add best fit trend formula or statistical lines to the plot Interact with plots and display multiple plot windows in the viewer window simultaneously Display non detect uncertainty or detection limits on the plot as lines or symbols Define data series ranges and modify display properties for different data ranges e g define a data range where the data exceeds the water quality standard values and assign unique symbol line and display properties for this data Select fields for plot grouping or data series grouping Modify display properties including axis labels symbols legends and intervals Print plots to a single
144. Field Allows you to select a field to use as a label for the intersecting feature Symbol Allows you to select a symbol to represent the intersecting feature Label Allows you to set properties of the label representing the intersecting feature The Field column contains a list of available fields for the selected layer This field will be used as the label in the cross section view Double click on the desired cell in the Symbol column to load the dialog where a symbol can be selected and its properties set Point Style E4 Pattern aa i4 o Font WH Symbol Symbol id Fil Border E Sample x OF Cancel NOTE You will only be able to change the Font and Symbol of the point if the Pattern is set to True type The Label Properties dialog may be loaded by selecting the button the properties that are available are shown below 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 321 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Label Renderer y X Vertical Alignment Center Horizontal Alignment Right Offset x 0 E v n Cancel Help The Placement options allow you to set the default label placement relative to the feature Use the Offset controls to fine tune the placement by adjusting the X and Y values The labels can also be rotated by specifying a desired Angle Change Well Width Provides options for increasing the display width of stations wells and boreholes plotted on the cross section
145. Field mapping Required Data Match to Field DB Unit Multiplier Name id co ordinate M Y co ordinate Scereen Diameter Gown Borehole Diameter id Elevation p name Data Freview date and time Ra aE Pe se and denih Vo TST ase 6 6 2007 i J 091 45341 r n z 535593 E 481 4371 73 7 T brbrapD0r 1 0 2134146 3 0 535599 700 4814371 73 w 2U b b zU0 1 00 3963415 4 20 535599 700 4814371 73 w 2U brbrap0r 1 00 6402439 1 F 0 535599 700 4514371 79 w 2U bb 1 00 9756098 b 0 535599 700 4814371 73 w 2U b b zUd 1 1 097561 T 0 535599 700 4814371 79 w 2U b b 1 1 25 B 20 538533 700 4814371 73 w 2U Be eUO 1 1 43292 4 20 535599 700 4814371 73 W200 b b zU0 1 1 554878 10 0 535599 700 4814371 79 w 2U b b zU 1 1 615654 I 11 0 535599 700 4814371 79 w 2U ad med 2 1 737005 12 0 535599 700 4814371 79 w 2U brbra00r7 2 1 888755 13 0 535599 700 4814371 73 w 2U b b zU 2 1 920732 E 14 0 535599 700 4814371 73 w 20 b b zU 2 2042583 E 15 0 535599 700 4814371 73 w 2U BeOS 2 591463 16 0 535599 700 4614371 79 W 20 b b zU 9 33243171 required infarmatian Analyze Cancel Help In the Pumping Wells tab select the data query that contains the required fields for this module for your pumping test analysis Then in the grid below map the appropriate field to each required field If the unit for the field is defined in the database template then the un
146. G secipcrcdeciassnecessxevsavarncceensdteetesseeeeteueetecstanss Email LOS FILS essssececssetnciiac sedenceadedsabeadedeevseveeiasepenieevewnss Problem Steps Recorder eee ee eene een License usen do OE crt ved e ua e iaraa Vr UE depu ende dE Creating New Projects Part 5 Template Manager 1 Interface 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Contents 2 HOW to add Tables and Fields iiic vd ce bene bug rate De M eere EE REIN R b TRE CEPR Veo AEE Sea Dv E CR Xa eee ELI DN SIDE PR IVa do 105 3 How toset afield t use d EISE 25 sce nier ete etin EE HR CHE EY ERA DECEM EFE VAR EIE OR ERI ANa N RR Eana 106 4 Howto Adjust Table Relationships cic eo diet re date cuss ada deo lees eun se cUe eek eeu Ge aka Cha as uu cue e a Xa Ed o a aucun esa eU nea Tek vaina da 107 5 Managing Database Templates uoce e yeu ee iste n Ua ER VEN EERFOR E NEURE FEN AERE RU RE S evN Ye YR SECO RR MA TERR EY LIP K No EIN ECRE RUE CK NEUE 110 Part 6 The Data Transfer System 112 l Genera sad bwnstemuiddininiivodo ert A ID M Aaa EUN Rd LEUR 113 2 EDD O J Boseiest4 muni intime PD Ren aqu ene E IU Seu rm I car eei RE dE 117 3 MODI EDD qj Jtgd sutitiseieiisiia pni ie eto eo re EPI A INO QU OUTRE DE TUPCR ii 119 4 Chemical duiuDedidiunisotesnugadetisi ib EH TUI ee oUE asteacusuu s QREEIVAS EE VLL QUAD DUXI ON RA DER SEHR EUM EDEN TU d 122 5 Diver Jadetisatasd
147. ID will be found multiple times within the Parameter Results table as there will be many results associated with the single unique sample you will have one record for every parameter that you had the lab analyze the sample for If you are adding new tables to your database you might also want to establish relationships between your new tables Here is an example of how you can establish a relationship between 2 tables Lets say you have created 2 new tables in your database one called Parent and one called Child The Parent table has a date field as the primary key as well as a field to enter the name of an event for your project And the Child table has an auto increment ID field as the primary key as well as a date field which we will use to establish the relationship back to the Parent Table as well as a field to record an observation Here is how these 2 tables would look in the Template Manager WHH event HE Station WIE Child fw ID WHH date WHH observation Y ou will notice that the Station field has been added to the Parent table because made this table have the automatic link to the Station table However the Child table does not have the link to the Station table because we are going to link it to the Parent table Now when select the Child table will find the settings for this table which includes an option to set the relationships for the table O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 109 Hydro GeoAnalyst
148. In some cases such as importing data into HGA or loading a shapefile in Map Manager if the geotranformation has already been defined you may be prompted to confirm the default geotranformation shown below The default GeoTransformation for transformation between coordinate systems NAD 1927 UTM Zone 17N and GCS WGS 1984 is NAD 1927 To WGS 1984 11 Do you want to accept this setting When presented with this dialog select Yes to accept the default geotranformation Otherwise select No to return to the Please Select Area dialog shown at top of page to select a new geographic area O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 437 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 18 Troubleshooting When encountering difficulties with Hydro GeoAnalyst you may try reviewing the following pages to try and resolve the issue We will be updating these page with additional information on a regular basis 18 1 Connection Problems There can be several different reasons for having difficulties connecting to a database 1 Server not Running you need to ensure that the SQL server is in face running or you will not be able to connect to it You can do this by typing services in the start menu If you see the prompt to Start the service that means it is not yet running Services i File Action View Help il ais M tr gt m n p Services Local Oo Services Local SQL Server SWS2012 Name Description
149. Layer and the layer will be displayed in the Layer Manager as well as in the map window This option is available only if a map project is open The resulting shapefiles will be saved as follows e for Station groups the shapefiles and supporting files will be saved to the sub directory Map Selection e for Data Queries the shapefiles and supporting files will be saved to the sub directory Map Data Setting Field Precision If the selected station group or query contains numeric data fields you will be prompted with the following dialog Set Field Precision X Please specify the precision Far the numeric Fields Field Name Elevation i Toc 4 uk Cancel The Set Field Precision dialog box lists all the numeric fields in the selected station group or query For each numeric field you can specify the number of decimal places to include when generating the layers shapefile Enter the desired number of decimal places under the Decimals column for each numeric field and then click the OK button Please note that all contouring of numeric values is performed using the precision specified in O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 262 this dialog Moreover the label renderer will display all numeric values on the map using the specified precision If you wish to change the precision after the layer has been created you must reload the HGA data into the map project 13 2 2 4 Import This menu
150. Line E4 Mame ae Buffer 200 meters Description Enter description here LIE Cancel From the CrossSection Line dialog specify a new buffer distance Click Ok Map Manager will now regenerate the cross section line using the new buffer distance Note Buffer distances for cross sections generated in past versions of HGA cannot be modified O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 312 14 Cross Section Editor The Cross Section Editor is designed with easy to use tools for interpreting geological and hydrogeological data as well as interpreting data for groundwater flow models Generating model layers for use as modeling layer elevations in groundwater modeling packages such as Visual MODFLOW Pro has never been easier In addition the Cross Section Editor is seamlessly integrated with the Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer a tool that combines and displays one or more cross sections in a 3D fence diagram Mew The Cross Section Editor allows for three types of data interpretations e Geologic containing lithology structure data e Hydrogeologic containing locations of aquifers aquitards etc e Model containing locations of model layer lines which may be used in numerical groundwater modeling The Cross Section Editor provides users with the following key features e Digitize geologic and hydrogeologic layers using the polygon draw tool e Select standard cross section fill patterns from th
151. MIR KR C AS 384 Part 16 The Report Editor 386 1 About thelnterface upoiesesciisiido unie en si eo RH oun Rev v else evel Lacie HS Ra e epos ri ete b UR COE E 386 2 Report Designer Window xuicieseenio eet dada tides suo toi at aate Setups esr os o UE ADD mter ct ias eMe TUS LA 386 Report Designer Toolbars i voccoss sure nav epveawass us atro vr EN be Y FEE ERN V eFURRR TE YS ERR rk adt Un va Wades sins EDU INE A PENES ToNSVER TN VE VERERU Cr a RE eE 387 Toolbox options TOF General TOONS sas cic dene ae Eee ou e aa ad uide Pr HERE MR cde desta du vui pd SEA ET eos ce ed cauea Vanden dk rV E EERAMVATRUE 390 Labell Me e OMM 390 Field tect tag eae ead eae ated ie umted tuc d oru pu pM D UU CI ae eL d M enous I UNES 391 Check Markoso niatna a an a napa l QE 392 Image zaoa c E v T M IER 392 E NN reae T NM MT 392 elo tn E cm EET 392 FRG FAT es T pP X PmHe rS 392 Frame aineinaan a n dee Pd EMIT UR UD n LL EMI LM E EM DU n LLLA E I ELS 392 Sub Report ccc co er Re RUP EM I ee Pd avt dU das ound peleas a acta EE TUNE G Y MEI Co gute Meee d MA ed Suid E 393 Page Break MITTUNT T I UU TT ER 393 QUE e e MS 393 BANCO Osc ete M pH M 393 ACcELIVeReDOPE Seater mene etre a Mano tama t re eco Md E ate en ren da EM Mte Dep e ALT duet an nen te eee 393 Using the Report DESI BNE oec oi EX Sax deu eoa oo SO erior E EEEa YR ER SNP eR
152. Manager in one of the following ways Activate the cross section lines layer from the layer manager and select a Cross section line by clicking on the desired cross section 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 313 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help To create a new cross section select the Create Cross Section menu option from the Tools menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button i on the toolbar This option will create a new cross section based on the selected cross section line To open an existing cross section based on an existing cross section line click on the Show Create Cross Section button E with the corresponding cross section on the toolbar This opens the cross section editor Click on the Cross Section tab in the upper right corner of the window see figure below to activate an existing cross section from a list of cross sections that are available for your project The Cross Section Editor window is shown in the figure below with a cross section loaded for demonstration purposes Active Menu Windo Map Project firstmap BN inl x ile Edit view Tools Help Toolbar anal k EHEV A xAKEKSx 2l90wi e c a E e E SecondLine v Model 360 uonaas sso15 Topography vl vl Geology 340 Gravel Sandy Gravel 320 Cross Sections amp Interpretations Layers control Coarse Gravel Clay rich 300 Fine sandy gravel
153. Mpperlmt 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lowelimt O Uipatlimts 0 0 b Semitransparent 00 See Slice Name is the name for the color map Visible shows or hides the color map Max value is the calculated maximum value for the plume Min value is the calculated minimum value for the plume Upper limit is the data value above which the color map may be clipped out not displayed Lower limit is the data value below which the color map may be clipped out not displayed Clip at limits indicates whether the color map will clipped above the Upper limit and below the Lower limit Semitransparent sets the color map as semi transparent Slice field contains a link to the Slice options see Creating Slices and Cross Sections for more details 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 15 5 3 3D Explorer 372 Isoline Maps Isoline Contour maps are a set of lines plotted on a surface whereby each line is connected by a set of points having equal values of a given data type Creating Isoline Maps To create a Isoline map click on the desired element in the Model tree and then right click on the element and select the Add Isolines map option from the pop up menu Alternately contour lines may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create contour map icon located above the Model tree This will open the Select create slices window with a list of the available surfaces slices The conto
154. N data After selecting click Ok Click the Import button to finalize the data import Import MON file data E Bf x Import data Notes Select Channel 1 Select one or more enabled channels v Level Temperature Conductivity Flowman selected by default 2 Select the source MON file by checking on Import File Name Logger Type Location Serial Number Station Name Station X z the checkbox in the Iw CTD_070503132 CTD Diver 13 CTD NO1 61667 312 w 01 80 56322954265 4 import column see Remarks below 3 Click on the Import button when ready C Documents and Remarks Settings W aynesDesktopsCTD 070503132027 51557 M N o Rows highlighted in CTTTTTTTTTTTITTITITITTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTTITIITT white have correct station name mapping and can be selected o Rows highlighted in red indicate that the station name in MON file can no be found in the database Click on the corresponding blue arrow to specify the destination Y station 4 gt o Rows highlighted in yellow indicate that there lt Bach Import Cancel Ej Help Upon clicking Import a progress bar will display shown above If the import is successful a confirmation message will appear similar to the one shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 134 Information E x i The Following Files were imported successfull
155. New Layer Group l X Please enter the name for new layer group E Cancel Enter a name for the layer group Click Ok The new layer group will now appear in the Layer Manager panel Adding Layers to a Group To add a layer to a layer group simply drag and drop the desired layer onto the layer group Removing Layers from a Group To remove a layer from a layer group simply drag and drop the desired layer out of the layer group Removing Layer Groups To remove a layer group follow the steps below Right click on the desired layer group From the pop up menu select Delete The component layers will ungroup and return to the root of the layer list All layer types including layer groups can be moved up and down within the Layer Manager panel by simply dragging and dropping the layer into a new position 13 1 2 Description of Toolbar Items The toolbar in the Map Manager provides access to most of the same features available in the Main Menu Most toolbar buttons are context sensitive and react according to the active layer window or dialog If there are no options for the selected layer the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 252 New button creates a new map project Gy I Open button opens an existing map project Save button saves the current map project m Print button sends the current map v
156. OE CT ORE Eu rb oed oe sag PES 322 Tools NM ec Q 325 Help isst eneiis niam aeque eds eiut oO nM qid federe Pei docens eut E VEA I de PET Te E E MU AdQ EU RM I ETC I UE 334 3 Cross Section Interpretatlorisueooitidoso e daa ee cURDE SERT Fa UU Fea Eee S EYE EE VEREOR EREXIT RLE CU Yo EA cause teddesuausdesesnudekousteneebanbixbiessanuonnecues 334 Loading Surface Laye rS diss eH Ye UE ERR vae Ru euE ua ee rero c Haee ia Ye aves esas eo NENESE SESTETO TUNE EP Vds bera rea sua Pv RO MU UEM UM 335 Geology Layer Interpretations oui rice ax Ter e coppa Ede E X aa eina Y x enr or ora EVER E e Na pU EXE PEOR Eos RII OPE QUE AVRT ELE Vea TRE E ANN ENS 336 Hydrogeologic Layer Interpretations ours errore tete dextre Fea VE pe Yee vea eoa a eR Ya Ac Feo YR E Nue IY PN VEA Two VE YU Vix Ve ERES ea Eo os Vus 338 Model Laver Interpre tatiOns uu cii Ex Da Pee eas UE OE RR dta Ux UE xS ons Ede AE CLE EIS UR er d VE XX REN PEN OE E EDU Ure udi rok TERI NOR UE 339 Defining Model Layer s eec REVOIR FEY ere Ur PUV ANE TELE NALE TEE acon FUNT EU cca aub P QN d opt veru dva Udo Vlde an ES 339 Drawing Model Interpretation Ed VOlS iet c utu e bes et bao pec bad Cep Ad PUER Sack eas d Bie css uss ea ue e ER Bu UR RO 340 Snapping Vertices to Other Model Layer Eres 22 eo des ERE EE Fu RU HON E RE EROR AEN IN Cae tua Ru e Deed aaa nen 342 Editing Model AVE Ss ecu ativdisco GR te hx oa tete n PCR batum t Ga fen In co
157. OE ODE EIS VPE QuY dude VENE EE QU dee pia Qu dV a a dh dea VENERE PU daii 393 3 Report Viewer Window xaicdeerdvsten esatta etus Das vae EOSS td Eu uio DUE ME oan EFE NP tU ee EE PIC UI v cU E Ue 398 Report VIEWER LOOID ANS rero d otxo PUN rhn quo QE TV ERR URER REN RU I SPI UI LFo NEP TOY anvanseunsuen CORE Korea TREE ER NEVER F du Sdn Uc TQUE IU ea US 399 Using the Report AT ELLE DLL LULIT m 399 A ReportSettinps Sohueduiessciisteeio ever tek ao in rao ota eg eT Eva Uv pe aa Er ususeossuseveausdsecsustussecansseseusedsesesuatecstacee 400 O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Contents 5 Creatine Reports iiseneseiibeniq dad ite reci debi Dri Veni eo E Sabse O E VP UEEENa EVER INE VOU D UNUS 403 Creating Reports in HGA Main WINGOW us erre pa apre pata coUe n a na xv eaa tina pan repu e auos Ue eU coy Fre ea a UNE VNa AE TEN Done e QE ErUrN Va Que atu ead Enn 404 Creating a Borehole Log Report o odio ovd oo EE NR ra oae race edu cadens OFERER YE aus ani Erek er VOU dene FERRE NOSE EN rV edeun der els Y E OPE EVE VA NR NUR ER v 405 Creating a Report Containing a Map Project 5 roo eo Eta SERE LEE EO YN cod RA YEAR AERE PR ERES tue eU eo ER P saa TEE ERENERNIA En ESPERE QrAB STU t I HIR GuS 406 Creating a Report Containing a Cross Section erase no eae voee a vov pev asap unekeu vk a eod oa ao see roo Ya usa e Na go Fes eva Te oae t aep uo V peYR e ep eus 406 Creating a Report Containing 3D Iniage
158. Open from backup from the HGA main menu In the Restore Database As dialog box specify your local SQL Server Please note you cannot restore a database onto a network SQL Server in this way O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 65 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help e Beside the Project field select the Open button folder with green arrow and navgate to the folder where the demo project files were extracted to Select the Project voh file e Beside the Backup File field select the Open button folder with green arrow and navigate to the folder where the demo project files were extracted to Select the SWS Demo DB bak file e Finally click the Ok button to open the demo project e The above steps only need to be done the first time you want to restore the Demo Project When you want to open the Demo Project the next time simply select Project Open and browse to the place where you extracted the zip file or select Project Reopen and you should see the Demo Project listed there 3 1 8 Properties This menu item will load a window displaying the properties for the current project amp Project Properties Projection Type UTM Projection NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N Unit meters Project Location Waterloo Material Specification DIN 4023 Database Name HGADemo Database Server MGAERTNER WATYSWS2012 Once a project is created there are options to modify some of the project settings The coordinate type and the coordinate ca
159. R ITO C ADD Eee 188 AdOPIOE andecdatatarm inu neca ees toi usd iteted ti dV e MD contd nies A Oana ae eaoavet 189 PI LG WAR An E E E E E E E E E E EE 189 3 PIObSettInPS A E cvecucdcataneuuuaveeeinant caceuteveunessdeatceeltsdescsuee2 194 Style and Display SGELIDBS ssisciescscccccrcrsrsesiesirssrcscisscesiciceossesecsssossesetoossessicidreseseossrisissaseosssasreisesieideosersseessssesaoius VI UMS 196 Data Series Se CLINGS ccoo Eon aee erede vedi aa EOE CET E E bed eR ee 198 4 JAddinglLiestoaPlOU X unda eaea aa veis oai duse i nouveau e Dea ce ia v reenact ee ede t Did 200 Saving Exporting and PrIDEIBB aoacsseiese dieci e Rv ev ER PE EAE Qe EINE DNE PREERN ER ERrEK AER d S eE NY CHAR ECVR ON AM GN REN NR ER SR EN 201 6 Managing Plot Templates qusesiivaepimm mi mmis i GA Co SIRE UH ERR I IEIR IR YRVRE SEEN ORE NEVRELEMARUN VIXER AE URS SY TRES 202 Part 12 Borehole Log Plotter 204 1 Aboutthe Inter faCce usond i ROTE OTI A S EN EF EXRTEEEER FIRE NEIRASKTE SEES NRTERSESFRRE RNAREFEYRT RT TR A RDOUE 204 2 BHEP Default Settings ooi ctssiss eee pnus beer Mansi ee Qv eese iva vas ever a Eee E de a oR ERAN AE ENTE QE SVN ERR I UNS ERN eV aaaeaii 206 3 BHLP COMMS Aiit ETEA E ERU NEPRKIN TRO REN EVAUR ES ECT CURA a 208 State Colum eso ae ANE PepcU EADEM Rede ade PINE M E PE EU aus FETU CRUDELE RET EIS RUE MP FM IM TEC IT LM LUC ET TEE 209 sand cC 210 EIEIO ORY d Sol E aL EE TTE DIIS IT cusen cou E e aeesamav
160. RTF control as a bulleted list Outdent Outdents the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list arti Itl arbi Ul Indent Indents the selected paragraph in the RTF control as a bulleted list Background color Sets the background color of the selected control Text Color Sets the forecolor of the selected text Line Color Sets the line color of the selected control IN Ps E n Line style Sets the line style of the selected control H Border Sets the border style of the selected control General Tools To insert any of the items listed below into your report select the item from the toolbar and in the designer window draw a box in the position where you wish that object to appear k select Selects a control object on the Designer At abel Allows you to put headings and labels in your report abl Field Insert it and link to a data field to display specific data from the project Field also allows you to put text in your report v Check box Add a check boxes to a report can be used to create check lists in your report Image Add logos maps and other images to your report You can link it to a data field in your project or to an image file outside of the project L2 Line Add simple lines in your report uj Shape Add shapes rectangle square circle to the report a Rich Text Control Add a text box with a RTF text to your report d Frame Add a frame in and or around the report Similar to
161. Raster Image to project coordinates in the top right corner of the window the two Georeference Points will be displayed These values cannot be modified unless one of the georeference points is deleted and a new georeference point is assigned A box will appear in the map window defining the image corners The image region can be modified as explained below To delete a georeference point Click the E Delete Point button in the toolbar Select one of the georeference points to delete it NOTE When a georeference point is deleted a new georeference point must be added since two georeference points are required to create a coordinate system 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 265 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Once the Georeference points have been defined the map region may be modified In the Select Map Region window the map region is represented by an outline of a box with circular nodes at each corner and with arrows pointing along the X and Y axes The map region box can be shifted or expanded to any alignment on the site map using the toolbar options described below These options may also be accessed from the Options menu on the Main Menu bar Resize Region Click and drag a corner of the map region box to stretch or shrink the size of the map region The new map coordinates will be updated to display the new map region E Rotate Region Rotate the map region a Align Rectangle Align the map region with the x axis E Maxim
162. S WGs 1984 Datum D Was 1884 Unit Degree Feature Counts 30 BSeq54 22m Line 520 06m 535 986 4 813 523 1 5564 There will be two values displayed here The Seg value is the distance from the current cross hair to the previous vertex location i e the distance of the line segment The Line value is the total line distance from the start point including all segments To finish the line and end the line measurement double click the left mouse button Define Cross Section Line Allows you to create a cross section line Make sure you are in one of the HGA data layers before drawing a cross section line Please see the section Defining a Cross Section Line for more details Create Cross Section Loads the cross section editor for the selected cross section line This menu item is activated only when a cross section line is selected highlighted There are two ways to highlight a cross section line e Choose the cross section line on the cross section line layer e Draw a new cross section line on a station layer For more details on creating cross sections please see Chapter 12 Cross Section Editor O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 301 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 13 2 5 View This menu provides options to modify the appearance and size of the Map Window and the layers within the map project Full Extent This menu item will zoom the map window to its original full extents Zoom In Provides options for zooming into a s
163. Seaton ET EO vend sa Uoeutus tues Qr Me ura Er cn pU De ILE DEVON US 38 EDDAImpDOFL eiseoee ient nerea aaae ae vapeu uu e o ERU ved deu dra seus Daie aa Ea aaa NANAREN rN aSa ie 41 MODIS EDD OMM cS 44 17 Spatial Geo POM Auneitsmuiesdi On eee m eei at nod redet e dave tete E 55 Part 3 Menu Bar 58 1 Projet Lintaecboditesseceistiseii doe date eu UAE oases sek o eai nda edic de cade caves dsusisbedeeteueueee 58 Al CUm 58 eld MD 58 Op n from BaCKUD metr 58 Gr c M 59 hi2 0 1 1 NNNM 59 O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 5 Help Part 4 Select Data Source Select Template Provide Project Details Online Sharing 21 eere oria reso one nga IY a eR Sn Exo Sae Saa EFE reU yd ieii Install the Demo ProjecL i ieri ene eno ei Seno R Ce s dla nans one a ecu non dp prIg lemen HGA Settings sinnsirean Cancer vus usR uS Default Tab Layout i esie ea oro eer ep isa oo or a PROP Saad euer Yd aa Exit uiuestuditenaedidtaxeiiisidvI uas oked Ve EUR Lada a REVUSREREUE 2 View Start Page nee Des Eds E EE Station List uli sisi rte xe Er i ERE VEN ee Needs Station Data uteeone ase tet M ut a DataQueri uds t iei dte exd eve dot eH EI VR RES CE Ad setans Data Filter AG E T ecc Well Profile uo opere nne aex POEM per Erro EE ienest steven 3 Modules Template Mana
164. Station Data e Data Query e Data Filter 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Hoo Geoana 2016 1 Demo 0000000000000 lesiiidltitai Project View Modules Database Help ea sumU49mM CO6A arp au Station List Station Data Dita Query Data Filter x EF ERE 1 i di de3E kd T 4 a Bamina iD Staton Name Sim Vim Elevatinniim TOCim Simton Type E a E E aen E E TE IMD AD quem eene 8 af Mondt nng Weis GEJE 536 155 69 4 5M 0SD OQ 326 00 327 00 Boreas j R ae E a 5307969 481407000 32600 32700 Borehole a WG Stations GE 55 ga E9 1 4 BM QD 322 X 32731 OU Borshole 4 Cioy thicker thon 2 9 GB45 5354868 4 814 060 00 32400 325 00 Borehole Sui Boing wdh T GAJE 53574369 451407000 23050 33 9 Berehrle W gh Queries GBAT 535 652 59 4 514 030 00 333 00 34 00 Bore pie p Haar rige aw SEE AN I 33050 Borehole E m Map Projects GB29 55 J669 4 814 060 call 328 BJ 330 Ag Botak T Bj Crose Sections I GB 10 53 295 69 481400000 33R DO 338 00 Ereng i e 3D Views 481400000 339 50 34 50 Borehole i M Reports z 4B 28180 32533 32633 Borehole 45814 3729 70 324 325 85 Borehole 4814 32020 323 324 Boehoe T4BM25130 324 25 1395 26 Borehule 451434940 326 56 327 55 Beorenaie 4 514 293 00 325 30 ECEN Borehole
165. Status Startup Type Log On As i SQL Active Directory Helper Service Enables inte Disabled Network S Start the service SQL Full text Filter Daemon Launcher Service to la Manual NT Service lt SQL Server CRM On Demand Shutd Managesth Started Automatic Local Syste Description 4 SQL Server SOLEXPRESS Provides sto Started Automatic Local Syste Provides storage processing and SQL Server SWS Provides sto Started Automatic Local Syste Meurs B EM ind japid SQL Server 5W52012 Provides sto Automatic Local Syste SQL Server Agent SQLEXPRESS Executes jo Automatic Network S a SQL Server Agent SW5 Executes jo Automatic Network S SQL Server Agent SWS2012 Executes jo Disabled Network S SQL Server Browser Provides SQ Started Automatic Local Service gt SQL Server Reporting Services SWS2 Manages e Started Automatic NT Service lt SQL Server VSS Writer Providesth Started Automatic Local Syste SSDP Discovery Discovers n Started Manual Local Service Storage Service Enforces gr Manual Local Syste Superfetch Maintains a Started Automatic Local Syste System Event Notification Service Monitors sy Started Automatic Local Syste lt Tablet PC Input Service Enables Tab Manual Local Syste x Tack Scheditler Fnahlecatic Started Automatic Lacal Sucte Extended Standard 2 Permissions you need to ensure that you have permiss
166. TapEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField BattamEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField Select the data table or query and the fields for the top and bottom entity In this column the data table or query is any data source that contains from to interval data and the top and bottom entities are mapped to these from and to fields As in the Depth column once the intervals have been established the value field has to be defined To do so right click anywhere in the Settings frame and select Add Entity L dE ur UL cim vaut Description D ataField from aeaea OC Caption Bottom el e e Description Delete Entity ataField to Select Text Entity or Image Entity from the combo box depending on the type of data you wish to display A new entity will be added to the Settings frame Using the combo box provided select the field that contains the value or image you wish to display 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 229 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 12 3 5 1 Settings ataT able TapEntity Moisture Content 7 Caption Top elevation Description DataField From E BattemEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField To extE ritity Caption Text Description Test DataField The Interval based column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted
167. Technician Plan Closure Wizard Plan Closure r Collections Collections Confirmation Have you collected at the following stations Station Collected Comment 3 7E p ns TR 7 Collected If all the required collections Station samples QAQC samples and Additional Data were made you can simply select the Select All option to indicate that everything was collected If O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 167 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help however some items were not collected during the field activities they should remain unchecked and a comment indicating why must be provided The next step confirms your collections amp Plan Closure Wizard Plan Closure Collections Confirmation Confirmation Reschedule Missed Stations Comments MGAERTNER WAT MGaertner Acknowledge that all information provided is true and complete Bak Finish Cae Hee Y ou have the option to reschedule any Stations that may have been missed during the field activties as well as entering comments regarding the plan You must select the Acknowledge button in order to select the Finish button the Event Plan which will then be considered closed 8 5 Manage Event Plans When you select the Manage Event Plans icon the list of all Event Plans will be displayed indicating the Name Start and End dates as well as whether the plan has been closed O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Event Planning 168
168. Template Format j Parameter Sample Station Name Sample ID Sample Date Parameter Result Station Name Sample ID Chemical Name Result Value Result Unit Qualifier Database Name parameter sample sample date Data Type Unit DateTime View Name Sample Date er A Reporting Detection Limit 4 Chain of Custody Collection Quarter T Comment Parameter Result 4 Sample ID 4 Chemical Name n Result Value F Unique 4 Result Unit Y Reporting Detection Li Use List T Sampling Precision T Fraction Code J Analysis Method Condtions Numeric The list of available fields on the left are provided as you would be used to seeing them in the Template Manager or the Query Builder First branch are the Data Categories next branch are the Tables and the final branches are the fields As you drag and drop fields into the Template Format section you will notice that other fields may show up there automatically these are also bolded These are fields that are required to be able to import the data into the select table If you select fields from the Single Sheets tab the Template will create a new worksheet for each table where fields were selected from In the example above fields were selected from both the Parameter Sample and the Parameter Result tables and therefore when you open this template in Excel you will find both a worksheet was created fo
169. The BHLP can also be launched from the Map Manager and Cross Section editors by Clicking on the E View BHLP button in the toolbar or View gt BHLP from the menu and clicking on a station to select it You may also view a BHLP in the HGA main window by selecting View gt Well Profile from the menu and clicking on the desired station in the station list The BHLP will load and display a borehole log plot of the selected station using one of the available BHLP templates A typical BHLP window is shown in the following figure Please note that a BHLP opened through the Map Manager Cross Section editor will not have as many options O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 205 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Viewer Available Stations Window Borehole Leg Designer ew P alaj x Select Station xim Y m Elvan m TOC m 56559 401 4050 00 LEM X70 gt D Daan Se Designer Hun Tree E Designer BGEXC IAE z Toolbar poste Settings Live Update lt L Ill Output Options The Borehole Log Designer dialog contains the following items A list of all Available Stations Select the station for the BHLP Designer Tree Contains the columns and related entities for the BHLP design Designer Toolbar Toolbar buttons used for modifying the BHLP design Settings Contains the settings for the selected entity Viewer Window Contains a real time view of the BHLP Output Options Allow you to export or print one or all BHLPs Liv
170. The Map Manager is an integral part of Hydro GeoAnalyst and is ideally suited for analyzing and presenting the spatial orientation of your groundwater or borehole project data Some of the key features of the Map Manager include e Import vector maps into a map project e Import BaseMap Layers to the Map Project DXF Raster and Shapefile formats including high resolution MrSid image files e Georeference and import raster image maps Display Station Groups or Data Queries from the Hydro GeoAnalyst project as a Map Layer in the Map Project Edit map layers labels order style visibility Draw and edit a point line polygon or text on a map with Annotation tools Create contour color shade and zebra maps of a desired data set Create Thematic Maps Bar and Pie Charts of selected fields Select stations using a rectangle polygon circle line or a single point Create new station groups with stations selected in the map project Send a Map vew to the Report Editor Export Map view as Raster images Create a legend for the Map Project Turn layers on off and set their properties using Layer Manager Define locations for cross section lines View statistics for selected data or station group layers Min Max Sum Standard Deviation Mean e Label and symbol renderer allows for creating color ramps gradients shading etc based on specified station data e ine measurement tool allows for measuring the distance between two points on th
171. Users Manual JI P E iE 1A F HF HEE P f wf fin Hydro GeoAnalyst From Data Discovery to Delivery Contents Table of Contents Foreword 0 Part 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst 1 1 What s New in Hydro GeoAnalyst e as oe e roxqerud a ovn ee Eva ure canus eu eres E TE EE CN RE Sdn a HQ EDEN NER RUE I ERNST EN R POS 1 2 Installing Hydro GeoAnalyst iustus eerh EN MOHEFER CU QU MM a GEHE REM HE HEN FERRE NMEEUM RIS XVE ERE ANT XO SECUS QU CU XR A ONSE Ua Ro S EVVP REPRE 2 3 Uninstalling Hydro GeoAnalVSst 2 55 i osemstesier diee b ees cei ee eae vr ed us eus ek evil ob eek equ creates tes Ebo Sent ue x Ert Ra FERREUS 2 4 HGADemoPrIOIGCU acsititsiieistnbcuiiibuisieiside ee EPI CeE TII SUa Ia evO CU TED EE CIIATI aaa 3 5 Updating Old Projects Xusdtususeeriieie ice iie rhv ei aites A da die sue aspe e reae ae NR iOS eei Une 5 G Learning to use Hydro GeoAnalVSL cosi dissae oen o rne d ese uerb eva ae i aparente unus ovi Rv V pa de Nee V ae aas eene 0l Rave UR FEES FUE SHY ES REN ERE R EUN an 5 Part 2 Fundamental Concepts 7 T Start Page Tab uansesinisc ns qiscensedddtudepitredee vui eee edu due boa PATE Fr dU VIF ibn Qi ie QA IUE OPER TATE VIUERE aa 7 2 Aboutthelntertlate ubibenoie nado nOD OD eta Ond EG e URN NEUE 8 3 TOOIDJIS Basui iiiuthdgtour a aa oa E ebd vo Civi bebe aaria Udo MU a Eaa 11 4 Station Table uiii ED vU E
172. Water Services ES Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 16 2 2 2 Field Determines how far in pixels from the left edge of the report the object is located You can either enter the pixel value manually or elect the object and drag it to the desired location Multiline Allows you to set whether you want the text to move to the next line when it reaches the right border of the object Multiline True or if you want to force the text into a single line Multiline False Top Determines how far in pixels from the top edge of the report the object is located You can either enter the pixel value manually or select the object and drag it to the desired location Vertical Alignment Allows you to set how the text is aligned in the object vertically Top will start the text at the top of the object and the cursor will move down with every new line while the text is stationary Bottom will start the text at the bottom of the object and the cursor will remain on the same line with every new line while the text moves upwards Middle will start at the vertical midpoint of the object and the cursor will move down with every new line while the text will expand equally upwards and downwards Custom Allows you to change the object output format to General Number Currency Date Time Percentage and Custom It also allows you to specify the line border style CanGrow Allows you to set whether you want the text field to become larger if the
173. You can add several plot series depth and interval to one plot column All lines and shapes will be drawn in the default color and will be semi transparent so that when they overlay each other every plot is visible Be careful however with displaying plots with vastly different scales on the same plot column The plots will be shown on the same scale relative to each other so it may appear that one of the plots is hidden from view O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 215 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 12 3 3 1 Settings The Plot column settings are shown in the following screenshots As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Plot node from the BHLP Settings window The settings for the Plot node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings EE l El BHLP Flo v Visible Column Options The Plot frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can modify the general column settings by clicking the Options button The Settings for the Plot Area sub node are shown in the following screenshots BHLP Settings X Plot Are General Horizontal Axis Vertical Axis Legend Appearance e Brain Size BE Plat Ez Background Color a Plot Area Bl Page Background Color Up Down Bottom Apply OE
174. a Data Date Query Date Finer Event Planer Stet Page The module launches as a tab and displays as a calendar to allow you to see any upcoming schedules If you select a schedule in the calendar you will see the stations that are due to be sampled that are associated with the schedule on the right hand side Ue allows you to schedule your stations for regular sampling allows you to create an Event Plan VOX allows you to close any existing Event Plans O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Event Planning 156 allows you to manage your Event Plans H Ej allows you to go to today current date in the calendar helpful if you have scrolled ahead or behind in the calendar 8 2 Schedule Stations You can schedule your stations for regular sampling by selecting the icon and the Event Schedules dialog will appear Event Schedules Start Date a Spring Schedule 03 12 2013 03 12 2013 Here you can see all current schedules for your project You can create a new schedule edit an existing schedule or delete a schedule To create a new schedule select the New button and the New Schedule dialog will appear 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 157 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Event New Event AE Location Start Time End Time Sun 2 24 2013 Reminder Stations Description Station Group Al Stations a GB 02 GB 03 GB 04 GB 05 GB 06 GB 07 GB 08 GB 09 GB 10 GB
175. a Source mag ser trier 2 rat eves Database zs 1f supported by your DBMS Then select OK and you will see the New Query Layer dialog box here you can see all the tables and fields in your database You can write your own SQL statement or you can copy a SQL statement from one of your HGA saved queries in HGA in the Query Builder on the SQL Statement section For this example wrote a simple query to take all the information from the station table O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Its Chery Liner EEE Il When you select the finish button the layer will be added to your map oe deia ENT fe dua ve bee mem tee epee quium as mies igi TIT ESL ee eB ESSSS s E pane nus KR ee et ee a Ur Lien LE i ya oe d Lr B nE H arara T Ea F s p a u ITEM m Es LL BOUM SL l E aa x T aT amp E F e tann ET DE Dun ama Cope If any changes are made to the database stations within HGA you delete stations or add new stations or even edit the stations coordinates all you need to do is hit the refresh button in ArcGIS F5 or View Refresh and the points will be automatically updated O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3 Menu Bar The HGA menu items have been specifically designed for optimal flexibility and ease of use The items in the menu bar are context sensitive this means that one or more menu items may be greyed out if a specific feature is not appl
176. a Transfer System o amp Select the table s you want to import into Map your source to the destination fields BE amp A Search POR Location F Uncategorized Destination Source Data Type B V Description VE Location ep ETT 3 Geologic Description Y degree Well Construction Elevation Elevation m Eur uc a Dd lt P Soil Sampling lt Monitoring Event Station Type 3 Mining Exploration 7 amp 3 Geophysics 7 amp 9 Well History T E E REIR RT R8 Select the Next button to move on to the next step indicating the Projection This step will only appear if you are importing into the Location Station table as you need to indicate what projection your X and Y coordinates are in In this case they are in the same projection as my project so this is selected by default r E amp Data Transfer System NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N X Unit meters Add New Stations to Groups Station Group Add to Group All Stations Boreholes Boreholes with Lab QC Stations Monitoring Wells QC Monitoring Soil Borings WQ Stations Y ou also have the option to indicate if you wish to put these stations into a specific Station Group By default all stations will go into the All Stations station group but you can also place them into additio
177. a bar chart NOTE You can also change the Series Type by right clicking on any data point on and plot and selecting Change Series Type 11 3 2 Data Series Settings Data Series Range settings can be accessed by right mouse clicking on any data point on the plot and selecting Edit Range Settings from the pop up menu The following Series Settings dialog will appear Series Settings X Within guidelin 100 Text Rb Exceedences 120 l Font Color Alignment Custom Use Different Label Source Label Source Include Pre fix Fre fis Iw Include Past fix Postfix E sceedence Sample Preview Esceedence e On the left side of this dialog there is a list of available data series for the selected plot You may also Add Data Range series and specify Data Series options for this Series This is useful if you want to identify data on the plot that exceeds a guideline or standard value and assign unique symbol or label properties to this data set only Click on the Add button to add a new range Click on the x Delete button to delete the selected range When you add a new Range enter the Breaking Value this is the upper limit for the range O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 199 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help For the example shown in the screenshot above there will be two ranges Within guidelines Values O 100 inclusive will have unique symbol and label properties Exceedences Values
178. aManager Diver Office and e SENSE MON files consist of three sections Logger Settings Data Series and Data The Logger Settings section contains the current settings of the logger including the location sample method sample interval serial number and available channels The Data Series section contains information on when field measurements were taken The Data section contains all the measurements for each channel ordered by date and time To import MON file data into your database follow the steps below STEP 1 Select MON Data Files STEP 2 Map Data Fields STEP 3 Import Data into the Database i T Please note that the MON data import procedure can accommodate multiple MON files simultaneously However for demonstration purposes only one MON file will be used in the following guide Also before you import data from MON files the water level values need to be compensated with respect to the top of the well casing This can be done through SWS datalogger software Diver Office Data Logger Manager by performing barometric compensation on the MON data using the Top of Casing method 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 129 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help nl x Select MON files Select Data Type Notes water Level with Respect ta Tap of Casing PLEASE NOTE If pou select the Water column above Diver or Water Level with respect ta Vertical Datum the water Level table will not be available for mapping i
179. alue Restores the default automatic minimum value which is calculated from the selected data set Grid Visible Shows hides gridlines on the plot Style Controls the grid line style select from Solid Dash Dot DashDot or DashDotDot Title Text Sets the title for the axis Visible Shows hides the axis title Angle Controls the angle for the axis title for the Y axis it may be useful to have the angle set at 90 degrees Font Controls the font for the axis title Tick Label Format Controls the decimal format for the labeled tics enter 00 to display 2 decimal places to display no decimal places simply enter O Angle Controls the angle for the tick labels for date labels it may be useful to select an angle of 45 or 90 degrees for improved display Font Controls the font for the tick labels Horizontal X Axis The Settings for the X Axis are identical to the Y axis with the following exceptions Log Scale is not available Min and Max values when you define the min and max format you must select these values from a calendar You can specify a Date Time format from the following options m d yyyy MMM yyyy MM yyyy yyyy 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 198 MMM hh mm ss tt tt AM PM hh mm ss You can set the Tick Interval by selecting one of the following options Min Hour Day Month Year Series Type Line displays the plot as a line chart Bar displays the plot as
180. an be changed at any time to obtain a more desirable vertical exaggeration of the project domain The vertical exaggeration factor is available to proude an improved 3 dimensional view when the scale of the X and Y axis far exceeds that of the Z axis When opening 3D Explorer the default value of exaggeration factor is set to 1 The Exaggeration factor can be changed in two locations In the Display tree under the Project Name folder OR In the toolbar top toolbar of the HGAnalyst 3D Explorer window as shown below Exaggeration Factor fi 0 Simply enter a new value in the field and press the lt Enter gt key on the keyboard 15 2 Positioning the Panels Positioning the Panels The Display Tree Panel and the Navigation Panel are both dockable panels which means they can be moved and or docked to another location on the interface or they can be left as floating panels on your Windows desktop i e not docked to any location on the interface These panels can either be docked on the left side of the interface or on the bottom of the interface Moving a Panel To move a panel to another location position the cursor over the title bar Press and hold the left mouse button and drag the panel by moving the cursor to another location then release the mouse button to drop the panel at the new location Floating Panels Once a panel has been moved from the docked position to a floating position a Title Bar will appear at the top
181. anced interpolation settings click the Advanced Settings button and advanced options will be displayed as shown below for Natural Neighbor O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 282 Interpalator Options Settings Values Start BD 5713902578452 End x 8i 54004651 40058 A Nodes K0 Start r 43 4574110323148 End r 43 1543 7541353 Y Nodes AU Use Log Interpolation E Restrict Min Value Restrict Max Value E Value Min Value Max Heal Min Heal Mas Mag X Mag Y Mag z No Value 999 0 Allow Extrapolation Sdip Tautness 1 1 5 Tautness 2 f Use Gradient Aare Oooo ERR q7 OF Cancel Least easting You may modify the interpolation settings then click OK to return to the main window For more details see Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings Use Only Selected Stations When selected the contour component will use only those stations that are selected on the layer as the data source for the contouring The option is only enabled when one or more stations are selected If not selected all stations on the layer will be used Restrict Within Domain This option allows you to clip contours lines to a selected polygon layer Select Domain X Please choose a polygon layer as the clipping domain domain Cancel FJ Help You may select any polygon shapefile from the combo box Then click OK to continue The calculated contours
182. and Points per block along Z values allow the user to choose Block Kriging used for interpolation as compared to Point Kriging Block Kriging is based on the premise that since Kriging is a linear algorithm direct estimation of the block average is possible for user defined blocks The default values for these parameters are 1 and in this case the default method is Point Kriging If Block Kriging is being used the user needs to enter the Min points for block Kriging and Max points for block Kriging The Octant Search option is an exhaustive search option available to make sure that data are taken on all sides of the point being estimated and is especially recommended for 3D data If the user specifies Max points per octant to be greater than 0 an Octant Search is employed to find the neighborhood of points for interpolation The Max radius and Min radius defines the search distances in user specified units in the maximum horizontal direction and the minimum horizontal direction for determining the neighborhood of points for interpolation For isotropic data the two radii are the same Enter the Vertical Radius value if 3D Kriging is to be performed If the total number of points in the data is large gt 200 computation time for Kriging may be reduced by specifying a smaller radius for the search The Angle1 Angle2 and Angle3 parameters define the search ellipsoid for situations in which anisotropy is present in the data The Krigi
183. ange unless the user makes the changes manually Follow the steps below to create a Dynamic Station Group query If the Query Builder tab is not yet opened select the Query Builder icon 39 from the main toolbar In the Query Builder tab toolbar select the New button B and the following dialog will appear New Query Query Name Station with TOC exceeding 320 Query Type _ Standard Select Query Dynamic Station Group Query Location Station Groups Provide a Query Name Station with TOC exceeding 320 for this example The default Query Type is the Standard Select Query we need to change this by selecting O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Query Builder 148 the Dynamic Station Group option Select OK to create the query You will notice that the Display Fields and the Group Conditions sections have become disabled these are not available for Dynamic Station Group Queries Click once on the TOC field it will become highlighted blue and drag this field into the blank Conditions field under the Expression column The TOC field will be added to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the Add button on the bottom half of the conditions section to add conditions then define them manually Available Fields El Description Location i Station Name Station Type description addins Geologic Description Well Construction l Soil Testing Soil Sampling l Monitorin
184. are interested in You can also highlight a record will turn bright blue by clicking on the button on the left hand side of the grid and then right click on the record and select copy Then you can paste this into for example an excel spreadsheet and both the header information and the records you highlighted will be pasted into the excel spreadsheet O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 1 Demo Project 7 View Modules Database amp Help ea sumU49mM CO6A Bar ola a All Stators Al Boreheles AF Bormehales wih nini aJ Lnbh QC Stslians F Momoning Wists 4 QC Maniannng Wel maij pel al Soil Borings 3 W Stations Cimy ihicker Han z al Soi Bonngs weh T w P Dues is Time Series Plots is atf Borehols Logs ae ee Qe Map Projects GB09 T d Crose Sections GB 1U u PW Views GB 11 WI Reports GB 12 GB 13 EJ GB M GB 15 GB 15 Gh MEI Ready Station List Station Data HE ji 535 498 69 536 155 69 535 075 69 EM BAB EO 535 743 68 535 652 69 k35 385 BS 535 295 68 535 237 68 536 225 82 536 128 74 ELS 535 66 68 535 776 56 535 625 46 83551850 535 394 60 5 35 288 76 535 200 00 536218 27 536 153 06 536 32 58 535 864 G8 535 866 19 535 782 82 535 582 53 535 504 78 E35 364
185. art 10 Lab Quality Control 172 1 Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis aieo e er rYa otn cua oh en ian o UO e Penn ge eua vun SeOFS evan NOV PAN Ong Rer e aU vR KR ES Uen rd vou UENuO 172 2 Define A New Lab Quality Template esii ks e nexis werd eaaa eee un ERR Veo NOR Ges AS E NER SNR EAS ENCARTA MIRA VS 174 Check Duplicates Settings oo rne vr Oder vorn oce dE oz eure uote ve venue Fe kae Dex eo C ha odd XV AR CU YE RN aE TETEA 175 CheckSpiked SetHlBs c oorr coded tv ONE e dod oed Pea A Mr eaves Mouse dM D o tu o eU IMP M A UU 176 Check Blanks Settings uoo eco vele e eek vues Er v EAE CO a cv P MET eei ssepe Pu esee cease EEEE AEEA 177 Check Dilution Factor Seline Ss Arrana nn AE cnc CAE EPL PASQUA dM PEL TV IE TE ITA EAE SeM FLUE VENE FLU Cod PAUR E UA s d RIS PII E 178 CHECK DETECTION Limit Set ELIT ES covers oed e e v UE EO VEU ERN EE AE AEE Cor da ordeo VAVAR QUO Pa revu aar tavern 178 Check Holding Time Settings uiccoevexcte ke On ve RARI OFFRE EE FEPVERAA QS cR EXE SUR IUE Les ies OR LE taste tuees ET QU ACCU S HR IUE TE OPE SE ONES dU WEE UEE 179 3 Perform Lab Quality Assessment iori ntes ever ev Pies Eeka euo curte Ses Fe a Yae n Ne A VER EEF INVI R UY SE V NER ERR SERRE NR Su EPUF VIN RU OSEE RENTA PETS 181 Part 11 Time Series Plotting 185 1 ADOUtthHE Interface NN 185 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 2 Addin Plots dieses iis edd se epa ise tse ba tud eeev ilL asveste aa Ae Lc I TI
186. at a single borehole over various depths the BHLP will automatically use the first result value in the query If using another value is desired then the Data Query should be modified with the appropriate conditions 12 4 2 Add Well Construction Column Next add another column type to the BHLP by right clicking on the Design node and selecting Add Column In this example Well Construction has been added to produce the design shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample E ni xi Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m GB 01 36212 69 487 4030 00 323 50 324 50 a Design a Lithology E9 LithologyE nities Coarse Gravel Medium Sand Caption Well Construction x Sateen Gravel l i ji i 1 i i E DELXBe6o60eo WS Yeooooos E a wil a a E EU TeTSIeTeTe T L b E i amp i a v Live update BRE Close Export v Print i Help 12 4 3 Add Plot Columns To add a plot column to your BHLP right click on the Design node and add a Plot column Once the Plot column has been added the Plot Series options must be defined To add a plot series right click on the Plot column in the Design tree Alternately you can O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter omm click on the Add button on toolbar after having highlighted Plot in the Design tree Select the Add Plot Series option as shown in the following screenshot Bor
187. ata Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Num Neighbors Number of nearest data points to use when calculating interpolated value for each grid node Z Only Allows the user to select between outputting the original X and Y values plus the interpolated value x y f x y or the interpolated value only f x y Note This has no effect on the actual contour output and can be ignored NATURAL NEIGHBOR The Natural Neighbor method Watson 1994 is based on the Thiessen polygon method used for interpolating rainfall data The grid node for interpolation is considered a new point or target for the existing data set With the addition of this point the Thiessen polygons based on the existing points are modified to include the new point The polygons reduce in area to include the new points and the area that is taken out from the existing polygons is called the borrowed area The interpolation algorithm calculates the interpolated value as the weighted average of the neighboring observations where the weights are proportional to the borrowed areas The Natural Neighbor method is valid only with the convex hull of the Thiessen polygon formed by the data points and values outside the hull extrapolation should be used with caution The Natural Neighbor interpolation scheme may be visualized as a taut ru
188. ate if any Additional Data needs to be collected while in the field O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 163 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Event Plan Information Additional Data Collection By default the additional data to be collected will be applied to all Stations however if you wish you can select different data to be collected for each individual station The data fields to be collected can be selected from the datamodel tree on the left hand side Once you have selected the field will be highlighted blue select the gt button to move the data field to the right hand side The next step of the Event Planning wizard allows you to prepare a checklist to help ensure all required items for performing the field activities are remembered You can enter one item per line 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Event Planning 164 The final step of the Event Planning wizard allows you to print the Event Plan report The Event Plans are generated and populate an MS Word template Schlumberger Event Plan Summary Stations to be sampled GB O1 80 552229 43 478311 GB 02 80 55292 43 478494 GB 03 80 552871 43 47867 7 GB 04 80 555432 43 478231 GB OS 80 556728 43 178593 Check List a To Bring Returned T 3 Buckets 1 O New pH meter oO Oo 6 sample bome The first page of the Event Plan report is a summary including the list of stations to be sampled along with the coordinates as we
189. ation Any other user defined configuration can be loaded by pressing the S Load Scene Configuration button and selecting it from the presented list O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 360 o Seting __ Yaue a Background color m EITitle E Test color Textsize 0 2 El amp sis BE Text color B C 0 0 025 Linecolor W C E Test color LI ER W Live Update Apply Background color sets the image background color By default the Background color of the display window is black Title Text color sets the color of the Project title text Text size sets the size of the Project title text as a fraction of the total screen size Axis Text color sets the color of the Title text Text size sets the size of the Axes labels as a fraction of the total screen size Line color sets the color of the axes lines NOTE For printing it may be helpful to change the background color to white and the axis color to black Legends Text color sets the color of the Legend text 15 4 2 Resetting Options The currently viewed scene position can be reset to the Default Setting by selecting Edit Reset scene position from the top menu bar or by clicking on the xe Reset Scene Configuration button in the toolbar NOTE The Reset options remove all display objects except the axes the axes labels and the project title 15 4 3 Project Display Settings The HGAnalyst Pro
190. ation Related Settings window as shown below will only be displayed if data is imported to the Stations table Projection Settings Define the coordinate system the projection system and the units for the stations in the source file Following successful import the new stations will be converted to the projection system and units defined in the HGA project A detailed description of the coordinate and projection systems available in HGA is provided in Chapter 3 see Step 3 Set Project Properties and Location NOTE It is important to know and select the correct projection system during the import to prevent erroneous station co ordinates The LAS file allows to specify a place holder for NULL values common examples are 999 0000 Wherever this value is detected in the source HGA will insert NULL in the destination according to the field setting specified in the Template Manager When you are finished select the Next button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 138 i Import LAS File Eek Mote This step provides a preview of the mapped fields and an indicalion of any eroneous records Records with emors wil not be imported ou may r luen to previous steps bo make any corechors ta the mapping Al Ihe bop of the window each tab represents a different database lable contaming one or more mapped elds 188 5 187 5 187 185 5 156 18
191. ation elevation or station TOC elevation if desired using the Expression below Design SUL View Preview chemical name Concentration result_umit Elevation Screen from z SELECT station id amp 5 id station s 45 x station 45 v station name 45 name chem test sample0 date 5 date chem Fest results chemical chemical name chem test results result_value AS Concentration chem test results result unit 45 result unit station elevation AS Elevation chem test samplelsereen FRU M AS Sereen from statian elevation chem test sample screen from 45 z FROM Station RIGHT JOIN 55t Station lD SStation SID LEFT JOIN ehem test resultst ON Statian id chem test results Station LEFT JOIN chem test sampleti OM S1 chem test sample Station AND chem test results sys sample code chem test samplell sys sample code HEHRE chem test results che BTE AMD S55tation IDi22 O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 43 2707 25147 045504114 BB 20 43 270725147 45504114 GB 20 43 2707 25147 045504114 GB 20 43 2707 25147 045504114 GB 20 44 352238574 510258338 GB 21 44 352238574 510258338 GB 21 j4 352238574 510258338 GB 21 44 352238574 510258338 GB 21 44 352238574 510258338 BB 21 j4 352238574 510258338 GB 21 333353834 7333 5833 GB 22 333353834 7933 5833 GB 22 J3J3B53834 7333 5833 GB 22 333353834 2333 5833 GB 22 J33g3B3834 7333 5833 GB 22 J3Jd3b3e34 2933 58033 GB 22 067630135 256520696 GB 23 067630135 256520
192. ations Press the Next button to start iz Options 1 Convert Finish Clicking on the Next button displays the second dialog requesting the MS Access database name that will be used as a source for the reports to be imported Provide the database name by clicking on the Open Database button to the right of the text box or alternately type in the name including the full path lx Convert M5Access Reports to WHI Reports Datab mre Source Database VB Projects Demo_ ProjectiRepartiSampleReport mdb fi Reports n Options I convert Finish Cancel z Back Next gt Click on the Next button to display the next dialog listing all reports that are available in the selected database Select the desired report and click on the Next button to proceed 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 411 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Iz Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Access to WHI Reports 2 0 Select Ehe report that vou want bo convert Customer Labels Employee Sales by Country Invoice Products by Category Reports Sales by Category Sales by Category Subreport Sales by Year Sales by Year Subreport Sales Totals b Amount Summary oF Sales by Quarter Summary oF Sales by Year Options Convert Finish Cancel Back Next gt Finish The dialog shown below will be displayed It allows you to specify some settings that will alter the converted report The default values are fin
193. ations that are displayed in a cross section The hydrogelogic layers must be drawn using the polygon tool The procedure for drawing and editing these layers is identical to drawing geologic layers as explained above The position of the hydrogeologic interpretation layers may be defined based on the position of any Geological interpretations that may already be available Translating Geology Interpretations into Hydrogeology Interpretations A hydrostratigraphic unit will generally include one or several geologic layers and the boundaries of a hydrostratigraphic unit will usually conform with the boundaries of the geologic layers As such you can copy one or more of your geologic interpretation layers and use them as a startup for hydrogeologic interpretation layers To do so Select the Hydrogeology option from the Layer Manager to make this layer visible Right mouse click on this interpretation layer and select Copy from Geologic Layers and the following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 339 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Select the Layers to Copy Bedrock Gk Cancel J Help In this dialog select one or more geologic interpretation layers to copy For each layer to be copied provide the name pattern and description of the corresponding hydrogeologic interpretation layer Aquifer or Aquitard Once this is complete the cross section editor draws the selected hydrogeologic interpretation la
194. atum NAD83 Layer Administrative Boundaries DEM Geodetic Network Landsat National Road Network Ministry of Sustainable Resource Management BC http srmwww gov bc ca gis arcftp html Data Warehouse Format Coverage Raster Geographic Coverage British Columbia Layer Administrative Boundaries Hydrology Forest and more Alberta Geological Survey http www ags gov ab ca mapserver map236 download download gis htm Data Geology Geochemistry Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Alberta Datum Geographic NAD83 Layer Geology Alberta Community Development http www cd gov ab ca preserving parks Irm index asp Data Parks and Protected Areas Format Shapefile 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices oam Geographic Coverage Alberta Datum NAD83 Layer Parks and Protected Areas Department of Provincial Treasury http www gov pe ca gis index php3 number 77868 Data Warehouses Format Shapefile and MIF Mapinfo Geographic Coverage Price Edward Island Datum NAD83 Layer Administrative Boundaries Road Forest Hydrology Department of Natural Resources Nova Scotia http www gov ns ca natr meb DOW NLOAD UTMNAD83 htm Data Natural Resources Data Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Nova Scotia Datum NAD83 Layer Natural Resources New York State GIS Clearinghouse http www nysgis state ny us Data New York State GIS Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage New York
195. ault Template Ok Cancel In the Name field enter the name of the plot The Type combo box contains the supported plot type currently only Time Series scatter plots are supported In the Template combo box select the desired plot template that should be applied to the new plot The plot template contains numerous pre defined settings for axis data series style settings etc If you want to re use the same template again in the future select the Set as the default template check box For details on creating plot templates see Managing Templates Click OK when you are finished to display the new plot in the viewer window The next step is to map the fields 11 2 2 Field Mappings Under the Data Source tab you can define the field mappings for the plot as shown in the screenshot below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 190 Settings Data Source Query Plot Grouping Seres Grouping Time Value Units Label NO factor Detection Limit Uncertainty Standards Multioher Bar Color Schema Query select the data source for the plot from the combo box currently the data must come from data queries Plot Grouping specify a field to be used for grouping plots Series Grouping specify a field to be used for grouping series at least one field must be selected for grouping the plot series Time Axis specify a field to be used for the Time X axis This should be the date field from you
196. ause For example if you want to create a query to show all chemistry results where the chemical name is benzene you would enter the following into the SQL Statement section SELECT FROM parameter result WHERE chemical name Benzene As soon as you have entered a few characters you will see that the Query Builder autocomplete tool becomes available to help you write your SQL Statement O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Query Builder 152 SGL sell W RIGHT OUTER JOIN a FH rock coring H screen S SEHECT Based on the first few letters of each word you enter the program will try and help you by suggesting SQL Commands for example SELECT or the names of tables or fields in your database Once you have completed entering the statement ensure it is exactly as written above including the single brackets around the word Benzene you can execute the the statement by selecting P button You will be moved to the Data Query tab to see the results of your query 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 153 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Query Builder Data Query Station List x 1 of12 gt Pee X F adoa liy Rowld Station sample_id chemical name result value result unit reporting detection limit sampling precision fraction code analy H DENM Ime e S 2 2008 19 Benzene mg L Ho a n 1 e m n d 3 p uma aesee mU p EPRS ro p pes feee w pooo o eus s p ue
197. automatically when you create a new renderer this can also be loaded by selecting the e Edit button after selecting the renderer you wish to change Graduated Renderer Graduated Renderer allows you to graphically display station data according to their specific interval of values You have the option of specifying the color scheme and or the symbol that represents the station To use the Graduated Renderer select Renderer from the Layer menu click the Add button and choose Graduated renderer from the available list The following dialogue will allow you to compose a set of symbols for different value intervals 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 273 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Graduated Renderer Mame Enter renderer name here Field Name ELEVATION Classify Mlin 332 0000 has 346 0000 i 334 8 332 334 8 i 33r b 334 8 337 5 340 4 33r b 340 4 343 2 340 4 343 2 i 34b 343 2 346 xa O Ramp OF Cancel Enter the Name for the renderer and choose the Field based on the values from which you want to classify your data Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals Clicking on the symbol beside each interval will load the standard Point Style dialog allowing you to choose a specific symbol and or color for each interval Color may also be specified as a spectrum
198. ay settings by selecting File Save Scene configuration from the top menu bar or by clicking the So Save Scene configuration button in the toolbar This will load the Save Scene Configuration dialog 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 383 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help gt y Save scene configuration for Configuration Hame ena M OF Delete Cancel Type the desired name of the scene in the Configuration Name field and click OK This scene configuration including attributes rotations and shifts can be loaded during a later session by selecting File Load scene configuration from the main menu bar or by clicking the YS Load scene configuration button in the toolbar 15 9 Saving and Exporting Options Saving Project The 3D project can be saved to file by selecting Project Save As from the Main Menu or click the H Save As icon from the toolbar The following Save to file dialog will appear Save As EET BER 8 AA 3x5 m BE 3x5 AB 3xs in VBX3D 3xs ix All XSeckions 3xs BB 3xs A CC Ks a cube 3xs Save as hype Visual Borehole Cross Sections file 3 3 Cancel The 3D image is saved with the extension 3XS and will be saved in the HGAnalyst Projects Project_ NameW3D folder by default A Save an existing project by selecting File Save from the Main Menu or by clicking 2 Save icon from the toolbar Exporting Options The displayed image can be
199. ayer This feature is active only when an object is selected Add Vertex button allows a vertex to be added to the selected object polygon rectangle circle or line This feature is active only when an applicable object type is selected he Delete Vertex button allows a vertex to be deleted from the selected object polygon rectangle circle or line This feature is active only when an applicable object type is selected G Zoom In button allows zooming in on the map window Draw a rectangle in any direction around the area you wish to zoom in to amp La Full Extent button restores the map view to the full extent of the map s coordinates da Zoom Out button allows zooming out from the map window Pan button allows panning the current map view left right up or down Previous Extent button allows restoring the map view to the previous zoom extent O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 253 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help EP E Select Single button allows individual objects such as stations to be selected This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager Next Extent button advances the map view to the next zoom extent Select In Rectangle button allows selecting all stations within a rectangle that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible an
200. b groups O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts 12 ld 4 5 of151 b bi We Rees It provides options to scroll through the list of records forward backwards first and last an option to add a record and delete a record as well as save any edits made There is also an option to print an option to show hide columns and a refresh option By placing your cursor over any of the icons in the tool bars you will find a tooltip indicating what the button does 2 4 Station Table The Station Table stores all the station location information for all projects residing in the database The Station Table may contain an unlimited number of fields Though as a minimum the Station Table must contain the following fields otation ID ID Station Name Name Station Coordinate X Station Coordinate Y Station ground surface elevation Elevation Top of Casing TOC If plotting stations on a map or cross section is desired then the following fields are required Station X co ordinate Station Y co ordinate Station ground surface elevation Elevation Station coordinates are stored in the Stations Table in latitude longitude format by default However each project may contain its own projection and coordinate system settings so that station locations may be entered and displayed in an alternate format e g UTM State Planar etc Stations can be added modified or deleted through the Station List tab The Stati
201. bber sheet stretched to satisfy all the data points The interpolated value at any location is a linear combination of all Natural Neighbors of that location and the resulting surface is continuous with a slope that is also continuous Combining the gradients or slopes with the linear interpolation provides results that are more smooth and may anticipate the peaks and valleys between data Singularities and other undesirable effects may be lessened by incorporating the gradient factor The gradient influence on the results can be manipulated by two tautness parameters that the user can enter These parameters allow the interpolated surface to vary from purely linear interpolation to one which is well rounded and has the gradient factor In all cases the slope discontinuities are removed and the resulting surface has slope continuity everywhere The advanced settings parameters for the Natural Neighbor method are described below Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Xdirection Start Y Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices a26 End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid Y Nodes Number of grid nodes in the Y direction Use Log Interpolation Flag to interpolate the log values of the data This setting is useful for where some measured values are many
202. blished Template Manager gg HX E Table Child Properties amp Description Display Name Database Name EF Geologic Description child Child EF Well Construction xy Soil Testing X Soil Sampling VEF Monitoring Event PE Parameter Sample E Parameter Result mg DIRA Water Level P Primary key 1D PEJ Meteorology Child table relationships MEH Divers PEJ Diver Data dh 2 ME Field Measurements WES Parent Child is child to v 4 date Table Parent Key s Foreign Key s D HE event Parent date date DHH Station Description SAKAR x EJ E1 F1 E F VHE date RHE observation FE H FE Mining Exploration EA H E Geophysics Foreign Key s Cl Well History Cel y Uncategorized Last changed on 01 05 2014 4 45 18 PM By DIR MGaertner 5 5 Managing Database Templates If you have made many changes to the database structure as well as perhaps set up List Editor lists on fields in your database and think you might want to re use the structure for another project you should export your project settings as a template by selecting the Ta icon in the Template Manager This will save a hgat file within the Project sub folder where all your templates are saved The default location is D Documents Hydro GeoAnalyst Templates Project however you may have changed this You can find out where your HGA template are saved by selecting 2014 Schlumberger Wa
203. bols BHLP Settings E x Dept v Visible Column Options Border Line Vizibilit Outline Appearance Description Appearance Using Jv Visible Es LJ Alignmen Horizontal Right m vertical Center Help Apply Cancel The Description tab consists of two subtabs Appearance and Using The Appearance subtab allows you to show hide the text label change its Font and change the position of the label 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 233 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help by using the horizontal and vertical Alignment dropdown boxes BHLP Settings E X Dept v Visible Column Options Border Line Vizibilit Outline Appearance Description Appearance Using wv Using as Mumeric Data Help Apply UE Cancel The Using subtab allows you to specify the display settings for numeric description data If you choose to include numeric data in your water level description select the Using as Numeric Data checkbox and specify the display format of the data using the Format dropdown list box You may choose from the following formats General use this format to display numeric data as whole numbers e g 1 Fixed use this format to display numeric data with a specified number of decimal places e g 1 000 Scientific use this format to display numeric data in standard scientific notation e g 1 000E 0 For both the fixed and scientific for
204. borehole log plot it is possible to e Specify the column type image text plot symbol scale as explained below e Select one or more fields of data to display in the column e Select the start and end depth for the data being displayed e Set the property of the column depending on the selected data type For example if a depth dependent graph is selected it is possible to set the properties of the graph If a text column is selected the font attributes can be set Note that each column may utilize different data fields for its start and ending depth information For example the start and ending depth information for Lithology patterns may be different from that of the well construction and may come from different tables Supported Column Types BHLP supports many data types including e Scale e Lithology eg geologic formation details soil patterns descriptions etc e Plot e Depth dependent plots data measured as depth value e g Geophysical investigation results Neutron Resistivty Gamma Chemistry results etc e nterval dependent plots data measured as from to value e g core recovery sample O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 209 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help technique Well construction casing screen annular filling etc Interval based data e g well screen indicators text etc With text entity e g comments on well drilling observations With image entity e g photos of soil or split sp
205. by right clicking anywhere in the designer window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Interval node from the BHLP Settings window BHLP Settings X Intera MEE Column Options Border Line Vizibilil Outline M Grid Pattern Symbol Descriptio MERE 7 Visible Font Use numeric format Format General ied Number of digits 7 ode T Image Draw Mode Tiled width 40 Help Apply OE Cancel The Interval frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button The Border Line Visibility frame allows you to show hide the column Outline and the Grid by clicking on the appropriate check box The Pattern Symbol frame allows you to show hide the pattern modify the Width and 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 230 change the Image Draw Mode The Description frame allows you to show hide the description and modify the Text Font If you choose to display numeric data select the Use numeric format check box 12 3 6 Depth Column The Depth Point based column is designed to display data that has been collected at various depths The data can be displayed using graphics text or both Water Level is an example of data that could be displayed using a Depth Point based column Water level i
206. by selecting the appropriate option in the Action column If wish to see which stations are not currently in the database can select the Click Here to View Data option For this example choose to Append the stations so any station names in my data that are not in the database will be automatically added Then the validation also found have duplicates in the database some of the sample IDs already exist in the database Again can select what want to do either overwrite what is in the database or reject the duplicate sample IDs For this example will reject these sample IDs O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Validation Results Validation Station Key Validation Checking if Stations From File Already exists in DB Legend Validation Log Station Names will be used as unique identifiers for this transaction If you want to use station ID as the unique identifier please map the Station field with the Station ID not Station Name The project database does not include the following Station Name s Append this will add the Station Name s to the project database Reject this will ignore all data associated with Station Name s that are not included in the project database A record with the same Station sample_id already exists in the database Replace this will replace all information of duplicated record s with the data from the file Reject this will ignore
207. c Arial Black Arial CE Arial CYR Select the desired export format provide a file name and path specify settings relevant to the format as desired and click on the OK button Reports that are saved or exported from the report viewer are not directly managed by HGA and as such will not be listed in the Project Tree 16 7 Creating and Managing Report Templates The Report Editor contains pre defined templates which allow users to quickly and easily create professional reports Report templates can be edited saved and managed in the Report Editor and new templates may be created and saved for future use This feature allows users to have different report layout options for headers and footers and to share them between two or more reports This allows users to have as many report designs as desired For example one or more report templates can be prepared for each client with the specific header and footer Another advantage of having a report template is that if the header information using a certain template changes the change will automatically be applied to all reports that use the template without the need to reopen the report For example if the client company s telephone number changes the user needs to change only the template instead of changing each report Each time a new report is created previewed or printed it will use the active report s layout unless a template is specified Creating A Report Templat
208. c 7440 70 72 mul Mg Magnesium THE mgl Fa Iron diae TEESE mpl Fags IE Ira Il essct TAS ESE mgl Fede diss inaa l aahei TAREE mgl Chionde TERR T DO E mul HEOI Eizarbonate BE 40 82 R moa Lihaa ES mga SD Saca 7611 85 8 mg Degth Depth of sampling pont m El Lond Electrical Londucinihy st uem T L5 Total hiria Sokiu mgl 5 Wontar T44 24 6 mpl hm imn Manzznezs TA118 5 5 mpl NH Ammon am gon75 5n g amp mol a Harrius is SATIS NS 3 mgl En Zinc cupo vand TUDES ug Cu diss Copper Tea S048 ug uh dist Mickel iissa TATED ug F luci ear EA mgl Bromide TI E mgl Du Slate ar mpl 2 tiga 478 T 5E5 E mpl Lartonale Tarbes he mgl 120 1H mcicpe d 420 mrjgen 7781 20 05 5 Barun TAHE mgl ZH IH heps e H20 hao TELE U 1 L das Aami nT 7429 80 15 wg La dar usen TAAD 1 7 ugi L4 dibi Cadie 744 41 3 ug Cr daa C hrerni ium thet TAAD 4 7 3 ug This module is similar to the Material Specification Editor Provide a New Group name on the right hand side and select the parameters you wish from the left hand side to be included in the new grouping Once you have selected the parameters will be highlighted blue Select the gt button to move the parameters to the Selected Parameters area right hand side To move all the parameters from a Station Group to the Selected Parameters area use the button Once you save the new grouping it will be available within the Event Planning wizard The next step of the Event Planning wizard allows you to indic
209. ces 3D Explorer asa Animation Properties X Rotate Time Plume Browser AutoRotate Axes Screen Axes AutaRHotate speed Model dees Automatic rotation can be performed around the Screen Axes or the Model Axes The AutoRotate speed may be adjusted by pressing and holding the left mouse button on the Slider Button and setting it to the desired level 15 3 3 Time Animation The Time tab is available when displaying a transient plume When the Time tab is selected the following window appears al Rotate Shift Light Position Time Plume Browser F alo T ar Options 58 1 2000 12 1 2000 Browser Time Time Animation Options Clicking the Options button will load the Animation Properties Time window as shown below Animation Properties X Rotate Time Plume Browser Time steps po Start Time o 172000 5 1 2000 Finish Time fiz 142000 12 1 42000 Animate in selected interval Cancel The Number of time steps for animation value may be increased to smooth the transition from one time to the next or it may be decreased to make the animation proceed faster HGA 3D 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 355 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Explorer uses interpolation in time for the case where the time step falls on a date where there is no data The Start time value indicates the simulation time when the animation will begin The Finish time value indicates the simulat
210. ch a source table with a destination table You may map the entire LAS file including the Well Section or just down hole parameters if you do not include the well section you must have the appropriate station already created in your project HGA will read the station name in the LAS file and attempt to find an appropriate match in the current project If one is found you may proceed Otherwise you must include the well section or terminate the import routine and return to HGA and create the appropriate station using the same station name as found in the LAS source If duplicate station names are found in the database there will be a prompt to select the appropriate station The Data Mapping window is divided into two frames The Source well section found on left side of the window and The Destination tables and fields on the right side of the window The Source frame which contains the data to be imported can be expanded on the left side of the window If the field names in the source are identical to those in the destination then the fields will be matched automatically For all others you must map the fields using the procedure below The Destination frame contains the database schema all tables and fields under their appropriate data categories From this frame select a Category then a Table from this category and a list of fields will be displayed in the grid on the right side of the window Mapping Mapping fields fro
211. chlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 2 Fundamental Concepts Before beginning to work with Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA you may want to review the following pages to get an understanding of the fundamental concepts of the program This might help you become more proficient with the software in less time The following pages go through the basic concepts of the program as well as main HGA interface including the various tabs available to you As well as how you can enter data both manually as well as with the EDD workflow which helps you to validate your data before importing it into the database 2 1 Start Page Tab When first launching HGA you will find a Start Page to help you do common tasks such as creating a new project or opening an existing project even installing the Demo Project There is also a lot of valuable information such as what s new in the latest version links to online resources including how to videos to help you learn about the new features more quickly and links to our Technical Support staff to make it easier to ask questions and report IB Hym Geotinalyst 2014 1 T Project View get Modules fjUziabase ij Hep amp ww TU ulu Saton List Station Deta Date Quen Data Filter Start Page x T Welcome ta s Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 1 z New Features Relesse Notes Support 9 New Pror ii am Mobile EDD Have you everwished you could collect your field data electranically Now you Sy
212. cify if you want a specific date range for the water levels or simply include all water levels This will be displayed as water level elevations in the Online Share when you select a station on the Map Online Sharing Lo jm General Stations Queries Maps Please select a map from the list lt No Selection gt C EEE SiteMap test i Select All example All Stations Boreholes Project TVOC Exceeds 5000 ug per L Elevation contours Topography WG Data Stiff Airports 1 Water Courses Major Railroads Urban Areas JE ES ES ES ST OCC 00 080 e Ground Water Level Time Series Plot Al data O Specify date range Fom 1 1 1900 To 1 11 2012 Launch browser after publishing Following are some screenshots of an example project Online Share O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services M cos tn mue ite ser Lotro panis in a ture igar co Du FM ous mr muia iom Leve nean a Lie rieteqar o 00 C J 8 Comentar Dekmpantns ture cdm timi l r x HB pr G e p O amrgi rira mew rtm i n P el Fe fet m Fete Tm Hep Fe dmt m Feet Tas Hm x Google ULT Meee ome de x Cog eee P m tw ds dete Lid Dawa R DS Id Svo fc com fen tmn m e M P P we LR Theaereter et 7 me etmedtar com n a wee sme heehee Cot a wo mo remeare E va me Peereaber Coed P wer m teeter met a wo ime pomar p we we Teter eater Pet onv wee given
213. ck on the desired vertex Source vertex that will be linked with another one the color of the vertex changes to green to indicate it has been selected Move the mouse cursor to the desired destination vertex to which the previously selected vertex will be linked The mouse cursor will change to a red square outline when a vertex is identified Click on this red square and the vertices will be linked 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 319 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help The Linked Vertex will turn orange to indicate that the vertex is linked and shared by two or more polygons or lines NOTE Link Vertices option is activated only if there are at least two objects on the layer Once two vertices are linked they behave as a single vertex Remove Links The Remove Links option allows for separating previously linked vertices To use this option Select the interpretation layer containing at least two polygons or lines whose one or more vertices are linked Make this layer editable Click the Remove Links option from the Edit menu or click the jc button from the toolbar Click on one of the linked vertices in the selected polygon linked vertices are colored orange Upon clicking on a linked vertex the vertex will change back to blue color to indicate that the link has been successfully removed Click on the pointer button k in the toolbar Place the mouse cursor on this vertex which has been separated Click once on this verte
214. ct the Add Vertex option from the Edit menu Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex This menu item is only available when an object polygon circle line or rectangle is selected Delete Vertex Provides an option to delete a vertex from the selected object To delete a vertex Activate the desired map layer containing an annotation object and make it editable Select an object on this layer all its vertices will be highlighted Click on the x Delete vertex button or select the Delete Vertex option from the Edit menu Place the mouse cursor on the vertex to be removed the mouse cursor will change to an X Click once with the left mouse button on this vertex to remove it from the object This menu item is only available when an object polygon circle line or rectangle is selected Copy Map to Clipboard Copies the entire Map Window to the clipboard The map window can then be pasted as an image in other applications The Map Manager provides annotation tools which allow for drawing shapes and inserting text labels on the map The drawing tools are available in both the Tools menu and in the Map Manager toolbar The options for the annotation tools allow modifying the color and style of the annotation objects The annotation items are only available on map layers with the corresponding object type i e text li
215. cting any of the provided database templates or simply selecting No Template and have only the table and fields required by HGA added to the project This allows you to completely customize your project All database structure templates that come with Hydro GeoAnalyst also come with their respective report and borehole log plot BHLP templates As such if one of the existing database templates is selected during the project creation these templates will be copied to your project by default You can later edit them or even remove them from your project if desired The Template Manager allows you to modify the view of the database For example you may only need to view tables that are related to geological investigation data The Template Manager allows you to hide all unwanted tables and or fields from view and display only a smaller set of relevant tables and or fields The Template Manager allows you to export the currently active database structure as a new database structure for use in creating new similar projects You can launch the Template Manager from the main toolbar by selecting the icon or by selecting the Modules Template Manager menu option 5 1 Interface With the release of Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA 2014 1 the interface of the Template Manager has been updated to allow you to more efficiently adjust the structure of your project database O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Template Manager 104 Template Manager TY
216. ction Window Full Extent This menu item will result in Zooming out the cross section window to its original full extents Zoom In 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 323 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Provides options for zooming into a section of the cross section that is defined by a rectangle drawn around the desired area Place the cursor on the cross section and click once to define one corner of the rectangle drag to a second position to define the opposite corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The selected section will be adjusted to fill the screen Zoom Out Provides options for zooming out on the cross section Click this menu item and the cross section window will zoom out The current screen will be zoomed out by a factor of two unless it is not already in a full extent mode Previous Extent Zooms the cross section window to the previous window dimensions Next Extent Zooms the cross section window to the next window dimensions View 3D Allows you to view one or more cross sections in 3D with the 3D Explorer Upon selecting this menu item the following dialog will appear Export to 3D Explorer i x Select Cross5 ection SelectAll EFA BB CE DD EE FF GG Select Surface W Select All relief mik Select Plume W Select All 3dplume E qg aqaqaaad W Include site map 3D name HGA3D OF Cancel FJ Help oo 2014 Schlumberger Water Services
217. culture http datagateway nrcs usda gow Data Natural Resources Data Warehouse 2014 Schlumberger Water Services oam Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage USA Datum NAD83 Layer Orthoimagery Soils Common Land Units Cultural and Demographics Governmental Units and Place names Elevation Hydrography Cadastral Transportation Roads Digital Raster Graphic DRG Scanned USGS quads Land Cover Vegetation Plants Watershed boundaries 10 12 digit hydrologic units Wetlands and Floodplain Easements Climate Precipitation and Temperature Flood hazards USDA Office Information Profile OIP Applied Conservation Practices Water Control Infrastructure National Inventory of Dams Grand River Conservation Authority http www grandriver ca index document cfm Sec 63 amp Sub1 216 amp sub2 0 Data GRCA data Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage Grand River Watershed Datum NAD83 Layer Airphoto Topographic and Thematic Data Ministry of Energy Mines and Petroleum Resources BC http www em gov bc ca Mining Geolsurv MapPlace geoData htm Data Geology Geochemistry Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage British Columbia Datum NAD83 and either BC Albers or Geographic Decimal Degrees Layer Geology Geochemistry Canadian Council on Geomatics http www geobase ca geobase en index html Data Geobase Format Shapefile and raster Geographic Coverage Canada D
218. d even though it is not a required field to enter the data into the database Also there is an option for more Advanced Conditions here you can enter any Excel functions for additional conditions O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts a8 e EDD Template Designer 7 85 Ed A an a Single Sheets Template Version Submission URL Template Version URL 1 mynameGgmailcom 4 Search 3 Uncategorized Template Format Database Name m Description ue E Parameter Sample parameter sample sample date 9 3 Geologic Description Station Name H Well Construction Sample ID Data Type Unit m Soil Testing Sample Date DateTime a Soil Sampling Parameter Result a Monitoring Event Station Name amp Parameter Sample Sample ID View Name zm i 4 Sample ID Chemical Name eh i Sample Date Result Value pu QE Lab ID Result Unit 2 T Batch ID Qualifier 4 Quality Code Reporting Detection Limit T Chain of Custody Condtions Ep g n Parameter Result 4 Sample ID 4 Chemical Name Numeric T Result Value IF Unique T Result Unit Y Reporting Detection Li Use List T Sampling Precision T Fraction Code T Analysis Method 2 16 2 HGA Quick Checker The HGA QuickChecker is an Excel Plug in Pre Requisites e Microsoft NET Framework v 4 5 e Microsoft Visual Studio 2010 Tools for Office
219. d New Project Wizard Creating new projects has never been easier with a few clicks you are ready to start Now use the Local Database option to store project data directly on your workstation without a SQL Server instance If you prefer SQL Server 2008 R2 or 2012 continue to be supported for larger more robust projects e Enhanced Import Wizard A streamlined import wizard that guides you to the correct import routine to use based on what kind of data you are trying to import Now you have only one place to go when you want to import your data e Cross Tab as Pivot table in Excel Dig deeper into your data using Excel pivot tables Push any query data into an Excel pivot table and use extended functionality to add rearrange or remove fields to show your data exactly the way you want e Expanded Chart in Excel options More options are now available when generating time series charts in Excel You can have multiple plots per page as well as multiple parameters per plot We have also included several more templates to help get you started e Stored Hyperlinks You can now store hyperlinks within the database and activate them from within the HGA interface This means you can store relevant webpages or paths to documents on your server e g PDF DOCX XLSX and then launch them right from within HGA 1 2 Installing Hydro GeoAnalyst Please refer to the HGA Install Guide for details on the system requirements and detailed
220. d reports and consolidate them into a powerful relational database system that can be queried and referenced with ease HGA operates as a desktop application based on Microsoft SQL Server technology Some typical applications for HGA include Regional water well management Contaminant site inventory Regulatory compliance Geologic cross sections Public access to information Environmental site assessment Monitored natural attenuation Regional aquifer characterization and management Cross boundary data sharing Aquifer vulnerability mapping 1 1 What s New in Hydro GeoAnalyst The main interface for Hydro GeoAnalyst has been given a bit of a face lift in an effort to make things easier to find and access Additionally there have been some significant new features and functionalities added these are described below e New and Improved Template Manager The Template Manager has been improved to make it easier for you to make adjustments to your project database You can make as many categories as you like to organize your tables and you can quickly make new tables and fields all in one dialog We have also added an option to create tables that are not related back to the station table giving you even more flexibility with your database structure Check out the updated Demo Project and see the new Permits table to find an example of this option O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst 2 e Simplifie
221. d selected from the Layer Manager 2 Select In Polygon button allows selecting all stations within a polygon that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager k Select In Ellipse button allows for selecting all stations within an ellipse that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager A Select Along Line button allows for selecting all stations within a buffer distance of a line that is drawn by the user This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager a Select All button selects all stations in the current map layer This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager e select None button de selects all stations in the current map layer This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is visible and selected from the Layer Manager and at least one station has been selected i Cross Section Line button allows the location and buffer distance for cross section lines to be defined This feature is active only when a layer containing Hydro GeoAnalyst stations is Msible and selected from the Layer Manager E Show Create Cross Section button allows a cros
222. de the data for Map Layers Cross section interpretation results Quality Control Analysis Columns in Borehole Log Plots Crosstab queries Time Series Plots 3D Plume projects To create a Select Query select the Standard Select Query radio button in the New Query dialog box Then define the necessary fields and conditions and execute the query Once the query has been saved the query will appear as a new branch in the project tree under the Queries branch Dynamic Station Group Query Dynamic Station Group Queries can be created and executed for the purpose of organizing the stations into groups To create a Station Group Query select the Dynamic Station Group Query Then define the necessary conditions and execute the query Once the query has been saved the query will appear as a new branch in the Project Tree under the Station Groups branch When O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 141 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help selected from the Station Groups branch the query will be executed and the stations that meet the conditions set in the query will be displayed NOTE Station Group Queries do not have options for modifying the display fields or advanced grouping options 7 2 About the Interface The Query Builder may be loaded from HGA several ways for example by selecting Modules Query Builder or by selecting the z icon from the Main Toolbar Additionally if you right click on the Queries branch of the Project Tree
223. derer to the same map layer To add a new custom renderer make sure Custom Renderers is selected from the comb box at the top of the Renderers dialog A new Custom Renderer may then be added by clicking on the Add button The Label renderer will be added to the list of renderers To configure the custom label renderer click the A Edit button The Custom Label Renderer dialog box will appear on your screen 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 277 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Custom Label Renderer l X Mame My Point Labels If Show secondary label Primary Labe Secondary Labe Field Elevation Y Frepend For Hatatin i Font Angle fo Primary Label Placemen Alignment Top Center Field Prepend Append secondary Label C Offset x 25 r 1 4 E Cancel The label renderer settings are described below Name Specify the name of the renderer configuration Show Secondary Label This control allows you to show hide a secondary label Field Allows you to specify which layer attribute to show as the object label Prepend Allows you to prepend text to the chosen layer attribute Append Allows you to append text to the chosen layer attribute Font Loads the generic font settings e g font style size color etc Rotation Allows you to rotate the label Alignment Allows you to set the default label alignment Offset Allows you to offset the label f
224. dicates the solid color used for all contour lines used only if Color from palette is not selected The browse button can be used to change the current Color setting to any RGB color Width is the contour line width Style indicates the line style used to plot each contour line choose from Solid Dashed and Dotted Auto Intervals View shows hides the automatic lines Upper Limit is the maximum data value above which no contour lines will be plotted Lower limit is the minimum contour line below which no contour line will be plotted Interval is the increment value at which contour lines will be plotted starting from the Lower limit value Labels The Labels setting is used customize the appearance of the contour labels Visible shows or hides the labels Text color controls the color of the label Text size controls the size of the labels Decimals is the number of decimals used for each label value Box Labels allows drawing a box around each label 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 367 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 15 5 Plumes Display Settings HGA 3D Explorer is capable of displaying and animating 3D Isosurfaces volumetric plumes of soil or groundwater chemistry data The 3D Plume must be generated from a data query in the main HGA window before displaying it in 3D Explorer For details on how to generate the plume please see 3D Interpolation The plume can be added to the 3D Project when working in the cross section edito
225. difference less than 100 Coefficient of variation less than 100 Highlighting Eont Backonouna Eoln Berger Caola OF Cancel Help d we To create a new template click the Add button and enter a name for the template The newly created template will then appear in the Lab Quality Templates list To configure your template click on the to expand the template tree As shown in the following example screenshot the three Check types Duplicate Spikes and Blanks will be listed To activate a Check type click in the checkbox beside it 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 175 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help x Lab Quality Templates Template Description Example Template Relative Percent Difference 20 Check Duplicates Coefficient of Variation lt 10 Percent Recovery gt 85 Check Spikes Blank 0 Check Blanks iian Check Dilution Check MDL Duplicate Settings Check Holding Time Relative percent difference less thar Al Coefficient of variation less thar JE Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color E xl Apply OF Cancel Help E The Template Description field is filled in by default with a verbal description of the Settings used for the template You can modify the Template Description with any text you would like to use by simply typing over the existing text Each Check t
226. domain e Cross section slices along a straight line or an irregular polyline through the entire depth of the domain these are based on cross sections available in the 3D project These slice objects define the locations where color maps and contour maps can be plotted for concentration visualization To define the slice locations select Objects Surfaces from the top menu bar A Select create slices window will appear as shown in the following figure The Select create slices window displays a list of the available slices which have been prevously defined The Select create slices window also has options to create additional slices or to modify delete existing slices O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 380 NS Seleck creake slices B x Slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice na 1 Ad Horizontal slice no 1 Vertical Horizontal 15 7 1 Creating a Vertical Slice To create a vertical slice through the project domain click the Vertical button to open the Slice Properties window as shown in the following figure A yellow outline of the vertical slice will appear in the Display Screen Vertical Slice Properties x Y1 481 4433 0 Ye 48 4433 0 both sliders synchronized The Slice type options define the planar orientation of the slice e Vertical XZ refers to the plane along the X axis extending through the entire depth of the site e Vertical YZ refers to the pla
227. dow When data is imported into Hydro GeoAnalyst When data is displayed in Map Manager When data is imported in Map Manager When a projection system is defined in the new project wizard As such you may be prompted to specify geotransformation settings in any of the aforementioned scenarios Configuring a geotransformation is very simple and is described in the following section Configuring Geotransformations When Hydro GeoAnalyst detects that a geotransformation is required it will check the internal geotransformation settings to determine if the geotransformation has already been defined If not it will prompt you with the following dialog O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices a Please select area _ _ Configure Geotransformation A geotransformation will occi between the following coordinate systems NAD 1327 UTM Zone 17N GCS WGS 1984 Please select the area that best describes the data extent Dominican Republic Grand Cayman Jamaica Turks Islands Alberta British Columbia Manitoba Ontario Newfoundland Nova Scotia From the Please Select Area dialog choose the geographic area which best describes the data extent Click Ok to save the settings In subsequent scenarios when this geotransformation is required Hydro GeoAnalyst will automatically perform the geotransformation on the fly In other words geotransformations only need to be specified once for the Hydro GeoAnalyst project
228. e O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 4 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help The Report Editor allows you to save the active report s design as a report template for future use Once you are satisfied with the design of the currently opened report s layout click H Save As button to save it as a report template In the dialog that is displayed provide the name for the template check the box beside Save as template and click on Save The template saves the header the footer as well as the background for the detail section of the current report The detail section may have background watermarks such as DRAFT CONFIDENTIAL etc at desired angles and locations The header and footer may contain relevant information for your company and or client including logo name Address Telephone Fax e mail and web site address The user can also configure properties such as font alignment etc for the template Once a report template is created it will be listed under the Reports node in the Project Tree of HGA Opening a Report Template Report templates can be opened by double clicking on them in the Project Tree of HGA A template can also be opened using the report editor directly by selecting the Open button from the Designer window s toolbar and setting the file filter to WTP Once a report template is opened it can be edited and saved Deleting a Report Template In HGA right click on a report template in the Project Tre
229. e OF Cancel Help In the list choose from available plot templates that were created using the chart component For details on how to create plot templates please see Chapter 9 Saving Plot as Template In order to display the plot in the map the following requirements in the template must be met e Plot Grouping and Series Grouping must be done by station ID e The plot template must contain data for the selected stations The remaining settings for the plot are similar to those described in the sections Choose Data tab below Tabular For a tabular display click on the Data Settings button and the following dialog will appear 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Data Settings d x Fields Condition Choose Data Layer Fields Display Fields ID ELEVATION 7 amp Pe a4 Ok Cancel iJ Help In the Data Settings dialog you select which Layer Fields from the layer should appear as Display Fields in the layout table as well as define the Display settings EE Select the desired fields from the left panel under Layer Fields then move fields to the Display Fields under the right panel using the gt button To move all fields press the gt gt button To remove fields from the Display Fields click on the or buttons respectively Use the tT button to move the selected field up Use the 4 button to move the selected field down Click on the Condition tab and you will
230. e Designer The MetaData tab stores path to the template file as well as some additional information needed for validation purposes Now you can populate the Parameter Sample and Parameter Result worksheets with the appropriate data You will notice that there are comments on the column headers to help you understand what the appropriate data for that particular column is Please be aware that using formula within your data may cause difficulties therefore we recommend that when a formula is required you copy and paste only the values Paste Special option to avoid difficulties later with importing the data La 3 Boek Mizreselt Escel inm Insert Page Lapai Formulas Data Brus vigus Quark Checker anabi Traa W ui EDDTemglate d an Ei m Data has net pet keen validated Lx Generate Headers Ha arrori Hed Previous Chem Vaedale b Details Ener Ener Formatting and Subma lempus Vind cion Guter aon Ba G H a L Station Name 2 3 STRING STRING DATESTAMPP STRING A z D a B Boek Micreseht Excel seh a Hhnme GELE Fage Layout Formulas Data Arne vig Quirk neck er Amsbat Tram oe 3 e IDDTemglale d S 5 y Daia has nel pel ten validated px Generate Headers H arron Met Previous Olea Vasdate A Details Enar Error Formatting and Subme Tom plete Verte ute pec is Al U Je Staton Name remm i fs n E
231. e Source Series select the data source series to which the line should be applied Period enter a period value When the Formula line type is selected the following settings will be available FormAddPlotLine q X Mame Line type Fomula BestFit Formula Type Constant Source Seres 5 z Constant Value lo Ok Cancel Formula type select from Constant Exponential Logarithmic or Inverse Source Series select the data source series to which the line should be applied Constant Value When a Constant Formula Type is selected enter a constant value for the location of the line This will result in a straight line drawn on the plot Click OK when you are finished to draw the new line on the plot The line series will appear in the tree under the selected plot The line settings can be modified as described below 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 201 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Line Settings When a line is selected for a plot the Settings tab will display the appropriate Line Settings as shown below Settings Mapping Mame test Visible True Width 1 Color BENE Red Style Solid El Marker Visible False Font Microsoft Sans Serf 8pt Font color dE Black Symbol Triangle Color EN Blue Size 4 4 Name set the line name Line Visible show hide the line Width set the line width Color specify the line color Style specify the line style Solid Dashed etc Marker Show
232. e and select the Delete option from the menu to delete the template The selected template will be deleted both from the Project Tree as well as from storage Setting a Report Template as Default Template To set a selected template as the default template right click on the template and select the Set as default option from the pop up menu in HGA The selected template will be set as the default template Every time a new report is created the default template will be used to furnish the header and footer sections 16 8 Import Reports from MS Access The Report Editor allows you to import reports that are created in an MS Access 2000 database environment This may be useful in cases where you migrate existing data from MS Access into HGA and want to import existing reports as well The MS Access Importing wizard can be activated by clicking on the 2 Import Access Report button on the Designer s toolbar The wizard guides you through a number of steps to import the desired report These steps are explained in the following sections The following figure depicts the first screen of the wizard that presents some introductory text O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 410 lt Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports J E y E IER This wizard assists vau in converting your Microsoft Access 2000 Reports to WHIReports 2 0 Format The converted Files can be loaded into WWHIReports Hatebace designer For Further modific
233. e show hide the markers Font Set the font for labels for the line markers Color specify the color Size Set the size of the markers along the line Multiplier select a field that contains a multiplier value use this to apply a multiplier factor to all result values on the plot Bar Color Schema This option allows you to define advanced bar color settings for bar chart plots When this option is loaded the Bar Chart Color Settings dialog will display shown below NOTE This dialog will only be available after you have specified Bar as the Series Type in the Settings tab 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 193 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help EE Bar Chart Color Settings y E s comi xi Define Color Settings f Graduated Color C Classification Select a Field that contains the classification r Mas Z200 Min 0 Humber of Classifications fe 04955 1 1 1335 mE 03 07 41995 3 1 1335 bd 05701 1995 5 1 1895 a gt 07701 1995 F 17 1335 ea gt 097011995 3 1 1985 1011995 471441995 f ot7011996 1 1 1996 E ae ee Todd eT id 4 In this dialog you may define the color scheme by selecting the Graduated Color radio button or the Classification radio button These options are most useful when displaying the charts on a map in order to see both the trends in the data over time at a single sample location and the spatial distribution trends of all sample locations Graduat
234. e Geology e Copy zones from geology layers in order to define hydrogeology zones e Display the locations of intersecting layers and other cross sections using symbols and labels Display water table location in cross section view Dynamically view the spatial orientation of the boreholes in the Map Preview Window simply move the mouse over the 2D borehole to highlight its location on the map View the orientation of cross sections as they relate to the Map Preview Window Define properties of intersecting features other layers or cross sections Display screened interval in cross section view Modify labels for lines and polygons Zoom in out and pan features Launch cross section for viewing in the Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer Export cross section view to image format Export model layer points for use in groundwater models including Visual MODFLOW Send cross sections to the Report Editor to be included in a report template Copy window to clipboard 14 1 Aboutthe Interface The Cross Section Editor may be launched from Hydro GeoAnalyst e n the Project Tree double click on an existing cross section from the Cross Sections node e Select the Cross Sections icon 4 on the main toolbar and then select the cross section you wish to launch from the drop down list e Select Modules Cross Section Editor and then select the cross section you wish to launch from the drop down list The Cross Section Editor may also be launched from the Map
235. e Report Editor may be loaded from the Project Tree in the main window simply double click on an existing Report or Report template under the Reports node The report editor consists of two main windows e The Designer Window e The Viewer Window Each component of the Report Editor comes with its own set of toolbars and icons that perform specific tasks related to the window The following few sections present a detailed description of the toolbar icons for each component 16 2 Report Designer Window The Report Designer allows you to design the contents as well as looks of your reports All report designs can be saved and opened for editing and or generating the final report A sample of the designer view is shown below with a report template loaded for demonstration purposes O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 387 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help New Data Query Report i max water level j V i Ss i ma CCEE EEE WULE FAALE KawsaacHae ee age F w E amp sjmy alci s TENET TEM cS Berga d images L1 0 cdBKTrIEESnarent ings D Transparent imag t i Center 2 Zoom True i020 The designer window contains the following items Property Toolbox provides the tools that can be used to edit properties of the report and all its sections including any controls that the report may contain Toolbar provides multiple buttons for functions in the desi
236. e Update When this feature is enabled the BHLP will automatically refresh update whenever an entity is defined or modified in the entity settings The time it takes for the BHLP to refresh depends on the volume of data being displayed on the BHLP a BHLP displaying a lot of data will take longer to refresh In this case it may be desirable to disable the automatic refresh to avoid the extended refresh times when making changes to the entity settings To do so simply uncheck the Live Update checkbox make all the necessary modifications to the entity settings and then click the Apply button to refresh the BHLP Description of Designer Toolbar Items The BHLP toolbar provides the controls and commands for the BHLP design The following buttons are available I Save button saves the current borehole log plot H Save As button saves the current borehole log plot with a new name Add button adds a new group column or plot entities depending on the currently active node Columns may be a scale interval lithology plot well construction or other features x Delete button deletes the selected group column or plot series O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 206 ie Refresh button updates the design and displays the preview of the current borehole log plot for the selected borehole Zoom in button allows you to select an interval to zoom in to and display a magnified portion of the BHLP
237. e displayed in the Project Tree Creating Reports based on a Data Query Follow the directions below to create a report containing a Data Query Select the desired Data Query from the Queries node in the Project Tree if no queries are available create a Query using the Query Manager Execute the Query in order to see the results Press the Print button i from the main toolbar or select Project Report This item is enabled only if a grid is visible and active and has at least one row of data The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the LL Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications As in the previous type of report the report will appear in the Project Tree once it is saved 16 5 2 Creating a Borehole Log Report A report for your borehole log plots can be created by following the directions below Select one or more stations from the Station List Select then open a BHLP template from the Borehole Logs node of the Project Tree From the BHLP designer press the Print button O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 4o Select the desired report template The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the SP Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications Print the report a
238. e i i cb 53649869 4 814 040 00 329 B 133050 Borehole 5 4 Map Projects GB49 535 386 69 481406000 329 50 33050 Barhate T m Cras Sectinns GB 1U 53 205 69 4 514 03D DO 3338 DO 338 0 Borehole h WD View GB 11 53523269 45814000 00 338 60 734050 Barehiale i Gl Reports GB T2 535225592 45428180 32553 39533 Borehole GB 13 5312974 481437970 324 85 325 85 Borehole GB M 53606576 481432020 32305 324 05 Borehole GB 15 53596034 481425190 324 25 395 26 Boreae GB 16 5358656 68 FEI MIAD 326 5E 1327 56 Barehate GB 17 535 776 5b 4514 2983DO0 325 30 3g9 30 Borehole GB 18 50562546 481425110 332 82 133132 Borehole GB 19 53551850 4814 308 60 330 13 135113 Borehole GB 20 53460 48430760 330 75 331 7E Boretole GB 21 515288 76 4 874 296 10 33506 336 96 Borehole GB 22 53520000 451429330 337 58 333 59 Borehole GB 23 53821927 481462030 32347 1394 47 Borehole ESI 53616306 4 amp 146H50 325 26 326 26 Bore ole GB 25 53603258 4B14664 20 325 B1 32681 Borehole GB 26 535986468 481449790 326 12 1327 12 Borehole GB 27 535 866 19 4 5M 655 10 327 B8 378 38 Borehole GB 28 53578282 481450900 32540 326 48 Borehole GB 29 53550263 481450180 33429 335 29 Borehole GB 30 53550478 4BM S544D 330 9 331 39 Borehole GB 31 E15 35436 487463430 30878 329 78 Borehole GB 32 535278 96 4514 624 DO
239. e map project 13 1 About the Interface Map projects are created and modified within the Map Manager application linked to Hydro GeoAnalyst The Map Manager can view and modify one map project at a time In addition the map projects should be modified by only one user at a time A map project may have an unlimited number of map layers The Map Manager may be loaded from Hydro GeoAnalyst in several ways Select Tools Map Manager from the Main Menu of Hydro GeoAnalyst Select Record Display on Map and the selected Hydro GeoAnalyst records will be loaded onto a Map project 4 In the Hydro GeoAnalyst toolbar click on the Map button From the Hydro GeoAnalyst Project Tree select a map project branch from the Map node Once the Map Manager window is loaded the display should be similar to the one shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 249 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Active Window lag Pet ier 3AF atati ed Bar ILE TESZILID ENAS NIE E b Edi g Map Window Come AD TCI UTI ana 704 Layer 4 Informationz Projection System Coordinates Scale The Map Manager window contains the following elements Menu Bar Contains program menu commands Toolbar Contains short cut buttons to some of the most commonly used features in the Map Manager Layer Manager Manages activating a layer visualizing and or editing layers Map Window Contains the visible layers for the map projec
240. e method of opening map project files instead of using the Open command Export Project Creates a copy of all layers in the current map project for use in other applications nee ET Abas Br EMI BIES o Export Map Project xs Map Layers Surface v Select Al Export as Sample Map GA brmp Raster Sample Map GR bmp v anew bmp Raster anew bmp v intra dsf LAD intro dst wt contour Line contour i All Stations Point All Stations v LrossSectionLineb Line LroseS echonLineS v Boreholes Point Boreholes lw ArPhoto Color or bmp Raster ArPFhoto_Color_ar bmp v Water Courses Line Water Courses v Airports 1 Paint Airports 1 v Major Railroads Line Major Railroads v Urban Areas Polygon Urban Areas v Trees Polygon Trees v Grasslands Polygon Grasslands v Cropland Polygon Lroplands Destination Folder D ternp L Export using current map project s coordinate system E part Cancel iJ Help O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 255 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help In this dialog select the layers you with to export and define names for the layers the same can be done for Surfaces if any are available Finally specify the Destination Folder for the copy of the map files On exporting a map project selected shapefiles will be exported in the current projection system if selected by the user Raster images will use the projection system at the time the image was g
241. e plotting component in Hydro GeoAnalyst allows users to create time series plots of data stored in the HGA database A query is required to be the source of data for a time series plot to be created The xj icon in the main toolbar launches the Time Series Plotting module For more details see Time Series Plotting 3 3 10 Crosstab Report This menu item loads the Crosstab query component where you can generate crosstab query reports from your existing data queries Ensure that you have a valid data query selected in the Queries node in the HGA browser before selecting this option For more details please see Chapter 7 Crosstab Queries 3 3 11 3D Interpolation HGA 3D Explorer is now able to display and animate 3D volumetric plumes of one or more soil or groundwater contaminants The plume is generated using the 3D Interpolator tool then displayed with the 3D Explorer The following section describes how to interpolate 3D points data in order to create 3D plumes for details on viewing the plume see Chapter 13 3D 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Explorer Plumes Display Settings The 3D Plume generation starts with a data set the data set must be generated by building and executing a data query with the Query Builder The data query should contain the data set your are interested in analyzing along with the fields required by the 3D Interpolation The following are required fields for the 3D interpolation and as such must be f
242. e report designer Copy Copies selection to clipboard E Paste Pastes contents of the clipboard to the report designer xl Delete Deletes current selection Reorder Groups Displays the groups order dialog Display Settings Tools ES Report Explorer Displays hides the control that displays all report elements placed on each section of the report IE Fields Displays hides the control that displays a list of fields available for the report EB Properties Displays hides the properties control for the report s Toolbox Displays hides the toolbar hosting the toolbox icons EB Grid Displays hides grid lines on the Designer 5 Script Editor Launches the VBScript editor that may be used to enhance report automation Formatting Tools Normal E Text Style Selects a format style ss Z Font Selects a font for the selected object 10 E Font Size Sets the font size for the selected object Bold Sets the bold status of the selected text Italics Sets the italics status of the selected text Underline Sets the underline status for the selected text he Mex e t Detailed Font Launches a dialog that allows setting font details Left Align Aligns selected text on the left margin O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 389 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Center Align Centers selected text Right Align Aligns selected text on the right margin Bulleted List Formats the selected paragraph in the
243. e similar to those for Graduated Renderers Add Value Delete O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 285 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Value Ascend Descent Change Color see Graduated Renderer for more details When you are finished click OK to return to the Contours screen With Isatis Allows you to send point data from the selected point layer to the Isatis software package for performing in depth geostatistical analysis and advanced data interpolation Interpolated point data can be brought back into HGA where it can be used to create contour color shading and zebra layers for your map project Note Isatis is a geostatistical software package developed and sold separately by Geovariances To acquire a license of Isatis please visit http www geovariances com If Hydro GeoAnalyst detects an installation of Isatis on your computer the Contours dialog will appear on your screen x Mame Grid Info Min Value l Data Minz321 03 Data to be Contoured Y of nodes 40 Max Value i Data M asz34L 43 Send ta SATIS To send point data to Isatis follow the steps below In the Name field type the desired name for the Istatis study From Choose Field combo box select the layer attribute that will be interpolated In the Grid Info section specify the resolution of the interpolation grid Click the Send to Isatis button to create the Isatis study HGA will then create the appropriate files and folder structure
244. e tables that violate the conditions For plots the templates are selected from available Chart templates To activate this feature first select a layer that contains points data i e a data query ora station group from the Layer Control When you select the Display Data option from the Layer menu the following dialog will appear 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 288 Display Data X iw i Samplel T able with VOC exceedences dE d t E Data Settings Display Settings OF Cancel Help e This dialog allows you to manage the various layouts for the map layer In the first column show hide the layout by setting the Visible status Define the Name in the second column In the third you may optionally enter a Description Click on the Add button to add a new layout In the combo box that appears select either Tabular or Plot shown below Display Type X Please select a display type Tabular Y Cancel Click on the x Delete button to delete the selected layout Use the T button to move the selected layout up Use the 3 button to move the selected layout down Next you must define the settings for the layout Plots For a Plot display click on the Data Settings button and the following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 289 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Data Settings l X Plot Template Choose Data Flease choose the plot templat
245. e unless a change is desired m Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports Fonts Charset Comment Module Text Strip sourcecode Evpedecls handler prefixes Options Convert MSGraph Chart Controls 4 Use 400 For Data Control instead of DAC Een Finish Press the Next button to start converting selected reports Cancel Back Next gt Finish Click on the Next button to start converting the report to the Report Editors native format A dialog will appear displaying the progress of the report conversion Once conversion is completed the dialog displays the summary report as shown in the following figure O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 412 Iz Convert MSAccess Reports to WHI Reports J 4 ES E Starting conversion fk Conversion complete Y The Following report were converted From database Woosinar visual Pocos Sistemas Visual Pocos Project SectionSample mdb Fa WHI Report gt Relationships For CrosSection F options Finish Click the Finish button and the converted report will be displayed in the runtime designer Once all desired modifications are done to the report it can be saved using the procedure discussed earlier The final report can be visualized by clicking on the Report Preview on the toolbar O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 413 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 17 Appendices Appendices 17 1 Appendix A Project Files and Di
246. each display object The color Palette settings can be modified by selecting one of the display elements and clicking the button in the Palette field of the Display Settings table The Palette window will appear as shown in the figure below 4 Palette ig x 0 Value 39574 5 Em a NE CNET COLOR E Reset Change color Add Delete O Mu 9 The default color setting contains a gradation of seven colors ranging from a dark blue at the minimum value to a dark red at the maximum value This range of colors and the values associated with each will be reflected in the Color Legend for the selected display element Changing Color Values The parameter values associated with each color can be changed by typing in a new value or by clicking on one of the color boxes beneath the color bar and dragging the arrow to a new location on the color bar Changing Colors The color for each color box can be modified by selecting the color box and then clicking the Change color button or by clicking the button for the color you would like to change Each color can be selected from an RGB 16 million color palette Adding Color Intervals In order to display more than seven color increments additional colors can be added to the color scale by clicking on one of the colors in the color value table and then clicking the Add button A new color entry will be added with a value midway between the previous
247. ect the desired unit from the drop down box Ceo wy If Local Projection Type is selected the project coordinate system cannot be changed once the project is created Furthermore all imported spatial data must already be expressed in local coordinates as HGA does support conversions from projected geographic coordinates systems to local systems Depending on the projection type that you select you may also be required to select an appropriate Geotransformation for your project If required the following dialog will display O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 101 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Please select area oan x Configure Geotransformation A geotransformation will occur between the following coordinate systems MAD 1927 UTM Zone 1 N GOS W s 1984 Please select the area that best describes the data extent Jamaica Turks Islands Alberta British Columbia Manitoba Ontario Newfoundland Nova Scotia Quebec New Brunswick Northwest Territories 4 Simply select the area that best represents the spatial extent of your geographic data from the list and then click the Ok button Note You will not be able to create the project until you have selected an area For more details on defining geotransformation settings please refer to Appendix G Configuring Geotransformation Settings Once you have specified the projects settings select the Next button to proceed to the final step of the New Project wizard
248. ected from both the Parameter Sample and the Parameter Result tables and therefore when you open this template in Excel you will find both a worksheet was created for each table If however you select the Grouped Sheets tab you will notice that the fields are presented in another way Here you will find the tables that are related to each other by database foreign keys are grouped on a branch When you select the child table lowest branch you will find a list of ALL fields of the related tables below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services EDD Template Designer ca jw 7 29 Eg al Template Version Submission URL Template Version URL C REN ERN Location Soil Sample Template Format Sheet Name E Parameter Sample E Aquifer Test View Names dX Sample ID Chemical Name Sampling Precision Fraction Code Dilution Factor Analysis Method Analysis Date Qualifier When you select fields from the Grouped Sheets tab you will create a template with only one worksheet You have some additional options when creating your EDD Template You can set a version number to keep tracked in case in the future you wish to update a template A submission URL can be set as either an email address or as an FTP folder to upload to A Template Version URL can be entered so that when using the template in the HGA QuickChecker and the EDD import routine it can be verified that it is the most up to date version of the templa
249. ection of the map that is defined by drawing a rectangle Place the cursor on the map and click once to define one corner of the rectangle drag to a second position to define the opposite corner of the rectangle and release the mouse button The selected section will be adjusted to fill the screen Zoom Out Provides options for Zooming out on the map Click this menu item and the map window will zoom out The current screen will be zoomed out by a factor of two unless it is already in full extent mode Zoom to Active Layer Zooms the map window dimensions to the extent of the selected map layer Previous Extent Zooms the map window to the previous window dimensions Next Extent Zooms the map window to the next window dimensions Activated only after Previous Extent has been used Custom Extent Allows you to manually set the zoom extents and the center of the Map Window When this menu item is selected the following dialog will appear Change iew E4 Window width 2733 m Map Scale le 17935 Center Es 535303 85 m T 48 4903 23 m UF Cancel O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 302 Provide the desired viewable width map scale and X Y coordinates of the map that will be repositioned at the center of the map window As the Zoom window width changes the Map Scale changes and vice versa The Zoom window width has equal proportions left and right of center TIP When you save the map project
250. ectuassaunesanuieuees 211 SEINES IE 211 fes ers ro ecc 212 s 3sdi c E 215 Well Construction Column soo der RE E EROR NOSDH FAI v cats REF ETE Hei dO ve eu Fu ux Vue AU EV REAR AAT AM UE VVTEC US rex CUTE CH Ue QOpd vs Padi uEs 218 sindici HR 218 interval Column ett ec Dc 227 SSBC cd PC C H 229 bi ieidgi Eol Ta al TT TED TIS T E E T A 230 SEINES M a E N T O E E O A N E EE 231 PicE re COH LG co oou dn E EEE E EEE EE caw EE DI C NO PUN TUE EDU QUARC EE EE EAEE ESSEE 233 sand EE 234 4 Create a New Borehole Log Plot Example 144 eere eere eene eene enero nnne eee tata anas ee eee tn nasse sese e enaaa 234 Adding bithology COLUMN 3 eoe cov aro YE EFRE CREE Ex OR NOE S PU QUE TV VIR e VY Yen Ere Se Eee EENE UY E er REEL e VeRO OPIRDVEUPEY S EET RA aosida 236 Edit Column Properties e o eed Vae ubere EO cu Lan dne e one Cod vei e eid dev ebat te dene esae tas es 238 SIE CUNY Data SOU Re RE EEUU TT 239 Add Well Construction Column essssesessesessssecessessssscscsesesacsscecsesecsssecscsececsesecscsecscsesecsssecscsecessesscsccecsssessesecscsesecsese 241 Add Plot C lUMNS ete HR Q 241 5 saving the Borehole Log Plot iiir evene Eo ius voted cb pe o ehe
251. ed This is done so that the data for the plots will not be duplicated HGA reads the necessary data for a borehole log plot from the database when displaying the plot To design a borehole log plot template select at least one borehole in the Station List grid Alternately activating a Station Group suffices for this purpose as all boreholes are assumed selected if there is no specific selection made in the grid Once a station group containing the desired boreholes is opened and at least one borehole is selected right click on the Borehole Logs node on the Project Tree Select the New pop up menu option as shown in the following screenshot to design a new template 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 235 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help f s Plots ES Mew Import Design Export resign Refresh Iv Refresh All In the New BHLP Design window that appears enter a name for the new borehole log design New BHLP design ES xl Mame Sample OK Cancel Help Note that the background color of the text box turns red if you type the name of an existing borehole log design indicating that you cannot have two BHLP s with the same name Modify your new template name slightly and the OK button will be re enabled In the Borehole Log Designer window that opens the borehole s you have selected previously will be made available in the Select Station combo box at the top left of the borehole log designer You can no
252. ed Color This option allows for coloring bars from the same sample date the same color on all bar charts For example if your plot data contains sample data from three seasonal sampling rounds spring summer fall you will see 3 instances in the grid at the bottom A different color can be assigned to each sample date Upon clicking OK each bar in the bar chart will be colored with the specified color and all bar charts in the series will share the same color where the sample date exists Classification This option allows for coloring the entire bar chart a certain color based on where it lies within a specified criteria For this you must provide a query that contains a field that will be used for the criteria identification When you select this option you must map to this field and you will then see the min and max available for this field as shown below You can then define the number of classifications default is 3 and the data range will be separated into equal number of parts At this point you can specify the color and the label 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 194 Bar Chart Color Settings p E x Define Color Settings C Graduated Color Classification Select a field that contains the classification pH ad Min D Max 7 96 Number of Classifications 3 Color Break value Label 2 65333333 0 265333333333333 EN 530666666 2553333333
253. ediately show up in the Design window press the Refresh button in the Fields frame as circled above To see the ADO Data control for the report click T on the button KA ADO button in the Detail section of the Report body design also circled above Then right click and select Properties A dialog similar to the one shown below will appear 2014 Schlumberger Water Services a Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Properties E X Provider fe DataSourceName o UserlD Doo O O Password Po ConnectionString Provider SQLDLEDB 1 ntegrated Security sspi Build Source SUL SELECT FROM lithology WHERE Stationz2 ORDER BY Station cancel e In the ADO properties under Source SQL you can see that the SQL string has been automatically created for you based on the table selected in HGA In this example the SQL string basically states Select all fields from the Lithology table where the Station ID is 27 and order by Station If you are familiar with the format you may modify the SQL string here and update the report design After the report is saved a node will be created in the Project Tree under the Reports node with the appropriate report file name Currently HGA requires that all reports be saved under the Reports folder which in turn is created within the project folder Although the Report Manager allows you to open reports from any folder only those saved under the Reports folder of your project will b
254. efault Query Type is the Standard Select Query which is the query type for this example We also have the option to specify the location of the Query The Select Queries will be stored in the Queries branch of the Project tree however you can create folders to organize your queries You can select the folder where you wish to save your query For this example we we will leave the default which will save the query to the main Queries branch i e not in a folder oelect OK to create the query By default the only field selected to be displayed in the query is the Station Name We are going to add other fields to the display fields Let s select the BHLP Map Plot and Plume Ready option this will automatically add several fields to the Display Fields section and will make the query available in other modules within HGA Expand the tree in the Available Fields section to find the TOC field under the Description category and the Location table Double click on the TOC field notice it has been added to the Display Fields section Now we will add a condition to the Query Click once on the TOC field it will become highlighted blue and drag this field into the blank Conditions field under the Expression column The TOC field will be added to the Query Conditions Alternately you may use the Add button on the bottom half of the conditions section to add conditions then define them manually 2014 Schlumberger Water Serv
255. ego nean in aea 9i ea Ta Ng Von Vara e RE REO RS eua AUF RES NET Nga sao Ehe Eee uas 356 O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services oe Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 4 Display Settings estais nieiipiaiiu a rec a Oa a eO E nuns ceuausctuconuceealanscadeade 357 D fa lt Settings cod oer ERE RERD Ren D eunt ne ce beat ep esn ce cie dub os du uc e asuas Da ren ES OIDQ Peu us Corre doe u en veR Tea fou ade IM P VUE Un TEE TUS 359 Resetting ODUIODS c ioa ava snis een v eepi e apaa REA E READ REPRE CH era EYED EE sears cneavevacadeceduceseenes reus ven cadenmensedsercesvercvaeveuveussens 360 Projecr Display Settings rinon Dee eoe RR AERE RR EDI AER SER OR SEES Eee Un MERO NR deae E ean ER enu es tod Un cho EORNM OPE CE RE VEREOR es Eo 0P Qu DONE RAT RUE 360 AMIS Display cR TREE TDI LUI E 362 SitemapiDisplay Settings ncnion ee ees Ye eiebe a idet bes i E COS lees tasa Vebia er sesdie uten Cebu vu TT epe ee pans 363 Surfaces Display Setti gs eder vanne Pneu at vane Ya HER taedet ba aT Dee o vae EUN ER OSa LaLe CET CI NE pei n VE ER NE AEN ETET EKA AP KENERE CE RUE 365 5 JPlumesDisplay Settings Suensosedasiateivevdeiion deret b eid d Fed oen OA se eroi o E DeU er o puEo Ped edv rns EVER FER UE CER RUE 367 Exstiligr or ttr EE 367 Color Maps ceo ETE SY 370 PSOUIN CNV NAS cence ETT DTE TIT DES E 372 Color Palette dea verc Te se e ves cvm Le Ea ducti e cnt dc c m ott uM cc CA tera M Sc uS 375 C olorLegend LE PR 376 6 Cross Section Data Display Se
256. ehole Log Designer Sample si B nj xj Select Station m Y m Elevation m TOC m I3B r 36212 69 487 4030 I 323 50 324 50 E E3 Design FI Litholooy E3 LithologyE ntities O Well Construction Save Save As Coarse Add Group Sraa Edd Galunin Add Plot Series e Medium Sand Caphon Ferrers Gravel v Live update Agli on 100 100 The Add a Plot Series window will open as shown in the following screenshot O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services oma Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Add a Plot Series i Flot Senes Typ f Depth Interval Description Time Mass Length Pumping Hate Conductivity Concentration Recharge Equivalent Concentration Category Unit X Choose the Plot Series Type enter Plot Properties as required then click OK to create the plot column Next the Plot Entities must be defined Click on the Plot Entities sub node to expand the Entities options as shown in the following figure O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter oma Borehole Log Designer Sample _ px Vithidbugy Vcl retraction Plut ba E CepthPlotE ntities Chir n 4 Gravis fesdinorel rad Erawa 35 4 lines rbd For a Depth Plot you must define the following e A Data Source this may originate from a Data Table or a Data Query Select the format you wish to use then selec
257. eholes gt Data Ca 5 Name megan wl Boreholes with plot da a Lab QC Stations Zal an Geologic Descnption A W Monitoring Wells Example Station nol ul QC Monitoring Wells s logy Hydrogeology Modeling Features Fractures al Soi Bonngs a Fromim Tolm xol type Descnpbon Feet i i A Clay thicker than im Cla Ml Sol_Borings wah TCE Ia Coarse Sand Fn H Queries amp 7 Time Series Plots D ad Crosstaba F Borehole Logs Map Projects H Cross Sections 30 Views t ul Reports 1 i Li j 15 000 Fine Sand n 1 Limestone M 2 17 Spatial Geo Point Making use of the spatial geo point option within SQL Server 2008 R2 or later we can have a more direct link to ArcGIS When creating or upgrading HGA projects to version 2012 or later and using SQL Server 2008 R2 or later there will be a new field called geo point in the Location station table We have hidden this field from your view in the Main HGA view as this is a system field that is automatically calculated based on the X and Y fields Additionally any Map Ready queries will now include this field as well ArcGIS is able to recognize this field and be able to plot your stations using this field Any time you make changes to your X and Y coordinates in HGA for example adding deleting or editing the geo point will be automatically recalculated Therefore all you need to do is select the refresh b
258. el Database Help version eee Workbook Select Workbook Options gt In this dialog select the Excel version from the combo box Press the Select Workbook button and the following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 421 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Select Workbook Database Mame List Files of Type Excel Files xls EN Cancel Help I Read Only H Directories E Aodbcesdata sources ER cA gt Program Files Common Files gt ODBC f Data Sources Drives LE Network From this dialog browse to the drive and directory that contains the source file Click OK to select this file A confirmation dialog will appear listing the Excel format and filename as shown below ODBC Microsoft Excel Setup ki Ea Data Source Hame ok Wescrption Database Version Workbook Cancel Help DA SS ample Stations xls Select Workbook M Use turent Director Click OK to proceed Options gt 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices oam Select Data Source Ei Ea File Data Source Machine Data Source Look in Data Sources bi DataSourceName DSN Mame DataS ource ame Mew Select the file data source that describes the driwer that you wish to connect to You can use any file data source that refers to an ODBC driver which is installed
259. elect LAS file The first step requires selecting the import package and data SOUICe Select data souce LAS File a Spacity a data transfer package Create an import package or select from existing packages The import package contains mappings from previous import sessions and allows you to save time when importing multiple source files of the same format Package name x Description p W Save change to this DTS package Select the data source Well Infarmation Description Unit Data ce Ee The first step requires selecting the data transfer package and data source A Data Transfer Package DTP is designed to store all settings of desired import operations that may be repeated from time to time For example importing several LAS files containing the same measured parameters The DTP contains information about the data source the selected destination table s matching between source and destination tables and fields source units and a number of other settings You may create an import package or select from existing packages All Data Transfer Packages if any are listed for selection at the beginning of all data transfer operations If an existing package is selected the import routine loads all information stored in the package The information can then be reviewed and updated as desired before as you move through the data transfer operation After selecting the package select the
260. elected cross section when displaying elements such as geophysical plots and well screen intervals the borehole log plot can be a valuable asset when creating a cross section interpretation The BHLP layout settings is shown below 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor ome BHLP Layout Settings xj Visible Horizontal Offset D OF Cancel In the BHLP Layout Settings dialog there are several display options available BHLP Template select the desired BHLP template from the list Visible show hide the BHLP on the cross section In the grid in the middle of the dialog select which stations should display the BHLP on the cross section selecting too many stations may result in a crowded display 14 2 5 Help Launches HGA Help placing the focus on the Cross Section Editor section 14 3 Cross Section Interpretations Creating the Cross Section As mentioned earlier cross section locations must be drawn using the Define Cross Section Line option or the CrossSection Line button ada in the Map Manager See Chapter 11 Defining a Cross Section Line for details on this procedure Once the cross section line is defined the corresponding cross section can be created from the Map Manager as follows In the Map Manager select Tools gt Create Cross Section from the main menu or click on the Show Create Cross Section button all on the toolbar Click Yes to create the cross section the na
261. entered text does not fit within the allotted frame CanShrink Allows you to set whether you want the text field to become smaller if the text does not fill up the allotted frame DataField Allows you to attach the field to a datafield in a project through a DataControl e g ADO If the field is linked to a DataControl select the desired data field from the drop down menu All fields linked to a DataControl in a current report are listed in the Fields window under the Report Navigator tree SummaryDistinctField Specify the field name of the field used in a distinct summary function SummaryFunction Set the function to be used for aggregating data SummaryGroup Set the name of group section for summarization SummaryRunning Determines whether the summary is a running value or not SummaryType 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 392 Determines the type of summary to be used 16 2 2 3 Check Mark Value Allows you to determine whether the starting condition of the checkmark is True checked or False unchecked 16 2 2 4 Image LineColor Style Weight Set the properties of the lines borders for the object Picture Select the picture you wish to display in the frame Supported graphics formats are bmp ico cur jpg gif and wmf SizeMode opecify how the picture will be displayed in the frame Clip will display the picture at original size and if the frame is larger than
262. enu bar Alternately the Navigation Panel can be loaded by clicking the Hide Navigation Tools button located on the top toolbar The Navigation tools panel contains several tabs e Rotate tab controls the rotation of the 3D image around the X Y and Z axes of the Display Window e Shift tab controls the location of the 3D image along the X Y and Z axes of the Display Window e Light Position tab controls the location of the light source for the 3D image e ime tab allows you to adjust the animation time when Mewing Plumes e Plume Browser tab is used when displaying Plumes and provides a summary view of plume data using slices or isosurfaces 15 3 1 Rotating the Image The Slider Buttons are used to rotate the display window along the selected axis or shift the view within Display Window The X axis is oriented horizontally left and right across the Display Window Y axis is oriented vertically up and down the Display Window and the Z axis is oriented into and out of the Display Window w Shift Rotate Screen X and Y Rotate Model andr 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 353 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help The image orientation and location can also be changed by right clicking anywhere in the 3D Display window and selecting one of the following options e The Shift option allows translation of the map region in the plane of the screen by clicking and dragging the mouse pointer in the desired direction e The Rotate
263. eoreferenced Export Map Provides options for exporting the current map view to a Raster Image file Supported file types include Bitmaps BMP JPEGs jpg and Enhanced Meta Files EMF Enter a filename and choose the file format and click Save An Export dialog will appear with settings for the image file as shown in the following figure Scale Factor Luality E J Oe 85 0 100 Scale Symbolo Esport Depth Falette Mn Sumbology Scaled f 256 Colors Default Half Tone C Web Safe C 24Bit Color C Grays With System Colors Source Depth C Line Sumbology Not Scaled C All Symbology Scaled There are several options for modifying the image Scale Factor Choose a scale factor from the combo box This factor will determine the resolution of the exported image The greater the factor the better the resolution will be Quality Using the scroll bar define the image quality This option is available only if the JPEG export format is selected The greater the percentage the higher the quality will be The image size is also directly proportional to this value Scale Symbology Determines if the scale factor will be applied to symbols and lines Export Depth Choose the color quality for the exported image Palette Determines the color palette to be applied to the exported image The Palette and Color Depth options are available only for bitmaps BMP and enhanced Meta File EMF Properti
264. eport Editor One interesting feature provided by the Report Editor is that of generating a report based on specific values For example a report that displays chemical data for all stations can be modified to only generate reports for a given station and or chemical The SQL statement is usually composed of the following four parts SELECT Field1 Field2 Field3 FROM Table Name WHERE Condition1 AND OR Condition2 ORDER BY Field1 Field2 Field3 where the highlighted words are internal to the SQL language and the terms in the brackets are optional To modify the data source information of the ADO control in your report O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 398 Select the ADO control by clicking on the appropriate icon on the toolbar Display the Properties explorer window if it is not already visible Select the Custom properties option by clicking on the button next to this item A dialog will appear Provide or modify the desired options 16 3 Report Viewer Window The Viewer allows you to visualize the final report as it would be printed It can be considered a print preview of your reports Once your report arrives at the viewer it is ready to be printed saved in the native binary format of the Report Editor or exported to the various formats A report preview can be generated by clicking on the E Preview button from the Designer window s toolbar A sample of the Report viewer window i
265. er Water Services The Data Transfer System 122 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2013 Demo Project View lt j Modules H Database Help iw a3 uu cAOMmee A av agile Station List Station Data Data Query Data Filter 3 3 Station Groups id 4 15 of 152 dB 26 id eT Bes xd All Stations Stations Example Station a Borehokes Name Data Category MJ Boreholes with plot da 22 52 mmm NN E oe a Monitoring Wells xample Station IE 2 QC Montofng Well Uthology Hydrogeology Modeling Features Fractures wf Soi Bonngs Fromim Toim sol_type Descnpbon x WQ Stations ME Clay thicker than 2m al Sol_Borings with TCE t gf Queries s M Time Series Plots 10000 15000 Fine Sand ai Crosstaba F Borehole Logs Map Projects F al Cross Sections iti ki aa 0lad ry js OHS Bll die Coarse Sand 30 Views ul Reports 6 4 Chemical Use this option for importing your chemical data samples and results when stored in an xls or xlsx file Please be aware you need to have a primary key on your Result table that consists of the Sample ID and Chemical Name fields in order to import your chemical data with this import routine Please see Template Manager section for further information on setting a primary key Step 1 Choose a Data Source Select the source file you wish to import and you will see a preview of your data You also
266. er to see the water level dates displayed beside the symbol you must map the appropriate Well Construction Drilling Water Level Entity fields as shown below the data source may be a table or query O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 226 H E Scale E E Well Construction H E Scale EE Drilling H E Lithology E E3 wW aterl evel CE WaterLevelEntities H E Pump m E3 Plug E Filing H E Casing of DrillingE ntities H E Lithology kj H Px 2 YS DataTable water Level D epthEntite Caption Depth Description Depth D ataField E TewtEntity Caption Text IMEEM HERES ri ep D ataField E Reducer BHLP Settings i x E53 BHLP Well Constructia ofS Well Construction Iw Visible Column Options Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reducer Scale_4 Appearanc Use Casings Color Angle 45 far 5 83 C Use Default Calor fas Help Apply OK Cancel Under the Reducer tab the appearance frame allows you to modify the display settings for pipe fittings that connect casings of different diameters shown below Select Use Casing Color to use the predefined casing color or select Use Default Color and specify a different color Use the Angle vertical scroll bars to change the reducer angle NOTE The reducer angle must be within the range of 5 89 The reducer is not drawn to 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 227 Hydro GeoAnal
267. ervices o Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help e vis E Station Groups 8 Queries Time Series Plots af Borehole Logs A Map Projects ted Cross Sections A 3D Views Reports aal paloi ade EH Ged 4 44 Gc b E Goal These items may be part of any project Each item is organized as a branch in the tree view with one or more items under each branch By selecting an item in the project tree you will either activate the appropriate tab or launch appropriate module to view this item You have the following options in the Project Tree This allows you to refresh the Project Tree This allows you to collapse all branches in the Project Tree This allows you to expand all branches in the Project Tree This allows you to filter for anything in the Project Tree simply start typing the name of the item you are looking for 1 This allows you to dock the Project Tree on the left P This allows you to dock the Project Tree on the right Additionally you can hide show the Project Tree by selecting the double blue arrows aal palog de You can organize each of the branches of the Project Tree except for the Reports branch as it has it requires its own structure by creating folders to group the items under the branch Simply right click the branch and select Add Folder Provide a name for the folder and now you can drag and drop items from that branch into the folder Here for example you can see how the Q
268. ery Builder The data query should contain the data set you are interested in analyzing along with the fields for a time series plot TIP If you are plotting a large water level dataset which was logged using a small time interval e g 1 sample per hour over many days use the average aggregate function in the query builder to query the daily average water level By doing this you will lower the number of data points in your query and thus lower the drawing time when displaying the time series plot The following are required fields for the Time Series plots and as such must be present in your data query e Sample Date or Time e Value for the parameter of interest e g water level chemical concentrations temperature pH conductivty etc The following fields are not required but are available for plot and series grouping and to take advantage of additional plot options Station ID Station Name Chemical Parameter name Measured parameter units Non detect ND factor Method detection limit MDL Uncertainly factor O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 189 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 11 2 1 Add Plot To add a new plot to the design click the Add button in the toolbar or right click on the Plot Page Design node in the tree view and select the Add plot menu option The following Add plot dialog will appear Plot Details x Name Plot Type Time Series Template None IY Set as Def
269. es The Map Project Properties dialog contains general settings for the map project This dialog is shown below 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 256 Map Project 23 E E x Description Geographic f UTM State Planar Non Earth Projection Upit C Others NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N meters Ok Cancel FJ Help In this dialog there are options for editing the Projection System units and description In the Name field a new name may be defined for the map project In the Projection Type frame there will be a list of Projection Systems supported by Map Manager and stored in the Database For each Projection Type a Projection must be defined along with a corresponding Unit The default unit for each projection will be displayed If your HGA project uses a local coordinate system all map projects must also use the local coordinate system In this case this setting cannot be modified and will be disabled IMPORTANT Currently cross sections cannot be displayed in the 3D Explorer if they have been created in a map project that uses a geographic coordinate system latitude longitude If you wish to display your cross section s in the 3D Explorer please be sure to create your map project using a projected coordinate system e g UTM In the Description text box you may define a brief description of the project NOTE Projects in the Map Manager can use co ordinate systems that differ f
270. escription H e Well Construction lt P Soil Testing lt 3 Soil Sampling lt Monitoring Event lt Mining Exploration lt 3 Geophysics H Well History Required field On the Mapping step you need to select the table you wish to import into In the example above selected the Location table i e the station table as am going to import new stations into my project Once have selected the table want to import into can see the fields for that table on the right hand side Any required fields are highlighted green The minimum required is the otation Name You will also notice that if the column headers in my source file an Excel spreadsheet in this case is the exact same as the field in the database they will map automatically It seems my column for elevation did not map this is because in my excel spreadsheet just called it Elev so must map this myself by picking it from the drop down Additionally need to indicate the unit for both the Elevation and TOC fields As mentioned prevously this is to allow for unit conversion during the import process You can see the database am trying to import into has the Elevation and TOC set as meters unit is found in brackets in the Destination column So if my source file is in feet need to indicate that here O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 115 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help amp Dat
271. esents information on how to transfer stations grids query results maps cross sections borehole log plots and 3D views into a printable report format which can be printed or exported for convenient transfer to your colleagues and or clients The Report Editor provides the following features Create and save Report Layout Templates Create and Manage Reports Import Reports Design and Preview Reports Save Export and Print Reports In addition the report editor Provides an easy to use Office like designer environment Supports VBScript and JScript events and expressions Provides Barcode control Allows report bookmarks and internet hyperlinks NOTE This chapter provides a brief overview of the features that the Report Editor offers For more details refer to the Active Reports on line help file This file is named AR2Std CHM and is found in the report folder of the HGA installation folder The default is Program Files Common Files Data Dynamics Active Reports AR2Std chm Simply double click on the CHM file to load the help file 16 1 About the Interface The Report Editor may be launched from HGA in several ways Select Project Report or click on the i Report button in most HGA modular windows Map Editor Cross Section editor 3D Explorer or the main window When this option is selected if there are report templates available for this module there will be a prompt to Select a Report Template before proceeding Th
272. esktopsehem import filesXE ample Chemical Data xls BI Format Dre Analysed Value per Row Start Importing Data Using Row v Use First How as Header Data Preview Worksheet NanD etects v Result Field contains Non Detect qualitiers e g 5 Select Result Field result value Step 2 Data Mapping This step requires you to select the category and result table you wish to import the data into Fields highlighted in green are required You also have the option to show the fields from the sample table this allows you to import information other than the Sample ID into the sample table for example the sample date As mentioned in Step 1 here you can map the newly created result value value and result value qualifier fields All data within your result field that appears as a string i e text will have been separated into the result value qualifier field While all data that appears as double i e a number will have been separated into he result value value field O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Import Chemical Data Wizard a Q Data Mapping Source Map Souree Fields to Destination Fields je ane Zi String aaie result value walie result unit result value qualifier s bebe Ie le xl Lu zample date ke 5 rt Remuired Fielde Destination Category Table mee Event a Parameter Rest z
273. ess Click on the Connection tab once more to display the original dialog O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 417 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 5 Data Link Properties Under the Specify the source of data select the option Use Connection String Click on the Build button and the following dialog will appear 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices 418 Select Data Source EE File Data Source Machine Data Source Look in Data Sources DSN Name Hew Select the file data source that describes the driver that vou wish to connect to You can use any File data source that refers to an ODBC driver which is installed an Your machinae In this dialog select from a list of data sources Since none are available click on the New button to create a new one The following dialog will then appear Create New Data Source E4 Select a driver For which you want to set up a data source Driver da Microsoft para arquivas texto AE 1 Driver do Microsoft Access mdb Driver do Microsoft dB ase dbf Driver do Microsoft Excel xls Driver do Microsoft Paradox db Driver para a Microsoft Visual FoxPro Microsoft Access Driver mdb Microsott 4ccess Treiber mdb Microgott dBase Driver dbf Kdteroe ohh HE see WEE irnar ARF Advanced Eu E j Back Cancel Select the ODBC driver format In this example select Microsoft Excel Driver as shown below
274. eted the records NOTE Once you click the Execute Query button all the data that is specified in the SQL statement will be permanently deleted from the database Because there is no undo function it is recommended that you use the select command before a delete command to ensure that you have the selected the correct records 7 6 Aggregate Functions Select queries within HGA may include an aggregate function The following functions are available e AVG Returns the average value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e COUNT Returns the number of items in a collection e MAX Returns the maximum value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e MIN Returns the minimum value of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e SIDEV Returns the sample standard deviation of a numeric expression evaluated over a set e SIDDEVP Returns the population standard devation of a numeric expression evaluated Over a set SUM Returns the sum of a numeric expression evaluated over a set VAR Returns the sample variance of a numeric expression evaluated over a set using the unbiased population formula e VARP Returns the population variance of a numeric expression evaluated over a set using the biased population formula You can specify the function within the Query Builder by selecting the appropriate function in the Display Fields section in the Function column for the appropriate field Display Fields Function Exp
275. eter List Field m Category Monitoring Event Category Monitoring Event Table Parameter_Result Table Parameter Fiesul Field Analysis Method Field Chemical Mame Cancel 10 2 6 Check Holding Time Settings Holding time is the length of time a sample can be stored after collection and prior to analysis without significantly affecting the analytical results This QA QC check will compare the Standard holding time with the holding times of your results The holding time of your 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control results will be calculated by comparing the difference between the Sample Date and the Analysis date Any results that have a holding time greater than what is specified in the QAQC Reference table will fail this check Holding Time Settings Any holding time above the Standard Holding Time will be highlighted ou can configure Standard Holding Time fram the Frapec Praperties QAQC References menu Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color You can enter your QAQC references Standards by selecting Project Properties QAQC References OAUC References MethodName m l ical Name _ Standard Detection Lii J EPA 5242 Rev 4 1 EPA 5242 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 41 EPA 524 2 Rey 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 m EPA 524 2 Rev 4 1 US EPA 8270 E 3X 4 434
276. evation Screen from z 314 13 314 13 314 13 314 13 313 42 313 42 313 42 313 42 313 42 313 42 322 95 322 35 322 35 382 35 322 35 322 35 309 32 309 32 309 32 309 32 309 32 309 32 235 26 235 26 235 26 235 26 235 26 235 26 oss Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help to Zin the 3D Interpolation to generate your plume NOTE It is recommended that the X Y and Z fields all be displayed with the same length units Interpolation Method Available interpolation methods include e Krigging default and e nverse distance Advanced Settings Press this button to see advanced settings for the selected interpolation method For more details see Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings Interpolate log values This option will interpolate the log values of the data points and then invert the log value distribution This option is useful when interpolating data with a high degree of variance Add Data Source Define the various properties relating to the data source Data Source select a field from the data query that contains the data to be interpolated e g concentration or result value Name define a name for the parameter Date Field select the field that contains the sampling date if available Date Granularity This option controls how to accumulate the data items of various date stamps For example assume you have data for the following sample dates 5 stations sampled on 03 05 99 6 stations sa
277. f the Property in the bottom of the Display Tree Panel below the Setting table Although each display element has a different set of display settings there are several display settings which are common to most display elements Name Sets the name of the display element as it appears in the Model tree Visible Shows hides the selected display element On Off 15 4 1 Default Settings The Default Settings are used to define how selected objects are initially displayed when a project is first opened If Default Settings of the selected objects are modified the new settings may be saved and applied to all HG Analyst 3D Explorer projects The Default Settings include e Background Color e Title Color and Size e Axis Text Color and Size and Line Color e Legends Text Color The modified Default Settings can be saved by selecting either File Save scene configuration from the main menu bar or clicking the X Save Scene Configuration button in the toolbar The following Save scene configuration dialog will appear ini x fs 1s my ras Save scene configuration for HGA3D St Configuration M ame Delete Cancel Using this window the most recently viewed scene configuration can be saved by entering a name for it When you close 3D Explorer the scene configuration you have at that moment will be automatically saved as Default When HGA 3D Explorer re opens this project it is opened with the Default scene configur
278. f you do not have this field it must be added to your data structure If you want well casings drawn individually not within a parent casing define a value of 0 for the Parent casing ID Under the Customization frame define color source for the casing Draw Border Use Draw Border Use Default Color Use Material Image color use this option if your well casing materials were selected from a list defined in the list editor and each list item has a corresponding color Use Material Image will use an image from the database for the well casing if you select this option you must add an Image Entity to the Well Construction Drilling Casing entities as shown below and map to an image field in the database O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 221 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help a E3 Design Ei E3 Well Construction H E Scale EE Drilling H E Lithology BES WaterLevel H E Pump BES Plug H E Filling l E Casing zj Eg Screen asingE ntities P000 he BS D ilinaEntities 3 6 Interval gt kx Ho X 2 5 DataTable 7 Casing T E TapEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField fram BattomEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField to DiameterE ntity Caption Diameter Description Diameter D ataField diameter hi E ImageEntity Caption Image Description mage DataField Img TestEntitu Caption Text Description Text DataField material Define color for the casing cap a
279. face is a 3D planar surface defined by a constant parameter value in 3D space Isosurfaces are typically used for demonstrating the spatial distribution of a selected parameter For groundwater modeling purposes isosurfaces are generally used for O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 368 representing the spatial distribution of concentrations HGA 3D Explorer allows you to create and simultaneously display multiple isosurfaces for the one or more plumes in your project Creating Isosurfaces To create an isosurface click on the desired plume data set in the Model tree to highlight it then right click on the element and select Add Isosurface from the pop up menu Es c Alternately isosurfaces may be created by highlighting the desired element and clicking the Create isosurface icon located above the Model tree This will open the Isosurface properties window as shown in the following figure NS Isosurface properties lsosurace name Plume_4 Minimum value n hd asimium value 32721 sasurface value FOS sasurface color Show borders Color from palette This window is used to set the display settings of the isosurface as described below Isosurface name defines the name of the isosurface as it will appear in the Model Tree under the selected element Minimum value is the calculated minimum value from the interpolated data set Maximum value is the calculated maximum value from the interpolated data set Isosur
280. face value is the element value for which the isosurface will be created Isosurface color is the user specified color of the isosurface double click the color box to customize the color Show borders will display a color map of the element values on the borders sides of the model domain when the isosurface intersects the edge of the model domain Color from palette will use the element color palette to automatically color the isosurface according to the specified isosurface value Once the isosurface is created the display settings can be accessed from the tree view These are shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 369 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Setting Vaue Isosurface 1 Wisible O O Z OoOo o Iw L Iw I sasurface properties lsosurace value 5000 0 0 38034 625 v Show borders v Volume estimatation 99153 Visible check box shows hides the isosurface Semitransparent check box sets the isosurface image as semi transparent The Volume Estimation value represents the calculated volume that the isosurface encompasses for lower isosurface values will result in higher Volume Estimations higher isosurface values will result in lower Volumes The volume estimation works in the following manner When you ran the 3D Interpolation to create the plume data set you specify the grid size grid cells in the X Y and Z direction The volume estimation uses the number of grid
281. g Event Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History 2 22 fe fe We need to set an operator and value for our Condition You will notice there are several options in the Operator drop down list gt gt lt lt lt gt IS IS NOT and LIKE providing you several options to query your data from the database For this example select the gt option from the drop down list in the Operator column Enter the number 320 in the Value field In the Conditions section select the Source Conditions The options are Project Station Group and Database If Station Group is selected then another combo box will become activated where you can select the appropriate Station Group to be the source for this query If Project is selected then all stations in the project will be queried If Database is selected then the query will be applied to the entire database For this example we will use the default Project The Query Builder should look similar to the image below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 149 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Query Builder w36 luu s Query Name amp Display Fields Station with TOC exceeding 320 3 Conditions V BHLP Map Plot and Plume Ready A is he ew aa Rina Available Fields Description Location Station Name X Y Elevation TOC Station Type description addins Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing S
282. g the cross section line The cross section editor now saves the interpretation results to the database for various uses including e displaying the results of each interpretation in HGA e querying the interpretation table for any desired surface s or thickness data that can be used for groundwater modeling applications The final interpretation results may be queried for information such as layer thickness at selected station s top elevation s bottom elevation s layer type name and description When you create a Data Query in the Query Builder and expand the Description data category you will see the Interpretation Results table as shown below ioj xi Xo HE A C Station Group Query Data Query Design SQL View Preview Select a Query Display Fields Cross section model interpretations Function Expr SEREND Alas station id id Station Type station x x station y y Top station name name Depth to Bedrock nterpretation Results laver description Layer Description description addins gt nterpretation Riesults top elevation Top elevation Interpretation Results Interpretation_Results thickness Thickness Station ID i Interpretation Station Name X T Layer Description TX v Map and BHLP Ready V Use current projection system Slice Name Top Elevation Conditions Thickness Below Slice zl T i dub 4 4 4 4 Bottom Elevation Expression Expres
283. g the same file name and in the same Plume sub directory NOTE Currently there is no method of opening plume projects in the Interpolation tool to make modifications Therefore it is suggested that you save the data query so the 3D project can be quickly re created 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3 3 12 Borehole Log Plotter The Borehole Log Plotter BHLP is a tool that can be used to display detailed information pertaining to a well borehole Information related to a borehole that may be displayed through the plotter includes e Lithology information for each formation Description of the geologic formation The depth and or elevation of each layer Well construction details casing screens annular fill Charts that display one or more data types collected at various depths in the well including those resulting from geophysical investigations e Symbols showing sample locations groundwater levels etc The 4 icon in the main toolbar launches the Borehole Log Plot module For more details see Borehole Log Plotter 3 3 13 Map Manager This menu item loads the Map Manager The Map Manager can be used for creating and viewing site maps creating thematic and contour maps and defining cross section lines The Y icon in the main toolbar launches the Map Manager module For more details see Map Manager 3 3 14 Cross Section Editor This menu item loads the Cross Section Editor This module can be used for defining
284. ger ix edi rhpeuto FREE REUSEE RAYS YR PERSE Ux FUE SO E YES IE import oec t IE wee enous ERI LEE TE EROPAERESAN EN US FERRE EDD Template Designer esessesessssecscseceesesecsccecsesessessoses Query Builder 59 ont cesses eas Lesdess Mo ees uev Quality Control eio ep erede DEN UP Ox E ERU NU S eon PUE UE S Eu rea DE Material Specifications Editor List Editor etienne cudur ed ELA KU TERT EUN iiaa Event Planning onoesosvede E e ex Od ardere devi Vx a ea eae a Time Series PIOECIDIB roce rout SIE Y E REESEERAYE YR ERN UA UE Su gx In Crosstab ReBOEL o oe RETE EOOE CER CES DUE CERE EMAREE TREO TIS 3D Interpolation aes Borehole Log Plotter cx tex ao ae RE eh Nx eo e eene MapManager 22 iies exse ey seva an o od da s saa FER YR sEeU re Kg oa ropa DRo pa EEEER Cross Section Editor cioe rre S CVV XD e CERES a ER EE ane JD EXBIOPGE waasser naea utet e d PEAK REOR er i eaii LYnmu rgr t noren eon EEEE EEE EA AEEA AquaChem esssssesecsesessssececsesecsesecscseceesesscsccecsesessssecese Parameter List Editor s esessesessssessssececsesecsccecsesesseseoses 4 Database Manage DatabaseS ssssececsesessssecsscseceesesscsccecsesesseseeses BackUp Database rere rov e xr Vass ea ri exo Yea EU ee v geld Ta Contents oves uix ed uet vp eere Rp m VERE ADOUL uendenevas o mv bv ve vas a a aan Release NOTES cei dr aser odia ac dex Pe aan HUE RESVEENER UE ERE TEE EE MICWLOS EN
285. gging level Warning There are 4 levels of logging available e Error this logs unexpected bad things e Warning this logs the errors as well as warning which might point to impending errors e Information this logs errors and warnings as well as other helpful things e Verbose this logs errors warnings information as well as debugging information The Warning level is the default level however if you are encountering errors Technical Support may suggest to increase the logging level and have you reproduce the issue and then send the log file to help us understand the problem However be aware that changing the level to Verbose may have a negative impact on performance so you might want to lower the level once you have provided Support with your log file The HGA Settings dialog also has a Reset button which will allow you to reset ALL the settings to default settings 3 1 10 Default Tab Layout The Default Tab Layout will restore your HGA main interface to show the Project Tree on the left and the follow four tabs on the right O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Station List Station Data Data Query Data Filter orem oro ait Deme Uo Propect View Mres ja GD hel 2 wp E Pu zu r tul i sMEGSHS4 9M OA Bar pa Station Lint Sese Data ata Query Daia Pie ad Sater Gree J nu n RoPT Ses t plot ad ER RT m u a BRRRRRKKRRKRKRS ta i in a R an Secs SEI ect Qin E Any other tab
286. gner Explorer allows you to browse through the controls that are placed on the currently opened report It facilitates selecting a control for further editing Layout window provides the interface for designing the report Fields allows you to select one or more data fields for displaying data Simply drag and drop the selected field into the desired section of the report 16 2 1 Report Designer Toolbars The figure below shows a closer view of the toolbars used in the Report Designer window jev Bealme w The following sections describe the toolbar buttons of the TE window Main Toolbar 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 388 New Report Allows you to create a new report X Report Wizard Allows you to create a new report using the report wizard x Import MS Access Reports Allows you to import reports that are created in MS Access Open Report Allows you to open an existing report Save Report Allows you to save the active report H Save Report As Allows you to save the active report with another name and or format i e as a report template if desired La Page Setup Allows you to edit the page setup properties x Printer Setup Allows you to configure printer settings x Print Report Allows you to generate the report and send it to a printer Preview Report Previews the report before printing Undo Cancels the last operation d Cut Cut selected text or object from th
287. gs ee Bate ss IUBE M Semitransparent Z Level for bitmap 221 03 b Bindtosuface Mone 7 zi Surface ta bind Map v Live Update Apply To load a site map into the project select File Import Basemap from the main menu In cases where the sitemap is not appearing clearly because of the colors used in the DXF file you can specify a fixed color to apply to all lines and attributes of the DXF file The following settings are available for Site map elements Name sets the image name Visible shows hides the site map image Semitransparent sets the site map image as semi transparent Z Level for bitmap defines an elevation for the site map Bind to surface drapes the map over a surface If there are no surfaces available the only option will be None First load a surface as explained in the following section then select a O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 365 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help surface for the draped map 15 4 6 Surfaces Display Settings The 3D Explorer supports Surfer Grid GRD files to be used as surfaces in the 3D project Common surfaces may be a contour map of ground surface elevations or a water table contour map Once a surface is loaded there is an option to drape a site map to the surface for a truly 3D perspective E Site maps 0 3 VBx3DA EE AA lf BB H E LL eH BD Setting O Mame Wisible Z OoOo o
288. h Pumping Wells and Observation Wells Pumping Start Pumping End Pumping Rate Observed time Observed depth to water level Additional fields may also be mapped and the data sent to AquiferTest these include e Well Elevation e Screen Diameter e Borehole Diameter For your convenience these fields are included in the Envronmental templates in the Well History tables The following section describes these settings O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services BN Pumping Test Analysis settings Pumping Wells Pumping Fate Observation Wells Units Site Map meters Dimensions meters Time sec Discharge m 3 sec Transmizssivily m 2 sec Pressure Pa vw Project informatica Project Name Project Ma Client Location Category M appin Pumping rate wel History Screen Diam wel Construction Water Level wel History vi Borehole Diam wel Construction 7 Elevation Description i required information Analyze Cancel Heb In the first tab define the project units you would like to use for AquiferTest and populate the Pumping Test information O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services o Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Pumping Test Analysis mi x Settings Pumping ells Fumping Rate Observation Wells Data Source Select a data query that contains the required fields For Wells Location and Construction aquifertest pumpingtest water levelz X
289. has its own tab for the time series chart TCE Vinyl chloride 192 2000 620 230E Oe 2s ee ee Benzene Ethylbe mene 1954 La Le Le 1 1 193 19329 2DUD 200 DEZ ZDES 200 ee 200 2100m Schlumberger Water Services GB 37 Time Series Provided with HGA is a template for the Chart in Excel option called Template Chart xlsx You can modify this template by going to the folder where the templates have been stored O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts 32 see HGA Settings for more details and adjust it to suit your needs Perhaps you may want to change the logo etc Any templates stored in this folder will be available in the drop down list under the Template Selection option 2 13 DataFilter Tab The Data Filter tab allows you to browse through the database tables to see the results of all stations in a particular table You can select to browse the entire project database or a particular Station Group Then select the table you are interested in Select the excute button and you will see all the results The first line on this tab is the filter line and as such is highlighted in purple blue The filter line is similar to what you find in Excel when you apply a filter You can enter values to filter the list of what is displayed only to those values that you are interested in You can also highlight a
290. he appropriate Data Type from the drop down list Select the OK button and the new field will be added to your table 5 3 How to set a Field to use a List Would you like to establish a set of valid values allowed to be entered for a field You can do this by setting a field to use a List and then create the list within the List Editor When you select a field in the Template Manager you will find the option to set a List Style as well as a List Type O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 107 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Template Manager 9 ag EXE Search PR Field Color Properties Ce W e Description Display Name Database Name E ges rcgi Desorption Color colour E g Data Type F rom M a To String 255 Hyperlink VHE Soil Type C Show full fst of data types VEE Description DEE Consistency MAG Structure DEE ASTM Descriptor Fa B Default Value vL Odor EER Formation Name TERI Formation Unit ta Incre Mf Allow Nulla MAA Moisture MA Comment G s Hydrogeology E mE Modeling EE v zz Features Description E Fale Fractures E WIE Well Construction E uw Soil Testing vj Soil Sampling Ce Monitoring Event H WEF Mining Exploration H WEF Geophysics E ey Well History Era E ra a eee Unt Category Last chang ed oi on 01 05 2014 4 45 18 PM By DIR MGaertner You will find three options in the List Style drop down None this means there will be no
291. her et M owe Orem erm eet wwe mm Hetenoer ot mn wn LI Wenden woa onn ma Teemat Pet wwe Ino Teamet mt Pompat y Otten ter ga ane lereias m ew II Oreste aot ower imm ce gie Sw Ine Jovem en om os inam lesarski mal D va ma Jisanater mei Boar Mt w arem nt m LI Iaat et 3 sv nw lirest nel M r ms aome a ew m sree Pr u me LII aerga Mam Praa e LA Mp Compton Promotes Made OF gt Sam s eic mom Competes Patena Medie DH gt AM M ros men wrain tact Lasers printad By Lom mneger coo a c O E Comm m qnte Dati oninia ihare nem romi oort om Pe Oe ae imre rt ene 07 9b i Var Sania Tub Hb Q orto a Hi pa x Cow tian P mm teh amp Fe iae fe a ls ow er T ong ae um wea amp abe 9 0 99 Hm im tome 9 e imm oem i ads HF P P P P 1 an om 40008 06 E 2 aw on on E ul 7s am 000 0 a i an au 0 a IND so ame 640 amp cn au LI at Cd vx 1090 EJ a ax au om ou wz emu om a wn au oo on mu ITI E oc ou 10 a U an aus oon E o a om E co asm oon E oo ams oo t oco Li IT oc ams 100 ES so am oo m ocu ens im E o gm oo a Rey one oo an w om E x4 gu Tl at m an ams 1 0 ET 9 gt u au gl a e A EL as s M orprm Panete ted OF w WM s ei de ba gt Lodi u If you select one of the stations on the map you will find a pop up with some additional information Also the pop up will provide a link to visualize the water levels in another w
292. hide markers on the line using the Visible option Font Set the font for labels for the line markers Color specify the color Size Set the size of the markers along the line 11 5 Saving Exporting and Printing There are several options available for saving exporting and printing your plot page design Saving Once you are satisfied with the current plot page design click on the Is Save button on the toolbar The new plot will appear under the Plots node in the HGA tree Exporting To export the current plot page design right mouse click on the plot page design node in the tree and select Export Plot Page to Image from the pop up menu The image can be saved to the following graphics file formats BMP JPG TIF EMF GIF PNG Enter a filename and choose the file format and click Save Copy Plot to Clipboard This option is available for individual plots in the design To copy the selected plot to the windows clipboard right mouse click on the plot name in the tree or right mouse click on the plot in the viewer and select Copy to Windows Clipboard from the pop up menu You can O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 202 then insert the plot into a graphics or word processing application for further modifications Printing A plot report may be generated from within the Plot Designer and either printed or saved to an external file With the Plot Designer window open click on the Print button
293. hoose the Field Name which will be displayed as a label Customize the settings as desired Please note that for numeric fields labels will be displayed using the precision defined in the Set Field Precision dialog box when the HGA data is being loaded into the map project For more information please see Load HGA Data Note Flip option applies only to the labels that may appear up side down such as line labels Checking Flip will ensure that all labels will appear right side up Click OK to accept the settings Make sure the Visible box is checked and click OK to apply the renderer You can add delete and edit different renderers using the toolbar located under the renderer list 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 276 X Background 5ymbo OF Cancel iJ Help The renderer may also apply a background to the data symbols this background can be modified using the standard Point Style dialog Custom Renderers Custom renderers are renderers that have been developed by SWS Currently the only custom renderer available is the custom label renderer The custom label renderer is similar to the system label renderer described above however it provides additional options allowing for greater control and flexibility when displaying labels on the map Note Please note that system renderers and custom renderers are mutually exclusive i e you cannot apply both a system renderer and a custom ren
294. iable than interpolation Sdip Calculate the aspect and slope at each grid node This can be used to augment the elevation information The aspect is measured in degrees or radians clockwise from north and the slope is measured positively below the horizontal plane in degrees or radians Tautness 1 Controls the influence of the gradient on the results and may be used to smooth the interpolated surface Tautness 2 Controls the influence of the gradient on the results and may be used to smooth the interpolated surface Use Gradient Blends the gradient calculation and the linear interpolation calculation to produce a smoother surface KRIGING Kriging is a geostatistical method that produces visually appealing maps from irregularly spaced data Anisotropy and underlying trends suggested in raw data can be incorporated in an efficient manner through Kriging The program used called kt3d is available in the public domain from the Geostatistical Software Library GSLIB distributed by Stanford University and is well documented by Deustch and Journel 1998 The program kt3d from GSLIB performs simple Kriging ordinary Kriging or Kriging with a polynomial trend and uses the standard parameter file used by GSLIB If the semi variogram components have already been modeled by the user they can be incorporated into the program by choosing the appropriate set of parameters in the parameter file The semi variograms available include Spherical Expone
295. ialog Select a layer containing HG Analyst station data Select Information from the Tools menu or click on the o toolbar Click once on any station within the selected layer Information button in the O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 300 This window will display Station ID Name Elevation TOC and any other fields depending on the layer type If there are stations that share the same ID and are hidden behind the selected station then the scroll arrow buttons in the lower left corner can be used to view the information for other stations NOTE The information tool can only be used on shape layers that are visible and active Measure Provides an option to measure distances on the map window To use this utility P Select Measure from the Tools menu or click on the Measure button in toolbar Place the mouse cursor at the start point for the line The mouse cursor will change to a cross hair Click once with the left mouse button to start the line Drag the mouse cursor to the end point of the line To add a vertex to the line click once with the left mouse button then continue drawing to the new location As the line is drawn the distance from the start point to the end point i e the current mouse cursor location is displayed in a status bar at the bottom of the Map Manager window This is indicated in the sample image below Layer Information Station Layer Coord GC
296. icable for a particular view 3 Project View g Modules fy Database Hel Sn E P The following sections describe the items which appear in the menu bar 3 1 Project The Project menu contains options for project level actions as described in the following sections 3 1 1 New This option start the New Project wizard which is described further in the next section Creating New Projects 3 1 2 Open The Open menu item is used to open existing HGA projects Only projects with the extension VBH may be opened in HGA The VBH file contains basic information for the project including a connection string to the HGA database The 3 Open button in the Project Tree toolbar performs the same function 3 1 3 Open from Backup Use this option to open a back up copy of the HGA project and database This is useful if a remote client or colleague needs to open your HGA project and SQL Server database A back up of the SQL Server database can be made using the BackUp Database option available in the Database menu explained later in this section A copy of the project can be made by simply copying the project folder and its contents using Windows explorer O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services os9 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Open Project from Backup SQL Backup File D Documents Hydro GeoAnalyst Projects Demo Demo Backup SWS bak D Documents Hydro GeoAnalystsProjectssDemo Demo vbh Server MGAERTNER WAT SW S Refresh
297. ices Query Builder 144 Available Fields Description Station Name i Station Type ne description addins Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling l Monitoring Event Mining Exploration l Geophysics Well History 2 22 24 IE E We need to set an operator and value for our Condition You will notice there are several options in the Operator drop down list gt gt lt lt lt gt IS IS NOT and LIKE providing you several options to query your data from the database For this example select the gt option from the drop down list in the Operator column Enter the number 320 in the Value field In the Conditions section select the Source Conditions The options are Project Station Group and Database If Station Group is selected then another combo box will become activated where you can select the appropriate Station Group to be the source for this query If Project is selected then all stations in the project will be queried If Database is selected then the query will be applied to the entire database For this example we will use the default Project The Query Builder should look similar to the image below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help L Query Builder 3ux io Query Name TOC Exceeds 320 BHLP Map Plot and Plume Ready Use project coordinates Expression
298. ields that are present in your data query eX Y Z elevation of sampling point Value concentration value for one or more contaminants Sample Date if transient plume display is desired Once you have created a data query you may create a 3D Interpolated volume plume of the data To access the 3D Interpolation tools select Tools 3D Interpolation from the main menu and the following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services o Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 3D Interpolation j O x 3D Plume Project Hame scil plume data Add Data Source Data Source Mame Result Values R esult Values Date Field Date Granularity Sample Date Day Transient Plume x MEE Date Field Result Values Hesult Values Sample Date a Regia of Nodes Min 535200 0 Maw 536225 9 4o 535200 0 536225 j of Nodes Yin 467 4000 0 Max 4814385 3 40 481 4000 0 481 4965 3 H of Nodes zHMin 232 93 Max 325 79 Interpalate using HGA Interpolation method kriging Advanced Settings Interpolate lag values OF Cancel Help In the 3D Interpolation window specify the various settings related to the grid size extents and data mappings 3D Plume Project Name Define the plume project name One plume project can contain multiple plumes e g for one or more contaminants Grid Region Define the various properties relating to the grid size X Value selec
299. iew to the report editor k Selection Pointer button allows objects in the active layer to be selected HN Draw Polygon button allows a polygon to be drawn in the active layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable E Draw Rectangle button allows a rectangle to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is visible and set to be editable Draw Circle button allows a circle to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable N Draw Line button allows a line to be drawn in the selected layer This feature is active only when a line shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable Draw a Point button allows a point to be inserted in the selected layer This feature is active only when a point shapefile layer is selected and set to be editable A Insert Text button allows for text to be inserted on the selected layer This feature is active only when a text file layer is selected and set to be editable o Information button allows the information for the selected station or any other object such as contour lines to be viewed P Measure button allows the distance between two points on the map to be measured X Delete Selected Object button allows the selected object polygon rectangle circle line point or text to be deleted from the active l
300. ii ea OU aes EU er ERU I NEIN VAIO Tia 128 e ES ae eee cerca cect eect octane daa IN V ETENIM IA ID EID EE 134 Part 7 Query Builder 140 t Query TVDES _ s_ sedis iuebcbepesbouccusseddeidvacicvacediduncuansavedwedauhiehieonleucuuscdascsusipueusesediicussedesdeucunchcoueenmpwdeeesesaveueds 140 2 Ab tthelnterface NNNM 141 3 Standard Select Query Example 4 o ea vv ertet aU Nae ue evt abate cies bid ca atest ea eve Tru U dee DI Lage ee 142 4 Dynamic Station Group Query Example ssssssssssscssssssccssccccnnscccccnscerscanccsnsscsnessnsccsnscsvaccccceseccsaccccsseesenauazecs 147 5 Using SQL Commands Example o cesses eatis eteran ua viata Caan raw vena ce cerea cs qe Cs e ea ua su Quen Dueb on Eo PvE NEU eade 150 6 AsePregate FUNCTIONS edocti ang eoi Us Aaa eager ed ENE Lvl Qa M ERU NE rd Yr vYE Lad EU FrM a EN 154 Part 8 Event Planning 155 1 Aboutthed terfate eundo terat ori insi m iru cover tid dE ae udo Raa N Ea a Ice cbe uia Reds 155 2 Schedule Stations ainina iia o Ne D DU SEU PI RN TEE DEEP aaa aaia ERU RAUM aas 156 3 Event Plan Wizard aeiae E EENEN ENEE EEE EE UP INL Qd MDUTR REM TUER Ra i 158 4 Event Plan Closure issadvaiaueeicecesbeussdacudacacussucestcadenaesecctchusiucssuisasesieacvesdasauccceceracdenssaciuscessescosaanseaedavausensenes 166 5 Manase Event Plans Zasissisatausaiecieoetpa a t e doe aaaea aA Lese eae eae rues ede EAEN 167 Part 9 Crosstabs are Now Pivot Tables 169 P
301. imitations Although the Report Designer provides a detailed interface for customizing reports and templates it is limited in the following ways e You cannot print multiple copies within one print event e You cannot select specific pages to print e You cannot select a page range to print If you wish to print your reports using these settings you can always export the report as a PDF and print the report s from a PDF Reader 16 5 Creating Reports Reports for your project can be created from the various modules within HGA including Data Grids Data Query Time Series Plots Borehole Log Plots Map Manager Cross Section Editor 3D Explorer HGA comes with several prepared report templates for most database schemas The first two report types listed above can be created through HGA s main interface while the remaining types are created only while using the respective modules of HGA The following few sections present detailed descriptions on creating each report type O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor a 16 5 1 Creating Reports in HGA Main Window The main interface of HGA allows you to create reports in one of the following two ways e From a Grid create a report with the data in the selected grid e From a Data Query create a report using the results of a query Creating Reports from a Data Grid Follow the directions below to create a report containing a data grid Select the desired grid in HGA fo
302. indow associated with that stations e vem me iye peat eee CC M Qus mO amr ppm Ke S Sl m Cow Ijs F ew aoe e amme euwe LES mt Tem e 9 tuc m s remm n D a 1 b DA 2014 Schlumberger Water Services e Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help m e Water Level W 12 Windows Internet Explorer provided by Schlumberger Water Levels W 12 Feb 1996 Mar 1996 Apr 1996 May 1996 Jun 1996 Jui 1996 Aug 1996 Screen 1 3 1 7 Install the Demo Project You can Install the Demo Project from within the program by selecting Project Install the Demo Project there is also an option to do this from the Start Page The Default option will install the Demo Project to a Local Database SQL 2012 Simple select Next and then Finish to Install the Demo Project Install Demo Project Data Source 6 Create Project I oO Help me pick a data source Data source type Local Database Instance name sws Database name Demo Back However if you prefer you can install the Demo Project to a SQL Server database by adjusting the Database Type option O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Install Demo Project Data Source Create Project Help me pick a data source Data source type aplH di Microsoft SQLServer v Available Servers ed MGAERTNER WAT SWS2012 v is
303. ing a complete selection of graphical formats and features These include e 2D and 3D views of the grid Station representation showing lithology Imported Surfer Grid surfaces Display contaminant plumes in the form of isosurfaces or color maps DXF and Bitmap overlays on surfaces Light source position control Semi transparent objects Auto rotate tools continuously rotate the image around the X Y Z axis Record grid rotation to an AVI file This chapter provides a detailed description of the features and functionality of the various options for preparing and customizing a three dimensional presentation of your HG Analyst data 15 1 About the Interface 3D Explorer may be loaded from Hydro GeoAnalyst in several ways In the Project Tree select a project from the 3D View node Through the Cross Section Editor select a cross section and choose the View 3D option from the View menu When the 3D Explorer window is loaded it should appear similar to the figure shown below 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 350 Menu Display Window Bar VW LH edroGeao Analyst 10 Espl eer Fi Program Files HrzAnalestiPrajecte Demi raject V3 Hr acm gx eee EF T OEET Toolbar gt x lt E VetieuExagaerson 4 Display Settings Navigation Panel The 3D Explorer interface consists of the following components Display Window Displays the 3D image of the se
304. ing on a different location on the raster image All control points are stored in a table shown below which can be accessed by clicking Edit Control Points from the menu bar O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 266 B36987 2873747398 4973771 40055556 535061 246412517 1814433 1401 4657 537074 3616397415 1813555 3007 56 1 536355 3271 78395 4812577 930 6004 535631 637094599 4813653 15720517 E 537571 759289336 4812201 09712209 534812 301152791 1813842 02995296 538122 215810551 i1813272 3281153 Cancel Here you can review all of the control points To delete a control point simply click the appropriate row in the table and click the Delete Row button Click Ok to close the table If there is a significant difference between the georeferenced coordinates and real world coordinates check the precision of the georeference points and reassign if necessary Once the georeferencing is completed click OK in the Georeference window A confirmation dialog will appear as shown below a File attributes Source file name Swayne SWBAProjects Demo Praject amp temp temp img bmp Name in the project wapne D WIBSProjects Demo_Project temp temp geo BMP Cancel Click OK to continue The Raster Image will then appear as a new Map Layer in the Map Project CAD The Map Manager also allows you to import AutoCAD files dxf into a map project CAD layers may be built in a P
305. instructions for installing HGA and SQL Server Express If you have any problems with your particular system configuration please make sure that you followed the installation instructions precisely If the problem is still unresolved contact your hardware experts Finally if you are still having trouble you may consider contacting the SWS Technical Support team sws support slb com 1 3 Uninstalling Hydro GeoAnalyst There may be instances where you will need to uninstall remove HGA from your system e g if the software is to be transferred to another computer or if you need to reinstall it on the current computer Before uninstalling the HGA software package from your system we strongly recommend you to make backup copies of all your HGA projects and databases These include your entire HGA project folder and all its contents Simply copy the Project directory and its O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help contents to another directory If you are also uninstalling your SQL Server make sure to also back up the SQL Server database s or else you will permanently lose your data For more details see BackUp Database To uninstall HGA Locate the Add Remove Programs option in your Windows Control Panel Select the HGA software as the program to be removed Follow the on screen instructions Once you are finished re boot your system to ensure all system files are updated 1 4 HGA Demo Projec
306. ion Use the r button to save the specification it will now be available on the Existing opecification side of the tab Use the button to import images file bmp or jpg to be entries in the specification Use the button to import names for your entries in the specification Use the V button to export the specification Creating a New Specification When creating your own custom specification you may borrow the names and images from existing specifications Use the gt button to copy a single entry from an existing specification to your custom Specification Use the gt button to copy all the entries from an existing specification to your custom Specification To select an image to be associated with an entry simply select the image cell and you can browse to the location of your image lt _ lt Please Note If you want to re use this custom specification in a new project you must save the database template Then create a new project with this new database template and the specification will be available For details on saving database templates see the Template Manager section Exporting the current template as a Database template 3 3 7 List Editor The List Editor provides the ability to create and customize lists for any field allowing for efficient and effective data entry A list in HGA may be considered as a lookup table they become drop down lists within the interface i e on the Station Data tab
307. ion table within this tab 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 25 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help amp Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 1 Demo eel x Project View P Modules E Database Help jee SRS 50 04 tO m O A Bav PMD Non Station Data 3 Station Groups X 4 0 9 gw 3 All Stations 4 Boreholes Data Category 4 Boreholes with plot d z Lab_QC_Stations Uncategorized M Monitoring Wells r QC_Monitoring_Wells Soil Borings ID First Name Last Name Badge Number Access Level P WQ_Stations N Al Al fl jd Clay thicker than 2m gt Jane Smith JS_2012 0125 Level 1 Soil_Borings_with_TC 8f Queries 3j Time Series Plots Borehole Logs Map Projects Cross Sections H 3D Views Ll Reports 981 Palod dip Ready You have the following options in the Non Station Data tab qp This allows you to add a new record X This allows you to delete the currently selected record s This allows you to save the changes you have made E This allows you select which columns you want to show or hide 3 This allows you to refresh the data in the current tab This option allows you to export the data from the current tab x 2 This option allows you to print the data from the current tab to an Excel template 2 12 Data Query Tab The Data Query Tab will display the results of executing running a query When you select a query from the Queries b
308. ion time when the animation will end The Animate in selected interval option is used to animate the display element only during the Specified start and finish time 15 3 4 Plume Browser The Plume Browser tab is the location where you can select from pre defined color maps or isosurfaces for a preliminary assessment of the plume As such there are basic options for color maps and isosurfaces Once you have a better understanding of where the contaminants lie and at what time steps you can use the more advanced options in the Plumes node in the tree including e advanced isoline maps with color fill and line settings e color maps with clip at cut off options e display color maps on cross section lines e isosurface options including color from palette show borders and display volume estimation When Plume Browser tab is selected the following options will appear El Rotate Shift Light Position Time Plume Browser F Hal Y p Plume result_value j j j Options z style Colormap an XY Plane 0 Position 50 100 Be Wisible w Save Lolormap When the 3D project was created 3D Explorer will display the plume in the form of an isosurface by default The default isosurface value will be 5 of the maximum concentration value calculated as a result of the 3D Interpolation In the Plume combo box you may select the plume data field used for visualization you will recall that 3D projects suppo
309. ion to the SQL Server and the database you are trying to connect to You may require your IT professional or Database Admin to give you permission to a database if you are trying to connect to a Network SQL Server 3 Local Database did you want to try and connect to your local database that is installed when you install HGA You can do this in Management Studio just like you connect to other SQL Servers The naming convention is localdb instance name You need to ensure that the localdb is within brackets Additionally the default instance name is V11 0 take note that the V is a capital However you can make another instance within HGA within the New Project Wizard Simply enter a new instance name in step 2 and that instance will be created on your local database O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services
310. ions IMPORTANT Currently cross sections cannot be displayed in the 3D Explorer if they have been created based on a map project that uses a geographic coordinate system latitude longitude in decimal degrees In order to display cross sections in 3D Explorer they must be created in a map project that uses a projected coordinate system e g UTM where the units are either meters or feet 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 377 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 15 6 1 Cross Section Settings The Cross Section contains the name as defined in the Cross Section Editor x Stay on top v Site maps f HGASD 2 E3 Surfaces Ef Cross Sections Data Bf ER FS Stations E 3 Interpretations tI Getting S E EE Nemes AA d wb o d M Visible v B C 20 60 v 2 06 d tortor L Sets the label attributes v Live Update Apply The entire cross section may be set to Visible or hidden from view The Label Properties allow you to modify the following settings Visible turns cross section labels on off Text Color changes text color Text Size changes text size Box Visible turns the outline box on off Box Depth changes the thickness of the label Box Color changes the label background color O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 378 15 6 2 Stations Display Settings Under the Stations node there will be a list of the Hydro GeoAnalyst stations which are Es Stay on tap v EHE Stati
311. ision the lower the value the more precise the results must be to be considered acceptable It can also measure accuracy when one of your results is the true value Such as the quality control lab results for a split sample or the actual concentration of a known or unknown sample Coefficient of Variation CV less than The standard deviation as a percentage of the average The CV is a unitless quantity indicating the variability around the mean in relation to the size of the mean When used with duplicate samples the CV measures precision the lower the value the more precise the results Highlighting If a record is identified as not meeting the Template criteria specified above it will be highlighted according to the settings entered in this frame By default the record s Background Color will be changed to yellow However the user has the option to modify the Font the Background Color and the Border Color of the record by clicking on the appropriate button s 10 2 2 Check Spiked Settings A matrix spike is an aliquot of sample that is spiked with a known concentration of target analyte s prior to sample preparation Ideally there should be 100 recovery of the spiked concentration or very close to this The following settings are available 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 177 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Spike Settings Minimal percent recovery gb Highlighting Font Background Color Border Col
312. it will be automatically populated Otherwise this will be left blank If needed you can manually enter a conversion factor to convert the data from the HGA source to the AquiferTest project target units NOTE For station X Y co ordinates the AquiferTest project units must be the same as the unit system used for the HGA project for example if your HGA project is using UTM set the AquiferTest units as meters for some State Plane set the AquiferTest units as feet Currently there is no conversion for these units O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Pumping Test Analysis Settings Pumping Welle Pumping Rate Observation Wells Data Source Select a data query that contains the required fields for Time and Pumping Hates aquifertest pumpingrates Field mapping RequredData Match to Field Name id Pumping Rate rate m S day 1 15740 740 740741E 05 Start Time start date DATE TIME STAMP a640i End Time DATE TIME STAMP Bb4L Data Preview name jstat date end date rate 21 535492 900 4814477 19 W 21 6 6 2007 1 5 6 2007 1 1200 required information Analyze Cancel Help In the Pumping Rates tab the workflow is the same as earlier mentioned In this tab you must map the well name pumping rate and the start and end interval 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Pumping Test Analysis mi x Settings Pumping Wells Pumpi
313. item provides options for importing basemap layers to the current Map Project Basemap images may be Raster Images bmp jpg tif sid and others or AutoCAD files dxf Each format is explained below Raster Image A critical element of any Map Project is registering the image map with the correct real world coordinates This procedure is called Georeferencing Since raster images do not contain information on the site s projection system or length units these details must be manually added using Georeferencing Georeferencing assigns points with known coordinates to the image the image is then scaled and the map extents are calculated NOTE The Map Manager does not provide an error trap for invalid georeferencing points Georeferencing Raster Images If a Raster image is selected from the Layer Import menu a message will appear stating that the image must be georeferenced Click Yes to continue and you will be prompted to save the georeferenced image as a new file Save in E Map 1 ex Data d Wayne new bmp Selection J Station J Wapned temp bmp PF test3 bmp WI T est Site M ap bmp File name Save Save as type Heiss il Cancel NL N Enter a name for the new image The file will be converted and saved as a bitmap BMP This new name will be used as the map layer name in the Map Manager Click Save to continue and the Georeference window will appear as shown in the following figure
314. ithology soil properties hydrogeologic properties etc e Well Construction e g drilling protocol annular filling monitoring points casing materials well dimensions etc e Soil Testing e g SPT pocket penetrometer vane shear test dynamic cone ooil Sampling e g Rock Coring Soil Chemistry results Soil Vapor Moisture Content Particle Size Distribution Atterberg Standard Proctor Unconfined Compression Direct Shear Odometer Consolidation Monitoring Events e g weather conditions bailing field properties water quality groundwater levels groundwater chemistry Mining Exploration e g Alteration Mineralization Structure Samples Down Hole Survey Down Hole Geophysics Geophysics e g Conditions Gamma Neutron 64 in E log 16 in E log Density Well History e g Pumping Rate Pump Screens Top of Casing status All of the above data categories may be renamed and used differently if desired For example the category named Geology could be renamed to Surface Water and tables such as Catchments Surface Water Monitoring Locations Rivers etc could be organized under it Placing tables under any one of these categories does not have any effect on how the tables are stored in the database 2 7 Adjustable Windows When opening an HGA project for the first time the default window displays will appear There are two groups one with the Project Tree and one with the following four tabs e Station List e
315. ize Height specify the symbol height Width specify the symbol width Proportional use this option to create proportionally sized symbols dependent upon the result value Min value specify the min value for the smallest symbol size then specify the marker size Height and Width that should correspond to this value Max value specify the max value for the largest symbol size then specify the marker size Height and Width that should correspond to this value As you define the label options the Preview frame at the bottom of the dialog provides a live update preview of how the data series symbols will appear using the selected settings O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 200 11 4 Adding Lines to a Plot Best fit lines or lines calculated with user defined formulas can be displayed on any plot to do so right mouse clicking on any data point on the plot and selecting Add Line from the pop up menu The following Add Line dialog will appear FormAddPlotLine X Mame Line type C Formula BestFit BestFit Type Std Deviation Source Seres Ca Pernod 2 LI Cancel Enter a line Name at the top of the dialog this name will appear on the plot The following Line Types are available e Formula e Best Fit Best Fit is the default line type when selected the following settings are available Best Fit type select from Std Devation Moving Average or Exponential Moving Averag
316. ize Enlarge the map region to the full extents of the basemap HINT If it is desirable to use the entire image for the map use the Maximize option to expand the map region to the full extents Adding Control Points You can validate the accuracy of the georeferenced raster using Control Points Control points are simply locations on the raster image of which real world coordinates are known Real world coordinates can be derived from geographic sources such as topographical maps or GPS units By comparing the georeferenced raster coordinates with their corresponding real world coordinates you can determine if the raster has been georeferenced accurately To add a control point Click the 3E button from the toolbar Click a location on the raster image where the real world coordinates are known A dialog similar to the one shown below will display Control point M2 536387 2879747 Y2 481 3 1 400585 Ap 485 Yp 303 LIE Coordinates shown in the above dialog X2 Y2 represent the interpolated coordinates derived from the two or three specified georeference points for that particular location on the image You can validate the accuracy of these coordinates by comparing them to the real world coordinates of that location Note To improve precision you may want to Zoom In directly on the location before adding the control point Click Ok to accept the Control point You can add additional control points by simply click
317. ject database All reports that are created for your project will be retrieved from the database and are listed in the Project Tree when your project is loaded into HGA 16 4 Report Settings The Report Settings dialog can be accessed by clicking the Page Report button LU from the Main Toolbar This dialog consists of four sections Page Setup Printer Settings Grid Settings and Styles Each section is described below Report Settings Top Margin 440 Bottom Hh argin f 440 Lett Margin 1440 Right Margin fao A Gutter 0 Mirror Margins Cancel The Page Setup section allows you to set the page margins of your report page Set the Top Bottom Left Right and Gutter margins by using the appropriate vertical scroll bars Margin values can be set in quarter increments 1440 1 inch You may also choose to mirror the margins of facing pages by selecting the Mirror Margins check box O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 401 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Report Settings Papersize Default Printer width Height Orientation Printer Default Partrait C Landscape Collate Printer Default Duplex PaperB irr Default Printer Cancel The Printer Settings section allows you modify the printing options Here you can select the paper size from the Paper Size dropdown list box You can manually specify the paper size by using the Width and Height vertical scr
318. ject element consists of general project settings as shown in the figure below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 361 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help s Setting Background color i m Mertical Exaggeration Factor FU Interpretation type Geology Ds Rai Visible Iv Deor LJ 9 96 cub Title HAJS Vibe o v Tetcoo 0 i LJ Textsze LB GT ext frame ElTime Label Title Date 5 75 2000 Vibe Iw Testeolor OZ oZ i E Textsize 004 GT ext frame ElLegend Visible Tte Gel 0 015 Text calor Frame Frame line color vs Frame fill color E By default the project Title is the same as the project name and it appears at the top of the Display Window This can be moved to any location within the Display Window by clicking on the Title and dragging it to a new location Background color sets the image background color By default the Background color of the display window is black Vertical Exaggeration sets vertical exaggeration factor for the project Extend model to plume region When you load plume files into existing 3D projects they may lie outside the 3D domain created based on the cross section extents Use this option to re size the 3D domain to include the plume Interpretation Type sets the cross section interpretation type currently in view Only one interpretation type may be viewed at one time Choose from Geology Hydrogeo
319. k between two or more polygons or lines This button is activated only if an interpretation having at least one object is activated and at least one of the objects is selected For more information see Link Vertex Zoom In option is used to zoom in on an area of the cross section defined by a rectangle 2 4 Lal Full Extent button restores the cross section view to the full extents of the Cross Section s coordinates gt Q Information button displays information for the selected station Moving the mouse cursor overtop of a station will display the information Zoom Out option is used to zoom out from the current cross section view Pan button allows the user to pan the current view left right up or down Previous Extent button restores the cross section view to the previous zoom extent Next Extent button switches the cross section view to the next zoom extent T View 3D button loads selected cross section s into 3D Explorer O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 315 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help E View BHLP button loads a BHLP for the selected station 14 2 Description of Menu Items Save This menu item will save all current edits for the cross section to the current cross section project file VCP Close Closes the currently open cross section Export Model Layers This option allows you to export the model layer lines for all cross sections to XYZ text file format These file
320. l MET j SLE lconExpenence Lo aj The Hub SA5 Logo _ Other bookmarks Schlumberger Hydro GeoAnalyst Mobile EDD _ Stations 2013 Schlumberger Limited All rights reserved Build 13 8 7 1 Here you have the option to Add New Station or Submit the data that was collected so far If stations already existed you would find them by selecting the beside the Stations button When you select Add New Station you are brought to another page showing all the tables and fields from your EDD Template O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts a8 D Hydro GeoAnalystMobile x V gt C B https onlinesharehgacom hgamobile mobile edd testing station ws 1 Mew Tab E CarWash HI Hyperbole and a Hal CruiseControl NET 7 SLE 5 IconExperience Lo it The Hub SWS Logo C Other bookmarks Lithology Water Level Field Measurements Station Name X Pe Y Example Station Elevation TOC 2013 Schlumberger Limited All rights reserved You can see for this template there are four tables Location Lithology Water Level and Field Measurements The first table tab will always be the Location station table and you will be required to enter a Station Name All required fields are marked with an asterisk By selecting the Lithology tab you will see the fields from that table that
321. l as the Word template used for printing Event Plans The office template files are organized into appropriately named folders Do not adjust the folder names as this is how HGA knows which templates are available O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services e Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help amp HGA Settings Project StarttPage Help Template Files External Programs General Templates Location DADocumentsiHydro GeoAnalyst Templates Restore Files You will also find the option to restore all the templates incase you want to move them to a different location or if you have made changes to the original ones and want to revert back e External Programs Here you can specify the location of the AquaChem and AquiferTest program locations This allows HGA to launch these programs from the Main Toolbar O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services amp HGA Settings Project StarttPage Help Template Files AquaChem Program Location D Program Files x86 AquaCheml aquachem exe AquiferTest Program Location D Program Files x66 AquiferTest AquiferT est exe e General Here you can turn the Template Manager warning message on or off As well as find an option to set the Logging Level 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help amp amp HGA Settings Project StartPage Help Template Files External Programs General Shaw Template Manager automatically saves changes warning message Lo
322. l the data you can select the Validate and Submit button again If the QuickChecker does not find any problems with your data it will automatically open an email in Outlook with the email address specified in the EDD template and attach a zip hga file which contains your excel spreadsheet and the validation information This file can then be imported with the EDD import routine described in a later section 2 16 3 EDD Import To launch the EDD Import routine select Modules Import EDD Then specify the location of the zip hga file that was generated within the HGA QuickChecker Please be aware that you should not attempt to unzip or modify the file in any way as this can invalidate the file and cause difficulties importing the data O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts a i EDO Frps 1 EDG e Rem V abeat abite Loan I ui EGO Fe Type Selected af ELE F ie Loree F ELK F ilp ipi a EDID Fils Sayer Crk Suami af ie ee ee ee DEF l T I Cancel Hais validating Data n es T a s As soon as the file is validated you will see the Validation Results dialog appear Here you may need to answer a question before continuing For example the Validation found that some of the station names am trying to import do not exist in the database therefore can choose to append the new station names or reject records for stations that do not exist make my choice
323. lbar Click once anywhere on the polygon to activate the object 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor ase Select the Add Vertex tool from the toolbar Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Geologic interpretation layers can have a free form and do not have to conform to a conceptual model e g a sand layer may appear more than once in an individual cross section Layers may not have to continue from first to last borehole However to have a meaningful view of your cross sections in the 3D Explorer you must avoid creating overlapping interpretation layers When defining Geologic interpretation layers there is an option to snap the vertices of one polygon to adjacent polygons For instance if after drawing polygons and the cross section still contains gaps the gaps may be filled in by linking the vertices of the polygons using the Link Vertex option To use this option please refer to the Link Vertex in the Edit menu NOTE Moving a vertex of a selected polygon will also move the linked vertex of any polygons or lines that might have been linked through the Link Vertices operation 14 3 3 Hydrogeologic Layer Interpretations This option allows for drawing layers that define the hydrogeologic layers Aquifer1 Aquitard1 Upper Unconfined Aquifer etc based on relevant data in the st
324. lculate the output image size So a higher a resolution will mean a bigger image while a smaller vertical scale will mean a larger image Quality Using the scroll bar define the image quality This option is available only if the JPEGs export format is selected The greater the percentage the higher the quality will be The image size is also directly proportional to this value ocale Symbology Determines if the scale factor will be applied to symbols and lines Export Depth Choose the color quality for the exported image Palette Determines the color palette to be applied to the exported image The Palette and Color Depth options are available only for bitmaps BMP and enhanced Metafiles EMF Print Loads the current cross section into the report editors runtime designer Please refer to Chapter 14 The Report Editor for more details on managing reports Exit Exit the Cross Section Editor and return to the main window of Hydro GeoAnalyst Note that this menu option also closes the map manager O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 318 14 2 2 Edit Delete Deletes the selected object Delete All Deletes all shapes from the currently active cross section interpretation Add Vertex Provides an option to add a vertex to the selected object To add a vertex Activate the desired cross section interpretation make it editable Select an object that is a polygon or a line depending on the active inter
325. le GRID XLS Geographic Coverage Canada Datum North American Datum of 1927 Layer Forest related data basemap data GeoPlan Center University of Florida http www fgdl org Data Florida Geographic Data Library FGDL Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Floridawide and County Datum FDEP custom Albers projection in the HPGN datum Layer Various St Johns River Water Management District http sjr state fl us programs data html Data GIS data Format Shapefile and Raster Geographic Coverage St Johns River Water Management District Florida Datum NAD83 Layer Basemap Natural Resources and Images United States Geological Survey and USA Environmental Protection Agency http nhd usgs gowindex html Data National Hydrography Dataset Format Geodatabase Geographic Coverage USA Layer Surface water features such as lakes ponds streams rivers springs and wells United States Envronmental Protection Agency http www epa gow OW OW watershed landcover lulcmap html Data Land Cover Digital Data Format Coverage Geographic Coverage USA Statewide Layer Satellite Land Cover National Atlas USA http www atlas usgs gove atlasftp html Data National Atlas Map Warehouse Format Shapefile Geotiff DBF Geographic Coverage USA Datum NAD83 Layer Agriculture Biology Boundaries Climate Envronment Geology History Map Reference People Transportation Water United States Department of Agri
326. le must contain the same units and projection system as the current map project in order for it to be displayed properly If there are differences then the CAD file can be Transformed to the map project s projection and coordinate system From the Import DXF dialog click on the Transform button This will launch the Map Georeference window as shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 268 Georeference CAD Georeferc e O xi QAM Eg B k Georeference Point 1 0 000 m Y 1 0 000 m ee 1000 000 m x2 1000 000 m Distance Between Points 1414 214 m Map Layer E stent M1 121 537 im al 5 485 m ae 1125 743 m T2 153 273 m X Cancel Transformation is performed using two points on the DXF file with known coordinates The Map Manager does not prowde an error trap for invalid transformations Follow the procedure below to import a DXF file and use the coordinate Transformation option To set the georeference point click the Georeference button Click on the first map location where the world coordinates are known A Georeference point dialog will appear prompting for the X1 and Y 1 world coordinates of the selected location Georeference point AT 5351 22 Y 48 2838 Ap 220 Yp 293 OF Cancel Enter the X1 and Y1 coordinates for this point Click OK Click the Georeference button again Click on the second map location
327. le to import your data 6 1 General The General option begins with you selecting the file you wish to import It supports the following file formats txt xls xlsx mdb or accdb If you need to you can also build a connection string to another MS SQL Server and import data directly from another database Data Transfer System 6 Select Data Source T Specify import file name D Documents Hydro GeoAnalyst sProjectsDemo Sample Stations xls Build a connection string Start Importing Data Using Row Use First Row as Header lf Data Preview Worksheet ees o e ID Name X Y EHG 535646 83 4313320 23 BH7 536892 4813306 BH8 536420 15 481367151 BHS 5371735 48139643 BH10 535369 6 4814739 1 BH11 535141 1 4813116 5 BH12 536309 5 4814708 3 BH13 5362677 4812838 8 m 15 records E EECUBEEE e _ Once you have selected a file you will see a preview of the data Select the Next button to proceed to the Mapping step O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 114 amp Data Transfer System cum Type Select the table s you want to import into Map your source to the destination fields rce Mapping Search PO R Location 7 99 iUncategorized Destination Source Source Unit Source Data Type I V Description gt MEJ Location X degree Y degree Elevation m TOC m Station Type IE description addins lt 3 Geologic D
328. le you will find it in the list of Event Schedules You find also find it in your calendar 8 3 Event Plan Wizard You can create your Event Plans by selecting the and the Event Plan wizard will 7 appear The first step of the Event Plan wizard allows you to provide some basic information about the plan including the Name and the Start and End dates Additional option information can also be provided including the Field Technician the Primary Lab where the samples will be sent the Plan Approver and Comments regarding the plan 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 159 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Event Planning Wizard E e Event Plan mm uas BEEN j p Information Event Plan Information Stations to be sampled QAQC Analysis Event Plan Parameters to be Analyzed Plan iT di Additional Data Collection Start Date End Date Check List M Print 2 24 2013 gv 2 24 2003 By Field Technician Plan Approver Comments we oe ome eal Back The next step of the Event Plan wizard indicates which stations will be sampled in the plan If you had a schedule selected in the calendar when you selected the Event Plan wizard the stations that are due will already be populated Event Planning Wizard Event Plan Information 7 Stations to be Stations to be sampled sampled Parameters to be Analyzed AN Stations Additional Data Collection m _ Seanina Stations Chaco a ces GB 03 GB 04 GB 05
329. lect data source frame shown below Select MON files Select Data Type PLEASE NOTE IF unu select the Water column above Diver or Water Level with respect to Vertical Datum the water Level table will not be available for mapping in Step 2 See on line help for Further information Select data source MON Files C Program Files HG4nalysthExamples Diver Data MON MON File Information Table Name Logger settings Instrument type TD Driverz3 Logger settings Logger settings Logger settings Logger settings Logger settings Logger settings Logger settings Der E ls canal 1 4 o EON M HON SN O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Notes Select one or more MON files for importing into the project database This utility supports the import of MON files created by LoggerD atah anager Diver Pocket Diver Office Diver VisiINE and e SENSE Description ail Next gt Cancel Help 131 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Below the Select data source frame is the MON file Information table This table contains the datalogger information of the selected MON file To remove a MON file from the list select the file and click the Delete button X Select the Next button to proceed to Step 2 Data Mapping Make Mapping l i loj x Data mapping Motes Select Section Field Select table field A Mapping H Logger settings i Turbidity E Series settings Data 1 Lett tree view lists
330. lected elements Menu bar Provides menu commands for most of the functions Toolbar Provides shortcut buttons for some functions Display Tree A tree structured list of the available project elements Display Settings Displays settings associated with each element Navigation Panel Contains a set of navigation tools to control the position and orientation of the 3D image and adjust the light source location Loading Projects To load a 3D project select File Open from the main menu and navigate to a directory where the desired Cross Section is located or click the EJ Open button from the toolbar Supported files are HG Analyst Cross Section converted files with the extension 3Xs OpenGL Settings O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 351 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Use hardware accelerator Use MS driver Cancel By default the 3D Explorer will attempt to use the vendor provided driver included with graphics acceleration hardware If problems are encountered with the vendor provided drivers display performance inadequate then 3D Explorer provides the option to use the Microsoft Driver for Open GL The OpenGL settings can be modified by selecting Settings Options from the main menu bar then select the OpenGL tab The 3D Explorer must be closed and re opened before the new Open GL driver will be used Vertical Exaggeration In Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer the vertical exaggeration factor c
331. lers Vertical Exag 9creen WLevel Intersecting Grid Screen Symba Water Level Sumbo Gap between Wells a H 2 2 and Screen Pixel Ea Size l2 Fill Color a Coa P Fill Pattem OoOO O Has Outline Tes v Outline Color ci Outline width fi Cancel Help In this dialog there are options for the view settings color style etc for both the screen and the water levels The Gap between Well and Screen controls the distance between the station and where the screen is placed The larger this Gap value the further away the screen will be from its respective station Intersecting Tab During a cross section interpretation knowledge of other interpretations is essential In this dialog you can define display options for intersecting cross sections 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 329 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help E ditor Labels Fiulers Vertical Exag Screen WLevel Intersecting Grid View Intersecting While E ditin Intergecting Laver Symbao Outline Color mn Outline Style width in Pixels E I Model Layer Geology Layer I HydroGeolagy Laver Specify the color and line style under the Intersecting Layer Symbol frame In the View Intersecting While Editing frame specify the view options for different interpretation types By default all modules will be active The intersecting cross sections will be visible when you set one of
332. ll Profile xX Station List Data Query Data Fiter 9 Jt Sintia a Hu i i of151 1 AATE a icm Ehia plota j Ip Sishon Nama i xjr Timi i Elessa TOCIm Saton Typa A af Boreheles wih sie amp m z af Lah QC Sistions A Motong Weis a Qc Man onng Wel 53 71269 481403000 32350 535 15569 4 814 060 00 3807869 4 814 970 00 505 953 69 4 894 020 00 SHMEE 4 814 060 00 5354369 4 614 070 00 4 814030 00 J Sel Bong a WO Stations AF Cimy thicker than 2 AF Sos Bonngs weh T gt P Quenes iy E Time Serves Pints gt Bioneshnie Logs x Q Map Projects W mj Crmes Secbons is V ID Views B Reports 4 874 060 DX 4 574 030 00 4 874 000 00 4 814 381 80 53512874 4814378 70 3246S 395 35 GEB 34 53506576 464 32020 32305 324 05 r n Station Group All Stations Rows 151 Station Data l x H4 I1 fil i t Taga Stetans z GB 1 Nome B Date Catagory 5 P 93 Decpm ic 3 Libelogy Hydrageciagy Madelng Festus Fractures GB 03 z Fomim Tom Sallype Ready Additionally you now have the option of dragging any tab outside of the main HGA view and onto a second monitor 2 8 Project Tree Tab The project tree lists the following items Station Groups Queries Time Series Plots Borehole Logs Map Projects Cross Sections 3D Views Reports 2014 Schlumberger Water S
333. ll as the checklist Each page thereafter contains the information for what needs to be collected at each station Including the parameters that will be analyzed any QAQC samples that should be taken and any additional information that should be collected in the field while at that particular station 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 165 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help stat Date Fad 242012 End Date F 24 201 Field technician Plan Approved By GB 02 80 55292 43 478494 Parameters to be analyzed Overview Temperstu re pH field K Na Ca Mg CI HOOS F 504 NOS C03 These plans can be saved and printed out for field personel The templates used to generate the plan reports can be modified if for example you wish to change the logo The template can be found in the Templates folder the location can be found in the HGA Settings 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Event Planning 166 8 4 Event Plan Closure The Event Planning module will remind you to close an Event Plan 7 days after the plan was scheduled to be completed This can be adjusted in the HGA Settings The Event Plan Closure wizard allows you to close an Event Plan In the first step you need to select the Event Plan you wish to close by selecting the L browse button Once the plan is selected you will see the basic information of the Event Plan displayed Plan Closure Wizard Plan Closure E Collections Plan Closure Confirmation Field
334. llowing options Top Bottom Left Right Style Controls what data elements or series appear in the Legend choose from the following options Automatic Series Names 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 197 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Series Values Last Values Palette Vertical space Controls the amount of vertical space between each data element in the legend higher values will result in more space between each item in the legend Inverted Legend Use this property to reverse the order of items in the legend For example items in the order A B C will be inverted to the order C B A when this property is selected Check boxes visible Use this property to display a check box beside each item in the legend when active you can then use the Legend check boxes to show hide which data series are visible on the plot Font series color visible Controls the font color for the text in the legend Vertical Y Axis Pen width Controls the thickness of the axis line Visible Shows hides the axis on the plot Log scale Plots the axis values using a logarithmic scale Max value Controls the maximum value for the axis By default this value will be calculated from the selected data set Min value Controls the minimum value for the axis By default this value will be calculated from the selected data set Auto max value Restores the default automatic maximum value which is calculated from the selected data set Auto min v
335. located on the blue box and moving it to a new position holding the left mouse button You can shift a polyline polygon up down left or right by placing your mouse cursor inside the blue box mouse cursor symbol will change and then clicking and dragging the entire shape to a new position Note These features are only available for polyline and polygon layers which have been digitized created in Map Manager Rectangle 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 29 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Provides the option to draw a rectangle This option is only available if a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Circle Provides the option to draw a circle This option is only available if a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Line Provides the option to draw a line This option is only available if a line shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Point Provides the option to add points to the map layer This option is only available if a point shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Text Provides the option to add text labels to a map layer This option is only available if a text layer is selected and set for editing Information Provides a dialog containing information about the selected station or other objects such as contour lines an example is shown below Info Window e X Rec Wo 31 a Save Close FJ Help To load the Information d
336. logy or Model The default is Geology x ET lt Station Label Properties Visible shows hides station labels Color sets color of station labels Size sets size of the station labels Title Title field allows for entering a project title Visible shows hides the title Text color sets the color of the Project title text The default is white Text size sets the size of the Project title text as a fraction of the total screen size By default this is 0 02 Text Frame Visible shows hides the text frame Line Color sets the color of the text frame 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 362 Fill Color sets the fill color of the text frame Time Label these settings are applicable when displaying time varying plumes Title field allows for modifying the time label Visible shows hides the time label Text color sets the color of the time label The default is white Text size sets the size of the time label text as a fraction of the total screen size By default this is 0 02 Text Frame Visible shows hides the text frame Line Color sets the color of the text frame Fill Color sets the fill color of the text frame Legend Visible shows hides the legend Title changes the legend title Text size changes the legend text size Text color changes the legend text color Frame allows to decide whether there is a frame around the legend Frame line color sets the legend frame line color Frame fill
337. ls that are present on the report and it contains an orderly list with the names and values of the properties of the objects in the report presented in the first and second column respectively A combo box with the list of objects whose properties can be edited is provided in the upper part of the window Additional information for the selected property is prouded at the bottom of this window Designer Advanced Controls and Settings Types of Controls The runtime Report Designer allows you to add several types of controls to your reports These controls range from those that are currently shown on the toolbar to all controls that are present on your computer The types of controls that are provided on the toolbar can be grouped as follows Data Access Controls ADO data control Provides access to the database using information provided to it Only one ADO control can be added to a given report This control O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 397 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help can be added to the report by clicking on the Insert ADO Data control icon s on the toolbar Data Display Controls Controls that can be used to display information that is either coming from the data source database or provided on the Report Designer The controls that fall into this category include Label Check box RTF Text Graphics Image Line Forms OLE objects Barcodes etc Page break Sub reports Adding Controls Except for ADO data contr
338. lyst 2014 Help The Styles section allows you to create remove and modify text styles which can then be selected from the Text Style dropdown box and applied to your text controls Text styles are useful for applying many text characteristics font size bold italic underline etc to your text in just one simple task Click the New and Delete button to create a new style and delete a current style respectively The Font Color and Misc settings in the right frame allow you to set and modify the text characteristics of the selected style Using non default page dimensions If you wish to print to any non default paper size e g plotter paper you must first specify the page dimensions in three different areas within the Report Designer To do so follow the steps below 1 In the Report Designer select the Page Setup button from the main toolbar Select the Printer Settings button opecify the page size from the PaperSize dropdown box Alternatively define the page dimensions by selecting Custom Paper Size from the PaperSize dropdown box and then entering the Width and Length values below Click Ok 2 Select the Printer Settings button from the main toolbar Select the desired plotter from the Name dropdown box Again specify the paper size Click Ok 3 Manually define the page size within the Report Designer by increasing decreasing the page extents with the mouse cursor Now you are ready to print your report L
339. m in button allows you to zoom into the selected plot page to zoom in on selected plot data within an individual plot O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 187 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help a Zoom out button returns to the original Zoom view L Fit to Page button fits all plots to the current viewer window size At the bottom of the window you will find the following buttons ce gt gt The function of these buttons from left to right is Previous Page scroll to the previous page in the plot design Next Page scroll to the next page in the plot design Zoom To zoom in on plot data in an individual plot use the mouse cursor to draw box around the desired data a sample is shown in the screen shot below aaea Electrical Conduct Over Tima Electrical Conductivity vs Time 55 550 ink t E ad A 53 j d 525 w j 520 j T i 515 lips i i j A IA SEE uil f Ie ie Fr 41 j 5 f kali A 4 EE ED a E pe X FR Hd mITLAM SL AY 4 1 P p r g BBnee tt I 04 1 T 1 P 3 i 1b S 5 ars amp f ed ME L LL s5 jj i T i i asi i A d n iL Elect iu 450 V HS 1200 L E m ET ees E Data File ud E Tile Backgeourd Cola L white 535 E Legend E Fettical is 3
340. m the LAS file to the database is described below e Select one field from the source file in the left frame e Select the appropriate matching field from destination in the right by expanding the O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 137 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help appropriate data category and table e Click on the Map button Mapped fields will then be added to the Prevew grid at the bottom of the window Repeat these steps for additional fields To remove the mapping for a selected field e Select the appropriate row in the Prevew grid e Click on the Delete Mapping button Units Due to the flexible nature of the LAS file there may exist one or more parameters with units that are not supported in HGA as such unit conversion will not be possible during the import Where the unit categories and units exist HGA will attempt to do unit conversion and import the data If the destination field does not support the selected source units there will be no conversion and the data will not be imported For this reason it may be necessary to modify the field settings for your database schema before proceeding with the import For more details see Chapter 13 Modifying Fields and View Settings When you are finished click the Next gt button in the lower right corner to proceed to the next step If the data to be imported contains the Well Section then some additional information may be required in order to allow proper data transfer The St
341. mats you can specify the number of decimal places by using the Decimal places vertical scroll box 12 3 7 Picture Column 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter ome 12 3 7 1 Settings BHLP Settings X E53 BHLF Picture E Scale v Visible Column Options eel E3 D epth wE Interval m Lithal viis MN Pattern Symbol Description mo Visible Font L Use numeric format Farmat General m Humber of digital eee Width 5 1 00 I Image Draw Mode Centerec Help Apply OF Cancel The Picture column settings are shown in the above screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Picture node from the BHLP Settings window The Picture frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking the Options button The Pattern Symbol frame allows you to show hide the image pattern modify the Width and change the Image Draw Mode The Description frame allows you to show hide the description and modify the Text Font If you choose to display numeric data select the Use numeric format check box 12 4 Create a New Borehole Log Plot Example In Hydro GeoAnalyst only the borehole log plot templates are stor
342. me assigned to the cross section line will be used as the cross section name If surface layers are present in your Map Project you will be prompted to select a surface layer 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 335 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Please see Loading Surface Layers for further information The cross section editor opens the selected cross section and displays the stations and related information The cross section shows projections of the borehole lithology columns on the cross section plane By default the topography top of model layer 1 will be drawn in for you The starting point of the cross section line will appear on the left side of the cross section window the end point of the line will appear on the right side of the window Locations for layers must be interpreted and drawn manually using lines or polygons layer types may be Geologic Hydrogeologic or Model The process of drawing layers is described in the next section NOTE Each cross section has required fields which must be present in your database structure as defined in the Profile Settings For more details see Chapter 4 Template Manager Profile Settings Drawing Cross Section Interpretations Interpretation of the cross section is a considerably creative process however the cross section editor makes it easy for you Once the selected stations have been loaded into the cross section editor the appropriate layers must be manually draw
343. mination introduced during field or transportation operations Types of blanks associated with the field are trip blanks these accompany samples through the transportation process equipment rinsates collected after decontamination and field blanks collected on site during the sampling event Ideally analysis of the blank samples should return no detectable concentrations of any of the analytes i e concentrations are below the method detection limit MDL 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control Blank Settings Any concentration above the sample detection limit will be highlighted Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color The detection limit for contaminants can be specified in HGA and must be added to your data query Highlighting The options are the same as described in previous section 10 2 4 Check Dilution Factor Settings A dilution factor is calculated by dividing the final volume by the aliquot volume Aliquot volume is the measure of sub volume of original sample Final volume is the total volume This QA QC check will look for exceedances in the dilution factors in your result records You simply need to set the Maximum allowed dilution factor Any reported Dilution Factors above what you have specified as the maximum will fail this check Dilution Settings Maxinium dilution factor Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color
344. mns and their order of display is flexible and can be set at the time of designing the borehole log plot and edited at any point thereafter Borehole log plots can be created for one or more boreholes at once based on a desired borehole log plot design Once the design is acceptable a borehole log report can be generated for any or all boreholes in the selection through the use of the Report Editor Borehole log reports once generated can be exported to various formats including HTML RTF PDF that are supported by the Report Editor The borehole log plotter can also be used as a data entry assistant in HGA by displaying well construction details as data is entered in tables that are related to the Borehole log plot Moreover the borehole log plotter is an invaluable tool in the process of making geologic and hydrogeologic interpretations of your data under the Cross Section Editor 12 1 Aboutthe Interface The BHLP may be launched from HGA in several ways Existing BHLPs can be opened from the Borehole Logs node in the Project Tree by either double clicking on the desired borehole log plot in the available list or by right clicking and selecting the Open pop up menu option To create a new BHLP template right click on the Borehole Logs node on the Project Tree and select the New pop up menu option NOTE A station group containing at least one borehole needs to be selected in order to launch the BHLP from the HGA main interface
345. mplate After that the Excel spreadsheet will open and you can select inside the Pivot Table option This will make all the fields from the query available in the Pivot Table Field List 2014 Schlumberger Water Services L 40 20 E amp wl Heady Insert Page Layout Formi a4 Calibri i iA k r z ba nter Bid a Rh To build a report choose fields from the PivotTable Field List H 6Sheetl Fa Page lofi Prot Eearmplecdnn Microsoft Excel pii E im amp F y n 73 iF aig Marge amp Center UR S Bodl Crosstabs are Now Pivot Tables 170 Developer QuirkChecker Fuit POF Options Design o GF Ri 4 KE E a Conditional Format Cell ra rmatting at Table Siyles op Wrap Teri General Insert Oeste Fanmat T iol ia H Tx TH rs Ej rJ ts ia e 1 i Es PivetTable Field Lest F 4 i j k L M Choose feda in add in rect rime pa os id a Pivot Table Landscape Example Drag Maidi tebyesen areas bem 7 Aeport Fite Tj Column Labels iud Sow Latels Eu E Defer Layout Update ia fus ima Then it is a matter of deciding what fields you want as columns and what fields you want as rows as well as the value field which need to be a number field Here have organized my Pivot table with the Station Names and dates as the rows and the Chemical names as the columns The concentration values are used in the values field 2014 Schlumberger Water Services
346. mpled on 03 14 99 could be from the same or other stations 4 stations sampled on 03 19 99 5 stations sampled on 03 27 99 6 stations sampled on 04 04 99 5 stations sampled on 04 15 99 4 stations sampled on 04 25 99 If you select Day for date granularity you will obtain 7 data sets to interpolate and If you select Month for date granularity you will obtain 2 data sets to interpolate 20 stations sampled on 03 01 99 and 15 stations sampled on 04 01 99 In this case the first observation from a well will be selected If you select Year for date granularity you will obtain only one data set that will essentially be a static plume In this case the first 1 data set When you have defined the settings press the Add button to add the mapped fields the values should then be displayed in the table at the bottom of the window To delete an existing 3D Plume simply click on the x Delete button When you are finished click on the OK button HGA will create a 3D plume file in the Plumes sub directory for your project with the file name provided and the extension nc For example TVOC nc in the directory D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Plumes To display the plume please proceed to the instructions in Chapter 11 View 3D In addition to the nc file HGA will save a txt file that stores the results from the query x y Z value that is used by the interpolator in generating the interpolation usin
347. mport options may have difficulty recognizing them as names Data Type String To avoid this you will need to ensure that you manually assign the data type within Excel as text You do this by right clicking on the cells and selecting Format Cells and then selecting the Text option in the Number tab dialog that appears You will notice that your numeric station names are now left justified in the excel column If you have completely numeric Sample ID s you will need to do the same for this column In fact any field in the HGA database that is set to have a data type String you Will need to do this in order to be able to import completely numeric values F i If you are trying to import non detect values with the Chemical import option then you need to consider rearranging your data sheet so that results with a non detect lt symbol is within the first few rows so that excel recognizes the data expected for that column To find more information on all these options revew The Data Transfer System section 3 3 5 EDD Template Designer EDD Template Designer You can find this option by selecting Project Export In this first step of the workflow you can create a template which can be opened in Excel for others to use to validate their data In the EDD Template Designer you select which fields you wish to have in your template by simply dragging and dropping them onto the Template Format O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydr
348. n and interpreted Start the interpretation by selecting the layer type from the layer manager Choose from Geologic Hydrogeologic or Model Each of these is explained below Hydrogeologic interpretations can be copied from geologic interpretations As such it is a better practice to first perform geologic interpretations of the cross section 14 3 1 Loading Surface Layers Surface layers e g DEM Surfer GRD in a Map Project can be used to generate a detailed topography model line for a cross section Note A surface layer can only be defined for a cross section line when the cross section is being created in the Map component of Map Manager Please refer to the Surface section of the Map Manager chapter for information on how to import a surface layer into a Map Project Also please see the Create Cross Section section of this chapter for information on how to create a cross section When a surface layer is present in a map project you will be prompted to select a surface layer when creating your cross section line The following dialog will display OF Cancel This dialog contains all of the surface layers currently present in your map project Select a 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 336 surface from the dropdown list box and click Ok to create the cross section Be sure to select a surface layer that covers the full extent of the cross section line Leave this dialog blank if you
349. n Group You can modify this template by going to the folder where the templates have been stored see HGA Settings for more details and adjusting it to suit your needs Currently it contains the SWS logo and a few default database fields Station Name X Y Elevation and TOC If you wish to create a new template with different database fields you must select a base template there is one provided with HGA called New Template Base pptx as well as a query that contains the fields from the database that you wish to include in your template You must create this query first before creating a new template When printing to a newly created template that has been based on a query only the stations which are included in the query will be printed Therefore you may wish to put a condition into your query to only select the stations you are interested in or perhaps add a condition to only pull information from a specific station group Additionally one slide will be generated per station per record in the query Therefore we recommend you only use database fields that result in one record per station or set appropriate conditions to have the query pull only one record per station For more information about designing queries please see the Query Builder section Please Note The Well Profile tab takes some time to refresh each time you select a different station If you are encountering a slow down while trying to scroll through stations on other
350. n Step 2 See on line help for Further information Select one or mare MON Files for importing into the project database This utilitu supports the import of MON files created by LoggerD ataM anager Diver Pocket Drver Office Diver VisillME and e SEMSE Select data source MOM Files MON File Information Next gt Cancel Help Diver data applications e g Diver Office allow you reference the water level data in various ways i e with respect to the top of casing with respect to a vertical datum or with respect to the Diver itself The first step is to specify how the water level data is referenced in the MON file Note If you wish to show water level data on cross sections and borehole log plots the water level data must be reference to the top of casing or ground surface and the data must be imported into the Water Level table Next specify the MON data source Click the Open Folder button Bs Locate and select a MON file s and click Open 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 130 Look in E Desktop E pi ARE My Documents 3 My Computer tJ My Network Places s CTD n70503132027 61667 3 My Recent Documents E eskto p My Documents gr My Computer T My Network Flaces File name Files of type MON ASCII Standard File MON Cancel EZ 2s The selected MON file s will now appear under the Se
351. n Width e Column Color O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 207 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help The Depth frame allows you to set a fixed column depth If you select the Auto checkbox the depth will automatically be adjusted to the depth of the deepest BHLP column The General frame allows you to adjust the default general display settings for all BHLP columns The following settings can be modified Fit width to page Select this option to fit your BHLP columns to the entire width of the BHLP Viewer Window Print Scale Factor The default setting of O will fit the BHLP onto your page However using a whole number for the scale factor no decimal or negative numbers will scale the BHLP in the following manner A Print scale factor of 1 100 would mean that 100 units on the BHLP would correspond to 1 unit on the printout i e if your BHLP units are in Feet then 100 Feet measured on the BHLP would correspond to 1 Foot in the actual printed results so on an 8 1 2 by 11 page 100 feet measured on the BHLP would take up just over 1 page when printed in portrait mode The scale factors must use the same units Column Options Column Options X Bod Color el Width 75 Header text E Fant Angle E Scale m Aliqn Center e wod wrap Lancel The Column Options dialog allows you to specify unique display settings for each column in your BHLP In this dialog you can modify the Header Color and Body Col
352. n a 3D project file 3XS or load a 3D project from the Project Tree in HGA e Create the desired 3D view adjust the view to your liking e Press the Print button from the toolbar or select File Print from the main menu The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the P Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications Each view of your Fence Diagram is created with its associated legends The report will appear in the project tree once it is saved 16 6 Managing Reports Opening an Existing Report All reports saved in your project are listed under the Reports node in the Project Tree To open a report you may either double click on the desired report or select the Open Report pop up menu item by right clicking on the desired report All reports are opened in the Report Designer by default The designer displays the report layout and allows you to modify it before generating the report The print preview of the report can be generated by clicking on the Print Preview button on the toolbar Deleting a Report To delete a report that is registered with HGA select it in the Project Tree right click on it and select Delete from the pop up menu The selected report will be deleted both from the tree view as well as from the file Saving a Report A report can be saved at any time by clicking on the Save ico
353. n be adjusted after the project has been created Additionally you can adjust the Material Specification can be adjusted The Database Server and Database name can been seen here but these cannot be adjusted 3 1 9 HGA Settings The HGA Settings dialog provides various settings for a number of options within the program e Project Here you can specify the default server and default location for project files These settings are taken into account when creating new projects or when installing the Demo project O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services HGA Settings Project statPage Help Template Files External Programs General Default Data Source Type Microsoft SQLServer Default Server MGAERTNER WATYSWS2012 Default Project Location DADocumentsiHydro GeoAnalyst Projects Hemind about Event Plans to be closed 7 day s over due or more Maximum Number of Rows to Load in Data Views 10000 bad Additionally you can specify when you will be reminded to close any outstanding Event Plans Also when working with large projects you can specify the maximum number of rows to load in the Data views Station List Station Data and Data Filter tabs The default is 10 000 rows This can help prevent long wait times as HGA is trying to load data If a maximum has been reached in one of the data views you will notice this indicated at the bottom of the tab It will also indicate the total rows that are stored in the database
354. n on the runtime report designer An existing report will be saved using the same file name When saving new reports your will be prompted for a file name Saving a Report As To save a report with a different name and or as a report template click on H Save As icon on the Report Designer s toolbar You will be prompted for a file name and type The report or report template will be saved to the Reports sub folder of the folder storing your project related information The report or report template will also be saved in the project s database and will be made available in the appropriate node in the Project Tree The report or template can be deleted from the Project Tree if you choose not to store it in the database Exporting generated reports Once a report has been generated it can be exported to various formats as well as being saved in the Report Editor s native format The native format stores reports with an RTF file 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 408 extension To export a report click on the T Export Report icon on the toolbar A dialog similar to that shown in the figure below will be displayed amp Export 4 m X Report Export Select the export File format options Export Format Portable Document Format PDF Export Options Filename Acrobat Version 1 Acrobat 3 x JPG Quality 75 Mo Embedding Fonts LI Bakang Arial Arial Balti
355. n order to see intersecting cross sections in the cross section editor the corresponding Map Manager project must be open O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 307 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help For more details on managing intersecting layers in the cross section editor please see Intersecting Layers Graticule Provides settings for the graticule also referred to as gridlines on the map The following dialog will appear Graticule Settings EN X Tic Minor Tic Numbers Minimum Fisele between Minor Tics 20 T Minor Tic Width H B Appearance Foreground Color EH Line Color alli Line Style 3 Font sample Text W Show Thousand Separator Major Tic width E Padding Left 50 Top 20 Bottom 20 eI Manual jw Visible Rotation U EY Iw Visible Rotation 0 EX Iw Visible Rotation 0 E ottorm W Visible Rotation 0 ET OF Cancel FJ Help Appearance In the appearance frame you can edit the line color style font Tic Allows defining the number of minor and major tics Paddings Controls the amount of buffer space between the edge of Map Manager window display and the labels on the axis It may be necessary to increase this value when the X and Y co ordinates contain many digits Intervals Controls the space between the major graticule lines You can accept the system calculated Auto values or enter Manual values Mark Text Controls
356. n s symbol Stations may be selected on the map by e Clicking individually e Drawing a polygon box or circle all stations inside the object become selected e Drawing a line and defining a buffer distance all stations within the buffer distance become selected Multiple station selections may be accomplished with the use of the Ctrl key Simply press and hold down the Ctrl key after making the initial selection then use one of the tools to select or de select additional stations Each selection option is described below Pointer Allows to select stations one by one When a station is selected a red circle will appear on top of the station s symbol When another station is selected the prevously selected station is un selected and the new station s symbol becomes selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Rectangle Allows to select stations within a drawn box To draw a rectangle place the cursor in the map window click once with the left mouse button in the area of interest and drag a window around the area then release the mouse button All stations within the box will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Polygon Allows to select stations within a drawn polygon Place the cursor in the map window at one point of interest click once with the left mouse button and digitize a polygon around the area of interest To add a vertex to the polygon continue to click
357. n using an aggregate function SQL Statement Allows user to generate their own custom SQL Statement other sections will become inactive NOTE The Display Fields and the Group Conditions sections are not available when creating a Dynamic Station Group query Toolbar Items The toolbar provides access to most functions of the Query Builder Toolbar buttons are context sensitive if there a button is greyed out this indicates that that functionality is not currently available based on what has been selected 4 New button allows you to create a new query a Open button allows you to open an existing query X Delete button allows you to delete the currently open query Save Query button saves changes to the query Save As button saves the query under a new name P Execute SQL Statement button executes or runs the query 7 3 Standard Select Query Example Follow the steps below to create a Standard Select Query If the Query Builder tab is not yet opened select the Query Builder icon 3 from the main toolbar In the Query Builder tab toolbar select the New button f and the following dialog will appear 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 143 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help New Query Query Name TOC Exceeds 320 Query Type amp Standard Select Query 5 Dynamic Station Group Query Location Queres ff Queries Qj Concentrations il Water Levels Provide a Query Name TOC Exceeds 320m for this example The d
358. n viewing the plumes in the 3D Explorer Surfaces Subfolder The surfaces folder contains all of the gridded surfaces GRD files created in the map project by interpolating the current layer The gridded surfaces can also be used in the 3D Explorer V3D Subfolder The V3D folder contains all of the 3D Explorer project files Any saved scene configurations will also be located in this folder Name 3XS This is the 3D Explorer project file XML file format BMP any map image sent from the map project will be saved in bitmap format bmp BPW any bitmaps tagged with georeference details O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices 414 XSection Subfolder The xsection folder contains all of the cross section information from your project In the xsection folder there is a subfolder for each cross section created in the project i e AA BB etc The subfolders contain all the shapefiles associated with the cross section XInter The XInter subfolder contains the shapefiles from the map project for the cross section line BHLP The BHLP subfolder contains image files for any borehole log plots drawn on the cross section BHLP images are saved as EMF format 17 2 Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for Importing The Microsoft Data Link Properties dialog appears throughout Hydro GeoAnalyst whenever an option to import data or entities or Build a connection string exists A few examples are Importing lists in
359. n will load the Plume Browser Options window as shown below Animation Properties X Rotate Time Flume Browser Number of steps 20 Start value 3 fo Finish value 4 144 Animate in selected interval The Number of steps value may be increased to smooth the transition from one time to the next or it may be decreased to make the browsing proceed faster The Start value indicates the value at which the browser will begin must be a value gt 0 The Finish value indicates the value at which the browser will end must be 100 The Animate in selected interval option is used to animate the display element only during the specified start and finish values 15 3 5 Recording Animation to AVI file Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer supports recording any animation rotation plume animation over time isosurface or color map spanning to an AVI file for playback during presentations and demonstration using any compatible AVI file player To record the AVI locate the Record button in the lower right corner of the window Click on this button and a Video settings window will appear as shown in the following figure d Video settings BE x Setting AV File name RABE Frame size Full window size Compression Full Frames Uncompressed Frames per second fi Height 240 OF Cancel The default AVI File name is the address of the V3D folder for the current project plus the name of the 3D pr
360. nal groupings to help you organize your stations this can be very useful later when you are querying the database When you select the Next button you will see a preview of the data to be imported O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 116 amp Data Transfer System amp Preview of data to be imported Location X degree Y degree Elevation m TOC m 535646 8299999 4813320 229999 100 61448 eH ssoms suz2seeo T0576 TORO BHT3 5962677 4812838799999 LES BH16 4813914 899999 100 7364 101 0412 BH17 100 67544 100 98024 BH19 536724 1 4814078 899999 103 3272 103 632 BH20 536746 69 4814507 499999 104 2416 104 5464 15 records You will notice that the Elevation and TOC have been converted into meters Select the Next button to perform the import Data Transfer System c5 Source Projection Preview Import You can watch the progress of your import When it is completed it will summarize how many records were in your source file and how many were imported so you can compare If data contained any errors or caused any warnings a dialog would appear that summaries the problems with your data Select the Finish button to close the wizard Your new stations should now be available O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 117 6 2 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help EDD within the Station List tab The EDD option prompts you to
361. nce settings of the vertical axis For both the Left and Right axis axis labels can be enabled disabled by selecting the Show Labels checkbox You can also change the label color by clicking on the Color box and change the font by clicking on the Font box Label Direction can be modified by making a selection from the combo box choose from horizontal or vertical direction O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 217 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help BHLP Settings B E E E53 BHLP Plot Area ED Scale General Horizontal Anis Vertical amp xs Legend L3 Well Construction a E Desc Grain Size E E3 Plot es Eee jw Background v Outline Shadow Apply UE Cancel Under the Legend tab there are settings that control the Visibility and the Background and Outline visibility and color The specific settings for the Depth sub node are shown in the following screenshot BHLP Settings E x Depth Serie v Visible Plot Style Line ha Line Style Solid Line Width 4 EN Line Color ag Symbol Rect Symbol Size B8 Symbol Color E Horizontal scale Pimayais l Apply UE Cancel Plot Line and Symbol options can be configured and the Depth Series can be shown hidden using the Visible checkbox You can also set the Horizontal Scale for the plot series choose from Primary or Secondary axis The specific settings for the Interval sub node are shown in the following screenshot
362. nd Color box respectively 12 3 3 Plot Column The Plot column is designed to display various types of depth dependent graphs It supports both the Depth Interval as well as the Depth Point based data types The following are some example data that may be displayed using this column type e Geophysical investigation results e Analytical results chemical concentration e Analytical results for soil physics moisture content bulk density etc e Soil testing results pocket Penetrometer SPT Various plot settings are available For Depth Point based graphs the plot column supports the following plot types e Points e Connected vertices line graphs with or without points e Bar charts For depth interval plots the area under the plot may be filled in To create a Plot column click the Add icon and select Plot from the combo box provided A new Plot column will be created in the designer window To create specific plots within this column select the newly added Plot sub node from the Designer tree and click 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 213 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help the Add button again The Add a Plot Series window shown in the following dialog will open Add a Plot Series Flot Series Type Depth v J Interval Flot Properties Caption Cancel From this window you can define the Plot Series Type Depth or Interval and provide the caption for the series Depending on whether you
363. nd Model Simply click on the sample box beside the appropriate label and a Font options dialog will appear as shown below Font Font style Size Arial Black Tr Arial Harrow Tr AvantGarde Bk BT Tr AvantGarde Md BT Tr BankGothic Lt BT Tr BankGothic Md BT Effects Strikeout T Underline Color BN Black AaBbYyZz Script wester Define the desired font settings then click OK to return to the Options dialog Rulers Tab Controls the appearance settings for the axis of the cross section plot For each ruler vertical and horizontal you may define e Foreground Color e Background Color e Marker Width e Min Tic Pixels e Tic Numbers e Font e Vertical Exaggeration Define the vertical exaggeration scaling factor for new cross sections There are two options Default value or User defined Specific If the default option is selected the map manager will automatically calculate and assign the most appropriate vertical exaggeration factor NOTE Please see Change Vertical Exaggeration in the Edit menu item discussed prevously for information on how to change the vertical exaggeration once a cross section has been created Screen Water Levels O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor ENZH Controls the appearance settings for how screens and water levels are displayed on the cross section These options are shown below Editor Labels Fiu
364. nd mount NOTE In order to see the well casing and screens in the appropriate locations you must add and map the appropriate entities as explained below In the BHLP settings right mouse click and select Add Entity You may add and map any of the following entities Image use this option if you want to display an image of the well casing on the BHLP you must select a field from the casing table that contains an image Text use this option if you want to display a descriptive label of the casing on the BHLP you must select a field from the casing table that is a string and contains the descriptive information on the casing type material IDEntity select the field that contains the Casing ID 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 222 ParentlD use this option if you want to display well casings nested within another casing or on their own You must select a field from the casing table that is field type double and contains values for the parent casing ID SortBy use this option if you want well casings to be ordered in a particular fashion on the BHLP You must select a field from the casing table that is field type double and contains values for the well casing orders Screen BHLP Settings N X E E BHLP Well Construction E Well Construction v Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Litholagy Water level Reduci Appearanc Labe i Use Default Color E Vi
365. ne point polygon These are called annotation layers For example to draw polygons on the map a new map layer with the type Polygon must first be created using the Layer New menu option or if a polygon layer already exists it has to be set to edit mode To add text to a map layer a new layer with the type Text must first be created using the Layer O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 298 New menu option The following annotation options are available Polygon Provides the option to draw a polygon This option is available only when a polygon shapefile layer is selected and set for editing Shifting and Scaling Digitized Polylines Polygons Map Manager allows you to shift and scale digitized polygons and polylines These options are NOT accessible through the main menu However they can be accessed by double clicking on a digitized polyline or polygon while you are in edit mode When double clicked a blue box will appear around the vertical and horizontal extents of the digitized shape indicating that the whole shape is selected as shown in the image below Map Project testmap Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help 1B a Sik N Layer Information Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum D WGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Cou nts 147 NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N 535 619 4 814 887 1 2 849 You can scale the polyline polygon by clicking on one of the vertices
366. ne along the Y axis extending through the entire depth of the site For a Vertical XZ slice the Slider Bar moves the vertical slice along the Y axis and the Y axis values are displayed in the fields labelled Y1 and Y2 Alternately a Y axis value can be typed directly into this field O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 381 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help For a Vertical YZ slice the Slider Bar moves the vertical slice along the X axis and the X axis value is displayed in the field labelled X1 and X2 Alternately an X axis value can be typed directly into this field When the desired location for the vertical slice has been defined click the Close button to save the vertical slice type and location The new vertical slice will appear in the Surfaces window 15 7 2 Creating a Horizontal Slice To create a horizontal slice through the domain click the Horizontal button to open a Horizontal slice properties window as shown below A yellow outline of the horizontal slice will appear in the Display Screen Horizontal slice properties X z value 31 od Help The Slider Bar moves the horizontal slice along the vertical Zaxis and the corresponding slice elevation is displayed in the field labelled Z value When the desired location for the horizontal slice has been selected click the Close button to save the slice type and location The new horizontal slice will appear in the Surfaces window 15 7 3 Selecting a
367. nes which stations will be included in the cross section stations which lie within the buffer distance will all be selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol and included in the cross section The Buffer Distance is projected out perpendicular to the cross section line Click OK to accept the Line attributes If necessary selected stations can be deselected by clicking on each of them while holding down the Ctrl key If necessary extra stations may be added to the selection by clicking on one or more stations while holding down Ctrl key NOTE Once a cross section line has been created stations can still be added to or removed from the line by selecting the line then right clicking and choosing the Add Remove Stations option Stations can then be added removed by clicking on the desired stations In order to use this feature the station layers on which the cross section are based e g Boreholes must be set to Visible in the Layer Control The cross section can then be created as follows Select Tools Create Cross Section from the Main Menu or click on the Cross Section O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 310 button ol on the toolbar Click Yes to create the cross section the name assigned to the cross section line will be used for the cross section name Use Existing Polyline You can create a cross section line from an existing polyline layer To do so follow the steps
368. nformation can be displayed through a combination of a symbol showing the level accompanied by a text label e g showing the date at which the displayed water level was recorded To create a Depth Point based column click the Add icon Select Depth from the combo box that appears A new Depth column will be added to the designer window Expand the Depth node in the Designer tree and select DepthEntities t3 Well Construction E E3 Scale Lj ScaleEntities DataTable E DeptheE ntity Caption Depth Description Depth D ataField Select the data table or query and the depth entity for the column using the combo boxes provided Selecting the field for the depth entity will create markers at the depths for which data is entered in the specified table or query At this point you can select what is displayed beside or in these markers Right click in the settings field and select Add Entity D ataT able E Depthentity Caption Description D ataField Select from Text Entity or Image Entity from the following combo box that appears 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 231 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Add Entity EE x Please Choose an Entity ImageEntity OF Cancel Adding a Text Entity will allow you to display text in the column such as descriptions or numeric values An Image Entity will allow you to display a graphical representation such as an image photo or formation pat
369. ng Geotransformation Settings ccsssccccsssccesssccccssssccesssccessscesesscsessscecessscesessseeenscees 435 Part 18 Troubleshooting 437 E Connection Problems reroror OEN LEAI iuga re eere eure Ee rR E E NR o OLET E De aiv CEL UR EC PUR EA den N V 437 Index 0 O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 1 Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst Hydro GeoAnalyst HGA is the most comprehensive and yet easy to use envronmental data management system providing data validation analysis and visualization The HGA package integrates a list of flexible and customizable database structures used around the world complimented by state of the art tools for data interpretation statistical analysis GIS mapping data charting and two and three dimensional visualizations For most envronment related projects whether they are contaminated sites or municipal water supply projects there is often an abundance of data that has been collected over the years How many times have you had to sift through several paper reports for that one piece of information when compiling monthly summaries on a project Can you be sure that you have not misplaced a report or failed to mention an important piece of data The HGA package addresses these and many other needs in the industry The system enables you to create a project specific database or enhance and build upon your existing database It can collect all of your previous data an
370. ng Rate Observation Wells Data Source Select a data query that contains the required Fields for Time and Water Level Data aquifertest pumpingtest water levelz X Field mapping o RequiredData Match to Fields DBUnt Multiplier Mame id X co ordinate Y co ordinate Observation Time date and Hime DATE TIME STAMP a640i E Depth to meters jname date and t depth_to_ 20 535533 UL 4814371 73 w 2 b b 2007 1 03145341 20 535533 700 4814371 73 w 2 b b 2007 1 0 2134145 20 535533 UL 4814371 73 w 2 b b 2U0 1 0 3353415 20 535533 700 4814371 73 w 20 b b 2U07 1 5402433 20 535533 700 4814371 73 w 2 b b 2U0 1 0 9756098 20 535533 UL 4614371 79 W 20 b b 200 1 1 097561 20 535533 UL 4814371 73 W240 b b 2007 1 1 25 20 535533 700 4814371 73 w 20 b b 200 1 1 432327 20 535533 UL 4814371 73 W240 b b 2U0 1 1 554878 20 535533 700 4814371 73 w 2 b b 2U0 1 1 515854 2U 535533 UL 4814371 73 w 2 b b 2U0 2 1 737805 20 535533 700 4814371 73 w 2 b b 2U0 2 1 659756 20 535533 700 4814371 73 W240 b b 2U00 2 1 320732 20 535533 700 4814371 73 w 2 b b 2U0 2 2042663 20 535533 700 4814371 73 w 2 b b 2U0 3 2 591463 20 535533 700 4814371 73 W240 b b 200 9 332311 required information Analyze Cancel Help In the Observation Wells tab the workflow is the same as earlier mentioned In this tab you must map the well name XY
371. ng type options are e Stationary simple Kriging with SK mean e Ordinary Kriging e Nonstationary simple Kriging with means from an external file e Kriging with external drift The following guidelines are recommended for selecting the type of Kriging Choose Stationary simple Kriging with SK mean if the mean value is known and is constant throughout the area Select Ordinary Kriging if the mean is not constant everywhere and needs to be recalculated dependent on the location of the neighborhood Choose Nonstationary simple Kriging with means from an external file if the mean is not constant and has to be read from an external file Select Kriging with an external drift when only the trend component needs to be estimated and not the residual component where the variable is assumed to be the sum of the trend and the residual component This option is also referred to as Universal Kriging For most situations Ordinary Kriging is recommended and is the default option The SK Mean defines the global mean of the data if Stationary simple Kriging is performed The Drift term defines the drift components if Kriging with external drift is performed Nine drift components are possible e X linear drift in x O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services m Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Xq Yq Zq XY XZ YZ Y linear drift in y Z linear drift in z quadratic drift in x quadratic drift in y quadratic drift in z cross quadratic
372. nge to an orange color to indicate the vertex is linked shared between the two model layer lines You can link to as many vertices as desired by repeating the above step However if Snapping to a series of consecutive vertices is desired you may click on the first and the last desired vertices The cross section editor will create the necessary number of vertices on the model layer line being drawn and link them to their respective vertices For instance if there are five vertices on the existing model line layer between the selected first and last vertices six vertices will be created on the current model layer line Linked vertices will move together and can be separated if needed The following figure depicts an example of a model layer pinching out around the middle of the cross section Map Project demo project map a inl File Edit View Tools ek 5 NIX h f 4l 360 T ic HE zE lh Yr aes Oa 350 Topography amn Overburden Aquife Aquitard mies 340 Main Aquifer C CI Geology 330 Clay e Pisi Sand Gravel Sens x P 320 Bedrock 310 HydroGeology Snapping between two vertices adsfsadf Elevation m 300 Snapping to end of cross section DD FF Mike test33 290 260 270 280 250 0 200 400 600 600 1200 1400 1600 1800 2000 1000 Distance m 1373 17 328 91 Snapping
373. ngs Introduction A Geotransformation is a mathematical operation that takes the coordinates of a point in one geographic coordinate system and returns the same point in coordinates of another geographic coordinate system Hydro GeoAnalyst supports one stage horizontal geotransformations between different geographic coordinate systems This is required for the following two reasons Hydro GeoAnalyst stores all spatial data i e station x y coordinates in the GCS WGS 1984 projection system lat and long coordinates When data is imported Hydro GeoAnalyst converts the spatial data into GCS WGS 1984 coordinates Likewise when data is displayed in HGA it converts the data from GCS WGS 1984 to the original projection system defined in the project settings In order for HGA to store and display your data correctly an appropriate geotransformation has to be defined In some cases it may not be possible to obtain certain geographic data in a coordinate system that is consistent with the rest of your project data In this case a geotransformation can be applied to express the data according to your project s coordinate system Note Currently Hydro GeoAnalyst does not support vertical elevation datum shifting Please ensure that your elevation data is consistent before importing into HGA Geotransformations can potentially occur in Hydro GeoAnalyst in any of the following scenarios When station data is displayed in the main Hydro GeoAnalyst win
374. nly publish Mobile EDDs based on templates created on Single Sheets e you must include the Station Name from the Location table within your Mobile EDD template e the Advanced option under the Conditions in the EDD Template Designer is not supported in the Mobile EDDs e You are limited to a maximum of 12 tables When you are happy with your EDD template select the Publish Mobile EDD button j and you will be provided with the following options 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts as Publish Mobile EDD Publish Options Public FTP Ste 9 SWS FTP Ste Web Root URL http online sharehga com hgamobie Web link folder Demo mob e edd testing V Select Station Group p Station Groups Note By selecting a Station Group the stations within the group will be published with the EDD Cane The default option is to publish this Mobile EDD to our SWS FTP site therefore all you need to do is confirm the name Web link folder that will be used by default it takes the Project name and the EDD template name e g Demo_mobile_edd_testing Or if you prefer you can publish to your own FTP site When publishing to your own site you need to provide the URL the FTP Host as well as the User Name and Password Publish Mobile EDD _ iim Publish Options 9 Public FTP Ste SWS FTP Ste Web Root URL Web link folder Demo_mobile_edd_testing FTP Host User Name Password J Select Stati
375. ns for modifying the symbol for the shapes point line polygon on the current active layer in the Layer Manager The options dialog is shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 270 Point Style E4 Patten See 14 Font WH Symbol Symbol s Fil Border E Sample x OF Cancel The dialog shown here is for point shapes There are similar dialogs for line and polygon shapes The available symbol Patterns include circle square triangle cross or any symbol from all true type fonts that may be available on your system If the latter is selected you will have to select the desired font from the Font combo box and the desired symbol from the Symbol combo box Choose a symbol size from the combo box in the upper right corner Finally the symbol Fill color may be chosen from a color palette If a border around the symbol is desired select the check box beside Border and provide a border color 13 2 2 9 Statistics Displays statistics for the selected data field of a selected layer These include Count Maximum Minimum Sum Mean and Standard Deviation as shown in the figure below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 271 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Statistics E4 Field ELEVATION Count Le hA aim 460000 Minimum 332 0000 Sum 6103 0000 Mean 9056 Std Deviation 19 8 0 LIE 13 2 2 10 Renderer Provides options for a Map Renderer The Map
376. ntial Gaussian Power and the Hole effect models If the variogram information is not available the default linear variogram with no nugget effect should be used This option is a special case of the Power model with the exponent equal to 1 The Interpolator Options window for the Kriging method is shown in the following figure while each of the settings parameters is described below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help ceed LALAITIN ATT LELEEEL G GS Gg 8114512041 1411g LALELA beL rr EILL 1 p b 3 6 g be ETT TUTTI V sues pou a f BI Use Log Interpolitian i Aestnct Min Value Acha Maa Vale E Value Min Value Maw D Rizal Min 0 Asal Man D Min bimming limit 1 r 29 a ted Mie timing limit 1 0 23 Fenis per Black abng X 1 Black size along Y Bbcksz aongz lh Mim ponte lot Dock kigng Mak paints for block kigng 47 Max per octant D act ured 3 Max radius 8 Min radus d QU n ninay loiging us T E simae vanabe Mesishle T rend eslimale M ugget eoanklarit n2 BiussVanupams 1 Mi Of Cancel Start X Minimum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid End X Maximum X co ordinate for the interpolation grid X Nodes Number of grid nodes in the X direction Start Y Minimum Y co ordinate for the interpolation grid End Y Maximum Y co ordinate for the interpolation
377. ntiby Caption Sample Description D ataField gamma mV Fine Sand jw Live update Appi l 190 Close Esport v Print v Help 12 5 Saving the Borehole Log Plot Saving the Borehole Log Plot Once the desired BHLP design is obtained there are several saving and exporting options available The BHLP template can be saved to be recalled later on The BHLP image itself may be exported to a Report or an external file The BHLP image may be printed Saving a borehole log plot design template O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 246 To save a BHLP template Click on the Is Save button on the BHLP designer toolbar To save a copy of a BHLP template with a new name Click on the H Save As button on the BHLP designer toolbar Exporting a borehole log plot design template It is possible to export the design and data composing a borehole log plot This is helpful if the user wants to create an XML file from the database To do so click on the Export button at the bottom of the designer window and select from one of the export options as shown below Print Y Export current borehole Close Export all boreholes You can either Export the Current Borehole or Export all boreholes in your project using the current BHLP template The exported file will be saved in XML format 12 6 Borehole Log Reports Printing and Exporting A BHLP report may be generated f
378. o o a e o a o o a ao o o a 2 6 e o o a e o When stations are clustered it may be necessary to modify the display location of the callout boxes You have the option to manually move individual callout boxes to a new location to improve presentation This is explained below Edit Layout Setting To edit the position of the callout box Right mouse click on the map window and select Edit Layout from the pop up menu Click once on any callout box to select it the box will become highlighted in a color outline indicating it has been selected Left click on the callout box and using your mouse drag the box to the new location When you have done this the result could be similar to the example shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 2 Map Project Site map SS g xi Project Layer Edit Tools View Select Settings Help 2 WSRS RRA EN E d AF mple 2 Er WO_Data r P contour uopas ss013 gu D All Stations cal n ult val ample dat DrossSectionLine5 AirPhota BW ar bm p AirPhota Color ar b mp Water Courses e TVOC 3509 36 an 6 15 asn Airports 1 eam a Re ae 1 j TVOC 3002 88 8 9 1996 Major Railroads TVOC 4003 84 2 12 1996 Urban Areas Trees at Grasslands 5 d 5 8 E a a 5 B a pi m Croplands Layer Information Station Layer Coord GCS WGS 1984 Datum D WGS 1984 Unit Degree Feature Counts 26
379. o GeoAnalyst 2014 Help EDD Template Designer 7 79 a cai Single Sheets Grouped Sh ects Template Version Submission URL Template Version LIRL mc X IEEE www Lab template_version_check com Description H Geologic Description Database Name H Well Construction H Soil Testing H Soil Sampling Data Type Unit E Monitoring Event j i DATESTAMP parameter sample sample date E Parameter Sample i Comment Parameter Result E Parameter Result View Names Water Level j i Meteorology Divers Diver Channels Diver Data Field Measurements ES m T EE Result Value Result Unit i Qualifier E Mining Exploration A Reporting Detection Limit d El FA H Geophysics i E Well History Condtions Required Numeric Unique The list of available fields on the left are provided as you would be used to seeing them in the Template Manager or the Query Builder First branch are the Data Categories next branch are the Tables and the final branches are the fields As you drag and drop fields into the Template Format section you will notice that other fields may show up there automatically these are also bolded These are fields that are required to be able to import the data into the select table If you select fields from the Single Sheets tab the Template will create a new worksheet for each table where fields were selected from In the example above fields were sel
380. o Setting VWaue Contour map 3 Vibe Color fl 5 Semitransparent Mas value 0 Min value l Slice o EN properties Euta intervals ElCustom Values Eg Texcoo 0 0 0 Text size Decimals Multiple Labels Distance o o Bexlabel o Boxdepth 5 Bexcoo o The Labels setting is used customize the appearance of the contour labels Visible shows or hides the labels Text color controls the color of the label Text size controls the size of the labels Decimals is the number of decimals used for each label value Multiple Labels enables showing multiple labels on the line Distance sets the distance value between each label smaller distance values will result in more labels Box Labels allows drawing a box around each label O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 375 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help The labels are plotted on the top and bottom surface of a flat 3D rectangular box The size of the box will be automatically adjusted to fit the text size but the Box color and Box depth can be customized 15 5 4 Color Palette The color Palette is used to customize the range of colors used to represent the values of selected model elements for each display object this includes the color maps isolines and isosurfaces The color Palette settings will govern the color scaling used on
381. of the panel and it will behave like a separate Window The Display Tree O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 30 Explorer 352 Panel has an option Stay on top When this is active the panel window will float on top of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer interface as long as it is the active window When this is active this panel will always float on top of the HG Analyst 3D Explorer window Docking Panels Floating panels can be docked again by clicking the mouse pointer on the panel Title Bar and dragging it to the left or bottom edge of the 3D Explorer window A grey outline will appear when the mouse pointer is in the proper location and the panel is dockable Release the mouse button to dock the panel at the desired docking area Closing Panels The panels may be removed from the 3D Explorer interface by clicking the Close icon X The panels can be re opened using the View options from the top menu bar The panels can be toggled on off by clicking the E Hide Project Tree button and M Hide Navigation tools button on the toolbar 15 3 Navigation Tools The Navigation Panel should appear on your screen as shown in the figure below Slider Buttons Ad Rotate Shift Light Position x Le xo Ww E 7 zixr afa zJ E mier ptions Rotate model around the screen axes X up down Y left right Z rock side to side If the Navigation Panel does not appear on the screen click View Navgation tools from the top m
382. ogue will appear allowing you to go through the procedure again and change various aspects of the chart 13 2 2 13 Create Contours With HGA Provides options for creating contours with data from a selected field from the selected points layer Upon selecting this menu item the following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 281 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Data to be Contoure Choose Field interpolator Settings Interpolation Method Natural Neighbours E Advanced Settings Min Value Data Minz321 053 has Value Data Max 340 43 Contour Type Contour Line Mame Settings Color Shade Mame Settings Zebra Mame Settings Use Only Selected Stations Restrain within Domain Choose Domain Lreate Cancel EJ Help The gridded data can be represented as the following Contour Types e Contour lines e Color shaded map e Zebra Select the desired Contour type and enter a name for the layer For each type there are additional settings that can be accessed by clicking on the Settings button See the sections below for more details on these settings Data to be contoured Select a Field that contains the data you want to contour Define the Min and Max values or accept the defaults Interpolation Settings Under Interpolator Settings select the interpolation method choose from Natural Neighbor Inverse Distance or Kriging To use the adv
383. oil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History dd d Source Conto amp Group Conditions TV R SQL Statement If you need you can add multiple conditions these need be linked by specifying an additional Operator choose from AND OR For this example we will only use one condition oelect the Execute Query button id and you will be moved to the Data Query tab to see the results of your query The results of a Dynamic Station Group query will have only 2 columns the RowlD and the Station ID More useful is the fact that the new query will now appear as a new branch under the Station Group branch in the Project Tree The Dynamic Station Group queries can be distinguished from a user defined station group static by the color of the icon used to display in the Project Tree Blue icons are Static Station Groups while green icons are Dynamic Station groups 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Query Builder 150 iei Station Groups bes Si AI Stations E Boreholes oreholes with plot data af Lab QC Stations e x Manitoring Vella A ac Montoring_ Wells at A te test X WQ_ Stations i Clay thicker i than 2m e M Soil Borings with TCE Exceeding 10 mg ios a Station with TOC exceeding 320 7 5 Using SQL Commands Example If you are familiar with MS SQL Structured Query Language syntax commands you can retrieve manage and manipulate your
384. oject and a sequential number of the video made for this project followed by the AVI extension The AVI File name can be modified to any path and filename required by clicking the button beside the AVI File name field The Frame size setting has a selection of four options e Full window size 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 357 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help e 640x480 e 320x240 e Custom If the Custom option is chosen the Custom frame size fields Width and Height will be activated and a frame size can be defined The Compression setting lists the various vdeo compression techniques available A higher compression setting will reduce the AVI file size but it will also reduce the quality of the image The Frames per second setting defines the number of frames time steps that will be displayed each second in the AVI file This setting has no effect on the recording speed After specifying the settings click OK and the recording will begin o To stop the recording click the Stop button NOTE Recording AVI files will require significant system resources both RAM and Hard disk space It is recommended to close all non essential programs while recording the AVI file and ensure the destination folder has adequate free space 15 4 Display Settings The Display Tree Panel should appear as shown in the figure here If the panel is not visible click View Model tree from the main menu bar or click the E button f
385. ol all controls can be added to the report in the desired section To add a control to a report select the desired control by clicking on the icon on the toolbar position the cursor at the desired location and click and drag to define the size of the control Depending on the selected control specific dialog boxes may be displayed requesting information Once the control is placed on the report its properties could be altered by activating the Properties Explorer window and modifying the desired property The position of the controls can be changed by selecting and moving the selection to the desired location Controls can be moved this way only within a given section Cut and paste can be used to move controls to another section Some controls have special properties that require the user s attention these controls are described below Altering Borders of Controls Border properties of one or more controls can be modified by selecting the controls first and either clicking on the iz Borders button on the toolbar or selecting the option from the pop up menu Modifying Data Source information of the ADO data control The ADO data control mainly uses the connection string and SQL statement as its input to provide access to the data stored in your project s database Currently HGA provides basic inputs for this control However advanced users may want to modify these inputs in order to produce advanced reports that are supported by the R
386. oll bars The Orientation frame allows you to specify the paper orientation You may also choose to set the options for Collate Duplex and PaperBin by using the appropriate dropdown list box Selecting Printer Default for any of the printing options will assign the default setting of the selected printer for that particular print option O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 402 Report Settings X fw Show Grid v Align Controls ta Grid 4k arid columns x ea 4k Grid rows Ruler Units C Inches Centimeters Cancel The Grid Settings section allows you to modify the grid appearance of the designer window You can set the visibility of the grid by enabling disabling the Show Grid checkbox Selecting the Align Controls to Grid checkbox will automatically snap controls to the nearest grid column Set the number of Grid columns and Grid rows by using the appropriate vertical scroll boxes You can change the units of the ruler that appears above the designer window by clicking on either the Inches or Centimeters radio button Report Settings x a Normal Heading Font ame ite FontSize 10 D Heading4 Bald False d Italic False M Underline False id Strike hraugh __ Zs BackColor FareL alar Mer Delete Horizontal Alignment Lett Vertical Alignment Top Cancel O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services a Hydro GeoAna
387. om our website and then open it from backup using the following instructions Please be aware the download file may be quite large in size and therefore may take a while to download depending on your computer and internet speed Downloading from Website and Restore e Ensure your computer is connected to the internet e Download the HGA Demo Project file Select the Save option and indicate where on your local hard drive to save the HGA Demo Project zip file e he demo project will begin to download to your computer Depending on your internet connection speed this may take several minutes Once the demo project has been downloaded to your computer extract the contents of the HGA Demo Project zip file to a location on your computer Launch Hydro GeoAnalyst by double clicking on the desktop short cut icon Select Project gt Open from backup from the HGA main menu In the Restore Database As dialog box specify your local SQL Server Please note you cannot restore a database onto a network SQL Server in this way e Beside the Project field select the Open button folder with green arrow and navgate to the folder where the demo project files were extracted to Select the Project voh file e Beside the Backup File field select the Open button folder with green arrow and navigate to the folder where the demo project files were extracted to Select the SWS Demo DB bak file O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnaly
388. on Group i P Station Groups Note By selecting a Station Group the stations within the group will be publshed with the EDD Ok _ _Cance You also have an option to publish a station group within your Mobile EDD This means that the stations in that station group will appear listed in the Home Page of the Mobile EDD This can be very helpful if the stations already exist within your HGA project and you are sending someone into the field to collect data for specific stations If you do not use a station group it simply means you will be creating new stations while collecting your data in the field 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Here is an example Mobile EDD website to check out https online sharehga com hgamobile mobile edd testing Note We recommend using Chrome or Safari as your browser This EDD was based on the Demo Project and allows you to create new stations it was published without a Station Group providing name and coordinates and elevation as well as lithology info water level and field measurements am going to use this example Mobile EDD in the following description of how to use the Mobile EDD on your mobile device to collect data while in the field When you first launch the Mobile EDD on your device you will see the home page So Hydro GeoAnalystMobile x c C B https online sharehga com abil e edd 1 a Mew Tab Car ash I Hyperbole and a Hal CrumeContra
389. on List tab displays a limited number of fields for vewing and editing for a more detailed view of each station the Station Data tab must be used the information displayed in the Stations Table can be found in the Description Data Category within this tab in the Location table as shown below 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Hydro GeoAnalyst Demo Project Al View ap Modules gg Database e Help ET A EFL LEZE Ba v gt a Co Station List Station Data Data Query Data Filter E Si Station Groupe alii 4 1 ft gt i iR RPS a ru T E s J All Stations ID Station Name Xim Yim Elevat Dri Borehales m Ea HA Ca P Boreholes_with_plot_da 9 OHUT bid MW 535280 18 4B1431500 332 101 535558 13 AB 4D3B 00 334 BIA 515535 5D 4674505 00 333 50 owt Lab QC Stations T Monitoring Wells P QC Manitenng Wells Kr a ABMBOS OU 335 464 iris 3554840 481463730 337 00 i j WG Stations SD 33080 WHO AB147B1 10 330 50 ia a Clay thicker than zm an ml Soll_Borngs_with_TCE gi Queries 515469 50 481465270 330 60 t Time Series Plots WDS 461454650 325 50 Chi Crosstabs W 10 481465230 329 50 535545 90 Ag1455350 33270 0 30020 cel Borehole Logs H Map Prajects f Pd Cross Sections i Fors rn E pe ses sss ara pw ww era er 2530 18 535577 45 4415 20 330 9 rrr a Eu tt arpir mA
390. one tab group for the Project Tree and one tab group with the rest of the tabs station list station data etc However you can have more tab groups vertical or horizontal You can find these options by right clicking on a tab Then you can just drag and drop the tabs where you prefer them Here is an example configuration that you might like to use Your configuration is remembered the next time you open the program Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 1 Demo 5 Project View Modules Ig Database amp Help on Us gMTOA I Bart sig 4 Wall Profile X Station List Data Query Data Filter T WM PFs 2 uu of LP eXRTSAS AI ains R i j IQ Selon hama Alm T n Ere iiiciniin TOC m Fahan Typs al Boreheles i bhipi3 plat column A al Bwehales wihal E be pa Ws a Lab OC Bisioa I 35 01 53 212 55 4814030 DO 323 5D 324 5 Borehole 4 Moretonrg_Wetls Desa n Le eon ME 53515859 4814 05000 326 00 327 00 Borehole E QC Muondnnng Wel GB 3 83 078369 481407000 326 00 327 00 Barehrole Soe Bigi p SS TU gi car a T gem m cili GE 23555368 4814 00n00 322 DO 323 00 Borehole F Wi Stations j i l l Clay thicker than 2 0 GE 05 535 MB EB 84 060 00 324 DO 325 00 Borehole F So _Bonngs_welh_T BB D 5335 743 69 401407000 X30 50 331 9 Borehole i Quenes GEI 07 s3565268 481403 00 31300 334 0d Borehole 7 Mme caret Pits p GB DE 535498 69 4814 080 DD
391. ons s E3 GB24 H E Interpretations H E BB Bf CC lf DD Jj wg X pu E EEE ES involved in the selected cross section Individual stations may be selected and set to Visible or hidden Station label properties can be modified in the Station Label Properties options under the Project node 15 6 3 Layer Interpretation Settings Under the Interpretations folder there will be three separate sub folders one for each of the interpretation types e Model e Geology e Hydrogeology Under each individual Interpretation Layer there is a list of the soil types belonging to O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 379 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Stay on top v B Cross Sections Data E Af AA H E Stations lf Interpretations E Model Layers El Geology Layers o seting o b Mame Coarse Grav Misble NM LayerName Coarse Gray this layer Each soil type has its own settings as shown here The soil Name may not be modified this name will appear in the Legend contents Each individual soil type may be set to Visible or hidden from view 15 7 Creating Slices and Cross Sections A slice is defined as a 3D planar surface extending horizontally or vertically through the project There are three types of slice objects available e Vertical slices along the XZ or YZ plane extending through the entire depth of the domain e Horizontal slices along the XY plane of the project
392. ook with the Log File attached and addressed to our Technical Support department Sws support slb com The log file can be helpful when trouble shooting issues 3 5 6 Problem Steps Recorder By selecting Help Problem Steps Recorder you will initiate a Windows program you can use to record the steps you are taking within HGA that is causing difficulties This can be helpful to send to Technical Support to better describe exactly the steps you are taking when you encounter a problem amp Problem Steps Recorder Start Record T The program is very simple to use simple select Start Record and then reproduce your steps within HGA Once you hawe finished select Stop Record and you will be prompted to save the recording as a zip file so you can send it to Technical Support Please be aware this option is only available on Windows or later operating systems 3 5 7 License This menu option provides the ability to request a license as well as install a license If you are working with a Team License you will also find the option to check out and check in a license O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 4 Creating New Projects This section presents information on how to create new projects and modify the properties of existing projects A new project is usually created with a completely new database however HGA is designed to also allow for managing multiple projects on a single database The
393. oon samples Depth based data e g symbols for water level indicator etc With text entity text label showing water level values With image entity Picture e g any image that should be applied to the entire BHLP column The column type may be selected from a pick list as shown below Choose Column Type X Please Choose a Column Type Scale Scale Well Constructor Interval Depth Picture One or more instances of these column types can be displayed on a borehole log plot in any sequence Each column can have its own header If you have added several columns to your borehole log plot and you would like to change the order in which they appear you can simply click on one of the sub nodes under the Design node in the tree to highlight it then click and drag the folder to a new position in the folder list The BHLP will be re organized to reflect the order of the sub nodes under the Design node 12 3 1 Scale Column The Scale column displays the vertical scale on the borehole log plot Although a table and respective fields for the starting and ending depth could be provided for this column the BHLP automatically adjusts the scale column so that the scale represents the largest column placed on the borehole log plot One or more vertical scale columns can be placed on a given borehole log plot This feature may be useful in such cases where displaying the vertical scale in more than one unit e g metres and fee
394. or Minimal Percent Recovery You can find this option by selecting Project Export In this first step of the workflow you can create a template which can be opened in Excel for others to use to validate their data In the EDD Template Designer you select which fields you wish to have in your template by simply dragging and dropping them onto the Template Format Highlighting these are also bolded These are fields that are required to be able to import the data into the select table NOTE The analysis assumes that the sample that is being spiked is a blank and does not contain any detectable concentrations of any of the contaminants You may not use a field original sample for a spiked sample analysis Highlighting The options are the same as described in the previous section 10 2 3 Check Blanks Settings A blank is a quality control sample used to detect and identify contaminants introduced to samples during the measurement process A laboratory blank is an analyte free matrix that is carried through all or part of the analytical process for identifying contamination introduced during analysis Types of laboratory blanks include method blanks carried through the entire preparation and analysis sequence calibration blanks matrix matched reagent water used for calibration and storage blanks placed in sample storage areas In the field an analyte free matrix is carried through a portion of the field process to identify conta
395. or any branch under it you can select New Query to launch the Query build Finally if you right click on a query in the Project Tree and select Edit Query the Query Builder will open displaying the selected query The Query Builder tab is shown below and displays the options available for a Select Query Query Builder X gt 3X ig v Query Name Display Fields Example Function Expression Alias Order By BHLP Map Plot and Plume Ready gt station name name v Use project coordinates Available Fields Description Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining Exploration Geophysics Well History x74 Conditions Expression Operator Value And Or dp gt 4 4 Source Condtion Project K Group Conditions R SQL Statement The Query Builder tab contains the following sections e Available Fields Select fields for the query from the tables in the database shown in the tree O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Query Builder 142 Display Fields The fields in this section will be displayed when the query is executed Conditions The fields in this section are used to set conditions for the query Toolbar Contains buttons to most of the functions in the Query Builder Source Conditions Provides options for adjusting the source for the query Group Conditions Specifies grouping options whe
396. or by clicking on the appropriate color box Use the Width vertical scroll bars to change the width of the column Under the Header Text frame specify the Font Angle and Alignment of the column header text Select the Word Wrap check box to ensure that the header text remains visible within the defined column width In the Header Text text box specify a header name for the BHLP column The Column Options dialog is available in the settings for each BHLP column and can be accessed by clicking the Options button shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 208 BHLP Settings E EN xl E BHLP Scale E3 ER v Visible Column Options visibili The Mies v Visible Major Tic Mark Interval fi 2 Display Unit m mi Color Label Position Left w L Minor Tic Mark Font Ea Interval 5 I Background E Color J Help Apply UE Cancel Individual column settings are described in the following sections 12 3 BHLP Columns The Borehole Log Plotter supports a number of column types that can be presented on a typical borehole log plot A borehole log plot consists of a set of desired columns selected from the list of supported column types The plot does not save the data being displayed and as such avoids data duplication A borehole log plot is generated in real time using a BHLP template and data for the selected borehole s For each column displayed on the
397. orders of magnitude higher than the majority of the other values In such cases the large values dominate the interpolation process and details in the low concentration zones are removed If this setting is selected the log of each data value is taken prior to performing interpolation By interpolating the log of the data set small values are given more weight than otherwise Restrict Min Value Flag to restrict the minimum value of the interpolated data Restrict Max Value Flag to restrict the maximum value of the interpolation data Value Min Minimum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data less than Value Min will be assigned a value of Value Min Value Max Maximum value of the interpolated data Any interpolated data greater than Value Max will be assigned a value of Value Max Real Min Real minimum value of interpolated data Real Max Real maximum value of interpolated data Mag X Xco ordinate magnification factor Mag Y Y co ordinate magnification factor Mag Z Z co ordinate magnification factor No Value Value assigned to nodes located outside the convex hull of the data points where interpolation is not performed Allow Extrapolation Is a flag to use extrapolation for nodes outside the convex hull of the polygon formed by the data points In this case linear regression is used to fit a plane through the data set and calculate the interpolated value This should be used with caution since extrapolation is less rel
398. ore foti mc Dress i Eerabele Les Prods i Cresa schon 1D Views i Ll Puanicots L 4 1 IE al titi Station Grow All Steticns Rows 151 Pad 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 15 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help If desired selected stations can be removed from a static station group or the Station Group can be deleted as a whole To remove stations from a static station group simply select the stations by highlighting the row and then select the delete button this will remove the station from the station group but will not delete the station from the database To delete a station from the database you must first select the All Stations station group and delete the stations from here To delete an entire station group right click on the station group in the Project tree and select delete 2 6 Data Categories The tables in an HGA database can be organized into a logical grouping by placing them into any one of the provided data categories HGA provides several data categories which might be considered common data categories found for environmental data However you can create as many categories as you wish within the Template Manager This way you can completely customize the way in which the tables are organized within HGA The Station Data categories can be accessed by selecting the Station Data tab and select the Data Category combo box ensure that one or more stations are selected in the Station List tab
399. ort a Previous Page Moves to the previous page in the report Page Moves to the page specified in this text box I Next Page Moves to the next page in the report i Last Page Moves to the last page in the document c Back Moves back to the prevous page in a list of recently accessed pages P Forward Moves forward to the next page in a list of recently accessed pages 16 3 2 Using the Report Viewer Once a report is generated and displayed on the Viewer it can either be saved in the Report Editor s native binary format printed or exported to various formats that are supported by the Report Editor Using the T button on the toolbar reports can be exported to e Portable Document Format PDF e Microsoft Excel e TIFF e Hyper Text Markup Language HTML e Rich Text Format RTF O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor o Saving Reports Saving the report design as opposed to the final report is preferable as the design requires a smaller storage space for most reports and the reports that are generated from a saved report design are dynamic they are up to date with the data stored in your database However reports that are saved from the Viewer are static and they may not reflect the exact content of the current data To save the report press the Save button from the Viewer window s toolbar The Report will be saved as a RDF file archive file HGA stores and manages all report designs in your pro
400. ortant for your project for example chemical concentration information O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Online Sharing co 9 jme Sm i ti i i Contaminant Queries NPCE Exceeds 1 mg per kg Depth exceeds 10m E Contaminant Queries Soil chem exceedences Contaminant Queries Soil Plume Data Contaminant QueriesNTCE Exceeds 10 mg per kg Contaminant QueriesNTVOC Exceeds 1000 ug L Contaminant QueriesXvoc Exceeds 5000 ug per L Contaminant QueriesNVC exceeds 1 mg per kg Water Level Queriesvavg waterlevel per date Water Level Queries diver data Water Level Queries max water level Water Level Querieswvmod head observations Water Level Queries water elevations months Water Level Queries water_levels aquifertest_pumpingrates aquifertest_pumpingtest_water_levels Cross_Section_Interpretations Cross_section_model_interpretations cross_tab_example lithoelevations qc lab analysis select for deletion soil desc concatenate stations Time Seres Chart Data 7 Launch browser after publishing JESIESI ESI ESILESE ES C00 0000008 g Oomi oo IGT The Maps tab allows you to select layers from any of the maps in your project that you wish to share Additionally any water level information for the points layers you select from the map will be included in the Online Share You have an option to spe
401. pefiles be kept in the same folder as the current map project By default Map projects are created in the Map sub folder of the current Project folder Shapefile Provides options for opening a map layer The Map Manager is able to open any shapefile that has a projection system already assigned to it These shapefiles include all types of ESRI shapefiles polygons lines points and text Once a map layer is opened it will appear in the Layer Manager and is added to the current Map Window If the selected shapefile contains numeric attribute data the Set Field Precision data will appear on your screen For more information on this dialog please refer to Setting Field Precision in the next section Surface Provides options for importing 3D surface layers The following surface files are supported e Surfer grid grd version 6 and 7 e DEM DEM e ESRI ASCII asc e ext txt Upon selecting this option an Open dialog will display shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 258 DEM syz DEM Canada E ARAL bet JjESRI Grid AFA1 grid Ext NED Z Bedrock Ext raw ESRI Format E binary grid file grd Surfer ES calpts grd File name Files of type All supported files ard dem asc tet Locate and select a surface file and select Open The following dialog will display where you can specify a Name Projection Type Projection system and Descrip
402. pography 325 333333322118 47 3333338853353 Model 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 BottLayerl 278 000000036182 46 0000000062631 Model 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 BottLayer2 278 000000036182 D Model 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 BottLayer3 232 000000023313 10 0000000299187 Model 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Medium Sand 321 999999977853 12 9999999575503 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Gravel 308 000000020303 30 999999984121 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Coarse Gravel 325 333333322118 3 99999994426497 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Fine Sand 278 0000000361 82 18 0000000265706 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Silt 260 000000009611 27 9999999796925 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 Sand 232 000000023313 6 00000000885686 Geology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 upper aquifer 325 999999922118 3 99999994426497 Hydrogeology 25 1204770644 936676091 GB 02 lower aquifer 278 000000036182 18 0000000265706 Hydrogeology 26 1871233061 1774674142 GB 03 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 Topography 321 333333377853 24 0000000354275 Model 27 3324895205 333321587 GB 04 BottLayerl 297 999999942426 9 00000001328527 Model 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 BottLayer2 288 9999999291 4 46 9999999460998 Model r Source Condition 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 BottLayer3 241 999999983041 19 9999999830406 Model Station Groups tid 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 Coarse Gravel 321 999999977853 7 99999988853 Geology 27 324895205 333321587 GB 04 Fine Sand 314 00
403. preadsheet XLS or XL SX or e MS Access Database MDB or ACCDB For more details on how to import export data using the DTS please refer to The Data Transfer System EDD Workflow The EDD Electronic Data Deliverable workflow provides an efficient way of getting validated data into HGA The workflow includes the following three steps 1 EDD Template Designer 2 HGA QuickChecker 3 EDD Import Additionally with the latest release of HGA we also have an option to make your EDD mobile SO you can use it on mobile devices like tablets and smart phones 2 16 1 EDD Template Designer You can find this option by selecting Modules EDD Template Designer In this first step of the workflow you can create a template which can be opened in Excel for others to use to O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts 36 validate their data In the EDD Template Designer you select which fields you wish to have in your template by simply dragging and dropping them onto the Template Format EDD Template Designer ca E 3 7 29 Ed cad id 6 Single Sheets Template Version Submission URL Template Version URL 1 myname gmail com Search P R 3 Uncategorized 3 Description 3 Geologic Description 9 Well Construction 3 Soil Testing lt Soil Sampling a Monitoring Event amp T Parameter Sample 4 Sample ID T T Lab ID Batch ID Quality Code
404. pretation type Click on the button or select the Add Vertex option from the Edit menu Place the mouse cursor at the desired location the mouse cursor will change to a pen Click once with the left mouse button at this location to add a vertex Repeat the last two steps to add more vertices at other locations on the selected object Delete Vertex Provides an option to delete a vertex from the selected object To delete a vertex Activate the desired cross section interpretation Select an object that is a polygon or line Click on the x button or select the Delete Vertex option from the Edit menu Place the mouse cursor on the vertex to be deleted the mouse cursor will change to an X Click once with the left mouse button on this vertex to remove it from the object Repeat the last two steps to delete more vertices from the selected object Link Vertex The Link Vertex option allows for linking two vertices from two polygons or lines It is intended to assist in filling in gaps between adjacent polygons or lines thus creating continuous interpretations The end result is that polygons or lines will be able to share a common linked vertex or vertices To Link Vertices on polygons or lines Select the desired interpretation layer and make it editable Select the polygon or line whose vertex will be linked with another vertex Click the Link Vertex option from the Edit menu or click the button from the toolbar Cli
405. priate User Name and Password to be authenticated on the SQL Server Please Note e Appropriate permissions need to be provided to use either of the authentication options Please contact your IT support to ensure you have appropriate permissions to create new databases or create new projects on existing databases e f you cannot see your local instance of SQL Express when creating a new project or opening an existing project please refer to Appendix F Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s for some troubleshooting suggestions Select the Next button to proceed to the next step in the New Project wizard O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 99 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 4 2 Select Template This step in the New Project wizard allows you to select which database template to use for your project Provided with HGA is a metric and imperial version of our Environmental template When you select a template from the drop down list you can review the database structure in the preview below New HGA Project Data Source 6 Select a Template dip E Environmental Metric 2014 hgat Project Settings Create Project Data Structure Preview Environmental Metric 2014 Hx Description H y Geologic Description H E Well Construction ly Soil Testing Gly Soil Sampling H Monitoring Event fly Mining Exploration Hx Geophysics H E Well History xy Uncategorized Download and review data model schemas for these templates The database
406. project Select a Hydro GeoAnalyst data layer i e station data and ensure this is visible and active selected If you do not have such a layer you may create one based on station groups that are available in your Hydro GeoAnalyst project To do this use the Layer gt Load HGA Data option to select a station group The Map Manager creates a layer with stations that are available in the group O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 309 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Zoom in to the area of interest optional Click the Cross Section Line button at the right end of the toolbar or select Tools Define Cross Section Line from the Main Menu Place the mouse cursor at the starting point of the line and click once with the left mouse button Click again at another location to add a vertex to the line You may add one or more vertices that define the cross section line Note If you wish to place a vertex beyond the extent of the current map view click and hold the right mouse button to pan across the map Also you can use the mouse wheel to zoom in and zoom out while defining the cross section line At the end point of the line double click the left mouse button to finish This will launch the dialog shown below CrossSection Line E4 Hame ae Buffer 200 meters Description Enter description here LE Cancel For each cross section line specify a Name Buffer Distance and Description The Buffer Distance determi
407. ptions for cross section interpretations Options NNNM xi E ditor Labels Fiulers Vertical Exag Screen wLevel Intersecting Grid Interpretation W Store Soft Data Points Save All Contacts The cross section editor now saves the cross section interpretations to the project database The interpretations are also linked to the stations that were selected for the cross section and these stations along with their interval data are also saved to the database The interpretations and the wells and corresponding interval data can be retrieved later using the Query Builder For more details please see Querying Cross Section Interpretations Store Soft Data Points Whenever a layer intersects with a station at only one point it could be because of one of the following reasons The layer truly touches the well at only one location e g pinch out or There is no contact with the well In either case the following options are available Consider the actually intersecting point as the top elevation and insert NULL for both the thickness and bottom elevation Extend the depth of the station fictitiously within the bounds of the cross section to determine the location of the other point These extensions are known as Soft Data Points If this point can not be found within the bound the layer will be considered to be a zero thickness layer with thickness of NULL Save All Contacts Some stations may be crossed by a
408. r for more details see View 3D of the Cross Section Editor You may also import a plume into an existing 3D project to do so select File Import Plume from the main menu The plume may be visualized with one of the display formats shown below when you right mouse click on any data plume in the model tree Region a Add Isosurface Add Calormap o E Add Isolines Add isosurface see Isosurfaces for more details Add color map see Color Maps for more details Add isolines see Isoline Maps for more details Refer to the respective sections for instructions on how to create these display elements and for details on the display settings associated with each one The display settings shown below controls the global settings for all Plume display elements m Setting Mam result value Palette eg Visible v Title Textsize 5 Test color B LJ m Lj Hame O Z OoOo Framelne color LJ Frame fill color The Name option controls the display name for the plume in the tree view The Palette option controls the color scale used on all Plume display elements A description of the Palette options is available see The Color Palette The Color legend settings are used to modify the appearance of the color legend as it applies to all color map display elements A description of the Color legend options is available see The Color Legend 15 5 1 Isosurfaces An isosur
409. r Name contains the parameter being analyzed typically found in the Chemistry Results or Soil Chemistry table with the results e Parameter Identification Information contains meta data about the parameter typically found in the same table as the parameter name e Parameter Values The measured or observed value for the selected chemical or O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control parameter Typically found in the Chemistry Results or Soil Chemistry table e Quality Code Identifiers Used to identify the sample type Typically found with the Sample ID in the Monitoring Event Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling Soil Sample table The following fields are not required but are helpful for easily identifying samples in the results page e Station Name located in the Station table e Sample Name this is typically found in the Monitoring Event Chem Sample table or the Soil Sampling gt Soil Sample table e Sample Date e Units e Unit conversion factors 10 2 Define A New Lab Quality Template To create a new lab quality analysis template click Tools gt Quality Control from the Main Menu then select the Manage Lab QC Templates option The Lab Quality window will open as shown in the following figure x Lab Quality Templates Template Description n Duplicate Settings Relative percent
410. r Water Services is not responsible for any direct or indirect damages however caused if project data has not been securely and independently backed up You are strongly encouraged to frequently back up your HGA project folder and the SQL Server database 1 6 Learning to use Hydro GeoAnalyst There are several ways of getting acquainted with HGA including using the Demo Guide included with the HGA Demo Project as well as the In Program and On Line Help Additionally we have both on line and on site training courses available for HGA Please contact Schlumberger Water Services if you require further training on HGA for yourself or your company or on other software that is developed and distributed by Schlumberger Water Services Online Help O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst You can also find the Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 help online http www swstechnology com help hga 2014 This online version of the Help can be updated more regularly than the help within the program itself so check it out for the latest updates to the documentation In Program Help To Mew the In Program help select Help gt Contents Some HGA windows and dialogs contain Hep buttons which load the appropriate help section for the current active component The HGA Help window is divided into three main areas e A Navigation Frame on the left displays the Contents Index Search and Favorites tabs e A Toolbar ac
411. r database used by the current project A backup of the database is helpful in order to preserve data or to detach and send the database to colleagues or SWS Technical Support Select this menu item and provide the directory path for the file It will be saved with the name of the database and the BAK extension You also have the option to make a copy of the all the project files as well Backup Database Backup Location Include project files in this backup NOTE Backup Database works only if you are running HGA on the system that also hosts the server SQL Server does not permit saving the back up copy of the database to a mapped network drive it can be saved only to a local drive Displays either the online or in program HGA Help depending on the settings specified under HGA Settings 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3 5 2 About Displays the HGA Info dialog This contains the HGA version number serial number and information on how to contact Schlumberger Water Services 3 5 3 Release Notes This option opens your default internet browser to display the online ReadMe file explaining the changes and additions to the program for the last several releases 3 5 4 View Log File By selecting Help View Log file the HGA log file will open up usually in Notepad This log file can be helpful for troubleshooting issues 3 5 5 Email Log File By selecting Help Email Log File a new email will be created within Outl
412. r each table If however you select the Grouped Sheets tab you will notice that the fields are presented in another way Here you will find the tables that are related to each other by database foreign keys are grouped on a branch When you select the child table lowest branch you will find a list of ALL fields of the related tables below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help EDD Template Designer El es X 18 al omnee uerum Ts ees inini Submission URL Template Version URL El Location i H Soil Sample Template Format Sheet Name E Parameter Sample E Aquifer Test View Names dX Sampling Precision Fraction Code Dilution Factor Analysis Method Analysis Date Qualifier When you select fields from the Grouped Sheets tab you will create a template with only one worksheet You have some additional options when creating your EDD Template You can set a version number to keep tracked in case in the future you wish to update a template A submission URL can be set as either an email address or as an FTP folder to upload to A Template Version URL can be entered so that when using the template in the HGA QuickChecker and the EDD import routine it can be verified that it is the most up to date version of the template Additionally you can add conditions onto the fields you have chosen that the HGA QuickChecker will verify For example you can make the Sample Date field require
413. r example select the Stations List grid or select the desired table Press the Print button By from the toolbar The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the Designer Window press the rs Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The fields in the selected grid will be added to the report designer and the ADO data control is automatically created An example is shown below for the Lithology table New Report 18 x J5 amp miHIOx 7 5s5mNx mrmlmiss s Norma x fe ENEHNEuUNHENHN 3HBl2 uU JR lad abi zm Zt S EB o e f DL 5245 05 e e I amp o aw S ee Cim EE Een oo roo x E E MainReport _ E PageHeader H 5 PageHeader H Detail B PageFooter ESET CAESARS CRETE EL EEE Beer Custom ERAAN perpeti s p Syrtes eser EEA prodere teet d Name dcRptData 2 F Command 30 4 P T us ZHHHHHCUHBEHEHEEE TT PIRE E E e fenal Connectio Provider SQLC B 9 uiu Connectio 15 p 2 ii CursorLoc 2 ddADOU PEA SH ES EG SE TRE CursorTyp 0 ddADOO DataSourc DefaultDa IsolationLt 1 left 3827 LockType 1 MaxRows 0 Password Provider Source SELECT FROI Tag top 354 UserID consistency structure matgsc colour ador formation name formation unit moisture comment The layout of the report can then be modified and unwanted fields can be removed from the design If the fields do not imm
414. r query Value Axis specify a field to be used for the Value Y axis This will be observed result value for the parameter s of interest Units loads the following dialog allowing you to make unit conversions Units e LUE Unit category E Units SEC m Unit conversion C Mane Constant Conversion Factor Factor Label C From field Y azLonversianF actor O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 191 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Select the unit category then the units from this category If the units categories are not compatible for instance Time and Length then the buttons are disabled You may also select a field to be used for the unit conversion or create constant conversion factor in this case enter the factor and an appropriate field The units conversion component implements full SI units including temperature electric current and luminous intensity Label select a field to be used for the symbol label The next two fields are used to control non detect results When the query returns null records for the result value the method detection limit if available and if selected can be displayed on the plot Optionally the method detection limit multiplied by the non detect factor ND Factor can be used instead of the method detection limit For example if an ND Factor of 0 5 is prouded and a column containing method detection limit values is provided then the plot will display the method Detection Limi
415. ral Stations Queries Maps Project Name Top Hat Project example project it includes data from several boreholes soil borings and monitoring wells in the area Contact Please contact me p Project Manager 123 456 7890 os Note Best size for client logo is 150 pixels wide by 100 pixels high The next tab allows you to select a query to display station information fe Online Sharing alee Stations Queries Maps Please select station data from the list B Select All aquifertest_pumpingrates aquifertest pumpingtest water levels avg waterevel per date Cross Section Interpretations Cross section model interpretations cross tab example diver data lithoelevations max btex concentration max water level PCE Exceeds l mg per kg Depth exceeds 1 m qc lab analysis select for deletion Soil chem exceedences soil desc concatenate Soil Plume Data TCE Exceeds 10 mg per kg Time Series Chart Data TVOC Exceeds 1000 ug L tvoc Exceeds 5000 ug per L VC exceeds 1 mg per kg vmod head observations water elevations months water levels Y Launch browser after publishing lt Previous Next gt Publish Cancel V The Queries tab allows you to select a query to display any additional data that is imp
416. ral template options which were installed with HGA You can modify templates O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts oss by going to the folder where the templates have been stored see HGA Settings for more details and adjust it to suit your needs Perhaps you may want to change the logo etc Any templates stored in this folder will be available in the drop down list It would be a good idea to review the templates before you use them In this example want to create 2 plots on each page with 2 parameters on each plot So will write a query to pull the 4 parameters want in the plots TCE Vinyl Chloride Benzene and Ethylbenzene Here for example is my query Display Fields Function Expression Alias Order By station Name Station Name parameter_sample sample_date Sample Date parameter result result unit Result Unit parameter result result value Result Value parameter resultl chemical name Chemical Mame xj Expression Operator Value And Or parameter result chemical name Vinyl chloride parameter result chemical name TCE OR parameter result chemical name Benzene OR parameter result chemical name Ethyl benzene Now I will review the template that matches what want to plot Template 2 plots by 2 parameters mH 9 ls Template 2 plots by 2 parameters xlsx Microsoft Excel o File Home Insert Page Layout Formulas Da
417. ranch of the project tree the Data Query tab will be activated and O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts z display the results of the selected query Hydro Geonahet 2014 1 Mema 2 eec Project 07 View Modules lg Database Help oo snm 4939 Bar gt ald Station Lit Station Data Data Query Gata Alter Query Builder i a Staion Groupe A 4 18 12109 M ve exeocoTresen 3 F Gusna a 5 Concerilesticans gc inb analysis J FP cass tab exa Real SialinaNem ample jO Sampie O Baich IL Chemical Resul V Fesull Ll Delgcirn QOualiy Cu Parameled Ansien Anabyses M Chuan F amp P mas hiex conc Oeil ae P PCE Ecseds f ia owe 420025 oaaao 39000 mail 1 00 s Pu UE 1 ow 4 EN 12 200 5 E 200 mgri E 00 P TVOC exa 190 oH omas oaao _ ms a i mgt 100 F tvoc Expel 130 OW4 2007 25 E 12 200 Temp ra 00 Degrees C B oo P VC sxceedz 1 TX OMA E 7 26 03 Teyaxx IU Taluens T X mail 1 oo E 1x OWS S oa a200 Vinyichioi DO mgit 100 a rr da
418. rawing Model Interpretation Layers Before starting to draw model interpretation layers please ensure that you have defined the model layer settings explained in the previous section You will see that the top of layer 1 ground surface is drawn in automatically for each new cross section This layer can be modified by moving it through its existing vertices adding new vertices at desired locations or deleting existing vertices To draw model layers follow the directions below Activate the Model Interpretation Layer in the Layer Manager Select the Line draw button N from the toolbar As soon as this option is selected the following Model Layers dialog will appear 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 341 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Topography Topography Topography Laver t3 Slice 2 BattL aver t3 Slice 3 BattL ayer Co Slice 4 BattLayer3 In this dialog choose the desired model layer by selecting the radio button from the first column in this grid Each model layer may be selected and assigned only once Interpretation layers that are already drawn in the cross section are colored in orange and are not selectable Click OK to continue Place the mouse cursor at the left boundary at the desired depth of the intended model layer when the mouse cursor becomes close enough to the boundary line the cursor will snap to the boundary Click once on the left boundary to add a vertex at this location and start the line Slowly
419. really helpful for our support team to help resolve your concern If you are having difficulties explaining the concern try using the Problem Step Recorder it does just what the name implies it creates a recording of the steps you took all the clicks with screen captures to help make it clear what you were trying to do Then on the right side of the Support tab there are links to more information including e The HGA You Tube channel with all the HGA videos e The online Frequently Asked Questions e And also our available Training Options 2 2 About the Interface Once a project is loaded the main window will appear the HGA demo project is displayed below Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 1 Demo E Sl Project View Modules Database amp Help ee 25 4 OxMTOA I Sarl alu 4 Station List Station Data Date Query Data Filter X Ee car 3 i ofi b A4XxETH Rv D Staton Name xim fim Elevatinnitm TOCim Sinlinn Tyne Fj i Boreholes wh nici F F Lnb QC Stslians 4 Mantonng Wels GB D2 555 155 69 4514 05D DO 326 00 A27 00 Borehole 4 QC Maniarng Wel Gata 53507869 48407000 33600 1327 00 Borehole E ape GB 04 53585359 4 814 090 00 322 pa 323 00 Boreham Clay thicker then 2 GB 05 SEMBE 481406000 324 00 325 00 Ezrengie 4 Soi Bons wdh T GB 06 53574369 48 4070 00 330 50 133190 Borehole P Queries GE 07 55 6269 4814 030 00 333 00 334 00 Borehole Har
420. rectory Structure An HGA project consists of many different files and folders related to the different components within HGA Please refer to the information below to determine what data is stored in which folder Project Folder Project voh is a text file and contains the information on the connection string to the HGA project such as SQL server name database catalog name etc Project voh bak is a backup of the voh file Project vbx is a text file and contains the geotransformation settings of the project Map Subfolder The map folder contains all of the shapefiles associated with the map project In the root you will ind MapProjectName VMP This is an XML file that contains details on the map project such as the projection system renderers settings cross section lines intersections etc Each map project has a unique VMP file Selection When you create a new map layer from an HGA station group or selected stations a new points shapefile is created and saved in this directory i e boreholes shp boreholes shx boreholes dbf Data When you create a new map layer from an HGA data query or a map project a new points shapefile is created and saved in this directory e g Chem Exceedences shp Chem Exceedences shx Chem Exceedences dbf Plumes Subfolder The plumes folder contains all of the files associated with the plume data once the 3D interpolation has been conducted on a query The created nc files are used whe
421. red by HGA therefore you may not be able to change the Database Name of these they will be grayed out However you can change the Display Name so that these tables and fields appear as you would like to see them in the main HGA interface You can adjust which tables and fields you see within the main HGA interface by simply adjusting the visibility option ie turn tables and fields on or off Not visible in the main HGA interface Y Visible in the main HGA interface To add more items to your database structure you can add as many as you like you need to use the following options in the tool bar ed to add a new category ng to add a new table O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 105 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help CB to add a new field To adjust the order of items in your database structure you need to use the following options in the tool bar T moves the item category table or field you currently have selected up v moves the item category table or field you currently have selected down 5 2 How to add Tables and Fields When you are ready to adjust the structure of your database and want to add a new table use the F icon You will find a dialog appears when you can specify the Table Name as well as the Category the table should go into Then you can add as many fields as need for your table by using the qp icon cl Be sure to provide a name for each of your fields as well as indicate which field you would
422. resents the top surface for the first layer while the bottom most layer represents the bottom surface of the last layer i e each model line defines the bottom of the model layer excluding the top layer Additional model layers may be inserted at any location at any time Press the Add button to add a new model layer The new layer will be added ABOVE the currently selected layer Press the x Delete button to remove the selected model layer To edit an existing layer press the p Edit button or double click on the row containing O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 333 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help this layer Each model layer does not need to appear in all cross sections NOTE The Model Layers options are not available when the Model Layer interpretation is set to edit mode in the layer manager Update Cross Section Use this option to update the screen water level and intersecting layer information displayed on the current cross section The corresponding map project should be open in order to update information from intersecting cross sections Cross Section Info Displays summary info for the selected cross section Information for DD b d X Cross Section Line Length 1513 1 m Buffer 200 0 m Starting Point Coord 536467 4814824 Ending Paint Coord 536598 481 3315 Vertical Exaggeratian 23 8 Well Numbers 2 Display BHLP Use this feature to display a borehole log plot directly on the s
423. ression Alias Order By d station name MAX gw level depth depth to water level When executing a query containing an aggregate function the query builder will automatically group all other fields in the Display Fields This is required in order to be able to determine calculate the function for the selected field In the example above the query will be grouped by the station name so only one record per station name will be displayed the record with the maximum depth to water level for each station O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 155 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 8 Event Planning The Event Planning module ensures that your field activities are always completed correctly and on time Easily create multiple schedules for various stations and then create event plans that outline the details of your field activities including stations to be sampled data to be collected field checklists and more Event plans are automatically converted into reports which can be printed and given to field personnel Hydro GeoAnalyst keeps track of all your event plans and automatically reminds you in advance when scheduled field activities are due 8 1 About the Interface The Event Planning module can be launched by selecting the toolbar or by selecting Modules Event Planning from the menu bar icon from the main pde Genhnahit 2013 Deme Project vie Menus Ohna Hp Edw E E oM TA B k F h sz wst Star
424. results of the query m This allows you to save the filter as a Query you will be moved to the Query Builder 2 14 Well Profile Tab The Well Profile tab allows you to view a Borehole Log Plot BHLP template for the selected station Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 1 Pema isl Project View Modules Database Help xu s G 49e CA 44 gu M 0 Sationcist Staten Data Data Query Data Filter Well Profile a Si Staton Groups 3 3 ed id All Stations L p JE z bhipl resistivity plot ed M Burehales with pl se ES Resisthity ohms a GC_Monitoring_W a Soil Borings al WO Stations Clay ihickmr than 4 Soil_Bonrugs_waih s Quenes 3 amp Time Series Plots ue a Borehole Logs zd Map Projects i ja Crose Sections a c 1D Views m is M Reports 12 101 2 201 2 F Lab QC Simiions af Monitoring Weis s Wei Construction Wee Coase Gravel Fine Sand ij From this tab you can also print your BHLPs to PowerPoint for quick and easy printing E Select the button to print your BHLP to an existing PowerPoint template O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts ES Select the button to create a new PowerPoint template Select the rl button to save the current BHLP as an image Provided with HGA is an example template called Station Group Template pptx If you print to this template it will print one slide per station for the currently selected Statio
425. ria limit where the criteria limit is available in another field in the selected data query In the Choose Data tab you can specify which stations should display the data table This is useful if you have a station group with numerous stations and are interested in displaying the data summary table only for a few stations 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 292 Data Settings X Display Fields Condition Choose Data Select one or mare stations Far which data will be displayed r Iv r m Iv m Get Selection from Map Cancel Help Simply place a check box beside the stations that should display the data summary table If you click on the Get Selection Map button then the Map Manager will get only those stations that are selected on the map layer on the map project and use only those for the Display Data This button is enabled only if you have at least one station selected in the map layer Once you are finished click OK to return to the layout window From the Layout Setting dialog click on the Display Settings button in the Callout Box column and the following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 293 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Callout Box Settings E X Settings Fill Color Outline Color zu Transparent Fase gt Bos Shape Round Rectan Tip Style Triangle v Padding hs 4 Shadow Fase Shadow Color ES Difset
426. rojection that is different from that used for the current map project therefore when a CAD file is selected the projection system and units may need to be converted to the current projection system and units In addition CAD files may contain graphic features on different layers as such there are options to select the layer to import These options are explained below HINT If you are having difficulties importing your CAD drawing please try exploding all blocks 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 267 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help and re saving as a dxf file before attempting to import into HGA Selecting Layers When a CAD format is selected using the Layer Import menu navigate to the appropriate file and open it The following dialogue will load Import DXF Projection Projection Type UTM Coordinate System NAD 1883 UTM one 17M LU rit meters Select layers to import into a map OF Cancel The top portion of the dialogue lists the projection system properties of the current map project Below this frame is a Transform button This option is required only if you are not sure that the CAD file has the same projection system as the current map project In this case click Transform to georeference the CAD image Once you are done click OK to return to the Import DXF dialogue In this dialogue select which layers you wish to import into the map and click OK Transforming Coordinates The CAD fi
427. rom the default alignment by specifying X and Y values Once you have defined the renderer settings click the OK button 13 2 2 11 Create Thematic Map This menu item allows the user to create a thematic map for any of the active Map Layers containing numeric data A thematic map shows the spatial distribution of one or more specific data values in the form of a Pie or Bar chart Thematic Maps can only be drawn on layers that contain data such as stations contour maps etc They are not applicable to annotation layers A common example of the applications for a thematic map would be displaying the distributions of multiple chemicals To create a Thematic Pie Chart for Hydro GeoAnalyst station data A Hydro GeoAnalyst Data layer from the Layer Manager to ensure that this layer is active O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 278 e g a Station Group or Data Query layer such as Boreholes Monitoring Wells etc Select the menu option Map Create Thematic Map Pie Chart from the Map Manager main menu A Thematic map window will appear as shown below Create Thematic Map Fields in T able Fields Far the Theme oc on gt ce Fe Enter a name for the map in the Name field This name will appear in the thematic map list should you choose to edit it later From the left panel select the fields for map Move fields to the right panel using the gt button To move all fields press the gt gt
428. rom the selected table or query will be available for mapping to the required data fields in the column Update each Data Field as necessary The Data Fields required for a Lithology column are circled in the following figure O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 240 Borehole Log Designer Sample 3 E E nx Cris Crawl Miodiurn ara a EE dB X 85 Cus LO Ed el TUI oe i lirei iard Note The depth point and depth interval information from to fields are depths not elevations Therefore the BHLP requires that data be entered as depth to and not an elevation above sea level or a benchmark Note When Queries are selected for the data source all Queries in your HGA project will be listed in the corresponding pull down menu Jueries ilce exceeds 10 mg per kg 1 ataT able F eres Using a Query instead of a Data Table provides more flexibility in the type of information that can be added to a BHLP For more information on developing a Query to use in a BHLP please see Chapter 6 Queries Please be aware that not all queries will be appropriate for use in a BHLP and that in some cases e g Lithology a query cannot replace a data table As well queries cannot be used if images are to be added O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 241 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help NOTE When a Query returns more than 1 record for a selected station e g time varying concentrations
429. rom the toolbar O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer ase Ed Stay on top W EE Site maps h HGA3D vee Ej Surfaces lf Cross Sections Data EE AA Fl Stations Interpretations fa Model Layers Ff Geology Layers 3 Coarse Gravel E3 Medium Sand of Gravel nn Fine Sand H E BE H E CC AH DD SEM Background color Vertical Exaggeration 4 0 Interpretation type Geology 7 Stations Label Prope Blfitle v Live Update Apply The upper section of the Display Tree Panel contains a tree structured list of the elements which can be visualized while the lower section of this panel contains a table of the Display Settings for the selected display element The Display Tree Panel can be used to selectively view stations cross sections interpretation layers and legends or alter the display settings of the selected elements The Display Tree Panel is structured in a hierarchical fashion where the elements within the tree can be expanded by clicking on the symbol Each display element listed in the Display tree has an associated Setting list that can be accessed by selecting clicking the display element from the tree A brief description of each display property is available by clicking the mouse pointer on the display property This O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 359 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help produces a tool tip Description o
430. rom those used for displaying stations in the main HGA window NOTE Changing the projection of a map will affect any existing georeferenced raster image layers in the map project If the projection of a map is changed all georeferenced raster images must be georeferenced again in the new coordinate system Print Loads the map view into the Report Editor where the report may be printed and or saved for later retrieval For more information please see Chapter 14 The Report Editor Exit Exit the Map Manager and return to Hydro GeoAnalyst 13 2 2 Layer A Map Layer is a set of points lines polygons or a raster image that have geographic coordinates attached to it A Map Layer may be imported into any Map Project O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 257 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 13 2 2 1 New 13 2 2 2 Open Provides options for creating a new map layer A new layer may be created as one of the following file types ESRI Polygon shapefile shp ESRI Line shapefile shp ESRI Point shapefile shp ESRI Text shapefile shp These are Annotation Layers meaning that they can be used to draw various shapes or labels text on your map project The new map layer will use the projection system of the current map project After entering a filename for the layer the new map layer will be created then placed in the Layer Manager and added to the current Map Window HINT For easy maintenance it is suggested that the sha
431. rom within the BHLP designer and either printed or saved to an external file With the Borehole Log Designer window open click on the Print button at the bottom of thee window and select from one of the print options as shown in the following screenshot Prink current borehole Prink all boreholes NOTE If you select Print all boreholes a report will be generated for each station in the current selection please be aware that this may take some time If you want to print a BHLP for just the selected station use the Print current borehole option You will be prompted to Select a Template for generating your report as shown in the following screenshot You can either select from the existing templates or leave the selection blank and create a new report template yourself Select Template X Mame bhlp landscape bhlp portrait O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 247 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help An example report loaded with the bhlp portrait template is shown in the following figure amp i Jmm Aaah Ariss uuiu msw x ER RE Seca 0008 0005 01006 00 o7 0158 109 oro rd rn ro rd rotor nt8 A Company Name Borehole Log Report Address Project Waterloo Investigation Contact Info Location Waterloo ON Borehole Date May 6 2009 Description Coarse oF Gravel Medium Sand 20 1499 1 09 fF ee 9 0 i Pk der dp tebe fF te fe mw ft Gravel 40 Fine Sand 9 ee If you have
432. rop down list on the Station data tab which could be cumbersome when you had a long list of stations PREVIOUSLY wil Staton List Staton Data I Daia Query PT Data Fate Data Canegon T Fun m Y mj Elevation m TOC jm 714 53 E 400 CECI X14 E 14 54 Lihologr Hedogeckae Modeling Features Frschae From Ta scil type Desenpnc Consater Swuchae ASTM Da Coke Oden Fomaher i a Ca amp 500 Coase karel g Coase Gem z E 5 500 2E DOO Mecum Tari B Fre iomad z zb DU v DUI SP ei Geawel z E z pog BS DUO Fr 5nd B Frs r 3 E DEG TD DICE T zr Shy clay vali z that Data H Rio TS Io Es LER pm om i Loree iib Mpeg Pemai Feta a vri Poin s d bp Dee ripen p Dir Geared Come r 1450 a Fora Sand m Few mand AX aa C0 ley Salty cies ET EJ a a Cuir ile nr and Salty w gra Kc 5 Additionally you will find some helpful filter options on the top of the columns in all of the data grids The first row on any data grid is your filter row 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help albam Led jam qam jeg uk 24 d X D n Lee at ie jn om Ine ce fabae ee 7 BEN B Wr xim aram SoS oats TRI a2 ao N n rs Bx Eas amupox Ld ETT La mm mau im Ema tam Varum za se a5 GM fos EE a luca ha aem ie aun mao pea Der am B ah ate ose Tm Th LT aan zi i l
433. ross the top displays a set of buttons to help navigate through the HGA Help system e A Topic Frame on the right displays the actual Help topics included in the On Line Help The tabs in the Navigation Frame provide the core navigational features as described below Contents The Contents tab displays the headings in the Table of Contents in the form of an expandable collapsible tree Closed book icons represent Table of Contents headings that have sub headings Index The Index tab displays the list of Help topics You can scroll to find the index entry you want or you can type in the first few letters of the keyword in the text box and the index will scroll automatically as you type Double click an index entry to display the corresponding Help topic Alternately you may select an index entry and then click the Display button to open the Help topic Search The Search tab is used to search the On Line Help documents for a word or phrase of interest Simply type the search word s or phrase s then press Enter or click the Display button Favorites You can add frequently accessed Help topics to a personal list of favorites which is displayed in the Favorites tab Once you have added a topic to your list of favorites you can access the topic by double clicking it Click Add to add the currently displayed topic to your favorites list Select a favorite and then click Remove to delete a topic from your favorites list O 2014 S
434. rpUSD Pare 2 5 Station Groups Many operations in HGA require the selection of one or more stations in the Station List tab An example of such an operation is data entry One or more stations for which you would like to add view and or modify data need to be selected so that the Station Data tab is accessible activated The complete list of stations that comprise a project can be viewed in the Station List tab by selecting the All Stations item under the Station Group node in the project tree By default all projects will contain a station group named All Stations thatlists all stations in the database belonging to the project However for some of the tasks commonly performed in HGA retrieving the complete list of stations in the project may not be necessary Moreover retrieving all the stations when only few of them are needed may be a time consuming process especially for large databases containing hundreds or thousands of stations O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts The solution is to create Station Groups Grouping stations into their logical groups allows efficient management and quick retrieval of data stored in the database For instance all stations which contain groundwater chemistry sampling data can be grouped together under a group named as GW Sample Locations Whenever these stations need to be updated with a new groundwater sampling round selecting the GW Sample Locations group displays only those
435. rts multiple plumes for one or more contaminants In the Style combo box select the desired display element Select from Colormap on XY XZ or YZ planes or Isosurface The Visible checkbox shows hides the current plume browser display element To the right of these controls you will find a scroll bar that is used to animate the selected display element When a color map is selected the scroll bar Position is used to slide the color map along the selected plane through the project s site domain from one side to the other or in the case of an XY color map from the top to the bottom When an Isosurface is selected the scroll bar is used to span through different isosurface Values or shells The O percent value represents the lowest possible value for the isosurface based on the interpolated data set and will result in the largest isosurface The 100 percent value represents the highest possible value for the isosurface and will result in the smallest isosurface When you are satisfied with a view click on the Save Colormap button or Save Isosurface in the case of Isosurfaces to save this display element to the 3D Project under the Plumes node in the tree By doing so you will have access to more advanced options for the colormap or isosurface and this will enable displaying multiple colormaps and or isosurfaces Plume Browser Options O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 356 Clicking the Options butto
436. s Quality Control and select the Perform Lab QC Assessment option the following dialog will appear Select and configure a template for lab quality validation i mj xj Template Description Lab Quality Templates Relative Percent Difference lt 20 Coefficient of Variation lt 10 Percent Recovery gt 35 Blank lt 0 j Mapping Field Quen Alias Station Name name i ee er me t F Batch ID Batch ID gt Sample Date Sample Date Chemical Hame Chemical Mame Result value Result Salue Result Units Result Unit Quality Code Quality Code gt Detection Limit Detection Limit Dilution Factor Dilution _Fact A Method Hame Method_N ame Analysis Date Analysl5_Date_ Required for Lab Quality validation caes Heb de From the Select and configure a template window select from the list of Lab Quality Templates Once a template has been selected the Template Description field will be completed with the description entered when the template was created The next step is to map the fields in your data query to the fields required by the QC component Mapping Fields In the Mapping frame the Field must be matched to the Query Alias for all required fields required fields are marked with a and are also listed in previous section In most cases HGA will be able to automatically detect and map the fields
437. s io o Were phe hs ha eps tenter dva deant Pax Fa uva URS u n VXeU T eae T eua e pea Sense plui eU e deer CO AaUI E RENE eS 407 6 Managing Reports 9 woe ads deli eese a ite Pall eni etie dod iva ird Cos iaaa 407 7 Creating and Managing Report Temp late cccccccssssssccssscssssscscscccsssscsssccssesssscccccesecssssccccesscesscecccesssensssnccceess 408 8 Import Reports from MS ACCeSS ic rer iecore viv eas eee be vetu n REO adea ra o EVE PH pP e Na IER SU CUYO EE NETTE VER UY VE CR E EHOW NEU dV Ea EVO dS 409 Part 17 Appendices 413 1 Appendix A Project Files and Directory Structure cesses eene eere nennen ernn nane eese tasa asses eee enn nass see eas 413 2 Appendix B Using the Data Link Properties for IMpPOrting sscccccssssccssssssscessssscscccsssessessesscscessesccscesessccers 414 3 Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings cccscccsscccsssssssssssssssscsssecsssssssccscccsscsssscccccesscesscccccesssenssscccseess 424 4 Appendix D Map Manager ISO Codes oua ido duree e ela E ro aea tl e Eva Cove ex dd Dn VER GE QOO VE ed Ce duo veo due 429 5 Appendix E Online GIS Data RESOULCEG ssssccccccsssssssccssscessscssccescesssscccceccsessscccccceseessscacccesecesscccccesscenssscccseess 430 6 Appendix F Frequently Asked Questions FAQ s 44 eene eee ee ee eere eere enero eterne etn neta osea tn see tn se enaue 434 7 Appendix G Configuri
438. s To do so F Right mouse click on Plots and select Save as a plot template from the menu Enter a name for the plot template and F OK The template will be available next time you create a new plot in the Add Plot dialog under the Templates combo box Deleting Plot Templates O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 203 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Plot templates can be deleted from the main HGA window Right mouse click on Plots in the HGA Project Tree and select Plot Templates The following dialog will appear 2101 x x Select the template you want to remove then click on the x Delete button at the top of the window O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 204 12 Borehole Log Plotter The Borehole Log Plotter BHLP is a tool that can be used to display detailed information pertaining to a well borehole Information related to a borehole that may be displayed through the plotter includes e Lithology information for each formation Description of the geologic formation The depth and or elevation of each layer Well construction details casing screens annular fill Charts that display one or more data types collected at various depths in the well including those resulting from geophysical investigations e Symbols showing sample locations groundwater levels etc In a typical borehole log report BHLP there may be one or more instances of the items listed above The number of colu
439. s in this dialog it is possible to specify the features to be displayed on the cross section plots The dialog also allows you to set display properties of these features The following options are available Name Name of the intersecting layer read only Field Select a field to represent the layer typically Name ID Text Font Select a font for the label Symbol Define symbol properties for the selected layer Angle Define label angle The Field column contains a list of available fields for the selected layer This field will be used as the label in the cross section view The Symbol column contains the symbol options for the selected layer Double click on the field in this column to load the options shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 306 Point Style E4 Fatter Font WH Symbol 5Smbal b Fil Border E Sample x OF Cancel To show the intersections on the Cross Section Click on the Cross Section tab From the top Menu Bar click Tools and then Update Cross Section The following image shows the intersections between the cross sections Map Project Site map r Joj xj File Edit View Tools Help eR SN K he A i 1 1 _ i a5 a FM Model 340 Topography BoltLayer2 E ivi _ Geology Medium Sand Gravel Coarse Gravel Fine Sand Silt ELILI HydtaGeoloay Elevation m 280 upper aquifer lower aquilet NOTE I
440. s can in turn be used to define layer elevations in groundwater flow models such as Visual MODFLOW When this option is selected the following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 316 Export Model Layers D x Select Model Layer Topography Topography Top L2 Top LZ Top L3 Top L3 Top L4 Top L4 Top L5 Top L5 Bot LB Bot LB Select Cross Section Select All In this dialog select the model layers you wish to import Each model layer will be exported as a separate file for each file you may define the name under the Export As column Next select which cross sections should be considered in the export Click the Create button to generate the files The files will be generated in the Model sub folder of the Project folder for example D Program Files HGAnalyst Projects Demo_Project Model Topography txt The Cross Section editor will generate the text files based on the vertex location of each model layer line in each cross section For example for model layer 1 Topography if cross section AA contains this model line with 5 vertices and cross section BB has the same model line with 10 vertices then the text file should contain 15 rows if both cross sections AA and BB are selected The XY location for each vertex corresponds to the X Y location on the cross section line the Cross Section editor also provides the option to save the well contacts using the station
441. s is or save to one of the supported formats 16 5 3 Creating a Report Containing a Map Project Follow the directions below to create a report containing one or more map layers from the Map Manager Start the Map Manager and open a Map Project Show hide the desired layers in the map project all visible layers will appear in the report Press the Print button from the toolbar or select Project Print from the main menu of the Map Manager The report will be displayed in the Preview Viewer window by default To change to the P Designer Window press the Designer button from the toolbar This will allow you to make any desired modifications The Report Editor allows you to either create a new report for the current map project or add it to an existing one If you choose to add to an existing report the report editor adds the new map to the report As such multiple views of your map project s can be sent to a report one by one Each view of your map project is created with its associated scale bar The map project can be resized and repositioned as desired on the runtime Report Designer Note that resizing a map project on the runtime Report Designer adjusts the scale that is associated with that specific view of your map project The report will appear in the project tree once it is saved 16 5 4 Creating a Report Containing a Cross Section Follow the directions below to create a report containing one cross section
442. s section corresponding to a selected cross section line on the map to be created or viewed This feature is active only after a cross section line has been selected or drawn in the map window E BHLP button loads a Borehole Log Plot BHLP for the selected station 13 2 Description of Menu Items New The New item provides options for creating a new map project file Map projects are saved with the extension VMP in the project sub directory Map The new map project will use the same projection system and extents as defined in the current Hydro GeoAnalyst project NOTE Each Map Project has required fields which must be present in your database structure as defined in the Profile Settings For more details see Chapter 4 Template Manager Profile Settings Open Provides options for opening an existing Map Project only files with the VMP extension O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager ome can be opened using the Map Manager Save Provides an option to save the current map project file All current Map Layers that are displayed will be saved to the current Map Project file Save As Provides the option to save a copy of the current Map Project with a different name Close This will close the current Map Project If there are unsaved edits there will be a prompt to save changes before closing Reopen A list of recently accessed map projects will be displayed beside the Reopen item This is an alternat
443. s shown below that can be displayed by clicking on the Fields icon on the toolbar 2014 Schlumberger Water Services oss Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Fields x Retresh the fields Station list Mame chemical name sample date result value _ List of available result unit a fields One or more fields in the fields explorer can be selected and dragged and dropped into the desired section of the report if displaying data from these fields is desired Report Properties Toolbox The Report Properties toolbox as shown in the figure below provides the tools that can be used to edit properties of the report and all its sections including any controls that the report may contain This window can be accessed by clicking on the Properties icon on the toolbar 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 396 Property ToolBox ag ExESTR MUNICIPIO T MI pA ee 2I Custom ERO Name ExESTR MLIMICIPIO Alignment D ddTMLert BackColor C BackStyle 0 ddBkTr anspare anGrow True CanShrink False ClassName Normal DataFleld STR_ MUNICIPIO Font Arial Forecolo n B height 205 hyperlink left 75 MultiLine True DOutlputkFarrial Style summary osti Summary Func 0 ddsF Sum Summary aro SummaryRunr 0 ddSRNone Summary Type 0 ddSMNone Tag text STR MLIMICIPTO top 75 __terticaldlionm o ddTsTon zl Custom a This window serves to access the properties of the contro
444. s shown below with a report template loaded for demonstration purposes iB New Data Dt et m ed Sa IA o GRY 100 Contents ort Project Waterloo Investigation Location Waterton OM Date February 9 2012 ZER Pewerrsowas fe E sal merus a 3 E EE E ee ee ee 8 8 s66t Jao R EET E LEE 38 d ee a ET L sema ese 5 L8 X 3H Qs95 mea amumaswos m 34 4d seii RC 5 g 1595 L 8 g eran euam E E seemin ER IR M 8 24 n L ise nes tn Lu See Se Ra e 8 siii so a am BS smasesn amussogo wenn i1 SIS4BA TD e Meo ce Ra EXER E i 7 t Hl EE 4 C Doo me emm 2 wd m eee am L 5e oa 0 M L M ER Aseisopwos o0 udi L x a sees eene i 3 34 se km 7 Um mxsasso a O O 23 er sensa sl Euer ESSE 3s 33 en ul 5563770 33 sve u ee i Pr sss anaeorsoss ww ee eee ae O a o o meson a To e A The Report Viewer contains three main components e Report Navigation Toolbar provides a number of toolbar icons that allow you to interact with the report described in detail below e able of Contents can be displayed by clicking on the TOC icon
445. s that were opened will be closed Any other tab groups that were created will be removed 3 1 11 Exit This menu item will close HGA and all related windows if any are open 3 2 View The View menu allows you to reopen any closed tabs The tabs you can view include Start Page Station List Station Data Data Query Data Filter Well Profile Please be aware there are other modules that will launch as a tab for example the Query Builder the List Editor and the Material Specification Editor but you view these by selecting these modules from the Modules Menu or by selecting the Icon in the Main Toolbar O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 3 2 1 3 2 2 3 2 3 3 2 4 3 2 5 3 2 6 3 3 3 3 1 Start Page If you have closed the Start Page tab you can reopen it by selecting it from the View menu Station List If you have closed the Station List tab you can reopen it by selecting it from the View menu Station Data If you have closed the Station Data tab you can reopen it by selecting it from the View menu Data Query If you have closed the Data Query tab you can reopen it by selecting it from the View menu Data Filter If you have closed the Data Filter tab you can reopen it by selecting it from the View menu Well Profile If you have closed the Well Profile tab you can reopen it by selecting it from the View menu Modules Any module you wish to use within HGA can be
446. saved by selecting Project Export Diagram from the top menu O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer asa bar or by clicking the Export Image button in the toolbar The following Save picture as graphics file window will appear NS Save picture as graphics file E E ml x picQ ai Browse Image Size Width Height 1600 1200 Cancel In the Image Size field opening the combo box shows a list of several different sizes for the image size to be saved The desired size of the image may be selected or customized by entering new Width and Height values The image can be saved to three graphics formats e GIF e Bitmaps bmp e JPEG Image File jpg Any of these graphics formats can be imported into most word processing software packages Alternately the image may be copied to the Windows clipboard by selecting Edit Copy from the menu This image can be pasted into most word processing and graphics editing programs NOTE The resolution of the graphics file image will depend on your screen resolution and on the size of the Display Window In order to maximize the image quality you should maximize the Display Window to full screen 15 10 Printing the 3D Image The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer is an advanced three dimensional visualization and animation component for displaying and presenting cross sections created with the mapping component included with Hydro GeoAnalyst Specifically this can be
447. sible Bont C Use Material Image Color Position je raw Border Color Fight Justify P Fill Fulli 2i viewr orny Help Apply OE Cancel Under the Appearance frame select how to display the well screen Use Default color Use Material Image color use this option if your well screen materials were selected from a list defined in the list editor and each list item has a corresponding color Draw Border and Fill Full 2D View only use this option to apply a solid color to the well screen Under the Label frame define the text settings for the screen labels NOTE In order to see the well screens in the appropriate locations you must add and map the appropriate entities as explained below In the BHLP settings right mouse click and select Add Entity You may add and map any of the following entities Image use this option if you want to display an image of the well screen on the BHLP you must select a field from the screens table that contains an image Text use this option if you want to display a descriptive label of the screen on the BHLP you must select a field from the screen that is type string and contains the descriptive information on the screen type material ParentlD use this option to define what casing each screen belongs to You must select a field from the screen table that is field type double and contains values for casing ID in most cases select the Casing ID Lithology
448. sion Interpretation ID Xsection X Name Geologic Description Well Construction Soil Testing Soil Sampling Monitoring Event Mining E ploration nm Reaarnhuaiag Source Condition Station_Groups z Boreholes Advanced Close Help Field Name Interpretation Results thickness Type Unit meters Rows 0 Time 00 00 00 The Interpretation Results table is read only also known as a View and stores data from the cross section interpretations By default the following fields are included e Station ID Station Name X using project coordinates Y using project coordinates Slice Name O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor Layer Description Top Elevation Thickness Below Slice Interpretation type Simply select the desired fields from the tree view and move these into the Display Fields or Conditions as required When you are finished Generate and Execute the query An example of the results is shown in the screenshot below XRH C Station Group Query Data Query 18 xl Design SQL View Preview Select a Query SELECT station id AS id station AS x station y AS y station name 4S name INterpretation Results layer 4S Layer Name INterpretation Results TOP elevation AS Top elevation Interpretation Riesults thickness AS Thickness Interpretation Results interpretation AS
449. st 2014 Help e Finally click the Ok button to open the demo project e The above steps only need to be done the first time you want to restore the Demo Project When you want to open the Demo Project the next time simply select Project Open and browse to the place where you extracted the zip file or select Project Reopen and you should see the Demo Project listed there 1 5 Updating Old Projects HGA is fully compatible with projects created in earlier versions of HGA The first time you open a project from a previous version you may be prompted to convert your database to the new format A dialog similar to the one shown below will display Confirm o For optimal performance one or more system tables need to be upgraded It is strongly recommended that you make a backup of your database before you proceed Would you like to make a backup now Ne Conca At this time you will have the option to create a back up copy of your database which is highly recommended Click the Yes button to create a back up copy of your database Otherwise click No to continue with the database upgrade without creating a backup Not Recommended Selecting the Cancel button will cancel opening the project In addition it is recommended that you create a backup of the Projects directory before you open projects in the new version of HGA This can be done using the options in My Computer or Windows Explorer Please Note Schlumberge
450. st Gd d e iet ao teal EE aqua C tpa EA 343 Remove Stations from Cross Sections essssesessesecsccececsesscsscecsesecsssecscsececsesecscsececsesecsssececsecessesecsccecessesscsscscsesecsese 344 4 Querying Cross Section InterpretatiOns ii m oen eren eH e MER EE aanika nrn ea ru dr NE don Y RU UP ER XR E NP EVER ERR RR Soon SURE 345 5 Adding Annotations to the Cross SectIOTI s eetece serere pr eL Yn Ne EEEER eo ae eo ae OE EHE NR TP FERE EA Cev sue FER VER EPA EKAPI MI eR e drea uade 346 O Eunitauohs emisti tois eicva ed restent a hid ui rivi aedes 348 Part 15 3D Explorer 349 TP Aboutthelnterfac8 JueoibIe EESTI ES EE RISE RETE eTES NEUES EEHNUAEUENNEI TA sacasuucevsnssuetscs sane UNO DUNT NSTNEAN EA Aaaa 349 Z Positioning the Panels zsrsr s dan La M seas D DUUM 351 2 Navigation Tool iuiissaumuettam uta Na des Iu DnS dion t Het a ONE EA MIS 352 Rotating the Image soiree nen aoa aee oae vl kat Ox pareti v Qua vuv ka vac kde ch eh Und VERRE O e pan Ea n RD EE EF EOE EEE E ECEE ses 352 Animati n Controls dT 353 Time Animaltion v eoo a iieaeoe idae CHE e YER E ER SN PEE Nox EDO E DH SPP EPA eSa LEER a c rR Voce Or dL E EPAT Na NV ur ebrei uer eor ETC E RERO SE NERA RU 354 Plume BOWSER SG 510020006 10009 tero Monte Que eo PE ee RS AERE RN EDI E Fa mERVE KE E TUOEE QNO P EAR ER UE DU ve cede Oo EORNM EIE Ex ERE e 00e Qu DON PU SAT HUS 355 Recording Animation to AVI file iie eeu epson epa oro y enu aba apa deae pao Vae sas
451. station ID ID station name Station Name station x X station y Y station geo point geo point station name name 9 Vv c YX XOD MYX Expression Operator Value i And Or oP gt 4 t 4 Source Condtion Project R Group Conditions amp SQL Statement Select the Execute Query button and you will be moved to the Data Query tab to see the results of your query 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Query Builder 146 f Query Builder Data Query 4i of71 b MW PprrxSQHomas i Rewld ID Station Name X mj Y m gen point name TOC Eal bp po jwe sess ser GG 8 a seres asus poer Ge ee mE 53572069 481482600 xdi 8 OW a 3 M rasant 40 4914704 90 Ppop ee e aem 6 roris TE j w s eea EE pp ws ser esas oa e EE w e ji HERR SD 4814553 5n FOINT B 535537 70 4814582590 POINT 8 a w 13 535800 DD 348145317 50 CITY H Dji H TET 53567460 4914800 00 s s wis eea 481466538 wis ps s ww smenm janens Wie rr 7 WT ope m 8 5 Tes sess am eonris ws m m ps sseeezo 4849718 PONTCS wzo ja s wa serm 1d m E H 5 us ESA a z va DES Sau Ja j ae GET GET AE zsa o S GET js ee eme a on ca sets 3 His x ON 3 seme e EOTS CR 2200 e a en ese arena a aer M Ww cer seme A PONTA es js sem paar s FONTE Bae
452. t Layer Information Displays the system for the selected layer Coordinates Displays the X Y coordinates for the current mouse cursor location and the Map Projection system Scale Displays the scale for the map window Active Window Select between the Map Manager window and the Cross Section Editor window The Layer Manager allows you to manage the layers in the map project The icons at the top of the Layer Manager provide some insight into the functionality 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 250 Layer Manage Toolbar he Teils he D mi Lei S bsc Lai Bioran A eli Bcd ea VE Exceeds 1 mg pe B id Seer Cobo Sines Tx21 33 3 Apost colos bmp Ww Sbaen E peel pei 1233 33114 EA 14 132038 These features include E Group Control Expand and collapse group layers lt Visible Set the visibility status of the selected layer i Editable Make the selected layer editable or not by checking or unchecking the check box Currently only those shapefiles created in the Map Manager are editable e Label Displays the Layer name a Symbol Edit the symbol identifying the layer on the map The Layer Manager will contain numerous types of layers each represented by a different symbol type In the example shown here the layer types from top to bottom are as follows PointLayer Point shapefile represented by a point symbol These include station groups and data query layers imported in
453. t Within the Program You can Install the Demo Project from within the program by selecting Project Install the Demo Project there is also an option to do this from the Start Page The Default option will install the Demo Project to a Local Database SQL 2012 Simple select Next and then Finish to Install the Demo Project Install Demo Project Data Source Settings Database Type Install Demo Project Local Database MSS 2012 Your project data will be stored in a local database Ne j Cance j He However if you prefer you can install the Demo Project to a SQL Server database by adjusting the Database Type option O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Introduction to Hydro GeoAnalyst amp Install Demo Project Data Source Settings Database Type Install Demo Project Microsoit SQLServer Available Servers MGAERTNER WAT SWS v Refresh Database Name Refresh 9 Windows Authentication SQL Server Authentication You simply need to provide the name of the SQL Server you wish to use the Database Name for the Demo Project and then select if you wish to use Windows Authentication or SQL Server Authentication The Demo Project files will be installed to the location designated under Project HGA Settings the Project tab The default location is under Documents Hydro GeoAnalyst We also provide an alternate way to access the Demo project you can download it fr
454. t and or a combination of Depth from a certain reference e g top of casing and Elevation from a selected datum is desired To create a Scale column click on the Add icon on the toolbar From the combo box select Scale A new Scale column will be added to the BHLP window In the Settings frame in the lower left corner of the window you can set some of the visual details of the column 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 210 Ej Ej Design H E Lithology E E Well Construction gt Bree Visible True 2 Header Text Scale Horizontal Algi Center Vertical Align Center Font Font Angle U Font Escape 0 To specify the display information for this column expand Scale in the Designer tree and select ScaleEntities E E Design E Lithalagy 1 Well Construction Socal A SealeEntities DataTable Lithology El TapEntity Caption Top elevation Description DataField from BattamEntity Caption Bottom elevation Description DataField n Using the combo boxes select the table and the fields from which to draw data In the example shown above the Scale column will display a depth scale that goes from the smallest from depth to the largest to depth in the Lithology table 12 3 1 1 Settings The Scale column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned prevously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and
455. t DL value multiplied by 0 5 the ND Factor If ND Factor is left empty then the DL will be displayed ND Factor specify a field that contains the factor for non detects Detection Limit select a field that contains the detection limit value Uncertainty select a field that contains a value for the uncertainty for the plotted series This will plot uncertainty bars directly on the plot Standard This option allows you to display water quality standards as a plot series on the plot This is useful for quickly identifying which values exceed the standard When you load the options for standards the following dialog will appear Click on the Add button to add a standard value and select a field that contains the standard value Click on the Delete button to remove existing list items from the list When you are finished click on the Close button The new standards will appear as a plot series under the Plots node in the tree You can then modify the line symbol and label properties as shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Time Series Plotting 192 Settings Mapping Mame test Visible True Width 1 Color BE Red Style Sold El Marker Visible False Fort Microsoft Sans Senf 8pt Font color dE Black Symbol Triangle Color EN Blue Size 4 4 Line Visible show hide the line Width set the line width Color specify the line color Style specify the line style Solid Dashed etc Marker Visibl
456. t Then hit the refresh button to see the files that were submitted from this site Select the file you wish to import and select the Import button You will see a validation dialog which shows how many new records will be imported In this example created one new station and entered 4 new lithology records 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts 54 D Documents Hydro GeoAnalyst Projects Demo MobileDataCollection mobile_edd_testing ExampleStation_201 Validation Validation Logs f EDD File Type Selected M jBoTee Es i f Project Information and Connection Cd EA Table station 1 new records and 0 updates validated and ready to be imported See Preview Table lithology 4 new records and D updates validated and ready to be Your EDD Data was imported successfully You may select another EDD fil file to be eto be imported or close this form Select the Import button to finalize the import process can review the data that was imported within HGA for example here are the 4 new lithology records imported 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 55 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Hydro GeoAnalyst 2013 Demo Project View oF Modules g Database Help TE s 90d OMWMOA Bart P gil Station List Station Data Data Query Data Filter J a Station Groups Ej i4 4 1 of 152 dBXx is ea 4 All Stations Stations Example Station al Bor
457. t Field Measurements tab to see the fields available for this table 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 51 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help gt Q B https onlinesharehga com hgamobile mobile edd testing field measurements L5 New Tab Ej CarWash E Hyperbole and a Hal D CruiseControLNET CI SLB IconExperience Lo fid A i ns Home lable View Add New Record Example Station Location Lithology Water Level Field Measurements Measurement Date Temperature i pH Total Dissolved Solids Total Organic Carbon dd mmiyyyy Dissolved Oxygen _ ah s sj zl 62013 Schlumberger Limited All rights reserved Once you have finished collecting your data you need to return to the Home page You will find your list of stations in the Home Page If you select one of the stations you will be returned to the forms for that station so that you can edit the data associated with the station j D Hydro GeoAnalystMobile x V ht 2 058 MIS clie stab Tioameblle moblle edd texting L5 New Tab Ej CarWash F Hyperbole and a Hal CruiseControLNET CI SLB leonExperience Lo fil The Hub SWS Logo Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst Mobile EDD Q Stations Search stations collected Example Station E TITRES OE Cc 8 2013 Schlumberger Limited All rights reserved Build 13 8 7 1
458. t a field to be used for the X axis of nodes define the number of grid nodes in the X direction X min X max define the minimum and maximum X values for the interpolated grid by default these will be read from the data source however you may modify these values if necessary O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services oimilar parameters exist in the Y and Z directions The Z value should be a field that represents the depth or elevation at which the data value sample was observed If you want to display the plume on the same elevation scale as your cross sections where data is displayed as above mean sea level you may need to convert your sample depths to sample elevations This can be done in the query builder by adding a calculated display field as shown below Design SQL View Preview Display Fields umen Expression s gs _ Dery __ id station x station y y station name name chem lest samplel date date station elevation chem test sampleO screen from and entering Z for the Alias Executing this query will produce the results shown below chem test results chemical name chem lest result result value chem test results result unit station elevation chem lest samplell screen from station elevation chem test sample screen from The last display field in the screenshot above combines the sample elevation and the screen depth from fields the screen depth is subtracted from the st
459. t the respective table or query from the combo box e A Data Field for the DepthEntity select the field containing depth values from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the ValueEntity select the field containing the values you want to plot from the pull down menu For an Interval Plot column you must define the following e A Data Source this may originate from a Data Table or a Data Query Select the format you wish to use then select the respective table or query from the combo box e A Data Field for the TopEntity select the from field of the data table from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the BottomEntity select the to field of the data table from the pull down menu e A Data Field for the ValueEntity select the field containing the values you want to plot from the pull down menu 2014 Schlumberger Water Services omws Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Once you have entered all required information click the Refresh button to see the data on the plot column An example is shown in the following screenshot Borehole Log Designer Sample E j s ni xi Select Station 2 m r m Elevation m TUE m GB O1 B3bz12 53 A81 4030 0 323 50 324 50 a Design H E Lithology E LithologyE ntities O Well Construction E Plot 258458 1 58 1 E BepthPletEntities Coarse Gravel Medium Sand DataTable Gamma E DiepthE ntity Gravel Caption Depth Description Depth DataField depth E ValueE
460. ta Review View Developer QuickChecker Foxit PDF Team e o ca gg s ems Ll I d I EN Dua P Y E i l 9 Calibri il Ep Wrap Text General lt T d L g Insert z Ay E a 32 31 g Delete gly Paste B Z Uv ifi v A E zx m E HiMenge amp Center 5 8 399 Conditional Format Cell Dm Sort amp Find amp M y a a Fir OB ees Formatting as Table v Styles t amp Format CZ Filter Select Clipboard 5 Font P Alignment P Number Py Styles Cells Editing c1 f Ca A B Station Names Sample Date C cl SO4 P 4 D D H o m H e z K r z gt M gt i 00 NOUA WN MOM Fe Re Pie eB ele SBESGaewahsb apes lili 24 M M Data Time Series 3 iKi T gt i Ready 2 E 100 2 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 29 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help On the Data tab can see this template is set for Ca Mg Cl SO4 So I will change this to the 4 parameters that want to plot Once have changed the parameters can review the Time Series tab to see what it will look like 3 mmo Be oh 10 M 4 M Data Time Series Here can see that TCE and Vinyl Chloride are going to be placed on the top chart and Benzene and Ethylbenzene on the bottom chart which is the way want to chart them If however want to switch them would just need to reorder them on the Data tab Also
461. ta type of mapped fields must be compatible The mapped fields will now display in the table at the bottom of the Data Mapping Configuration dialog Repeat this process for additional fields To remove mapping F Select the appropriate row in the preview grid F Click the Delete button X O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 132 Select the Save mapping to database checkbox to retain the mapping for future MON file import operations Select the Next button to proceed to Step 3 Importing Data into the Database Import MON file data E E ini x mport data 1 r Notes 1 Select one or more r Select Channel enabled channels IV Level Temperature Conductivity Flowman selected by default 2 Select the source MON file by checking on the checkbox in the import column see Remarks below Serial Number Station Name Station X N01 61667 312 Logger Type Location CTD Diver 13 CTD File Name 1 CTD 070503132 Import 3 Click on the Import button when ready Remarks o Rows highlighted in white have correct station name mapping and can be selected o Rows highlighted in red indicate that the station name in MON file can no be found in the database Click on the corresponding blue arrow to specify the destination station m o Rows highlighted in yellow indicate that there _ lt Back Import
462. tabs we recommend closing the Well Profile right click on the tab and select close until you need to use it You can re open the Well Profile by selecting View Well Profile 2 15 Data Entry Manual Data Entry There are two locations in HGA where data can be manually entered and or edited the Station List and the Station Data tabs If the source data is available in a text file spreadsheet XLS or database the data may be imported using the Data Transfer System DTS Data Transfer System DTS If the project database is going to store numerous stations it may be more efficient to import the data using the Data Transfer System DTS The DTS allows for importing data from the following source types e Text CSV e Excel 2000 Spreadsheet XLS or XL SX e MS Access Database MDB or ACCDB e MS SQL Server The DTS can be loaded by selecting Modules Import Data from the main menu the first DTS window is shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 35 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 2 16 Data Transfer System Import Ep i nmi x Choose a Data Source Specify a data transfer packag Package name Y X Description 4 Save changes ta this OTS package Select data soure Specify import tile name Ex Builda connection sta The DTS also allows exporting data from a project to one of the following formats e Text files CSV e Excel 2000 S
463. tails see see Check Blanks Settings e Analyze Dilution Factor Detection Limit and Holding Time Compare the dilution factor in your results with the maximum allowed dilution factor that you set in your template for more details see Check Dilution Factor Settings Compare the detection limit in your results with the standard detection limit for more details see Check Detection Limit Settings Compare the holding time in your results with the standard holding time for more details see Check Holding Time Settings e Execute a Quality analysis on a selected dataset Display and retrieve assessment results records not meeting assessment criteria will be highlighted e Save assessment results to a MS Excel spreadsheet 10 1 Preparing Your Data for QC Analysis Your QC Blank duplicate and spiked samples should be entered in the same table and fields as your original samples If a Duplicate sample was collected at an existing station then create a new sample ID and assign the appropriate Quality Code D You must also define a common batch ID for duplicates to indicate that they belong together If you want to compare the duplicate to its original sample you must add the appropriate Original Sample Quality Code O to each original sample If a Blank sample was collected it can be added as a new station and sample or as a new sample to an existing station Create a new sample ID and assign the appropriate Quality Code
464. take surface layers from the map manager and display them as a line layer on cross section interpretations Surface data can be used to show the relationship between interpretation layers and numerical model layers or for showing interpolated subsurface features e g water table In order to show surface data on a cross section you must first import or create the surface in the map manager Once the surface exists in the map manager select Tools Create Surface Lines from the cross section editor toolbar The following dialog will appear on your screen O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 325 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 14 2 4 Tools Display Surface on Cross Section X Please select the surface layer TIPIEDPIEDPERIIERIIITIPIHIDIDIDIEDIEEIIIIDIIDIDIDIIDEXIIIIDIEZIDIDRDIDIIDIDIDIDEIIIIIDIDZIDIIDIDIDIDIDIIDDIDIILHIDTIDDNIIIDIIIIIIDIDLIDIDEIDIIIIEDEIIZIDLIDIDIDDPRIIDIEZDEIIITITIDIDILIDIDEZEIIIIIIIII Bedrck m Bottom Layers Bottom Layers Bottom Layerl Water Table Mame of the Surface Bedrock Line Style OF Cancel The Display Surface on Cross Section dialog displays all surfaces currently loaded in the Map Manager These surfaces may have been imported or interpolated from point data Layer gt Create Contours Select the desired surface to show on the cross section You may also change the name of the surface and specify the color size and pattern of the surface line by clicking on
465. te Additionally you can add conditions onto the fields you have chosen that the HGA QuickChecker will verify For example you can make the Sample Date field required even though it is not a required field to enter the data into the database O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 3 3 4 3 3 5 3 3 6 EDD Template Designer 7 79 p a Template Version Submission URL Template Version URL www Lab template_version_check com Description H Geologic Description Database Mame i Well Construction j parameter sample sample date E Soil Testing H Soil Sampling Data Type Unit Gl Parameter Sample 2 1 Comment i Parameter Result View Names fg Water Level gt Stati Gl Meteorology amp Diver Channels Result Value Diver Data Result Unit 4 Field Measurements Qualifier Tie E Mining Exploration br Reporting Detection Limit 2 Fg E Geophysics E Well History Condtions Basc advanced MV Required E Monitoring Event j i DATESTAMP Numeric Unique Query Builder This menu item loads the Query Builder which prowdes options for tasks related to queries In the Query Builder there are options for creating new queries or loading previous queries 3 The 3 button in the toolbar performs the same function For more details see the Queries
466. te au Name waterquality multipleplots Number of Columns 2 Number of Rows 2 Chloride Time Series Plot Sulfate Time Series Plot Spacing Width 10 u Spacing Height 10 240 RAS 20 220 18 200 18 Plot im 14 Settings 160 S 5 140 c 10 and Data 120 100 6 Source 60 2 40 0 bk x L 20 12 7995 12 5 1997 12 5 1999 12 5 2001 SampllNg Date 12 74995 12 5 1997 12 5 4999 12 5 2001 Name SampllNg Date The name of the plot page Print Ok Help The plot window contains the following items Plot Page Design Tree A list of all available plot page designs plots and series such as Lines and Standards Designer Toolbar Toolbar buttons used for modifying the plot design Plot Settings and Data Source Contains the settings for the selected entity and data mappings Viewer Window Contains a real time view of the plot page design Description of Designer Toolbar Items The plot designer toolbar provides the controls for designing the plot page The following buttons are available l3 oave button saves the current plot design H Save As button saves the current plot design as a new name Add button provides two options Add Plot will prompt you to select a template to be used Add Default Plot will create a new plot using the default plot template x Delete button deletes the selected plot or line series E Refresh button refreshes the design with new settings or data Zoo
467. ted layer the respective toolbar button s will become inactive indicated by a greyed out appearance For example the option to add a vertex is active only when a polygon or a line is selected oave button saves the current cross section project EN Print button sends the current cross section view to the report editor k Selection Pointer feature is used for selecting objects in the active interpretation E Draw Polygon feature is used for drawing a polygon or a rectangle in the active layer ht A X Delete Selected Object feature deletes the selected object shape from the currently activate layer Draw Line feature is used for drawing a model layer line in the selected layer Add Text features is used for adding annotation to the selected layer Add Vertex feature is used for adding a vertex to the selected object polygon or line This button is activated only if an object is selected Ix Delete Vertex feature is used for deleting a vertex from the selected object polygon or line This button is activated only if an interpretation having at least one object is activated and at least one of the objects is selected Link Vertex feature is used for linking two vertices from two polygons or lines This feature is only available if an interpretation having at least two polygons or lines is activated and at least one of them is selected E IT Remove Links feature is used for breaking the vertex lin
468. ter Services 111 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Project HGA settings from the main HGA interface HGA Settings Project StartPage Help Template Files External Programs General Templates Location DADocumentsiHydro GeoAnalyst Templates This way when you go to create a new project you will now have the option to select your own database template instead of just the standard ones provided with HGA O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Data Transfer System 112 6 The Data Transfer System The Data Transfer System DTS is a flexible tool used for importing data into an HGA project When starting a new project it will be necessary to enter data from other sources into the HGA database While you can enter data manually on the Station List Tab as well as the Station Data Tab or Non Station Data Tab it is more efficient to import your data With the 2014 1 release of HGA the DTS has been given a face lift and now incorporates all the importing options within a single wizard You launch the DTS by selecting Modules Import or by selecting the we Import icon from the toolbar The DTS will launch and give you several options for importing depending on what kind of data you wish to import Data Transfer System Select the type of data you want to import 9 General import your stations and other associated dab from Excel and Access files Coordinates and Units will be automatically converted dunng import J EDD import your
469. tern in addition to text In the Settings frame select the field that contains the appropriate information for the entity you have chosen ataT able 64 in E lag DepthEntitu Caption Depth Description Depth TestEntity Caption T ext Description Text DataField Value 12 3 6 1 Settings The Depth Point based column settings are shown in the following screenshot As mentioned previously the settings can be adjusted by right clicking anywhere in the BHLP window and selecting Properties or right clicking on the Design node and selecting Show Settings then selecting the Depth node from the BHLP Settings window 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 232 BHLP Settings q X E E BHLP Dept w Visible Column Options E gt Depth Sis Lite S Outline Appearance Description Genera v Visible Width 10 Height 10 46 Image C Symbol Image Setting Draw Mode Tied Symbol Line Color Symbol Fill Color Help Apply Cancel The Depth frame allows you to show hide the column using the Visible checkbox You can also set the general column settings by clicking on the Options button Use the Outline checkbox to show hide the column border line The Appearance tab allows you to show hide the contents of the column using the Visible checkbox You can also select from the available Draw Modes change the Width and Height of the images or modify the appearance of sym
470. the frame it will be cut off Stretch will adjust the image proportions to fit the frame even if it means distorting the picture Zoom will adjust the size of the picture until the entire image is visible in the frame and there is the least amount of unfilled space possible 16 2 2 5 Line AnchorBottom Anchors bottom of vertical lines to section bottom x1 y1 x2 y2 Specify the coordinates in pixels of the start and end of the line 16 2 2 6 Shape Shape Specify which shape you wish to display rectangle ellipse or rounded rectangle 16 2 2 7 Rich Text MaxLength Specifies the maximum number of characters a user can enter in the control The default for MaxLength is 0 indicating that the text is limited only by available system resources Any number greater than 0 indicates the maximum number of characters 16 2 2 8 Frame Close Border Specify whether or not the bottom border line will be displayed if the frame spans across multiple pages 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 393 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help 16 2 2 9 Sub Report 16 2 2 10 Page Break 16 2 2 11 OLE 16 2 2 12 Barcode ReportName Sets gets name for the sub report Enabled Allows you to enable or disable the page break PictureAlignment Set the alignment of the contents within the frame BarWidth Set the width of the thinnest line in the code Caption In barcode the caption is the set of symbols alphanumeric you want to code
471. the interpretation types to visible and editable In the example screen shot below you can see that cross sections EE and BB along with their interval locations are visible while interpreting cross section ZZ 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 330 Map Project Site map Ei a x File Edit view Tools Help Daj ZBNA XxA xS53s SFM ORR j e o a jj P cc s 340 o o 330 mn mn e e 320 EE E EE E aM L1 Model N 310 Topography 300 OMC HydroGeology 290 E c 2 n m w 250 260 270 280 240 230 220 150 200 250 300 450 500 550 600 350 400 650 700 Distance m 535 872 4 814 505 29 91 226 30 D 50 100 535 137 4 814 510 Grid Tab Set the display properties for grid lines in the 2D cross section view Editor Labels Rulers Vertical Exag Screen Level Intersecting Grid Grid Line Color Line Style Width in Pixels iz v Visible for Vertical Lines v Visible for Horizontal Lines Show on Load In the Grid Lines frame set the line style color and width and also set visibility settings for the horizontal and vertical grid lines The Show on Load option will result in the grid being 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 331 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help displayed each time the cross section is loaded Interpretation Tab Define the data storage o
472. the query to create a Pivot table in Excel You can find more information in the Crosstabs are Now Pivot Tables section This allows you to use the query to Perform Lab QA QC Assessment n This allows you to show or hide the query columns This allows you to export the results of the query This allows you to save the changes you made by applying a filter to the existing This allows you to save the changes you made by applying a filter as a new query you will be moved to the Query Builder tab This allows you to print the results of your query to an Excel template a This allows you to send the results of your query as a time series Chart in Excel When printing your query results to an Excel Template you will be prompted to select a template Provided with HGA is a template called Template Table xlsx You can modify this template by going to the folder where the templates have been stored see HGA Settings for more details and adjust it to suit your needs Perhaps you may want to change the logo etc Any templates stored in this folder will be available in the drop down list under the Open Template option Print To Excel Open Template Template Table xlsx Once you have selected a template you can select the OK button and the Excel template will open with your data in it ready for printing When using the Chart in Excel M option you will be prompted to select a template We have provided seve
473. tion The surface projection system must be the same as the projection system defined for the Map Project For example if your Map Project is set to the NAD83 projection system you must select NAD83 for the surface layer Map Project l a X Mame Description DEM UTM This is a sample Projection Typ Geographic v UTM State Planar C Non Earth Projection Unit LS NAD 1983 UTM Zone 17N z meters o xK Cancel geb Once the surface layer settings have been defined click Ok The Color Settings dialog shown below will appear O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 259 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Color Settings E ES x Color Palette 330 3549 356 0269 Zebra 330 3545 333 56415 33b f 34 33338255 343 1313 Tid r d m Transparency 5 fo DK Cancel FJ Help The Color Settings dialog allows you to define different colored zones ranges according to their specific interval of elevation values The Classify button allows you to decide how many intervals you wish to have and HGA automatically divides the available range of values into that number of equal intervals indar The Ramp option loads the following dialog Color Ramps Start Color NEN End Color pnm Cancel You can choose a monochromatic ramp that provides a range of the same color but with varying degrees of darkness a dichromatic ramp that provides a
474. tions qp This allows you to add a new record X This allows you to delete the currently selected record s ra This allows you to save the changes you have made iE This allows you select which columns you want to show or hide eS This allows you to refresh the data in the current tab This option allows you to export the data from the current tab LY uL This option allows you to print the data from the current tab to an Excel template When printing your Station Data to an Excel M template you will be prompted to select a O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts om template Provided with HGA is a template called Template Table xlsx You can modify this template by going to the folder where your templates have been stored see HGA Settings for more details and adjust it to suit your needs Perhaps you may want to change the logo etc Any templates stored in this folder will be available in the drop down list under the Open Template option liant To Exi Once you have selected a template you can select the OK button and the Excel template will open with your data in it ready for printing 2 11 Non Station Data Tab The Non Station Data tab provides you the ability to vew any Non Station table within the project database You can find out more information about how to add a Non Station Data table in your database in the Template Manager section You can also enter data manually into a Non Stat
475. tly during the HGA installation However since this is part of SQL Server 2012 it is only supported on Windows or later operating systems If however this project will need to be accessed by multiple users you should use the Microsoft SQL Server option We currently support Microsoft SQL Server 2008 R2 or 2012 Express or Full editions Local Database If you have selected to use the Local Database you only need to specify the Instance name of your local database When it is installed with HGA it is named SWS however if you have another instance installed you can use that as well And then provide a name for the database C Please be aware that you cannot have the same name of database on both instances of your local database fi i A current limitation of using the Local Database option is that you are not able to back up the database like you can with a regular SQL Server However you can find the Local Database files mdf and Idf at the following default location C VUsers Your Username Microsoft SQL Server If you have selected Microsoft SQL Server you will need to select the SQL Server that will hold your project database and then provide a name for the database You have two options for authentication 1 Windows Authentication default 2 SQL Server Authentication Windows Authentication uses your log in to authenticate you on the SQL Server while SQL Server Authentication requires you to enter an appro
476. to the map project LineLayer A line symbol indicates a cross section line contour line layer or annotation line PolygonLayer Polygon shapefile represented by a polygon symbol TextLayer Text annotation layer represented by a T symbol Contour Layer Contour line layer Station Layers A group layer containing several component layers Boreholes and Monitoring Wells Station group layers vc_exceeds 1 mg per A data query CrossSectionLine2 Cross section line layer Color Shade A color shade layer Airport color bmp Georeferenced raster image O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 251 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help WQ Stations A station group layer with graduated rendering DEM UTM17 A surface DEM layer 13 1 1 Grouping Layers Group Layers help organize map layers that share similar characteristics in a map project For example if your map contains a railroad layer and a highway layer you may choose to group these layers into a single group layer called Transportation Network Group Layers behave similarly to other layers within the Layer Manager panel If you turn off the visibility for a group layer the component layers will also turn off You can also move a group layer up or down the layer list change its draw order and ungroup layers as needed Creating a Group Layer To create a Layer Group follow the steps below Right click anywhere within the Layer Manager panel From the pop up menu select Create Layer Group
477. ttings uiii deett ri eia der tra Gua U Seo Din Ge aae go are pape T Con ONG Oe eno EFE INN Ig UEM e SA US UOS G Ede 376 Cross Section Settings ascenvengsvvaiecccusexa eees 377 Stations Display Settings ias a per aaa EXT ER E aa aeeai 378 Layer Interpretation Settifigs siii a cressoni E a EAEE EEE REN ENEE E E RENE TRU ara 378 7 Creating Slices and Cross SectiOnS esssssseseesssoooseeecsssoseeeesssoosseeeesososeeesssooossesesooooeeeesssseeseeessoosoeeesessosseesessoseeeeesssoe 379 Creating a Vertical Sice sss ert er tee ete ove e kinean deeree e eC FEN ERN Eebe eE dead veesoasuubnansaeddovsecedeedgeenssaveuxsuveeci i 380 Creating a Horizontal Slice sro vorhd It ca cdecuaswy cnet couse pio ee Ia Rex egal u ct XV Cod Te ls augu De cp dav er I RUP MI E E um P QUO Ted a 381 Sel ctinPaCrossSectional Slice o oi ED da et eie vedo ei eee ve sce iss ce eee Pe Ure Va usa b A ee edes e ron oa es Rad 381 Dele ting 3 S I6B cisco Pbi reo bU exer Diae eus ido PEU Ee Te ve Dese elus ded stare Deu dn eas OMIM USE ue vt PUE UT Vos ven pen uade dU IM P Rer EVE TU TUE 382 Modifyinga Slice eee 382 SB SCONE Configurations soem nite nete pa dd m ei Mu LE EU EN UTE 382 9 Saving ane Exporting ODUIOTIS corio rra pena en doetile cr ea verae rro sa ER aa Vieh e erra LAN EN n ee vw dice yv Pe ero bac RP Ue aee 383 TO Printinge the sDimage lues pa doi Ue ae IEEE Da E AE v EO
478. tum NAD83 CNT Layer Airport Annotation Building To Scale Building As Symbol Concession Contour Crown Game Preserve Drainage Line Drainage Point MNR District MNR Region Municipal Park National Wildlife Area OBM DTM Park Zone Reg Pit or Quarry Provincial Park Zone Regulated Railway Segment Spot Height Tank Tower Transport Line Transport Point Utility Line Utility Site Water Edge Water Structure Waterboy Segment Wooded Area GeoCommunity http data geocomm com catalog Data GIS Data Depot Format e00 format coverage Geographic Coverage Each Country USA each State and County Layer DEM NWI DLG LU LC and TIGER are available for free United States Geological Survey http seamless usgs gow Data GIS Data Warehouse Format Geographic Coverage World each country USA any scale and seamless Datum NAD83 Layer US National Elevation Dataset up to 10 M National Land Cover Dataset High Resolution Orthoimagery Layer extent Transportation Boundaries Hydrography Florida Department of Environment Protection ftp ftp dep state fl us pub gis data Data GIS Deta Format Shapefile Geographic Coverage Florida O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Appendices oam Datum FDEP custom Albers projection in the HPGN datum Layer Envronmental Data Basemap Data Global Forest Watch Canada Warehouse http www globalforestwatch ca datawarehouse datawarehouse htm Data GIS Format Shapefi
479. tyle dropdown box allows you to select between a Rough irregular border to a Straight flush border 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter omo The Filling frame includes a Show checkbox which allows you to set the vsibility of the annular filling You can display the annular filling in one of two ways Use Image or Use Color The use image option will use the images defined in the List Editor to display the filling Otherwise select use color and specify a color from the color box Casing BHLP Settings m X E43 BHLP Well Construction E Well Construction v Visible Column Options General Drilling Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reduci Customization JD yje I4 Show Border Calor Order Use Default Color By Order ID C Use Material Image Calor L abe Use Material Ima e Tiled moo Font Use Casing Color for Cap LJ Fight Justify vw Use Casing Color for Mount J Position Help Apply OE Cancel The Casing Settings frame allows you to define the well casing source color view and order and label settings Under the Appearance frame select how to display the well casing Select the View 2D or 3D Casing Order left to right right to left centered etc Define Label properties NOTE In order to define well casings within another parent casing you must define the parent casing value in the Casing table I
480. ucu zr diim mcm a aon Imm mg base oar is a se 5 P ab et ander i Ex Er LA d bm cm Kr a f aw Zar F M wri was LIA La as oe ERO Ex i Eo hi oS E dis alind Las inn T4 a i _ a ali a MT m e a EA E EI E lum tL s a J 5 Agmen jj B a 35 So you can quickly filter using many of the options you would be used to seeing in Excel m Contains Does not start with ia Does not contain LK Does not end with Does not match Not Like Does not equal Less than 1 Less than or equal to gt Greater than gt Greater than or equal to Additionally if you select the drop down list in the filter row you will find a list of all the unique values in that column Paremeter_Resut Water Level M r Chers Name ii E 2000 TOi LI fa BTETEX pond TOL 00 BTEX moo TCE moo BTEX meon TCE moo BTEX moo TCE V BTEX 2 3 Toolbars There are different tool bars available within the program The top toolbar with the larger buttons provides quick access to the various modules in HGA e g Map Manager Materials opecifications Template Manager Chemical Analysis etc a8 dz 95 40wOA There are also toolbars available on the individual tab groups specific to the actions you may wish to perform on the data contain within the tab group Below is the general tool bar found on most ta
481. ueries branch of the Demo Project is organized with folders O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts z Eg Queries xi Water Levels 3 3 Water Quality o H8 WO Data Calcium i jg W Data SO4 WE aquifertest_pumpingrates I aquifertest pumpingtest water levels NI g bhip Ex gl Cross Section Interpretations l gl Cross section model interpretations WE soil desc concatenate WO Time Series Chart Data In previous version of HGA only the Queries branch could support folders but now all branches except for the Reports branch support grouping folders 2 9 Station List Tab The Station List tab proudes an overview of the available stations in the selected Station Group This tab displays any fields from the Station table the main table within the HGA database for example name X coordinate Y coordinate Elevation etc These fields may be modified for a selected station simply click in the cell you wish to edit or a new station may be created here selecting the green plus icon and the values for these fields may be defined The Station List tab may be used to quickly enter numerous stations and define the basic attributes for each station The first line on this tab is the filter line and as such is highlighted in purple blue The filter line is similar to what you find in Excel when you apply a filter You can enter values to filter the list of what is displayed only to those values that you
482. ur map for the selected model element can be plotted on any of the surfaces listed or on cross section lines NS Seleck creake slices 8 x Slices CrossSections List of slices Vertical slice na 1 Horizontal slice na 1 Ad Vertical Horizontal Select Cancel If there are no slices in the list then this window can be used to create the desired vertical or horizontal slices to use for plotting Color maps and Contour maps To select a surface from the list click on the desired surface and then click the Select button A contour map of the plume will then appear on the selected surface and a Contour map element will be added to the Model tree under the Plumes node Isoline Map Display Settings Once the Isoline map element has been added to the Model Tree the display settings can be customized as described below Color fill will fill the space between contour lines with a solid color where the color between lines is scaled according to the lower contour line value Line properties O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 373 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Seting Wale Name j Centourmap 3 Visible v Cel 0 E Semitransparent E Max value 39339 7952 Min vale OD Slice ooo E Color from palette L auto intervals ElCustem Values os alid E Color from palette indicates each contour line
483. urce name f Use connection string Connection string DBG D Program Files HudroGeoBazesSam Build 2 Enter information to lag on to the server User name Password Blank password Allow saving password 3 Enter the initial catalog to use D o D Program Files HydroGeob ases Snnular Fill mew final a D Program Files HydroGeob asesSnnular Fill mevi nulti D Program Files HydroGeob ase sSnnular Fill mieve nulti oi D Program FilessHudralieoB ase drlling type D Program FilessHudralieoB ase sapen list D Program FilessHudrabieoB ase s5 ample Stations iul Help Cancel Select the Excel file once more Click OK to complete the procedure The file will then be loaded into the appropriate module in Hydro GeoAnalyst 17 3 Appendix C Advanced Interpolation Settings INVERSE DISTANCE The Inverse Distance Squared method Is a very fast and efficient weighted average interpolation method The weighting factor applied to the data depends on the distance of the point from the grid cell and is inversely proportional to the distance squared Consequently the greater the distance the data point is from the grid node the smaller the influence it has on the calculated value The Inverse Distance Squared method for interpolation may generate patterns similar to a bull s eye surrounding points of observations Selecting a larger number of nearest neighboring data points may smooth this effect but if
484. used to display multiple cross sections in the form of fence diagrams using a variety of three dimensional graphical formats In addition basemaps may be displayed for relating the fence diagrams to surface features The graphical tools and presentation formats available are specifically designed for vewing geology and hydrogeology data The Hydro GeoAnalyst 3D Explorer uses state of the art 3D graphics technology to display your data and sampling results using a complete selection of graphical formats and features These include e 2D and 3D views of the grid otation representation showing lithology Imported Surfer Grid surfaces Display contaminant plumes in the form of isosurfaces or color maps DXF and Bitmap overlays on surfaces Light source position control Semi transparent objects O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services oss Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help e Auto rotate tools continuously rotate the image around the X Y Z axis e Record grid rotation to an AVI file This chapter provides a detailed description of the features and functionality of the various options for preparing and customizing a three dimensional presentation of your HG Analyst data O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services The Report Editor 386 16 The Report Editor The SWS Report Editor included with the Hydro GeoAnalyst package is used to create professional reports containing data and 2D and 3D views you have generated for your projects This chapter pr
485. utton F5 in ArcGIS and your points will automatically be adjusted as it is directly reading the points from the database Please be aware that if you are using a Projected Coordinate system for your project the geo point is being calculated as WGS 1984 lat long as this is the internal way HGA stores coordinates in the database If you are using a local coordinate system for your project then the geo point will not contain any coordinate system information only the values of the coordinates Within the current version of ArcGIS version 10 you can select File Add Data Add Query Layer O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Fundamental Concepts ose QU eted o kn Marc rara Fd L aee Eien benedi Daderteen Gee OCC Sce hp kim Kris H al ma m inj ER Dem a a amp X p g Tm na i iei Cus 5 2 1 er Le hosp A Cen hdi Dun FL pede Tinie H th HE iiime a 4n ali Cinar ha r dil Das Eger d GE Cii X Fur ral Poss Tati fs dad Ww Data La hai Peers EE e ML Fi Rete f erie g Crem bie Heiji E Add QoL 0 T lager nag E blip Tinta mel Pr enitn Last Bir 14 Select New to make a new connection Manage Connection s Existing Connection s Hame Connection to sqmernve Provide your SQL Server details please remember you must be using SQL Server 2008 R2 and the database you wish to connect to Databare Connection Properties Dat
486. vent Plan Information E tations to be sampled Parameters to be Analyzed QAQC Analysis Parameters to be Stations Analyzed Additional Data Collection Apply to All Check List adr Gn Print p Overview pH field 86 v By default the parameters selected will be applied to all Stations however if you wish you can select different parameters for each individual station Once you have selected the parameters will be highlighted blue Select the button to move the parameters to the Selected Parameters area right hand side To move all the parameters from a Station Group to the Selected Parameters area use the button To make it easier to select parameters since the list can be very long the list is taken from the List Editor list for the Chemical Name field in the Parameter Results table you can create Parameter groupings Several groupings have been provided by default but if you wish you can create your own by selecting the L button This will launch the Parameter List Editor O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Event Planning 162 Ewart Piriti Parainerler Liat Edilos x Lxistirg Paneer EMIT m 1 BPH DES Xd Parameter Giuni a Paige es Gap Mame Mes Parameter Grou liae Dieux ner GAS Murniser Una i Nare Deren CAS Humber Url Igel l lil a lal gg A EE lal l p oTempernahine Samping Tampere p H heid ig il ul Eh Chodatimm Fonie my L Poia mum Dri moll i gt e e a THIS mga Ca Cal
487. w add the desired elements to the empty BHLP template as shown in the following screenshot 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 236 Borehole Log Designer Sample E 1 l m x Select Station A m m Elevation m TOC m GE 01 ib3bz212 53 481 4030 00 323 50 324 50 lel H rx sz ra Name Vw v Live update Apply Close Export v Print v Help 12 4 1 Adding Lithology Column To add a column to the BHLP right click on the Design node in the tree view and select the Add column menu option or click the Add button in the toolbar 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 237 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Borehole Log Designer Sample i 4 IE fae fyc Aw Add Group Add Column Add Flot series Delete Show fSietnings Select Column Type Select the desired column type from the pop up menu and press OK button Choose Column Type X Please Choose a Column Type Well Construction Interval Depth Picture A node identifying the column will be added to the tree view under the Design node For some columns such as Lithology and Well Construction the BHLP attempts to obtain data for the 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 238 borehole that is currently selected in the combo box and displays a preview in the viewer An example is shown below for a new Lithology column Borehole Log Designer 5ample
488. were selected for the EDD template in this case just a from to and soil type You will notice the soil type field has a drop down list this is based on the list within HGA for that field O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 49 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Lj Hydro GeoAnalystMobile x gt Q https online sharehga com hgamobile mobile edd testing lithology iy le 5 New Tab E CarWash E Hyperbole and a Hal CruiseContreNET CI SLE IeonExperience Le The Hub SWS Logo O Other bookmarks IB Home Table View Add New Record Example Station Location Water Level Field Measurements From soil type Anhydrnte Banded Clay Bituminous Coal ted All rights reserved ES or Manne Limestone Calc Tuff Chalk Clay Clay Mud Claystone Coarse Gravel Coarse Sand Cobbles Conglomerate Breccia Dolomite Fine Gravel Fine Sand Fissile Metamorphic Rock Glacial Loam You will also notice that there are a couple more options within the header Table View and Add New Record For any table other than the Station table you might have multiple records you want to collect for example here the lithology information while drilling This allows you to enter the information in the fields from to and soil type and then select Add New Record the fields will be cleared and saved to the table view Here is an example of the table view where I entered 4 records for the
489. where the world coordinates are known Enter the X2 and Y2 coordinates for this point Click OK The coordinates will be entered into the corresponding Georeference fields on the right hand side of the window Once this is complete click OK to continue and the CAD file will be loaded as a new layer 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 269 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help into the map project 13 2 2 5 Save Saves the selected layer 13 2 2 6 Delete Deletes the selected layer A layer cannot be deleted while it is in Edit mode 13 2 2 7 Create Intersection With this option you can create a new map layer from the intersection of any station points polyline polygon layer surface layer or color shade zebra layer with another polygon layer First select the map layer that will be intersected from the Layer Manager Toolbar Next select the Create Intersection option from the Layer menu The following dialog will appear Create Intersection i f x Please choose a polygon layer to make the intersection Mame af the new layer DK Cancel FJ Help Select the desired layer from the combo box and enter a name for the new layer Click OK when you are finished and the new layer will be added to the Layer Manager panel Note When clipping color shade and surface layers the Name of the new layer field will be greyed out as it is not required 13 2 2 8 Properties Provides optio
490. will be colored according to the contour line value using the color palette for the selected data type Color indicates the solid color used for all contour lines used only if Color from palette is not selected The browse button can be used to change the current Color setting to any RGB color Width is the contour line width Style indicates the line style used to plot each contour line choose from Solid Dashed and Dotted Auto Intervals Setting Contour map 3 v E 39339 7052 n Line properties Hluta intervals Visible we 40000 Lowerlmt 10 ntewal 500 b EICustam Values HL abels Upper Limit is the maximum data value above which no contour lines will be plotted Lower limit is the minimum contour line below which no contour line will be plotted Interval is the increment value at which contour lines will be plotted starting from the Lower limit value Custom values The Custom Values setting is used to assign custom contour values in addition to or in replacement of the regular interval contour values Press the browse button to load the Custom contour values window as shown in the figure below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 3D Explorer 374 FS custom contour Yalu he RM FK Visible Click to add a value Click E to insert a value Click WA to delete a value This setting is commonly used to set logarithmic contour interval values for concentration data Labels
491. will then be clipped at the edges of the polygon O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 283 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help NOTE If the polygon is greater in extents than the selected station layer the contouring will end at the furthest point Currently extrapolation to the edge of the polygon is not possible When you are satisfied with the settings click the Create button to create the contour map Contour Line Settings Click on the Settings button beside Contour Lines and the following dialog will appear Contour Line Settings i X Intervals Contour Line Setting C Contour Interval 3400 Contour Line Style Label Renderer Sample T est Custom Interval Decimal Places 4 Ok Cancel FJ Help opecify Intervals you may select to define the Contour Interval e g 0 5 1 0 5 etc or the Number of Intervals 5 10 20 50 etc You may also define Custom Contour Lines in the grid in the lower corner Use the and X buttons to add remove custom contours respectively Note Custom Contour Lines will be added to the map in addition to the ones defined by selecting Contour Interval or Number of Intervals Under Contour Line Settings specify the line color thickness style and label settings Label Renderer will add a label to the lines Color Shading Zebra Map Settings Click on the Settings button beside Color Shading or Zebra and the following dialog will appear O 2014 Schlumberger
492. with the left mouse button To close the polygon double click the left mouse button at the final vertex All stations within the polygon will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Circle Allows to select stations within a drawn circle To draw a circle place the cursor in the center of the area of interest click with the left mouse button and drag an expanding circle around the area then release the mouse button All stations within the circle will become selected indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol Line Allows to select stations near a drawn line To draw a line place the cursor at one end of the area of interest click with the left mouse button and digitize a line through the area of interest To add a vertex to the line click with the left mouse at the vertex location To finish the line double click the left mouse button at the final vertex location This will open the buffer distance window O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Map Manager 304 Buffer Buffer meters OF Cancel Enter a buffer distance from the drawn line and click OK All stations within the buffer distance of the line will become selected as indicated by a red circle on top of the station s symbol The Buffer distance extends out perpendicular to the line location All All stations on the current Map Layer will be selected None All stations that are selected on the current Map
493. wn below Yalue Renderer E X Mame Elevation Field Hame ELEVATIDN w Display Value Fort Frequency for display value 3 Iw Default Symbol Total 323 117 325 144 327 1 71 323 138 323 138 4 331 225 7771257 E Tx A GO Ramp 323 117 uk Cancel 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 275 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help At the top of the dialog specify a Name for the renderer and select a Field Name for the renderer The Value Renderer dialog allows for detailed symbol and label rendering Use the Frequency for display value vertical scroll box to set the label display frequency You can manually specify value symbols and their corresponding labels by clicking in the desired symbol and label field Alternatively specify a default symbol and select the Default Symbol checkbox to apply the same symbol characteristics to each value Use the Ramp function to specify the color scheme and size for the symbols and click OK first to return to the Value renderer dialog click OK again to accept the settings Then also make sure the Visible box is checked and click OK to apply the renderer Label Renderer This renderer allows you to display various labels for the selected layer stations or contour map for example Label Renderer Mame Field Mame fw Allow Duplicates Fort jw Spline Text Sample Text Iv Flip UF Cancel Enter the Name for the renderer and c
494. x and drag the mouse away from its position and place the polygon vertex in the new position if desired Set Features The Set Features option allows for modifying the display properties of most layers in your map project and other cross sections that intersect with the current cross section If this option is selected from the Edit menu a dialog similar to that shown below will be displayed Set Features ir m X Hiver TAE Highway NAME well ID z A cross section line may intersect with one or more features that are displayed in one or more layers in your map project For instance one or more rivers from the Rivers layer may O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 320 intersect with a given cross section at one or more points Other features of importance may include roads railway lines lakes etc Features from selected map layers that intersect with a cross section may be displayed as a symbol and or label on the cross section line NOTE The intersecting items display options can be defined only at the time when the cross section is created currently it is not possible to set these features later on once the cross section has been created Also intersecting items must be selected in Map Manager before the cross section is created In the Set Features dialog there are several options Name Name of the intersecting layer read only Visible Defines if the element is visible or not
495. y C Documents and Settings wWaynelDesktop CTD OF0503152027_ 61667 MON 83 Records 6 6 LAS This option allows for importing data from an LAS Log ASCII Standard file a standard format introduced by the Canadian Well Logging Society in 1989 The LAS file contains two types of sections Well Information Section data related to the station location driller etc Parameter Curve Information Sections descriptive and or measured data for one or more down hole parameters When importing the LAS file in HGA the following options are available Import the Well Sections and Parameter Curve sections use this option if you want to import a new station and one or more measured parameters for this station A new station will be added to the database using station details name co ordinates etc in the LAS file If the station already exists in HGA you will be prompted to overwrite the details using those in the LAS source In addition data from one or more parameters Parameter Sections may be imported to one or more tables in your database Import only Parameter sections use this option if this station already exists in your project HGA will read the station name in the LAS file and attempt to find an appropriate match in the current project When you select this option the following dialog will appear 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 135 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Import LAS file 4 BEE Mate Step 1 S
496. y select it from the list instead of typing a new name Click on the blank area beside Pattern to load the pattern options as shown below O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 337 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Fill Patterns Please choose a pattern D alamite OF Cancel e Select a pattern then click OK Repeat the same sequence of operations for other layers within the active cross section The result will be a layered structure of the geological domain The cross section may contain some gaps where polygons do not completely touch adjacent polygons this can be easily fixed by selecting a vertex on a polygon and using the pointer tool to re position the vertex Alternately gaps between polygons can be filled by using the Link Vertex option These options are explained below Once a layer is created in one cross section it will be available for selection in all other cross sections that you might have for your project Altering the properties of a given layer will be reflected in all cross sections Editing Layers Once the interpretation layers are drawn it may be necessary to modify the positions of one or more vertices or fill in the gaps between any two adjacent layers to create a continuous layered structure To move a vertex Select the k pointer tool from the toolbar Click on one of the vertices of the polygon Drag the vertex to a new location To add a vertex Select the k pointer tool from the too
497. yers 14 3 4 Model Layer Interpretations This option allows for defining the unique model layers Model Layer 1 Model Layer 2 etc for the displayed stations Model layers can be used for numerical groundwater flow models or for general purposes The layer positions for model layers must be drawn in manually with the mouse using the Line tool 14 3 4 1 Defining Model Layers Before drawing model layers the layer attributes must first be defined To do so Select Tools gt Model Layers from the main menu This will load the Model Layers dialog as shown below 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Cross Section Editor 340 Model Layer Top of Layer Topography Topography Layer Bottom of Layer 1 Overburden Aquifer Overburden Aquiter Bottom of Layer 2 Aquitard Aquifer ie S Bottom of Layer 3 Main Aquifer Bottom of Aquiter P x Save Cancel FJ Help In this dialog you can specify the total number of model layers and set properties for each layer In addition the layers can be numbered in a particular order Layers will be numbered Starting with 1 for the top most layer and increase with depth The top most layer represents the top surface for the first layer while the bottom most layer represents the bottom surface of the last layer i e each model line defines the bottom of the model layer Once the layers have been defined additional layers may be inserted at any location at any time 14 3 4 2 D
498. you must right click on the selected layer and either switch between annotation types or de select the current annotation type otherwise you will remain in Edit mode for the selected annotation type Upon deselecting switching annotation types you will be prompted to save your changes Add Text To add text Select the Edit Text option from the pop up menu Click on the A Text button on the toolbar Click on the desired text location in the cross section window Enter the text in the Input text window that appears Once a text box has been created it can be moved by clicking and dragging or edited by double clicking on the existing text Text can be deleted by right clicking on a text box and selecting the Delete option All text added to a layer can be deleted by right clicking and selecting the Delete All option Add Lines To add Lines Select the Edit Lines option from the pop up menu Click on the N Draw Line button on the toolbar Click once on the desired line location in the cross section window and simply drag and click to create a line with several vertices A vertex can be added to an existing line by right clicking on a line and selecting the Add vertex option A line can be deleted by right clicking on a line and selecting the Delete option All lines added to a layer can be deleted by right clicking and selecting the Delete All option Add Polygons To add polygons or rectangles Select the Edit Polygons option from the
499. you open the HGA project and select Modules AquaChem it will simply launch AquaChem When using AquaChem with HGA keep in mind that AquaChem is intended only for its presentation and calculation features Data entry and maintenance operations should be performed centrally through the HGA interface and not the AquaChem interface The operations that must be performed in HGA include e Importing data e Creating new samples e Creating new stations Please keep in mind that there are specific table and field requirements in the HGA project database in order to allow the Geochemistry Extension to be properly added to your project database The following tables and fields are required Station ID Name X Y Elevation TOC 2014 Schlumberger Water Services 93 Hydro GeoAnalyst 2014 Help Depth Parameter Sample sample_id lab_id sample_ date comment watertype Parameter Result sample_id chemical_ name result_ value result_unit reporting detection limit sampling precision analysis method qualifier outlier comment analysis date These tables and fields are all included in the current Environmental metric or imperial versions of the Database Templates provided with the installation of HGA You are free to change the View Settings for these tables and fields for instance to change them to a local term or another language however the database settings must remain Limitations X and Y coordinates When using an HG
500. ype has its own Settings which can be adjusted by clicking on the Check type to highlight it The Settings will then appear to the right Settings for each Check type are described in the following sections 10 2 1 Check Duplicates Settings A field duplicate is a QC sample which is used to determine the precision associated with all or part of the sample collection and measurement process Field duplicates are two independent samples which are collected as nearly as possible from the same point in space and time The two field duplicate samples are collected from the same source using the same type of sampling equipment Ideally analyte concentrations in the duplicate sample should be identical or very close to the original sample to which it is being compared The following settings are available O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Lab Quality Control Duplicate Settings Relative percent difference less than 20 Coethicrent of variation less than 10 Highlighting Font Background Color Border Color Relative percent difference less than This criteria is used to compare how close the result from a duplicate sample D is to the true original field sample O It is expressed as either a positive difference the sample result is higher than the true value or negative difference the sample result is lower than the true value When used with duplicate samples the Relative Percent Difference measures prec
501. yst 2014 Help scale and is intended for visualization purposes only A0 et M i _ a 120 140 Scale BHLP Settings X E3 BHLP Well Constructia ie Well Construction m Visible Column Options Casing Screen Lithology Water level Reducer Scale Appearance Display Unit m Major ticks interval fi 0 Label Position Lett Color Font Minor tick interval 5 p T Background bs Color LJ Help Apply LIF Cancel The Scale tab allows you to modify the scale within the Well Construction column The settings for this scale are identical to those described in the Scale Column prevously 12 3 5 Interval Column The Interval based column is designed to display data that has been collected at various intervals As in the case of the Depth Point based column the data can be displayed using graphics text or both Examples of data that could be displayed using a Depth Interval based column include screen locations interval based samples and their descriptions etc O 2014 Schlumberger Water Services Borehole Log Plotter 228 To create an Interval based column click on the Add button to add a new column and select Interval from the combo box that appears A new Interval column will be added to the designer window Expand the Interval node and select IntervalEntities Sn Depth 3 Depthe ntities A 6 Interval DataTable

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

  Descargar  取扱説明書 LDT  6” x 108”  User`s Manual - ICP DAS USA`s I  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file